Month: March 2025

  • Al-Riyadh Newspaper, March 16, 2025: Diplomatic Efforts, Economic Developments, Social Initiatives, Humanitarian and Religious Outreach

    Al-Riyadh Newspaper, March 16, 2025: Diplomatic Efforts, Economic Developments, Social Initiatives, Humanitarian and Religious Outreach

    This collection of articles from the Al Riyadh newspaper covers a diverse range of topics, primarily focusing on Saudi Arabia’s diplomatic efforts, economic developments, and social initiatives. The paper reports on the Crown Prince’s dialogue regarding the Ukraine crisis and the Kingdom’s commitment to facilitating peace. Additionally, it highlights Standard & Poor’s positive credit rating for Saudi Arabia and the nation’s drive to boost investment. Several articles detail Saudi Arabia’s humanitarian and religious outreach, including Ramadan feeding programs and Quran competitions internationally. Furthermore, the publication includes local news, sports updates, cultural discussions, and economic analysis, offering a broad snapshot of current affairs.

    Read Previous Al-Riyaz Newspapers

    Understanding the Source Material: A Study Guide

    Quiz: Short Answer Questions

    1. According to the article, what is Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman’s stance on the Russia-Ukraine conflict?
    2. What was the significance of Standard & Poor’s recent action regarding the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia’s credit rating, and what factors contributed to this decision?
    3. Dr. Mohammed Ayman Sosan discusses the “Malameh As-Siyasah Al-Kharijiyah As-Saudiyah Tijaha Suriyah.” Based on the provided text, what is a key aspect of Saudi Arabia’s foreign policy approach towards Syria?
    4. What was the record-breaking event hosted by Saudi Arabia in Indonesia during Ramadan, and what was its purpose?
    5. Describe the historical and spiritual importance of Al Rawdah Al Sharifa in the Prophet’s Mosque.
    6. What is the “King Salman’s Table” event, and what does it reflect about Saudi Arabia’s role in the Islamic world?
    7. What are some of the investment opportunities being offered in the holy sites of Makkah, as mentioned by the Kedana company?
    8. What is the current trend in the regional markets for olefins, and what are the challenges being faced by suppliers?
    9. According to the article, what was the main announcement made by the US regarding digital assets, and what are its potential implications?
    10. What were the initial demands of Syrian protestors in 2011, and what has been the significant change in the country as of the writing of this article?

    Quiz Answer Key

    1. The Crown Prince emphasized the Kingdom’s keenness to facilitate dialogue and reach a political solution to the crisis in Ukraine. This aligns with Saudi Arabia’s broader efforts to promote global peace through discussion.
    2. Standard & Poor’s raised the Kingdom’s credit rating to “A+” with a stable outlook for both local and foreign currencies. This upgrade reflects the continuous progress in the Kingdom’s creditworthiness, attributed to the supported non-oil economic growth, market reforms, and diversification efforts in line with Vision 2030.
    3. A key aspect of Saudi Arabia’s foreign policy towards Syria is its focus on supporting the Syrian people, providing aid, and assisting in rebuilding Syria as a unified, independent, and safe Arab state, free from foreign interference and preserving its territorial integrity.
    4. The record-breaking event was the “King Salman’s Table,” the largest Iftar meal in ASEAN countries, held in Indonesia during Ramadan. Its purpose was to reflect the greatness of Islamic solidarity and strengthen the bonds of love between Muslim people.
    5. Al Rawdah Al Sharifa is a highly revered area within the Prophet’s Mosque, located between the Prophet’s house and his pulpit. It is considered a garden of Paradise and a place for answered prayers, a center for knowledge, and a starting point for spreading guidance.
    6. “King Salman’s Table” was a massive Iftar meal in Java, Indonesia, organized by the Saudi Ministry of Islamic Affairs. It reflects Saudi Arabia’s leading role in serving Muslims, strengthening their unity, and its continued support for Muslims at the heart of Indonesia.
    7. Kedana company is offering long-term investment opportunities in the holy sites of Makkah, including developing the squares of Jabal Ar-Rahmah for commercial units and investing in a section of the Jamarat facility to create attractions for pilgrims and residents.
    8. The pace of price increases is accelerating in the regional markets for olefins in March, with suppliers seeking larger increases to improve profit margins. However, new supplies are exacerbating the oversupply, creating challenges for buyers to absorb these higher prices.
    9. The US President signed an executive order establishing a strategic reserve of Bitcoin and other digital assets. This signifies a formal recognition of the digital assets industry at higher levels of the American government and implies a long-term holding strategy rather than immediate selling by the government.
    10. The initial demands of Syrian protestors in 2011 centered on calls for dignity, freedom, and the downfall of the Assad regime. A significant change as of the article’s writing is the reported fall of the Assad regime, following advances by opposition forces into Damascus.

    Essay Format Questions

    1. Analyze the various roles Saudi Arabia is portraying on the international stage as highlighted in the provided excerpts. Consider its diplomatic efforts in the Ukraine conflict, its economic standing based on credit rating upgrades, and its initiatives within the Islamic world.
    2. Discuss the economic diversification efforts of Saudi Arabia as evidenced by the Standard & Poor’s rating upgrade, the investment opportunities in Makkah’s holy sites, and the ambitions in the semiconductor industry. What are the potential long-term impacts of these efforts?
    3. Examine the significance of cultural and religious initiatives undertaken by Saudi Arabia, such as the “King Salman’s Table” and the focus on historical mosques. How do these initiatives contribute to the Kingdom’s image and influence, both domestically and internationally?
    4. Evaluate the complexities of regional conflicts and international relations as reflected in the discussions about Ukraine, Syria, and the Israeli-Palestinian situation. What role, if any, does Saudi Arabia appear to be playing in these contexts?
    5. Analyze the interplay between economic factors (such as oil prices, market trends in olefins, and the establishment of a digital asset reserve) and geopolitical events as discussed in the provided sources. How do these factors influence each other and shape the global landscape?

    Glossary of Key Terms

    • ولي العهد (Wali al-Ahd): Crown Prince. The designated successor to the throne.
    • أزمة أوكرانيا (Azmat Ukraniya): Ukraine Crisis. Refers to the ongoing conflict involving Ukraine and Russia.
    • ستاندرد آند بورز (Standard & Poor’s): A leading international credit rating agency that assesses the creditworthiness of countries and corporations.
    • التصنيف االئتماني (At-Tasneef al-I’timani): Credit Rating. An assessment of the ability of a borrower to repay their debt obligations.
    • رؤية 2030 (Ru’yah 2030): Vision 2030. Saudi Arabia’s ambitious long-term plan for economic and social reform and diversification.
    • واس (WAS): مخابرات وكالة الأنباء السعودية (Saudi Press Agency). The official news agency of Saudi Arabia.
    • مالمح السياسة الخارجية (Malamih As-Siyasah Al-Kharijiyah): Features of Foreign Policy. The main aspects and principles guiding a country’s interactions with other nations.
    • المسجد النبوي (Al-Masjid An-Nabawi): The Prophet’s Mosque in Medina, one of the holiest sites in Islam.
    • الروضة الشريفة (Ar-Rawdah Ash-Sharifah): The Noble Garden, a specific area within the Prophet’s Mosque with significant religious importance.
    • مائدة الملك سلمان (Ma’idat Al-Malik Salman): King Salman’s Table. Often refers to charitable or large-scale meal initiatives undertaken in the name of the King.
    • آسيان (ASEAN): The Association of Southeast Asian Nations, a political and economic union of states in Southeast Asia.
    • المشاعر المقدسة (Al-Masha’er Al-Muqaddasah): The Holy Sites around Makkah associated with the Hajj pilgrimage, such as Mina, Arafat, and Muzdalifah.
    • الجمرات (Al-Jamarat): The pillars in Mina that are stoned by pilgrims during Hajj, symbolizing the rejection of evil.
    • الأوليفينات (Al-Olefinat): Olefins. A group of unsaturated hydrocarbons containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond, important in the petrochemical industry.
    • البولي إيثيلين (Al-Buli Ithilin): Polyethylene. A common type of plastic polymer.
    • نوتانيكس (Nutanix): A cloud computing company.
    • Kubernetes: An open-source container orchestration system for automating application deployment, scaling, and management.
    • البيت الأبيض (Al-Bayt Al-Abyad): The White House, the official residence and principal workplace of the President of the United States.
    • البيتكوين (Al-Bitcoin): Bitcoin. A decentralized digital currency, without a central bank or single administrator, that can be sent from user to user on the peer-to-peer bitcoin network without the need for intermediaries.
    • العمات الرقمية (Al-‘Umlat Ar-Raqamiyah): Digital Currencies. Currencies that are only available in digital form, not physical coins or banknotes.
    • هيئة تحرير الشام (Hay’at Tahrir ash-Sham): Levant Liberation Committee, a Sunni Islamist militant group involved in the Syrian Civil War.
    • داعش (Da’esh): An alternative name for the Islamic State of Iraq and Syria (ISIS), a militant group.
    • حماس (Hamas): A Palestinian Sunni-Islamist fundamentalist organization currently governing the Gaza Strip.
    • يونسيف (UNICEF): The United Nations Children’s Fund, an agency responsible for providing humanitarian and developmental aid to children worldwide.
    • الأونصة (Al-Ounsa): Ounce. A unit of weight, often used for precious metals like gold.
    • الرئيس ترمب (Ar-Ra’ees Trump): President Trump. Refers to Donald Trump, the former President of the United States.
    • أوبك + (OPEC+): A group of oil-producing countries comprising the Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC) and several allied non-OPEC countries.
    • نيورو سينما (Neuro-cinema): A field that studies what happens in the brain when watching films and dramatic works.
    • اإثراء (Ithra’): اختصار لمركز الملك عبدالعزيز الثقافي العالمي (King Abdulaziz Center for World Culture). A cultural center in Dhahran, Saudi Arabia.
    • MBC: Middle East Broadcasting Center, a pan-Arab media conglomerate.
    • صناعة الأدوية (Sina’at Al-Adwiyah): Pharmaceutical Industry. The sector involved in the discovery, development, manufacture, and marketing of pharmaceutical drugs.
    • أشباه الموصالت (Ashbah Al-Mawasilat): Semiconductors. Materials that have electrical conductivity between that of a conductor (such as copper) and an insulator (such as glass), crucial for electronic devices.
    • الهوية (Al-Hawiyah): Identity. The characteristics that determine who or what a person or thing is.
    • التحول (At-Tahawwul): Transformation. A thorough or dramatic change in form or appearance.
    • الإستقرار (Al-Istiqlal): Stability. The state of being stable; resistance to change or deterioration.
    • ردة فعل (Raddat Fi’l): Reaction. An action performed or a feeling experienced in response to a situation or event.
    • موسم الرياض (Mawsim Ar-Riyadh): Riyadh Season. A large entertainment and cultural festival held annually in Riyadh, Saudi Arabia.
    • إكسبو 2030 (Expo 2030): The World Expo scheduled to be held in Riyadh in 2030.
    • كأس العالم 2034 (Ka’s Al-‘Alam 2034): The FIFA World Cup scheduled to be potentially hosted by Saudi Arabia in 2034.
    • النفط (An-Naft): Oil. Petroleum, a liquid mixture of hydrocarbons that is present in certain rock strata and can be extracted and refined to produce fuels including gasoline, kerosene, and diesel oil; mineral oil.
    • الأمن الصحي (Al-Amn As-Sihi): Health Security. Measures taken to protect public health against diseases and other health risks.
    • الاكتفاء الذاتي (Al-Iktifa’ Adh-Dhati): Self-Sufficiency. The ability to fulfill all needs without external assistance.
    • الجزائية (Al-Jaza’iyah): Penalty (in sports).
    • الفار (Al- الفار): VAR (Video Assistant Referee) in sports.
    • اللياقة البدنية (Al-Liyaqah Al-Badaniyah): Physical Fitness.
    • التكتيك (At-Taktik): Tactics (in sports or strategy).
    • الروح المعنوية (Ar-Ruh Al-Ma’nawiyah): Morale. The confidence, enthusiasm, and discipline of a person or group at a particular time.

    Briefing Document: Analysis of “Al Riyadh” Newspaper Excerpts (March 16, 2025)

    Date: October 26, 2023 (Based on the request date) Subject: Review of Key Themes and Information from “Al Riyadh” Newspaper (Issue 20715, March 16, 2025) Source: Excerpts from “20715.pdf” ( جريدة الرياض – العدد 20715 – السنة الثانية والستون – الأحد 16 رمضان 1446هـ 16 مارس 2025م)

    This briefing document summarizes the main themes, important ideas, and key facts presented in the provided excerpts from the March 16, 2025 issue of the Saudi Arabian newspaper “Al Riyadh”.

    Main Themes:

    1. Saudi Arabia’s Role in International Diplomacy and Conflict Resolution: A significant portion of the front page highlights the Kingdom’s active engagement in facilitating dialogue and seeking political solutions to international crises, particularly the conflict in Ukraine.
    2. Economic Growth and Investment: The newspaper reports on positive economic developments, including an upgrade of Saudi Arabia’s credit rating by Standard & Poor’s, citing the Kingdom’s efforts towards economic diversification and investment attraction.
    3. Developments in Saudi Foreign Policy: The excerpts touch upon Saudi Arabia’s foreign policy approach towards Syria, emphasizing support for the Syrian people and a unified, independent, and secure Syria. Additionally, the Crown Prince sent a congratulatory message to the new Canadian Prime Minister.
    4. Preservation and Development of Islamic Heritage Sites: The newspaper features articles detailing the historical and spiritual significance of the Prophet’s Mosque in Medina, including the Rawdah Al-Sharifah and the Prophet’s Mihrab. There is also news about the development and investment opportunities in historical sites within the Holy Sites (Masha’er).
    5. Social and Cultural Initiatives in Saudi Arabia: The excerpts cover various social and cultural events and initiatives, including a large Ramadan iftar organized by the Ministry of Islamic Affairs in Indonesia, the honoring of accomplished students in the Qassim region, and a seminar on the legacy of Prince Mohammed bin Fahd. The “Ithra” center’s cultural programs during Ramadan are also mentioned.
    6. Economic and Market Trends: The economic section reports on the accelerating increase in olefin prices, factors influencing the oil market (including geopolitical tensions and potential changes in production), and the gold market breaking the $3,000 barrier. There is also a piece on the potential and capabilities of the Saudi pharmaceutical industry.
    7. Developments in Regional Conflicts and Humanitarian Issues: The newspaper covers ongoing conflicts and humanitarian situations in Palestine (Gaza and the West Bank), including reports of displacement, Israeli military operations, and efforts to provide aid. The situation in Syria and Lebanon are also briefly touched upon.
    8. Sports News and Developments: The sports section reports on various events, including Yazeed Al-Rajhi’s victory in the Dakar Rally Saudi Arabia 2025, Al Nassr football club’s victory, and Colombian player Jhon Duran’s absence from a match against Brazil. The Saudi Handball Federation’s appointment of a new Spanish coach is also announced.
    9. Regulatory and Organizational Changes: The Saudi Olympic and Paralympic Committee is reported to be implementing stricter financial regulations for sports federations.

    Most Important Ideas and Facts:

    • Saudi Mediation Efforts in Ukraine: Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman reiterated to Russian President Putin the Kingdom’s keenness to “facilitate dialogue and reach a political solution to the Ukraine crisis.” The article highlights Saudi Arabia’s leadership in supporting international peace initiatives and its belief that dialogue is the only way to achieve lasting global peace. The Kingdom has hosted discussions between Ukrainian and American officials, reflecting its strong diplomatic influence.
    • S&P Credit Rating Upgrade: Standard & Poor’s raised Saudi Arabia’s credit rating to “A+” with a “stable” outlook for both local and foreign currencies. The agency’s report attributed this to the Kingdom’s “continuous progress in the credit rating,” driven by a supportive non-oil economic growth, diversification, and capital market development, which balances the risks of high sovereign foreign debt service and costs, aligning with the goals of Vision 2030.
    • Saudi Foreign Policy Towards Syria: Dr. Mohammed Ayman Sosan, the Syrian Ambassador to Saudi Arabia, outlines features of Saudi foreign policy towards Syria, emphasizing the Kingdom’s support for the Syrian people following the fall of the Assad regime. Saudi Arabia has participated in various meetings and conferences regarding Syria, affirming its commitment to a unified, independent, and secure Syria, and supporting a political transition that preserves the rights of all Syrians.
    • Significance of the Prophet’s Mosque: Articles detail the spiritual importance of the Rawdah Al-Sharifah, quoted as being “a garden from Paradise” by the Prophet Muhammad (peace be upon him). The historical evolution of the Prophet’s Mihrab (niche indicating the direction of prayer) is also described, noting the renovations undertaken during the Saudi era.
    • Investment Opportunities in Mecca’s Holy Sites: The Kidana company, the development arm of the Royal Commission for Mecca and the Holy Sites, has presented a package of long-term investment opportunities in historical sites within the Masha’er. These include developing the squares of Jabal Al-Rahmah (Mount of Mercy) and parts of the Jamarat facility into commercial units and exhibitions to enrich the experience of pilgrims and residents. The average daily number of visitors to the Masha’er is reported to be 15,000.
    • King Salman’s Ramadan Iftar in Indonesia: A massive iftar (breaking of the fast) event organized by the Saudi Ministry of Islamic Affairs in Central Java, Indonesia, set a new record in ASEAN countries, with over 28,000 fasting individuals attending. This reflects the Kingdom’s efforts to strengthen ties and promote solidarity among Muslims.
    • Gold Price Surpasses $3,000: The spot price of gold reached an all-time high of $3,004.86 per ounce during the week, driven by investors seeking safe-haven assets amid economic uncertainty and geopolitical tensions.
    • Palestine Conflict and Humanitarian Crisis: Reports detail ongoing Israeli military operations in the West Bank and Gaza, resulting in Palestinian casualties, displacement, and damage to infrastructure. International organizations warn of increasing food insecurity and the need for humanitarian assistance.
    • Saudi Pharmaceutical Industry Potential: An opinion piece emphasizes the significant potential of the Saudi pharmaceutical industry, highlighting the Kingdom’s growing market, regional leadership, and Vision 2030 goals. It stresses the need for integrated strategies to localize manufacturing, attract investment, and promote research and innovation.
    • Stricter Financial Oversight for Saudi Sports Federations: The Saudi Olympic and Paralympic Committee is implementing a strict financial agreement to address potential overspending by sports federations, emphasizing the director’s administrative role and limiting financial authority.

    Quotes from Original Sources:

    • Crown Prince to Putin on Ukraine: “# ولي العهد لبوتين: المملكة حريصة على تسهيل الحوار والوصول لحل سياسي ألزمة أوكرانيا” (The Crown Prince to Putin: The Kingdom is keen to facilitate dialogue and reach a political solution to the Ukraine crisis.)
    • S&P on Saudi Arabia’s Credit Rating: “رفعت وكالة التصنيف الائتماني )S&P( ستاندرد آند بورز تصنيف المملكة الائتماني إلى »A+« مع نظرة مستقبلية »مستقرة«.” (The credit rating agency (S&P) Standard & Poor’s raised the Kingdom’s credit rating to “A+” with a “stable” future outlook.)
    • Prophet’s Saying on Rawdah Al-Sharifah: “…قال النبي -صلى الله عليه وسلم-: “ما بين بيتي ومنبري روضة من رياض الجنة”” (…the Prophet – peace and blessings be upon him – said: “What is between my house and my pulpit is a garden from the gardens of Paradise.”)
    • Kidana on Investment in Holy Sites: “طرحت شركة كدانة، الذراع المطور للهيئة الملكية لمدينة مكة والمشاعر المقدسة، حزمة فرص استثمارية »طويلة الأجل«…” (Kidana Company, the development arm of the Royal Commission for Mecca and the Holy Sites, has presented a package of “long-term” investment opportunities…)
    • Article on Modern Media: “لب الإعالم الحديث، وبناء القصة وما وراءها من تجارب هي فحوى الرسائل التي يتجاوز تأثيرها المواد الإعلامية التقليدية…” (The core of modern media, and the construction of the story and the experiences behind it, are the essence of the messages whose impact goes beyond traditional media materials…)
    • Gold Market Report: “بلغ الذهب الفوري أعلى مستوى له على الإطلاق عند 3004.86 دوالرات للأوقية” (Spot gold reached its highest level ever at $3004.86 per ounce.)
    • Commentary on Saudi Pharmaceutical Industry: “تمتلك بلادنا مقومات تجعلها قادرة على تطوير قطاع الأدوية وتحقيق الاكتفاء الذاتي…” (Our country possesses the components that make it capable of developing the pharmaceutical sector and achieving self-sufficiency…)

    Conclusion:

    The excerpts from “Al Riyadh” on March 16, 2025, present a snapshot of Saudi Arabia’s multifaceted engagement across international politics, economic development, cultural initiatives, and regional issues. The emphasis on diplomacy, economic growth, and the preservation of Islamic heritage underscores the Kingdom’s key priorities. The reports on regional conflicts and global market trends provide context for Saudi Arabia’s actions and policies. The inclusion of social and sports news offers a broader view of current events within the Kingdom and its interactions with the wider world.

    Saudi Arabia: Diplomacy, Economy, Culture, and Markets

    FAQ on the Provided Sources

    • What was the main diplomatic focus of Saudi Arabia as highlighted in the article? The main diplomatic focus highlighted was Saudi Arabia’s commitment to facilitating dialogue and finding political solutions to international crises, particularly the conflict in Ukraine. The article emphasizes the Crown Prince’s communication with President Putin, reiterating the Kingdom’s keenness on this matter. It also mentions Saudi Arabia’s history of mediation efforts and its hosting of talks between involved parties, reflecting its desire to foster global peace and stability through diplomacy and dialogue among nations with differing political views and backgrounds.
    • What positive economic development was reported for Saudi Arabia? The positive economic development reported was the upgrade of Saudi Arabia’s long and short-term sovereign credit ratings in both local and foreign currencies by Standard & Poor’s (S&P) to ‘A+’ with a ‘Stable’ outlook. S&P cited the Kingdom’s continued progress in diversifying its non-oil economy, developing its capital markets, and implementing its Vision 2030 objectives as key factors for this positive assessment. The report indicates that this progress balances the risks associated with higher external financing needs and debt servicing costs, ultimately attracting foreign investment.
    • What was the primary subject of Dr. Muhammad Ayman Sawsan’s article? The primary subject of Dr. Muhammad Ayman Sawsan’s article was the features of Saudi Arabia’s foreign policy towards Syria. The article discusses the Kingdom’s consistent stance on supporting the Syrian people, its efforts to help them rebuild a unified, independent, and safe Arab state free from foreign interference, and its emphasis on a political transition that preserves the rights of all Syrians. It also highlights Saudi Arabia’s active diplomatic role in various meetings and conferences concerning Syria following the fall of the Assad regime.
    • What was the significance of King Salman’s Ramadan iftar in Indonesia? King Salman’s Ramadan iftar in Central Java, Indonesia, was significant as it set a new record for the largest iftar table in ASEAN countries, with over 28,000 fasting people in attendance. Organized by the Saudi Ministry of Islamic Affairs, Dawah and Guidance, this event reflected the greatness of Islamic solidarity and brotherhood. Beyond just a meal, it was a message of peace and love from Saudi Arabia, reaffirming the Kingdom’s role in serving Muslims and strengthening unity among Islamic nations. This achievement also built upon a previous record set by the ministry in Indonesia in 2024.
    • What initiatives were highlighted concerning the development and preservation of historical and cultural sites in Saudi Arabia? Several initiatives were highlighted, including the Prince Faisal bin Mishal’s reception of the Qassim Region Women’s Committee’s report on their developmental work, emphasizing support for productive women and families to achieve sustainable development in line with Vision 2030. Additionally, under the patronage of Prince Abdulaziz bin Fahd bin Mohammed bin Turki Al Saud, the Al-Anoud Foundation held a seminar titled “Prince Mohammed bin Fahd: Achievements and Legacy,” focusing on historical impact. Furthermore, Kadana Development Company offered investment opportunities for historical sites in the Holy Sites of Makkah, aiming to enrich the experience of residents, pilgrims, and Umrah performers by creating commercial outlets and exhibitions that showcase the historical narrative of Makkah. The second phase of a project to renovate and restore 30 historical mosques across 10 regions was also mentioned, aiming to rehabilitate these sites for worship, preserve their architectural authenticity, and highlight the Kingdom’s cultural and religious depth, aligning with Vision 2030’s focus on preserving heritage.
    • What was the key concern regarding the market for olefin products in the region? The key concern regarding the market for olefin products in the region was the accelerating pace of price increases in the regional olefin markets. New supplies were exacerbating the oversupply situation, creating challenges for profit margins. While suppliers aimed to improve these margins with significant price hikes, there was uncertainty about whether buyers could absorb these increases. Weak import competitiveness, particularly from the United States due to high shipping costs and stable local prices, was also a major factor influencing the polyethylene market.
    • What were some of the main themes discussed at the Nutanix .NEXT On Tour event in Riyadh? The Nutanix .NEXT On Tour event in Riyadh covered several main themes related to advancing digital transformation. These included leveraging modern digital platforms like cloud computing and the shift towards enterprise artificial intelligence, the introduction of the Nutanix Kubernetes Platform for seamless migration to cloud-native applications, hybrid cloud computing as an enabler of digital transformation, and Saudi Arabia’s bid to host the 2034 FIFA World Cup, including the role of AI in football with a special appearance by Saudi national team coach Hervé Renard. The event also highlighted Nutanix’s significant investments and strategic partnerships in Saudi Arabia, such as opening a new office, increasing employee numbers, becoming a regional headquarters, partnering with the Digital Government Authority, and empowering local talent through training programs.
    • What was the significant development concerning gold prices and global stock market value? Gold prices broke the $3,000 per ounce barrier for the first time, driven by investors seeking a safe-haven asset amid economic uncertainty and geopolitical tensions, including the potential for escalating trade wars. Simultaneously, approximately $3 trillion was wiped off the global stock market value in the preceding week, with most of these losses concentrated in the United States. This reflected investor concerns over trade policies, economic slowdown fears, and rising geopolitical risks, leading to increased demand for safe assets like gold and a sell-off in equities.

    Ukraine Crisis: Saudi Arabia’s Diplomatic Efforts

    Based on the sources, there have been discussions and efforts related to the Ukraine crisis talks.

    • Saudi Arabia welcomed Kuwait’s hosting of talks between the United States and Ukraine. In a statement from its Ministry of Foreign Affairs, the Kingdom affirmed its support for and belief in reaching a solution to the crisis in Ukraine through peaceful means. Saudi Arabia also appreciated Kuwait’s efforts to find a political resolution.
    • Similarly, Saudi Arabia also welcomed Qatar’s hosting of talks between the United States and Ukraine. The Kingdom’s Ministry of Foreign Affairs expressed hope that these discussions would contribute to reaching a resolution to the crisis in Ukraine. Saudi Arabia also expressed its appreciation for Qatar’s diplomatic efforts aimed at bringing international viewpoints closer, reiterating Qatar’s firm belief that dialogue is the optimal choice for resolving regional and international crises and conflicts. The Ministry further reaffirmed Saudi Arabia’s support for all efforts aimed at establishing peace through cooperation among nations.
    • Earlier in the year, the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia itself was involved in facilitating discussions related to the Ukraine issue. According to one source, on the sidelines of hosting the US Secretary of State for talks with Russia, then-US President Donald Trump acknowledged the Kingdom as a “special place with special leaders” for holding such discussions. These talks took place in Riyadh.
    • Furthermore, the Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman bin Abdulaziz Al Saud had a phone call with the President of the Russian Federation, Vladimir Putin. During this call, they reviewed the existing areas of cooperation between the two countries and ways to enhance them. The call also involved a review of the efforts being made to resolve the Ukrainian crisis, and the Crown Prince emphasized the Kingdom’s keenness to exert all good offices to facilitate dialogue and everything that leads to a solution.

    Saudi Arabia’s Diplomatic Efforts for Peace and Stability

    Based on the sources and our conversation history, Saudi Arabia has been actively involved in diplomacy across several areas, demonstrating its commitment to regional and international peace and stability. Here’s a discussion of Saudi Arabia’s diplomatic efforts:

    Efforts to Resolve the Ukraine Crisis:

    • As discussed in our previous conversation, Saudi Arabia has shown a keen interest in facilitating a resolution to the Ukraine crisis. Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman emphasized the Kingdom’s eagerness to facilitate dialogue and reach a political solution during a phone call with Russian President Vladimir Putin.
    • President Putin expressed his gratitude to the Kingdom and its leaders for their efforts in settling the Ukrainian crisis, recognizing Saudi Arabia’s important role as a mediator. He also acknowledged the Kingdom’s political and economic standing and its pivotal role on the international stage, highlighting the trust major powers have in Saudi Arabia’s ability to act as a neutral and impartial mediator.
    • Furthermore, then-US President Donald Trump, in February of the previous year, acknowledged Saudi Arabia as a “special place with special leaders” for hosting talks between the US and Russia on the sidelines of a visit by the US Secretary of State to the Kingdom.
    • Saudi Arabia welcomed Kuwait’s hosting of talks between the United States and Ukraine, affirming its support for a peaceful resolution.
    • Similarly, the Kingdom welcomed Qatar’s hosting of talks between the United States and Ukraine, expressing hope for a resolution through these discussions and appreciating Qatar’s diplomatic efforts.

    Broader Diplomatic Engagement:

    • The Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Saudi Arabia reiterated the Kingdom’s support for all efforts that contribute to establishing international security and stability and creating favorable conditions for development and prosperity.
    • Saudi Arabia welcomed the agreement between the Republic of Tajikistan and the Kyrgyz Republic regarding border demarcation and expressed congratulations to both countries, wishing them continued stability and prosperity.
    • The Kingdom has been actively involved in efforts to achieve national consensus among Syrians and has consistently emphasized the importance of preserving Syria’s territorial integrity, national cohesion, and sovereignty, opposing foreign interference. Saudi Arabia has called for political solutions to the Syrian crisis to alleviate the suffering of the Syrian people, many of whom have become refugees or displaced.
    • Saudi Arabia welcomed Kuwait’s hosting of talks between the United States and Ukraine, emphasizing its belief in peaceful resolutions for the Ukrainian crisis.
    • Similarly, the Kingdom welcomed Qatar’s hosting of talks between the United States and Ukraine, expressing hope for a solution and appreciating Qatar’s diplomatic endeavors.
    • Saudi Arabia has stressed the necessity of a political horizon for the Palestinian people and a negotiated solution to the conflict with Israel that meets their legitimate needs and aspirations, promoting comprehensive peace and stability in the Middle East.
    • The Kingdom has also expressed its concern over the increasing tensions and hostile actions in the West Bank, urging a reduction in these actions and affirming its readiness to engage with Arab nations to outline proposals for reconstruction and a path towards the future.
    • Saudi Arabia welcomed the convening of the Syrian National Dialogue Conference and the agreement between the Syrian government and the leader of the Syrian Democratic Forces, which aims to integrate all civil and military institutions to build a unified Syrian state. The Kingdom has also provided humanitarian aid to the Syrian people through King Salman’s Relief Center.
    • The Kingdom welcomed the invitation to the Syrian Foreign Minister, Mr. Asaad Al-Saybani, to participate in meetings of Arab foreign ministers and the resumption of Syria’s membership in the Organization of Islamic Cooperation, in which Saudi Arabia played a significant role.

    In summary, Saudi Arabia’s diplomacy, as reflected in the sources, is characterized by a proactive approach to conflict resolution, a commitment to peaceful dialogue, and a willingness to support and facilitate international efforts aimed at achieving stability and peace in various regions, including the Ukraine and the Middle East. The Kingdom leverages its political and economic influence to play a constructive role on the global stage.

    Saudi Arabia’s Credit Rating Upgraded to A+ by S&P

    Based on the sources, Standard & Poor’s (S&P) raised the Kingdom’s credit rating to “A+” with a “stable” future outlook for both local and foreign currencies.

    The agency provided reasons for this positive revision in its report:

    • The upgrade reflects the Kingdom’s continuous progress in its credit rating and the maintenance of a stable future outlook.
    • This progress is attributed to the supported and growing economic sector within Saudi Arabia.
    • The diversification of the non-oil local financial market is also a key factor.
    • This diversification is seen as balancing the risks associated with high sovereign external debt service and costs.
    • The positive rating also reflects the Kingdom’s progress in achieving the targets of its Vision 2030.

    In summary, Standard & Poor’s increased Saudi Arabia’s credit rating to A+ with a stable outlook, highlighting the positive developments in the Kingdom’s economy, particularly the growth of the non-oil sector and the efforts towards achieving Vision 2030 goals, which contribute to balancing financial risks.

    The Prophet’s Mosque: Key Historical and Sacred Features

    Based on the sources, Al-Masjid an-Nabawi (the Prophet’s Mosque) in Medina holds immense religious and historical significance, receiving exceptional care throughout history.

    Here are some key aspects discussed in the sources:

    • The Prophet’s Chamber (Hujra): The mosque houses the chamber of Aisha (may Allah be pleased with her), which contains the grave of the Prophet Muhammad (peace and blessings be upon him), as well as the graves of his two successors, Abu Bakr Al-Siddiq and Umar ibn Al-Khattab (may Allah be pleased with them). This sacred area is referred to as the “Noble Enclosure (al-Muwajaha al-Sharifa)“. Angels are said to descend upon this pure spot day and night, invoking blessings upon the Prophet.
    • The Noble Enclosure is surrounded by walls and had four doors to Aisha’s chamber: a southern door facing visitors, the western door known as Bab Fatima, Bab Aisha, or Bab al-Wufud, the eastern door towards al-Baqi’, and the northern door called Bab al-Tawba, al-Amin, or al-Tahajjud.
    • Within the Noble Enclosure, facing the Noble Rawda, is the Prophet’s window, located between two pillars. This marked the spot where the Prophet (peace be upon him) used to pray and the direction of his bed and the mihrab (niche indicating the direction of prayer). Another window is situated at the end of the eastern wall, near Bab al-Baqi’.
    • The sources emphasize the great attention and preservation efforts dedicated to the Noble Enclosure from the time of King Abdulaziz Al Saud to the present reign of King Salman bin Abdulaziz Al Saud.
    • The Prophet’s Minbar (Pulpit): The minbar is a prominent feature of the Prophet’s Mosque and is considered “a piece of Paradise” according to a hadith.
    • Initially, the Prophet (peace be upon him) would lean against a palm trunk while delivering sermons. Later, a two-stepped minbar was constructed for him. It is narrated that the original palm trunk yearned for the Prophet when he began using the minbar.
    • The minbar was about three and a half cubits high (the trunk) and the seat was two cubits long. During their caliphates, Abu Bakr, Umar, and Uthman (may Allah be pleased with them) used the minbar in a manner reflecting their respect for the Prophet’s position.
    • The minbar’s construction and appearance evolved over time, with Uthman (may Allah be pleased with him) being the first to cover it with al-Qibtiyya cloth. Later, it was made of various materials like wood and marble, and the number of steps sometimes increased.
    • The Saudi government has consistently provided care and maintenance for the minbar, including covering it with a transparent sheet and applying gold plating when necessary to preserve it as a testament to the precision of Islamic art.
    • The Prophet’s Pillars (Asatin): The original pillars of the Prophet’s Mosque were trunks of palm trees. Several of these pillars were later known by specific names, each with its own historical significance:
    • Al-Mukhallaqa (The Perfumed): This pillar marks the spot where the Prophet (peace be upon him) prayed after the direction of the Qibla was changed.
    • Aisha: Located near the Prophet’s bed in Aisha’s chamber, where she (may Allah be pleased with her) used to pray.
    • Al-Rawda (The Garden): Situated overlooking the Noble Enclosure, it had a window and was a place for the Prophet’s i’tikaf (seclusion) and where his palm-leaf bed was located.
    • Al-Hanana (The Yearning): A reminder of the original palm trunk that yearned for the Prophet.
    • Al-Surir (The Bed):.
    • Al-Muharras (The Guarded): Where Ali (may Allah be pleased with him) would sit to guard the Prophet.
    • Al-Wufud (The Delegations): Where the Prophet (peace be upon him) received Arab delegations.
    • Al-Tawba (The Repentance) / Abu Lubaba: Named after Abu Lubaba (may Allah be pleased with him), who tied himself to this pillar as a penance until Allah accepted his repentance.
    • Khokha of Abu Bakr Al-Siddiq: A small door or opening from the house of Abu Bakr Al-Siddiq (may Allah be pleased with him) led directly into the mosque. It was notable for being kept open at night when other such openings were closed.
    • Mihrab of the Prophet: The niche indicating the direction of prayer used by the Prophet (peace be upon him) is another significant feature.

    The sources highlight Al-Masjid an-Nabawi as a place of immense historical and spiritual importance, with specific locations like the Prophet’s Chamber, the Minbar, and the original pillars carrying deep significance and being subjects of continuous care and attention.

    Saudi Arabia Economic Investments and Vision 2030

    Based on the sources, there are several key areas related to economic investments in Saudi Arabia:

    • Stimulating Investment and Economic Diversification: Saudi Arabia is actively working to stimulate investment, which is expected to enhance the growth of the non-oil sector and improve the economy’s resilience in the medium term. This drive to boost investment is a significant part of the Kingdom’s efforts to diversify its non-oil local financial market, aiming to balance the risks associated with external debt. The goal is to achieve the targets of Vision 2030.
    • Positive Economic Outlook and Growth Projections: As a result of these efforts, Standard & Poor’s (S&P) anticipates a median real GDP growth of 4% during the period of 2025-2028. This positive projection indicates confidence in the ongoing and future economic investments within the Kingdom.
    • Investments in Specific Sectors:
    • Technology and Digital Transformation: Events like the “Nutanix” forum highlight the focus on cloud computing and artificial intelligence and how these technologies can empower organizations. Partnerships with global technology leaders are also being showcased. These activities suggest investments are being made and encouraged in the digital and technology sectors.
    • Sports and Entertainment: Saudi Arabia’s bid to host the 2034 World Cup would necessitate substantial investments in infrastructure and related industries.
    • Pharmaceutical Industry: There is a clear drive to establish pharmaceutical manufacturing facilities and expand production lines within the Kingdom. The government encourages agreements with international companies to localize drug manufacturing technologies. The Public Investment Fund and the Saudi Industrial Development Fund support pharmaceutical projects, providing crucial funding and facilities for factory construction. Furthermore, the presence of advanced research centers like King Abdullah University of Science and Technology contributes to the development of pharmaceutical research.
    • Semiconductor Industry: Saudi Arabia has ambitious plans to become a significant player in the semiconductor industry through initiatives like the “Alat” company, backed by the Public Investment Fund. This is seen as a unique opportunity to deepen its economic independence by possessing another source of power alongside oil. The strategy involves partnering with leading global semiconductor companies, building ecosystems focused on suppliers, manufacturers, and research institutions, and developing a skilled workforce. The Kingdom may initially focus on specialized semiconductor markets such as those for military applications or artificial intelligence.
    • Financial Stability and Credit Rating: The raising of the Kingdom’s credit rating by S&P to “A+” signifies a positive assessment of its economic management and the potential returns on investments within the country. The stable outlook further reinforces the confidence in the Kingdom’s economic trajectory.

    In summary, the sources indicate that Saudi Arabia is actively pursuing economic investments across diverse sectors, including technology, sports, pharmaceuticals, and semiconductors, as part of its Vision 2030 goals. These investments are aimed at economic diversification, boosting non-oil sector growth, and enhancing the Kingdom’s global economic standing, which is reflected in positive ratings from agencies like Standard & Poor’s.

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • Democracy, Expression, and Human Rights in Pakistan by Rohan Khanna India

    Democracy, Expression, and Human Rights in Pakistan by Rohan Khanna India

    The provided text highlights concerns about the state of democracy, freedom of expression, and human rights in Pakistan. It argues that true democracy necessitates freedom of speech, which is often stifled in the country. The speaker expresses solidarity with marginalized communities, such as the Baloch and those affected by the merger of FATA into KP, who face systemic discrimination and lack basic rights. The text also addresses the plight of Afghan refugees in Pakistan, alleging inadequate protection and denial of rightful compensation. Ultimately, the speaker urges the government and media to amplify the voices of these oppressed groups, address their grievances, and ensure their fundamental rights are respected.

    Study Guide: Democracy, Expression, and Human Rights in Pakistan

    I. Quiz (Short Answer)

    1. According to the text, what is an essential component of democracy?
    2. What does the text suggest about the state of democracy in Pakistan?
    3. What specific right does the law supposedly grant to citizens, according to the text?
    4. Which community led by Manzoor Pashteen is mentioned as facing problems?
    5. What human rights issues are mentioned in relation to the Baloch people in Balochistan?
    6. How does the text describe the human rights situation under the Taliban government in Afghanistan?
    7. What was the impact of the attack on Afghanistan, and its related consequences, on Pakistan?
    8. What are some of the issues facing the people of FATA after its merger into KP?
    9. According to the text, what should be done to support the oppressed sections of society?
    10. What is mentioned regarding the response of the community to the violence it has faced?

    II. Quiz Answer Key

    1. Freedom of expression is stated to be an essential component of democracy, highlighting the importance of individuals being able to voice their opinions without fear.
    2. The text implies that democracy in Pakistan is flawed, characterized by restrictions on expression and stifling of dissenting voices.
    3. The law supposedly grants the right to assemble and express one’s views, provided it is done without violence.
    4. The Pashtun community, led by Manzoor Pashteen, is specifically mentioned as having faced significant problems.
    5. The text mentions recent incidents involving the Baloch people in Balochistan, suggesting human rights violations are taking place and that the populace knows about this.
    6. The text depicts the human rights situation under the Taliban government in Afghanistan as dire, characterized by extensive violations without historical precedent.
    7. The attack on Afghanistan resulted in many refugees seeking asylum in Pakistan, and the war created many ongoing problems.
    8. The people of FATA, after its merger into KP, are facing issues such as a lack of compensation, unemployment, and inadequate infrastructure, education, and employment opportunities.
    9. The text argues that the voices of oppressed sections of society should be amplified, and their concerns addressed with government intervention and media attention.
    10. The community has consistently opposed violence and condemned it, even in the face of immense suffering, imprisonment, and death.

    III. Essay Questions

    1. Analyze the text’s critique of democracy in Pakistan. What specific examples are used to support the claim that freedom of expression is limited?
    2. Discuss the human rights issues raised in the text concerning specific groups in Pakistan (e.g., Baloch, people of FATA). What recommendations does the text offer for addressing these issues?
    3. Compare and contrast the text’s depiction of the human rights situation in Afghanistan under the Taliban government with its portrayal of human rights in Pakistan.
    4. Evaluate the text’s argument that supporting oppressed groups and giving prominence to their voices is essential for a functioning democracy.
    5. Assess the role of the media in highlighting and addressing human rights issues in Pakistan, according to the perspective presented in the text.

    IV. Glossary of Key Terms

    • Democracy: A system of government in which power is vested in the people and exercised directly by them or through elected representatives.
    • Freedom of Expression: The right to articulate one’s opinions, ideas, and beliefs without fear of censorship or retaliation.
    • Human Rights: Basic rights and freedoms that belong to every person in the world, from birth until death.
    • FATA (Federally Administered Tribal Areas): A former semi-autonomous tribal region in northwestern Pakistan, now merged with Khyber Pakhtunkhwa (KP) province.
    • KP (Khyber Pakhtunkhwa): A province in northwestern Pakistan.
    • Balochistan: The largest province of Pakistan, located in the southwest of the country.
    • Taliban: An Islamic fundamentalist political and military organization currently ruling Afghanistan.
    • Oppressed Section: Refers to groups within a society that are subjected to unjust treatment, control, or marginalization.
    • Compensation: Something, typically money, awarded to someone as recompense for loss, injury, or suffering.
    • Infrastructure: The basic physical and organizational structures and facilities (e.g., buildings, roads, power supplies) needed for the operation of a society or enterprise.

    Pakistan: Democracy, Expression, and Human Rights Analysis

    Okay, here’s a briefing document summarizing the main themes and ideas from the provided excerpt from “Democracy, Expression, and Human Rights in Pakistan.”

    Briefing Document: Democracy, Expression, and Human Rights in Pakistan

    Source: Excerpts from “Democracy, Expression, and Human Rights in Pakistan”

    Date: October 26, 2024

    Summary:

    This document presents a critical perspective on the state of democracy, freedom of expression, and human rights in Pakistan. The speaker argues that a true democracy necessitates freedom of expression and criticizes the restrictions placed on certain groups and issues within the country. The document highlights the plight of marginalized communities, including the Pashtuns, the Baloch, and Afghan refugees, emphasizing their lack of basic rights, compensation, and opportunities. It also touches upon the situation in Afghanistan under the Taliban, highlighting the severe human rights violations occurring there. The speaker calls for greater media attention, government action, and public support to address the grievances of these oppressed sections of society.

    Key Themes and Ideas:

    • The Intertwined Nature of Democracy and Freedom of Expression: The speaker asserts that democracy is fundamentally dependent on the freedom to express oneself. The absence of free expression signifies a deficiency in the democratic system. “In a country where there is democracy, there is also freedom to express. There is no concept of democracy if there is no freedom to express.”
    • Restrictions on Expression in Pakistan: The speaker criticizes what they perceive as limitations on freedom of speech and assembly in Pakistan, particularly concerning sensitive issues or specific groups. “If one wants to say something, then people start getting stifled. There is a restriction on a particular issue.” The speaker contrasts this with the legal right to assemble and express views peacefully, arguing that suppressing dissenting voices through power is “against democracy and the law. It is against humanity.”
    • The Plight of Marginalized Communities: The document focuses significantly on the hardships faced by specific groups within Pakistan, including:
    • Pashtuns: The speaker references Manzoor Pashteen and his movement, noting the “major problems” faced by this community.
    • Baloch: The speaker mentions the treatment of the Baloch people in Balochistan, referring to “recent incidents” that are reportedly known to the public through media coverage.
    • Afghan Refugees: The speaker highlights the long-term presence of Afghan refugees in Pakistan following the conflict in Afghanistan and expresses concern that they are not receiving the rights or compensation they are entitled to, despite promises from international organizations.
    • Lack of Basic Rights and Opportunities: A recurring theme is the denial of basic rights, adequate compensation, infrastructure, education, and employment opportunities to marginalized groups. Specifically, the merger of FATA into KP is mentioned in the context of unfulfilled promises of compensation and lack of economic opportunities.
    • Human Rights Violations in Afghanistan under the Taliban: The speaker draws a comparison between the situation in Pakistan and the situation in Afghanistan under the Taliban, citing the “human rights violations that are happening under the Taliban government” as unparalleled in Afghan history. The speaker was also disturbed with how Afghans were deported to Afghanistan.
    • Call to Action: The document concludes with a plea for greater attention to the voices of the oppressed, urging the media, the government, and the public to support their cause. The speaker emphasizes the non-violent nature of these communities and the need for the government to address their problems and find solutions. “This voice should be given prominence. We should raise our voice in their support. Our media should also write for them.” The speaker also notes the massive support that these populations have.

    Important Considerations:

    • Perspective: It is important to note that this document presents a specific viewpoint, likely that of a human rights advocate or a member of a marginalized community. It is crucial to consider other perspectives and contextual information to gain a comprehensive understanding of the issues discussed.
    • Generalizations: The speaker makes some broad generalizations about the treatment of certain groups. Further investigation is needed to verify the accuracy and extent of these claims.

    This briefing document offers a starting point for understanding the complex issues of democracy, freedom of expression, and human rights in Pakistan, particularly as they relate to marginalized communities. It is essential to consult a variety of sources and perspectives to develop a well-rounded understanding of these issues.

    Frequently Asked Questions about Democracy, Expression, and Human Rights in Pakistan

    1. What is the fundamental connection between democracy and freedom of expression in the context of Pakistan?

    In a genuine democracy, freedom of expression is essential. The source emphasizes that democracy is meaningless without the right to voice opinions, assemble peacefully, and express views without the fear of stifling or restriction. The ability for individuals and groups to express dissent and advocate for their rights is seen as a cornerstone of a functioning democratic society.

    2. What are some examples of restrictions on freedom of expression that exist in Pakistan, according to the source?

    The source mentions a tendency to stifle opinions, restrict expression on particular issues, and hinder the rights of individuals and political groups to assemble and express their views peacefully. The speaker critiques actions taken by those in power to suppress or obstruct dissenting voices, highlighting a discrepancy between the legal right to express oneself and the practical reality.

    3. What specific communities are identified as facing human rights challenges in Pakistan, and what are those challenges?

    The source specifically mentions the community led by Manzoor Pashteen, the Baloch people in Balochistan, and the people of the former Federally Administered Tribal Areas (FATA) now merged into Khyber Pakhtunkhwa (KP). The Baloch are described as facing mistreatment, while the people of FATA have allegedly not received promised compensation, lack infrastructure, educational institutions, employment opportunities, and basic facilities.

    4. How does the situation in Afghanistan, particularly under the Taliban government, relate to the discussion of democracy and human rights in Pakistan?

    The source contrasts the lack of democracy and widespread human rights violations under the Taliban government in Afghanistan with the principles that should be upheld in Pakistan. The treatment of Afghan refugees in Pakistan and the discomfort caused by deportations to Afghanistan are also mentioned, highlighting concerns about the protection of vulnerable populations.

    5. What criticisms are raised regarding the treatment of internally displaced persons (IDPs) from FATA after the region’s merger with KP?

    The source alleges that many people from FATA have not received the compensation promised to them following the region’s merger with KP. Further, the source claims that the area lacks adequate infrastructure, educational institutions, employment opportunities, and basic facilities, leaving residents feeling as though they lack the rights afforded to citizens.

    6. What is the speaker’s call to action regarding the issues faced by marginalized communities in Pakistan?

    The speaker urges support for the oppressed and marginalized sections of society. They call for giving prominence to their voices, raising awareness about their issues, and advocating for their rights. They specifically call on the media to report on their situation and for the government to listen to their problems and find solutions.

    7. How is the non-violent approach of certain communities emphasized in the context of their struggles for rights?

    The source highlights that the communities they are discussing, despite facing significant suffering, imprisonment, and even death, have consistently opposed violence and condemned it. Their commitment to non-violent means of advocating for their rights is presented as a testament to their dedication and a justification for their voices to be heard.

    8. What actions does the source suggest should be taken by the government and media regarding marginalized communities in Pakistan?

    The source urges the government to listen to the problems of marginalized communities and find solutions to them. The source also calls on the media to write about these communities, give prominence to their voices, and raise awareness about their struggles. The goal is to ensure that their concerns are addressed and their rights are protected.

    In a country where there is democracy, there is also freedom to express. There is no concept of democracy if there is no freedom to express. There is a strange kind of democracy in our country. If one wants to say something, then people start getting stifled. There is a restriction on a particular issue. The law gives the right to assemble and express one’s views. If there is no violence, then any planet, any party, any political group has this right. To give them respite through power is against democracy and the law. It is against humanity. So when he gave this plan of the strike, these people created a lot of ruckus and also hid. The community which Manzoor Pashteen is leading now has already faced major problems. The way the Baloch are being treated in Balochistan, the people know about the recent incidents of the people. All the people have been listening to the media. When the attack on Afghanistan took place, many people who We took refuge here, a long time has passed, the war is still going on there, till now we have seen that the Taliban government has come, democracy is not found there even after searching, democracy is not a thing at all, in fact the amount of human rights violations that are happening under the Taliban government cannot be compared in the history of Afghanistan, the way people were thrown from here and sent there, this thing was very uncomfortable for the Afghans, although we have been taking from the big Amjad International Committee that we protect the Afghan refugees, we bring compensation and bring it back, but they do not give the rights to those who are entitled, FATA has been merged into KP, there are many people, they have not been given the compensation that was promised to them and they are unemployed, there is no infrastructure there, there is no industry there, there are no good educational institutions for them, there are no places for their children, there are no employment opportunities, they do not have the right that they are not citizens of Pakistan, why should they not be given their basic facilities, why should they not be given their rights Labourers should not be given wages. This is the voice of this oppressed section. This voice should be given prominence. We should raise our voice in their support. Our media should also write for them. They are the people who have always opposed violence and condemned it. If they had done violence, even then there was objection to those thoughts. They suffered so much, many of their people were put in jail and killed, in spite of that they did not follow the path of martyrdom. So many people of Badshah Khan’s Talimabad Khar come out in their defense with them, so many people of such a huge population should be united. Their voice should be heard. Their government should listen to their problems and find solutions to them.

    जिस मुल्क में जम्हूरियत होती है वहां आजादी इजहार भी होती है डेमोक्रेसी का कोई तसवर नहीं है अगर आजादी इजहार ना हो हमारे मुल्क में अजीब किस्म की जम्हूरियत है य कोई भी बात कहनी हो तो कने लग जाती है फला मसले पर बंदिश हो जाती है आईन ये हकता है इतमा का इकट्ठे होने का अपने ख्यालात का इजहार करने का अगर वायलेंस नहीं है तो कोई भी ग्रह कोई भी पार्टी कोई भी सियासी जमात यह हक रखती है ये उसको कुशल देना ताकत के जरिए ये जम्हूरियत और आईन के खिलाफ है इंसानी ब याकूब के खिलाफ है तो उन्होंने जब ये रके का प्लान दिया तो इन लोगों ने काफी इतरात किए और बस लुकिया भी की मंजूर पश्तीन अब जिस तबके की कयादत कर रहे हैं उनके साथ पहली बड़ी तियां हो चुकी है ों के साथ और बलूच के साथ जो सलूक हो रहा है बलूचिस्तान में भी पिछले दिनों पर्सन के वाकत भी सारे आवाम जानते हैं हमारे मीडिया में सारी श्रोता आई हुई है सन की फोसे जब अफगानिस्तान प काब हुई थी बहुत से लोग जिन्होंने पनाह ली थी इधर एक जमाना बीत गया अब वहां लते जंग अभी तक चली आ रही है अभी तक देखि तालिबान की हुकूमत आई है उसमें डेमोक्रेसी ढूंढे से नहीं मिलती है कोई चीज ही नहीं है डेमोक्रेसी वाली बल्कि ह्यूमन राइट्स की जितनी वायलेशन तालिबान की हुकूमत में हो रही है इसकी तो मिसाल नहीं मिलती अफगानिस्तान की हिस्ट्री में लोगों को यहां से जिस तरह को में फेंक के वहां भेजा गया तनों को अफगान को ये चीज बत अजियत नाक थी हालांकि हम लबी चौड़ी अमजद इंटरनेशनल कमटी से लेते रहे हैं कि हम अफगान रिफ्यूजी की हिफाजत करते हैं हम मुआवजे लेके खा आ जाते हैं लेकिन जो हकदार है उनको हक अदा नहीं करते फाटा को केपी में मगम किया गया कई सायल है उनको वो फिटी नहीं दी गई जो उनके साथ वादे किए गए थे व उसमान खते हैं वहां कोई इंफ्रास्ट्रक्चर नहीं है वहां कोई इंडस्ट्री नहीं है उनके लिए अच्छे तालीमी इदार उनके बच्चों के लिए नहीं है रोजगार के बके नहीं है उन्हो का ये हक नहीं है कि वो पाकिस्तान के शहरी नहीं है उनको क्यों उनकी बुनियादी सहूलियत ना दी जाए उनको उनके ू क्यों ना दिए जाए मजदूर मतीन दर इस दबे हुए तबके की आवाज है इस आवाज को सरबला किया जाना चाहिए उनकी आवाज में हम आंगी करनी चाहिए हमारे मीडिया को भी चाहिए कि उनके लिए लिखे बोले वो लोग हैं जिन्होंने हमेशा वायलेंस की मुखालफत की और उसकी मजम्मत की है अगर वो वायलेंस करते फिर भी इतराज था वो उन विचारों ने इतनी मारे खाई उनके कई लोगों को जेलों में रखा गया मारा गया इसके बावजूद उन्होंने शद की राह नहीं अपनाई उन्होंने बादशाह खान की तालीमाबाद खर की इतने ज्यादा पखत निकलते हैं उनकी हि मायत में उनके साथ तो इतनी बड़ी आबादी के इतने उनके जिर्गे को मकत होना चाहिए उनकी आवाज सुनी जानी चाहिए उनके हुकूमत को चाहिए कि उनके मसाइल सुने और उन्हे हल

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • Master Animation Course For Beginners in Hindi Crafting Digital Characters and Environments: A Design Lecture by CG Opinions

    Master Animation Course For Beginners in Hindi Crafting Digital Characters and Environments: A Design Lecture by CG Opinions

    This collection of text is a comprehensive animation course introduction. It outlines the software, including Blender, Character Creator, iClone, and ZBrush, needed for character creation, animation, environment design, and audio editing. The course emphasizes character design and rigging, frame-by-frame animation, lip-syncing, and environment creation. The lectures cover pre-production, production, and post-production, including concept development, script writing, storyboarding, and voice casting. It also provides practical guidance on using AI tools for generating character sketches and images for storyboards. Finally, the text contains the course creator’s instruction on basic modeling in Blender to produce props and environments for the animation project.

    3D Modeling & Animation Study Guide

    Quiz: Short Answer Questions

    1. What is a PNG file, and why is it useful in the context of character creation? PNG files are image files with the capability to save transparency. This is useful for character creation because it allows the character to be placed on different backgrounds without showing a background behind the character.
    2. Describe the basic steps for finding environment references using online resources like FreePik. First, go to FreePik and search for your desired environment, like “classroom” or “library”. Next, filter the results to find vector images that suit your project’s style and script, then download the relevant files.
    3. Why is sketching in Adobe Photoshop important in the pre-production phase? Sketching in Photoshop helps create custom environment references. It allows for manipulating shapes and colors to design a classroom or library layout, including tables, walls, and other visual elements.
    4. Explain the use of the Pen Tool in creating custom shapes within Adobe Photoshop. The Pen Tool is used to create precise and complex shapes that are not readily available as basic geometric forms. It allows for creating outlines and selections, and adding layers and colors.
    5. Why is voice recording and audio editing crucial in animation pre-production? Voice recording and audio editing ensure clear and appropriate voiceovers for characters. Editing can involve enhancing audio quality, removing background noise, and adjusting pitch to suit different character types (adults, teens, or children).
    6. What is the purpose of using a website like 11 Labs in voice-over production? 11 Labs is used to convert adult voices into those of children or teens, allowing for characters with voices that better match their age. It also enhances audio quality and provides options for selecting different voice styles.
    7. What is the significance of Storyboarding in animation? Storyboarding is important to plan the animation’s visual narrative and workflow. It helps organize the scenes, camera angles, character placement, and dialogues, ensuring a coherent and well-structured final product.
    8. Briefly outline the steps for creating a storyboard using Adobe Photoshop. First, set up a grid-like layout using rectangles. Add scene numbers and descriptions. Place character and environment references into the grid and insert script notes or dialogue snippets below each scene.
    9. What is the purpose of dividing an object into multiple parts during the editing phase of 3D modeling in Blender? Dividing a model allows for intricate adjustments. This customization ensures it matches the desired level of detail.
    10. What is the purpose of “Extrude” in Blender? Extrude is used to expand a selected face, edge, or vertex outward, adding volume or length to an object.

    Essay Format Questions

    1. Discuss the importance of pre-production in animation, detailing how environment design and character references contribute to the final product.
    2. Compare and contrast the techniques of creating a storyboard using readily available assets versus using original sketches.
    3. Describe the process of voice recording and editing for animation, explaining how tools like 11 Labs and Adobe Audition enhance the final audio output.
    4. Explain the significance of character creation in Blender, including how an understanding of basic shapes, tools, and modifiers contributes to a 3D object.
    5. Discuss the role of audio, and the way the different sources presented here describe audio’s contribution to the final animation.

    Glossary of Key Terms

    • PNG: (Portable Network Graphics) An image file format that supports lossless compression and transparency, commonly used for web graphics and character design.
    • Vector Image: An image composed of mathematical equations rather than pixels, allowing for scalability without loss of quality. Often used in graphic design and illustration.
    • FreePik: An online platform that provides free vector graphics, stock photos, and other design resources.
    • Adobe Photoshop: A raster graphics editor used for image manipulation, photo editing, and digital painting.
    • Pen Tool: A tool in Adobe Photoshop used to create precise paths and shapes, commonly used for drawing custom illustrations and shapes.
    • 11 Labs: An online platform for generating realistic AI voices, commonly used in animation and voiceover production.
    • Adobe Audition: A digital audio workstation used for recording, editing, and mixing audio files.
    • Storyboarding: A sequence of drawings or images that outline the key scenes of a video or animation, used for planning the visual narrative.
    • Headshot Plugin: Used for creating 3D characters from a 2D picture.
    • G Brush: Software used to customize the dimensions of a 3D character’s body type.
    • T Pose: A pose that the character holds to ensure all body components are accessible to the designer.
    • Mesh: The framework of vertices, edges, and faces that define the shape of a 3D model in Blender.
    • Edit Mode: Mode used to customize the shape of a 3D model.
    • Extrude: Expands a face, edge, or vertex outward, adding length to a 3D object.
    • Vertices: Single coordinates in space.
    • Faces: The space between edges.
    • PBR Textures: Physically Based Rendering, describes lighting and texture details for computer graphics.
    • Dynamics: Settings that change based on the environment, allowing a brush’s dynamics to change its style and size.

    3D Animation: Pre-Production and Production Techniques

    Okay, here’s a detailed briefing document summarizing the key themes and ideas from the provided source excerpts.

    Briefing Document: 3D Animation Pre-Production and Production Techniques

    Overview:

    The provided text details a series of lectures or tutorials on 3D animation, covering pre-production processes (module 2) such as environment design, voice recording/editing, and storyboarding, and delving into production techniques (modules 3 & 4) with a focus on character creation and prop/environment creation within Character Creator 4, ZBrush, and Blender. The overall goal is to equip individuals with the skills to develop 3D animations, even if they have limited resources or drawing abilities.

    I. Pre-Production (Module 2): Environment Design

    • Theme: Creating reference images for backgrounds and environments.
    • Key Ideas:The instructor demonstrates how to source reference images from websites like FreePik.
    • Emphasis is placed on adapting these references to the specific needs of a script.
    • Alternative: create the environment reference from scratch using basic shapes in Adobe Photoshop. This involves using the rectangle and pen tools to construct elements like whiteboards, tables, and walls. “What you simply need to do is click here second one you have to use the shape tool and Second, use the pen tool here okay.”
    • The Pen Tool is important for creating custom shapes. “It is necessary to create a custom shape somewhere You need to create a custom shape for.”
    • The instructor distinguishes between 2D and 3D animation workflows, noting that 3D requires designing each element (table, whiteboard, wall) separately.

    II. Pre-Production (Module 2): Voice Recording and Audio Editing

    • Theme: Generating and refining voiceovers, particularly for child or teen characters.
    • Key Ideas:The instructor identifies a common problem: adult voice actors struggle to convincingly portray children.
    • Solution: Use a combination of normal voice recording (using a microphone like Boya M1, mentioned as affordable and effective) and AI-powered voice modification. “I have to record the guys dialogues you sowed m1 is a mic, it is a very powerful mic and It is also within a very reasonable price.”
    • The website 11 Labs is recommended for converting adult voices to sound like children or teenagers. “The website is 11 l you guys can tell me about it You must have heard that you should not worry In this you will get 10000 credits which are They are available for free, okay.”
    • Audio editing software (Adobe Audition) is used for noise reduction, normalization, and enhancement. The tutorial details specific effects and settings for improving audio quality.

    III. Pre-Production (Module 2): Storyboarding

    • Theme: Structuring the animation’s narrative flow.
    • Key Ideas:The instructor outlines prerequisites: script, character designs, environment designs, and recorded dialogue.
    • Storyboards can be created using various software (e.g., Canva, Adobe Illustrator), but the tutorial focuses on a method within Photoshop.
    • A template is created using rectangles to represent scenes, descriptions, and durations.
    • Characters and environment references are imported into the template.
    • Dialogue references are added to link specific audio recordings to the corresponding scenes. “The dialogue that Ali had recorded What was the number one dialogue of Like Ali? dialogues like we gave our numbers and told our If you remember, did you save the dialogues? We saved our dialogues by giving numbers.”
    • The instructor contrasts this “shortcut” method of storyboarding (using existing assets) with a more professional approach involving sketching and drawing skills.

    IV. Production (Module 3): Character Creation

    • Theme: Creating and sculpting characters using Character Creator 4 (CC4) and ZBrush.
    • Key Ideas:CC4 and ZBrush are presented as complementary tools for character design. The plugin Headshot is useful for creating faces. “In this module three we will discuss the characters You will learn to design cartoon and Both types of realistic and complete characters that have characters Rigging is also included and in addition Characters’ outfits and accessories we will work on etc as well.”
    • The tutorial explains the CC4 interface and content management.
    • A key technique is using a reference image to generate a base character in CC4 using the Headshot plugin. The instructor stresses selecting the appropriate body and skin type (male/female, baby, clean/soft/old).
    • Morphs (shape adjustments) in CC4 can be used to refine the character’s features, but ZBrush is recommended for more detailed sculpting.
    • The importance of posing the character in a “T-pose” before exporting to ZBrush is highlighted.
    • ZBrush is used for sculpting and further customizing the character’s features and body shape. The “Move” brush is specifically mentioned for creating a stylized, cartoonish look.
    • ZBrush’s UI and navigation is explained and the tool’s “divide” function is mentioned in terms of smoothing out polygons.

    V. Production (Module 3): Custom Accessories & Outfits

    • Theme: Designing and implementing custom accessories and outfits for characters.
    • Key Ideas:ZBrush is again used for creating the 3D models.
    • The instructor demonstrates how to add a new mesh (e.g., a ring/necklace) to the character in ZBrush. They also show the difference between using w to get the move tool versus using the rings move tool, and how they had to select the character in order to move the ring tool correctly.
    • The importance of properly aligning and scaling the accessory to the character’s body is emphasized.
    • Extrude tool was used on the vertices to create a 3D shape.
    • The shirt is selected in CC4 and the PBR texture is applied.
    • Skin deformation is important, making sure the clothing merges properly with the character.
    • Emphasis is also placed on where to find outfits and meshes and clothing items to drag and drop onto the character.

    VI. Production (Module 3): Materials and Textures

    • Theme: Enhancing visual realism and style through materials and textures.
    • Key Ideas:The instructor reviews how to change a character’s texture and hair.
    • The tutorial promotes using PBR Textures website for details on the clothing fabric.
    • Drag and drop the textures into the base color on CC4.
    • Deforming the skin on the clothing to merge properly with the character, however the teacher in this case did not have to do this.

    VII. Production (Module 4): Prop and Environment Creation in Blender

    • Theme: Creating and modifying props and environments.
    • Key Ideas:Emphasizes the importance of skilled developer.
    • Blender’s user interface explained.
    • Creating a plane for the ground.
    • Constructing the scene uses raw materials.
    • The need to know the dimensions are of what you are creating, such as a house, to make sure it is accurate.
    • Focus on edit mode, faces, edges, and vertices when creating the shape. Subdividing is mentioned to change the shape.
    • The meaning of Extrude and extracting is described.
    • Creating a gate for a house.

    Overall Themes:

    • Practicality and Accessibility: The lectures aim to provide solutions for animators with varying skill levels and budgets, offering alternatives to complex drawing or expensive resources.
    • Integration of Tools: The tutorials emphasize a workflow that combines the strengths of different software (Photoshop, CC4, ZBrush, Blender) to achieve specific goals.
    • Step-by-Step Guidance: The instructor provides detailed, step-by-step instructions and troubleshooting tips for common challenges.

    This document should provide a comprehensive overview of the key concepts covered in the source excerpts. Remember to consult the original sources for more detailed instructions and visuals.

    Animation Storyboarding and Workflow FAQs

    Storyboarding & Animation Workflow FAQs

    1. How do I remove unwanted elements from an image before using it in my animation?

    Use an image editing tool like Photoshop. Select the eraser tool, adjust its size for precision, and carefully erase the unwanted areas. Ensure all extra elements are completely removed for a clean, transparent image. Save in PNG format to preserve transparency.

    2. What file format should I use to save my transparent character images?

    Always save character images with transparent backgrounds in PNG format. This format preserves the transparency, ensuring your characters integrate seamlessly into any environment without a visible background.

    3. How can I find suitable environment references for my animation projects?

    Websites like FreePik offer a variety of vector images that can be used as environment references. Search for specific locations (e.g., “classroom,” “library”) and filter results to find vectors that match your script’s requirements. Download these resources to use as guides for creating your animation’s setting.

    4. How can I create custom environment references if I can’t find suitable pre-made images?

    Use a tool like Adobe Photoshop. Utilize the rectangle and pen tools to draw basic shapes for walls, tables, and other elements. Customize the colors and arrangements to create a unique environment reference tailored to your animation’s needs. This is especially helpful if you need a very specific background.

    5. How can I alter my voice to sound like a child or teenager for animation projects?

    Use software like ElevenLabs to convert your normal voice into a child’s or teenager’s voice. You can upload your audio and select a voice profile that matches the desired character. The software will modify your voice, saving you the need to hire a voice actor and still enhancing audio quality.

    6. How do I clean up audio recordings for animation?

    Software like Adobe Audition is great for audio editing. Remove background noise using noise reduction tools, normalize the audio to equalize volume levels, and enhance the sound with filters and equalizers. Clear audio recordings are essential for creating a high-quality animation.

    7. What elements are required when setting up a storyboard for an animation?

    To create a storyboard, you need:

    • A script: This will provide the basis for all of your scenes.
    • Character references: These will help you keep your characters looking consistent.
    • Environment references: You will use these as a template for each scene.
    • Dialogues: You need to have voice recordings to put in the video, these are needed to make the scene make sense.

    8. How can character creator be used in animation to customize character designs?

    Character Creator 4 allows you to customize characters using morphs and plugins. Alter facial features, body proportions, and overall appearance to match your character’s design. Additionally, you can customize clothing. You can then export to other 3D modeling applications for texturing.

    Animation Tools, Software, and Production Pipeline

    Various animation tools and software can be used to create animations, each with its own unique features and capabilities. Here’s an overview of some of the animation tools mentioned in the sources:

    • Blender: Blender is a powerful, free, and open-source tool suitable for both beginners and professionals. It can be used for basic modeling and environment design.
    • Cinema 4D: This software is great for creating realistic and cartoon-style characters.
    • Character Creator: In Character Creator, characters are created and designed, and then brought into iClone for animation. A Headshot plugin is used to design a base character, and after creating the character, morphs are used. Sculpting can be done in ZBrush.
    • iClone: iClone is animation software where you can create various animations on characters, work in depth, do lip-syncing, frame by frame animations, and final rendering. You can animate all kinds of characters and easily apply animation presets.
    • ZBrush: ZBrush is helpful for adding detail and realism to characters. It is used for sculpting and modeling.
    • Adobe Audition: This software is used to enhance the quality of recorded audio. Noise is removed from the background. The dialogues or voice-overs are applied to the characters.
    • Video Editing Software (e.g., Filmora, CapCut): These are used to merge scenes, design sounds, and mix music, sound effects, and dialogues.

    The animation pipeline generally involves the following stages:

    1. Pre-production: This includes concept development, idea generation, script writing, storyboarding, and voice casting.
    2. Production: This includes making 3D models, creating props and environments, texturing, rigging, layout, camera angles, animation, scene creation, and rendering.
    3. Post-production: This includes compositing, visual effects, audio editing, sound design, music, and final output.

    Animation Character Creation: A Comprehensive Guide

    Character creation is a key aspect of animation, involving multiple stages and tools. Here’s an overview of character creation, drawing from the provided sources:

    • Software and Tools:
    • Character Creator: This software is used for character creation and design.
    • iClone: After designing characters in Character Creator, they are brought into iClone for animation.
    • ZBrush: This tool is used for adding detail and realism to characters through sculpting and modeling.
    • Headshot Plugin: The Headshot plugin for Character Creator is used to design base characters.
    • Blender: Can be used for character creation.
    • Character Design Process:
    • Designing and Rigging: Characters are designed and rigged. Rigging involves placing bones inside the character to give it movement.
    • Types of Characters: There are human characters, animal characters, and toon characters. Human characters can be realistic or cartoon-like.
    • Creating Realistic and Cartoon Characters:
    • Realistic Characters: These are easier to make compared to cartoon characters.
    • Cartoon Characters: Cartoon character creation may involve using the move tool and other brushes in ZBrush to adjust features like the eyes, nose, and face.
    • Pre-Production:
    • Concept Development: This involves developing the concept and generating ideas.
    • Script Writing: The script defines characters, dialogues, actions, and scenes.
    • Storyboarding: Characters are drawn and illustrated in 2D to create them in 3D later.
    • Character Designing: Involves references for characters.
    • Production:
    • 3D Modeling: Making 3D models of the characters.
    • Texturing: Applying textures and materials to the characters.
    • Rigging: Rigging the characters for animation.
    • Character Detailing in ZBrush:
    • Sculpting: ZBrush is used to sculpt and add details to the character.
    • Mesh Detailing: The geometry is divided to smooth out the polygons for detailed work.
    • Brush Tools: Tools like the move brush and standard brush are used to modify the character’s features.
    • Accessories and Outfits:
    • Designing Accessories: Accessories such as rings or lockets can be added using tools within ZBrush.
    • Creating Outfits: Outfits can be extracted from a character mesh and customized.
    • Applying Textures: Textures can be applied to clothing and accessories using PBR textures.
    • Animation:
    • Frame-by-Frame Animation: Animation is done frame by frame.
    • Animation Presets: Readymade animation presets can be applied to characters.
    • Additional Considerations:
    • References: Using references for character design.
    • AI Tools: AI image generators like Free Pic can be used to create character sketches based on client instructions.
    • Skin Weights: Skin weights are adjusted to ensure proper deformation.
    • Morphs: Morphs are used to refine character features.
    • 3D Formats: FBX and OBJ are common 3D formats for characters.

    Animation Software Tutorials and Guidance

    The sources provide guidance and tutorials for various software used in animation, including character creation, environment design, audio editing, and more. Here’s a breakdown of the tutorials and guidance available for different software:

    • Character Creator 4: The source material includes a “getting started” guide that introduces the Character Creator 4 interface and tools. There are tips for designing a base character. The sources recommends having the zip file available for any new plugin or addon that needs to be installed.
    • ZBrush: The source material contains a tutorial on sculpting characters in ZBrush. It emphasizes the importance of understanding the software interface and provides guidance on using shortcut keys.
    • Blender: The source includes an introduction to Blender, covering its interface, tools, and basic modeling techniques. The sources details how to rotate the interface. Tutorials are available for basic modeling techniques.
    • Adobe Audition: The source provides a tutorial on voice recording and audio editing using Adobe Audition. It explains how to record dialogues, enhance audio quality, remove background noise, and apply audio to characters.

    In addition to software-specific tutorials, the source material offers guidance on the animation pipeline, idea generation, storyboarding, and other aspects of the animation process.

    3D Modeling with Blender and ZBrush Techniques

    3D modeling is a crucial aspect of animation, involving the creation of three-dimensional representations of objects and characters. The sources discuss various tools and techniques for 3D modeling, especially within Blender and ZBrush.

    Here’s a breakdown of 3D modeling based on the provided sources:

    • Software and Tools:
    • Blender: Blender is used for 3D animation and modeling. It provides tools for basic modeling, environment design, and creating props. The sources note that 3D animation developers use Blender.
    • ZBrush: ZBrush is a tool for sculpting and adding detail to characters. It is used for detailed modeling and adding realism to characters. ZBrush is used in conjunction with Character Creator for creating cartoon characters from realistic base characters.
    • Modeling Techniques in Blender:
    • Basic Modeling: This involves using primitive shapes (meshes) like cubes, planes, circles, and cylinders to construct 3D objects.
    • Editing Mode: To modify a mesh, you must enter edit mode, which allows manipulation of vertices, edges, and faces.
    • Subdividing: Dividing a mesh into smaller sections for finer control and detail. Subdividing is needed when customization is required.
    • Extruding: Extending faces to create more complex shapes. The Extrude tool increases the shape or size of an object.
    • Scaling, Rotating, and Moving: Adjusting the size, orientation, and position of objects in 3D space.
    • Character Modeling:
    • Base Character: Character Creator and its Headshot plugin are used to design base characters.
    • Sculpting in ZBrush: ZBrush is used to sculpt and refine character details. This can be done after creating a base in Character Creator. The sources discuss using the move tool and other brushes in ZBrush to adjust features like the eyes, nose, and face to create cartoon characters.
    • Custom Accessories and Outfits: These can be designed in ZBrush to fit the character.
    • Environment Design
    • Environment Design: The sources mention using Blender for environment design.
    • Props: indicate that props can be made inside Blender
    • General Concepts:
    • 3D Space: 3D modeling operates in a three-dimensional space with up, down, left, right, forward, and backward directions.
    • Raw Materials: Meshes are raw materials used for construction in 3D.
    • Grid Lines: Grid lines help align objects and characters to the ground plane.
    • Workflow:
    • Concept and Reference: Before modeling, it’s helpful to have a concept and references.
    • Iterative Process: Modeling often involves iterative steps of shaping, refining, and detailing.
    • File Formats:
    • 3D Formats: Common 3D file formats include FBX and OBJ.

    Comprehensive Animation Course: From Basics to Advanced Techniques

    The animation course being described is designed to take individuals from the basics to advanced techniques in animation. Here’s an overview of what the course introduction entails, based on information from the sources:

    • Course Overview: The course aims to explore animation tools and techniques. It starts from the very basics and progresses to an advanced level, covering everything from A to G. The course is structured as a complete story and is considered better than many advanced or paid courses.
    • Learning Objectives: The course will cover what needs to be learned and how to perform in the final animation. It details the quality of animation expected.
    • Character Creation:
    • The course teaches how to create various types of characters, including animal, human, and toon characters.
    • It covers creating both realistic and cartoon characters.
    • It also includes designing outfits and accessories for characters.
    • Software Tools:
    • The course provides an overview of the software tools used in the animation process.
    • The primary software used includes Character Creator, iClone, ZBrush, Blender, Adobe Audition, and video editing software.
    • Animation Pipeline:
    • The course will cover the animation pipeline, including pre-production, production, and post-production stages.
    • Pre-production: This includes concept development, idea generation, script writing, storyboarding, and voice casting.
    • Production: This includes 3D modeling, creating props and environments, texturing, rigging, layout, camera angles, animation, scene creation, and rendering.
    • Post-production: This includes compositing, visual effects, audio editing, sound design, music, and final output.
    • Idea Generation:
    • The course includes guidance on creating unique and interesting animation stories.
    • It teaches how to find inspiration, free imagination, create characters and plots, structure stories, and finalize them through drafts.
    • Script Writing:
    • The course emphasizes the importance of writing a good script.
    • It introduces using AI tools like Chat GPT to assist with script writing, including defining characters, dialogues, scenes, and situations.
    • Character Designing: The course includes character designing, and how to find references for characters. It teaches how to use AI image generators to create character sketches.
    • Environment Designing: The course also touches on environment designing.
    • Voice Recording and Audio Editing: The course includes how to record and edit audio, customize audio using AI, and generate dialogues.
    • Storyboarding: The course will also cover storyboarding.
    • Additional Resources: The course may provide additional resources such as SFX packs. There may also be packages available that include characters, environments, and other assets to help accelerate the animation creation process.
    Master Animation Course For Beginners in Hindi CG Opinions

    The Original Text

    I welcome all of you to such a journey which will take you into a new world of animation Today we will explore those tools and techniques which are a complete Universe [music] [music] is the car I’m sitting in right now I am an existent in real life it doesn’t even do that this is a 3d car with a I put myself in place and did this I it is Blender is a powerful tool that even beginners can use A treasure for both professionals and professionals not less than and this is cinema 4d which [music] As is clear from its name, this is This software is realistic and cartoon Great for creating characters And it is a unique software, in this you can Draw realistic cartoons with ease Characters in Disney style You can create whatever you imagine You can create the same character but remember that this software is just and only to create human characters or Hideo characters or toon animals The most ideal for creating characters there is software this software i call it iclone I also call him brother because there is only one Both the softwares of the company are same one is to design the crack and the other to do the animation means that In the character creator we create characters design and then bring it to Iclone We do animation of those characters only end movements and here’s yours and mine The most favorite animation software whose The name of this animation software is Iclone Inside you can create lots of animations on character He can work in more depth and detail You can do that too very easily With this one software inside you guys can do everything Can animate all kinds of characters You can do lip syncing frame by frame Can do animations and even final render can and its name is z bush g bush Add detail and realism to your characters very helpful in giving This happens with the help of just this one tool Very focused on the verticals of your characters can work in greater depth action is a kind of skill which needs to be learned It requires your complete focus so I want you guys to complete it Completely focus on yourself Watch all the lectures by Evolve Watch this complete video carefully This complete video is a complete story in itself. This is a course, it starts from the very basics And I will go till the end, from A to G I will take you I will teach animation in this and I am sure I say that these big animations There are advanced courses or paid courses This course is a thousand times better than those courses which I am providing you for free I am here so you guys have shared this video somewhere I don’t want to skip it and what I am talking about I need you, whatever you give me What I want is that you guys like my channel Subscribe as much love as you can Give that away and share the video with your friends Lazily share guys our first module This is the first lecture of which is named Introduction to the Course Within this course What do you have to learn, what do you have to learn You will get to learn and how you will perform in the final What quality of animation is this? You will find all these things in detail So guys first of all I will define it inside number I’ll teach you how you’ve how to create characters two characters There are many types of animal characters and there are human characters and Apart from this there is another type also those toon characters are characters meaning they get mixed up animal and Now the human characters in this which we The software you will use Using softwares we can do animal and Both types of human characters Basically we will learn to create characters What is needed the most is human characters have to be created because The animal characters are what we Those of any species are free You get it inside and you will get this course All the animal characters inside They will get together now, humans There are two types of characters the first one is realistic and the second one Cartoons are realistic characters It is very easy to make, it is very easy Compared to cartoon characters we are we will use the method with that method Creating cartoon and realistic characters You don’t have to work very hard for it, and The quality will also be awesome, so its how will we design the cuts inside them How to create accessories for outfits and where to buy You will get likes from dressing up a character do we have to wear shalwar kameez or else we whether to wear pant shirt or any kind The second outfit could be any If we have to dress the character then these are the outfits Where do we get the end accessories from and How we designed the character ourselves We have to do all this in this course We will learn inside when we design characters will design a character well It has been done and its designing is complete if it is gone then the next step comes after that he knows about rigging but this course The software we will use inside is a to design the character inside We just have to design the character or we’ll have to sculpt it No need to rig the character Rigging means that the character We have to place a bonus inside so that we to be able to give it movement, it is exactly like that Like there is a character in real life for Example is yourself, if you have a b body If there is no bonus inside then you can harm your body If you cannot give movement then the characters It is very important to place the bonus inside and the process of rigging that takes place It is very time consuming so You will get complete rigging automatically inside it you will get it so what will happen that your hard work It will be saved and your time will also be saved, so guys Designing and Rigging a Character The next stage after that is character Frame by frame animation of characters Animation has to be done, it has to be paused so that we can use it in our script If we could act accordingly then we would have done the character The animation that needs to be done is done frame by frame We put in a lot of effort into the animation it has to be done but for the character I have also made one for you regarding animation It has made it easy for you to read the characters inside it You will not have to bother to post You will get readymade presets of animation Simply find the preset you want and it has to be applied on the character After that comes the turn of the character’s lips about syncing so in this course I will tell you The easiest and best way to lip sync I will tell you the method, so what you need to do is Simply access your recording has to be done and the recording You have to bring your laptop or PC inside and then you put that on top of the character You have to apply the audio and your The characters pick up the waves of that audio and he will start speaking very smoothly and If you get a realistic feel of the character Frame by frame animation before animation There is a step before this as well which is very What is important is the environment then you can design the character’s animation Environment design first and then later You can do it and later prepare for that environment You can bring your character inside but Here it would be more reasonable that first You design the environment Small models come as props inside objects come or else its In addition, visuals also come when If you design the environment then After that, adapt your character to that environment. you have to bring it inside and after that you If you want to animate your character then To complete the character’s animation After that you have to render it. Create each scene and render it And when all your scenes are complete if we go then we will learn that we have How to finally bring those scenes and merge them Inside your video editing software And how did we design the sounds there? or how to use sfx Then there’s the music sound effects and the dialogues you have or whatever is behind it There is a voice over in the background How did you mix up all three things? All these things have to be done, we will tell you in detail You will learn inside and finally save your video After export, we provide the client with how to provide it or make it social How to use it across media platforms I want you to publish all this Guys, I will teach you our module one in detail This is the second lecture of and the name of this lecture is Here is an overview of the software tools used We will talk about those tools in this lecture and software which is included in this complete course inside we are going to use this So guys to make the complete animation First of all we will use religion comes from the character creator and its There is a plugin Headshot Plugin Headshot Plugin what basically works is that inside it We have to design the character as a base The base character has to be made the base After creating the character we started working on the morphs. Needs to do a bit of tinkering with Meaning the body parts of the character they have to adjust a little bit After that again the brush is used which we have Create a character inside the Character Creator After that it has to be taken inside the brush and you have to do sculpting there, which This is a sculpin process, then we When we need a cartoon character so firstly we have to design a You will create a realistic character in any of your Regarding photos, we do not share any of our photos insert the headshot inside the plugin and then What will happen next is that the Headshot plugin will give us that A character realistic to the photo he will create the character and provide it when he Once the character is ours then we we will take it inside the j brush which is basically for sculpin and Sculpin is used for modeling It is a very famous software for Android and quite People in the industry are more professional If we use this then we bring it inside it You will sculpt your base character to convert into cartoon character so when we draw our character inside the brush Once the sculpin is completed then we The character creator will take him back and going inside we give him clothes When our character is worn by the guy Our character will complete our appearance Once it is ready, then we will will export as an avatar then after that We’ll take him inside the Iclone A very easy Iclone animation There is software in which it is very easy to With this, quite professional animation is created. We will complete our work by coming here Animation work can also be done using key frame animation. and also animation presets If you can apply then I recommend you I would suggest you apply animation presets But I can help you in making key frame animation I will also tell you the method so that if you get any Custom animation presets If you don’t find accord then your frame animation After that post that character and finalize it. give its animation a succinct shape Here inside the icon, just click on the character here we will animate the environment We will not design the environment To do this we will use a blender I’ll show you basic modeling inside Blender. How to do it and reach the advanced level How to use modeling tools I will tell you this in a very easy method Manage your objects inside the FPA by Props need to be imported and brought inside your iclone and there By arranging small things, a complete Anyway, we will have to give it a shape of environment We also manage our environment inside Iclone you can make it but for example you have If you want to use a ready-made environment So that ready-made environment is called Iclone. bring it inside and use it there and one Giving it a final look with final lighting It is easier but in small size Designing the props is pretty much it it is difficult and we just need the character More tools for animation here If we get to see it, we will use it of blender so if we need a custom thing You have to make it as per your wish and bring it with you For example, regarding the environment, we have a Do you want to bring a table or choose one of your choice? Do you want to bring a chair or a room of your choice If you want to design living room or kitchen then We will design and bring our own icons by bringing it in and here we are bringing our character Render your scene by animating the If you give then we will go, after that our final A final editing software will be available in inside this we will use fim or any also other video editing software You can use it but I will give you a cap inside it I will provide both cut and fire in this Friends, inside the complete course here We have one software left whose name is Adobe Audition Basics Inside Adobe Audition What will happen if we use our mobile phone You will have to record your audio or dialogue would have recorded that We will take the dialogue inside Adobe Audition We will come and edit our audio there. have to enhance its quality There will be some noise in the background whatever will happen will have to be finished and After that again the same dialogues or voice over then if it is a voice over then it We need to apply it to the characters We won’t need simply final editing inside a layer within the software You will have to add it but if those are dialogues with whom the characters have to lip sync then we have to find those clones inside the icon Dialogues will have to be taken turn by turn And you will have to apply it on the characters So how will this all happen, I will give you details I will try to explain to our This is the third lecture of module one and this Lectures are very important Because this is where you can start creating animations. you will start you will start because behind All the things that I told you All things from the course overview Was it related or related to software But now from here I will tell you those things I will tell you something related to our animation How do we start the animation? This is basically where we start learning if you do then the name of this lecture is Understanding the Animation Pipeline Inside, we will talk about three things first Pre production on number two On production and post number three So Guy Prey on the Production Stages what happens inside the production that its Inside we have to develop the concept We have to generate ideas inside it. You have to bring an idea into your mind This is a unique idea to tell your story and then when inside our mind If a unique idea is developed then we The script has to be written now What are the things in script writing Dialogues are included in it There are actions and scenes included There is a description of the scene What are the things inside the description It happens here in your details You have to define that you are number one This scene will come at second place, this scene In the first scene you will see so many characters I have to show so many probems I have to show so many You have to show visuals and so many dialogues there are all these things after that Here comes the turn of story boarding You have to draw your own characters Illustrate has to be done in 2D so that you can create them in 3d later When you illustrate in 2D your Meaning of characters and your environment that after your scenes then you Share your story board with your team or with your You have to get approval from the client when your The client or your team can send your story board If you approve it then after that the story According to the board you can create your characters the scenes and the visuals that you have When it comes to final designing then guys when you People design their own characters If you create the environment then after that The thing you need to do is number three Voice casting will have to end What’s inside voice casting of recordings There are guys in it who are voice actors or the voice artists who They say that you have to wait for them They have to choose, you have to see this that your story inside your story on the board or inside your script that what are the characters, what is their age and what are their Also what is their gender if they are female If there are characters then they are for female actors Where do you get your voice artist from? There are two methods for this, the first method is this It happens that you are a voice actor voice Hire the artist you have for animation or you can use artificial From Intelligence to AI in your dialogues which If you want to get text to speech done then give me this Which method suits you better yes you can do that but I will tell you about it I will tell you inside how you recorded the audio. How to edit what you want to record and the finale is your dialogues How to apply on characters And I will also tell you that How did you get AI to customize your Audis to suit your needs? to generate the dialogues and for you Which are the most useful AI tools? you can then when your pre production The concept will be clear, it will be completed Ideas will be generated and stories will be created Your board will be complete, your voice will be If you have done the casting then after that you If you want to move towards production then after that Then what you have to do is to make your characters Making 3d models for making props you have to create a end environment when you are in 3d You can make characters and props If you create the environment then after that you textures on top of those environments or You have to apply the materials They have to give the colors and then after that Then comes the rigging, you can rigg the cactus too you can do it and apart from that whatever props you have you can rig them too if you I want to show you motion graphics but I you already defined that we The need to rig your characters If it doesn’t happen then it will come again after that When it comes to animation in production In this we have first number layout Now we have to see what is inside the layout Planning happens here, camera angles of her movements and scenes The next frame is for composition frame animation of the animation which is here for objects and characters I have told you about the characters. was that we were using animation presets but how to place your objects To animate it we need to use key frame We will use animation of objects Where do we need animation? It may help you in future by itself You will understand, then the turn comes for the scene Inside the scene montage of the montage we have You have to combine your characters Props can be obtained from the environment or All things related to visuals Your small objects are done Inside your scene setup and its creation We have used as many small elements as possible all those things that I had done happened We combined them all in one scene You have to show it and then your turn comes again There comes two renderings inside the rendering things are most important Lighting comes first if If you do not know how to do good lighting then Then you can make a nice render In this I will tell you in detail that How to do good lighting And then comes the turn of rendering You have placed your 3d models inside 2d images Effects inside frame by frame detail After applying it, it has to be rendered Hai To Guy Pre Production And Production So we have talked about it in detail Now comes the turn of post production Number one in post production But the thing is compositing and visual Effects Compositing and Visual Effects So what happens in compositing is that Inside this we have to combine our Backgrounds are separated from layers with effects Merging our text layers and we This happens to all the scenes which We rendered it using animation software and whatever post production was done That is our final editing work Inside video editing software If it happens then it’s the turn of the guy after compositing When it comes to visual effects we call it in short Inside the case it says VF and here we have to add special effects and When I apply this to you practically If I show you, you will understand it yourself Now it is the turn of audio editing The first number seen here is sound designing is called sound designing What happens inside is that your animation To enhance you have used sound effects You have to supply likes if you are any When the character is running then the running sound The sound that comes from running is an effect You have to apply that if your character If you are simply walking then by walking you will become real The sound of footsteps in life or Whatever sound there is, you have made that sound your own. of your frames inside the animation An accord has to be set or a scene It’s raining or snowing inside or if gusts of wind are blowing You have done everything according to that thing Adjust your sound according to the situation Effects that apply SFX If so, I will give you the complete SFX Pack is also provided free with this course I will do it now its your turn for the music Music needs to be played in the background without music your animation or your The video is lifeless without the music Your animations with or without music Or whatever you believe in your videos They change totally, then their turn comes next There is a way to mix the audio in which You have to balance the dialogues According to sound effects and music Or the music needs to be balanced According to your dialogues that if somewhere But during your animation a character he started speaking he started speaking From where the audio waves of his speaking Your music will start from there audio waves that are slightly decreased what will happen is that your music Slow down a bit and what you These are the dialogues that you can hear clearly And now finally let’s talk about the final what happens inside the output that we Create your animation in a specific way Export as per desired format The format you want to do is mostly mp4 format It is used for videos and we have mp4 I have to export it inside here Format alone doesn’t matter Hey guys there is a lot of quality control here Quality control matters Your things come first The ratio of the video depends on which one you have watched. Publishing your video on the platform Is youtube1 ba 9 ratio is separate for this Ratio is used in the same way then your facebooksignup.in ding your video You have to export and then Then what you have to do is to make your animation Distributor is within distribution What happens inside it, number one It is seen that what you have created is animation which animation is made what do you want to convey to the audience has anyone made an animation tutorial You have created a course, you are marketing that course If you want to do it then you just have to do that You have to choose the audience that will be in the animation are you interested or if you have any Create animation for a specific product If you have done this, then you have reached your audience with your Skills on how to deliver animation You should know this marketing skill or have you created a moral story and you can read that moral story [music] I will tell you all the things in detail Explain guys this is our module two whose The name is pre production and in it our The first lecture is idea generation and today we We are going to talk about idea generation only This video will help you how to Create unique and interesting animation stories can add unique and Creating interesting ideas is an important skill and Today I will tell you five important steps I will tell you, after knowing which you will become a good And you can generate your own unique idea This is the first step for stories Finding inspiration through books and Reading stories of different kinds Read stories like Science Fiction Fairy Tales and historical stories that will take you through new Movies and animations can provide ideas Watch various animations and movies and note what is special about them Learn from the world around you in your life whatever is happening as friends nature spending time together or attending a special event Looking at all this might give you ideas On the second number, free your imagination do what if means what would happen to you ask the question what would happen if animals can you talk to me about what would happen if the kids Magical powers mix up situations Do two or more different Mix up situations and see what happens For example, there is a story called a science fiction story. And if we add ferries to it So how would you feel friends, you are at number three Characters and plot of the story Munfarid and Create interesting characters that have their own should have a special feature such as a The cat who is a scientist, now let’s talk The plot of the story above the plot of the story It should be such that the viewers like it come to a magical forest or All your tasks inside a futuristic city All your characters are visible All the characters of one story According to the running order comes at number four the structure of the story, which includes a beginning, a middle And these three things are very good for you The story should have a clear structure Should be an interesting start should be full of problems and challenges There should be a middle and a beautiful ending There should be conflict and challenge in the story Add conflicts and challenges to attract viewers remains interested in number five Finalizing the story comes through drafts Write multiple drafts of the story and make them better and better when you Write drafts of the story and then Then take feedback from your friends or teachers Seek feedback so you can improve your story so that we can make it better and correct the mistakes in it whatever mistakes there may be, whatever shortcomings there may be You can improve them, remember the best Ideas are those that come from the heart let your imagination run free Gaining inspiration from various sources and create a story that will captivate viewers Our guys take us to the magical world This is the second lecture of module two which The name is script writing is a good First step to create animation You have to write a good script when Until you write the script, you will How will you define the characters in your mind When nothing is clear inside So you can give your animation a final shape. If you can’t give it then I have AI here A very powerful tool from whose name is chat gpt and about it You already know it in more detail It is not neat to tell but what is here The tricks that I’m going to tell you about helps you have a very very fun You can get the script written by A Chat GBT with proper dialogues and well This will also define your scenes It will define the situations in my mind Inside as we discussed in the first lecture In the first lecture of this module we talked about It was about idea generation so my mind I have a very unique idea and it The unique idea is that of a time traveling There should be a classroom where children study and those When you go into your school library and there he finds a book which that ours is related to time travel what kind of a thing is this picking up the imagination If the script writes it here, then I will promote it in detail here that you also make me the plot of the story ok After that the names of the characters are Also define two dialogues and write them along with it two and every thing that is a part of a story It is an important part of the script And on the basis of which we can make a good animation you can make it so I am going to promote it here If I give it I say that Me write a script Two Own So he wrote the script for the animation and now I stop here enter it here and because by mistake I went there and just now I wrote the prompt cut I didn’t have it, when I passed my intermediate first, then I I say that please this Script Easy Urdu to be in so that my Hindi students also be understood well and the characters define the name also And dialogues with Write down other situations too Also define the scenes with directions two more with in every Also mention the duration of the scene Two ok now let’s see what it does So Titled Time Travel Adventure Characters Ali, Sara and a teacher and a librarian have come, okay is scene one Classroom duration of which is 2 minutes The camera zooms in to a talking classroom students are chatting, some are reading and the the teacher is explaining a lesson about Historical Events Teacher and Children this is Those important historical events that We should always remember Ali Whispering to Sara Ali sparring in Sara’s ear What a boring topic it is Sara yes friend I wish we could see all this ourselves Scene Two School Library Duration Three 3 minutes the bell rings ok so so guys our I have this complete script now What you simply have to do here is You have to click on the copy which is there and Now you have added a new text here A file of the document has to be created and Just paste the script inside Now you can close GPT by clicking here. you can do it so now we need to know about this script You have to create your characters according to your own You have to create the environment and tell your story Now I have to make a board, not proper characters we will make it in complete 3d, we will just Ruffle will define your characters Accordingly, firstly we mean their sketches we will prepare it and according to them it is they will create those characters okay we will make references you can also get it generated from and the scenes are those scenes we Sleep with inspiring animation or AI Now if I briefly tell you So let me tell you what we need to do to According to the script, first we have to They have to design characters on numbers sketches have to be made so that they can be used as models later can we do it okay after that then we have a We have to create that environment for the environment as well we have to make sketches so that we can use those sketches According to that then give it a proper final shape can we show that there is a final Our final environment looks like this We will give them the proper model of blender inside okay but for now we have Characters for story board here We have to make sketches of the environment Make sketches and write your dialogues Later, the story was told according to the scenes We will define the scenes inside the board and Within the scenes, we have the duration and dialogues which yes I will write it down and also write the situation So guys we will give this module of ours to you The third lecture is called Characters Designing Now in this lecture we will discuss proper I will not design the characters in fact We can find references for the characters here we have to design it okay because we are Our time is in pre-production Module two is pre-production and I told you in detail that pre Inside the production we only Story boards to prepare your references Create a reference for the story board and story board We have to finalise it then when we make the story board we will finalise it after that We have to move towards our creation properly we have to design the environment and Props have to be made, then characters and in this way all these things are made into a will go with the sequence and if this if you go with the sequence then you will get a to create professional animations it’s a quality you’re preparing it’s okay They are coming to you in all their forms and stories boarding and this is what we call pre production When it is present inside then it is pre production what’s inside that during pre production All these lectures inside are our ideas generation script writing these two lectures so We already have our characters now designing is environment designing then If there is voice recording and audio editing then These five lectures are very important The story behind designing this thing okay to make the board so story Why is the board important? I I mentioned earlier that the story board is It is important because when we If changes have to be made then do it in the story board It is easy to make changes inside and if we When you have completed an animation After creating a complete animation, It is difficult to make changes so if our The client asks us to make changes so whatever we can put inside the story board changes will have to be made, they will do it because It is very easy to make changes in the story board It happens that we talk a lot here and there It has gone out so we need characters infact character design References to characters are to be made here So there are two ways, guys, one way is this It happens that you take any reference You can take any reference of any kind You have to take it and you can use that reference You can design your own characters that reference for you If you want to take reference for designing then I have told you the other methods. It is very easy, you will go to Pinterest simply go up and here any character that is You can take a reference for that, okay and What type of references do you need to take? If you want to make it yourself then what is its pose? You should be the only one for him The face of the characters is for you it matters more and for that You see this, this is your picture These two should be there for reference Whatever is on air, those shows should be there, it is natural okay these two should be visible and The characters have their own appearances Must be of very high quality So look, we have an example here as well. If it is lying then these are the reference images It is from them that we develop our character let’s design it if for example that We do not have any reference images It is not available and we can create the sketch ourselves want to do and then after that sketch According we design the character or If client provides us with a sketch How can we get what we want according to him? If you have to design a character from I’ll tell you the method for that too, but If we have to make a sketch ourselves We have to give our own promotion to our customers According to your requirements or your According to the client’s requirements so what we have to do is we have to do We have to visit free pic here AI image This is a generator, you just have to click on it it’s okay and whatever your client tells you Instructions are given same instructions You can make it a base and create the source here You have to give your prem, now see our what was the script that we generated There were four characters in it, Ali Give us all the teachers and librarians This character is the most important one Ali Sara is currently studying in this school what should be their characters 14 If they had A for 15 years then we would have called it Are K Create 14 years old Old Female Character drawing okay now after that then this is from us Here the style will ask what is your style what should we say our The style should be sketchy, okay, then color If he asks us what the colour should be If you give any sketch then it is clear That only this color will work for you which is black And it is white, okay this is your color If it works then after that we will see the camera angle If he is asking then we tell him that you are like this do that one Cyanamide You can keep studio lighting and structure Let it be by default and then You do not need to change the mode or size here You can pick whatever you like from here I’ll keep 69 as it is and the numbers are off Image You have only one count here right now You have to do it and simply click on create Give Now it is look at us she gave us a sketch of what she is If we create it and give it to us, then we have a The character is here, okay, now this is what we call it that created a 15 years old male character 15 Years Old male character and will do some addition here From our side, we have done this simple proverb the isn’t it but we’ll add here I am a male character Drawing Vid Desi The outfits are okay because our characters are he is desi who lives in india and pakistan are used and all other things are bye Leave it as default and click on create again Click on Okay, this also created a reference for us. after doing this he gave it to me anyway this drawing If I didn’t create a style, I just kept drawing but he made it a little more realistic If you did it then it doesn’t matter, we need a reference that’s all we need and now here we are for the rest characters he is one of our teachers and If there is a librarian then we say bye to him By default I will pick any character The passes which are already made are fine yes i will use them only then my These two characters are important for me but to add it inside story board So I will take their references with shame for that I go here I click and go to home if you If it is not generated by AI then simply click here You can also search be a librarian Draw cartoons or sketches or anything So here you have to see your Requirements According to me the free filters are I will put it here and there is a librarian The librarian can be either male or female It could be so or it could be a female as well, we are female the librarian takes it here okay so this is one character we have ok let’s download it Here But now let’s see the second character is the teacher okay this would be a librarian and the other We need a teacher on this number. So our teacher should be female and Come here and write your name in search filter cartoon so this is what we have this one The teacher has come, there is some ad so this is our I think it fits the story We will also download this on here Okay, so this is the reference we have here. When they got together, now the characters We have the reference and it is ready now Simply what you have to do is go to Adobe here This is the character I have right now, what should I do? I’m gonna unlock it here After that I go to select and then click on subject I will simply click, then ours the subject is the main subject this is the one I have been selected from here and I am in Mass Now I will click on the rest There are extra things left here If it is not removed then what can I do simply that we take from here we have there is a tool are tool first one pick it Do it and increase the size and like this You can find all the extras here delete it from there race it okay and this Rest this delete has been done ok So let’s do this as well, in the same way you did this Same is the case with this character too It is ok to do it When all your images are transparent So you have to go to Simply File here and then click on save as and Save the format on your computer from here You have to select PNG PNG If you select the format then it will show you Your picture is transparent then it will save without background so where You also want to keep this in your pictures I will create a new folder here hoon characters And save it here with the teacher’s name hmm simply and in the same way you did the rest You have also named the characters one by one Let’s save Know what your characters are Their references are ready, these are ready Now we have to place it inside the story board but before that what we have Environment references also need to be prepared So our next lecture is Depending on the environment, the method is the same It will happen but some things will add more energy to it It will happen, I will tell you the way that how do you want to do it then let’s go As we move on to the next lecture, Guys Our module to pre production and today Our lecture is environment designing Lecture four is called Environment Designing is like the previous lecture We will have to work on this too but Some things are a little different in their approach Majeed I will tell you the extra here So if you want to look at this carefully then our We can see what kind of environment it is This is our script tha classroom is okay and then school so this is the library so these are the two main scenes One of our classrooms and the other of the school library so what do we do here now is the first number of But you have to go to Free Pick and search here have to do it Classroom is the first way, this is the second way Then I tell you in the classroom you You searched and got what you want Looks good according to the requirements right you that classroom is here Take it from here and simply download it One be it went and after that we search here Are library here you can see the vectors which are Apply the filter above and now you have everything Vectors are here and this one is a reference It looks pretty good it’s ok as well This is also ok you should see which reference you get It looks so good and your video is Suitable as per your script There is also it and you will find it on second and third number When you create it in 3D then It will be very easy for you to make So this is what it has, these three qualities Well, it looks good here as well we can put the librarian up here But both our characters will come and this When we make it in 3D it will take a lot of time to make it. We are facing more difficulties because of this also If you are not present then you can also read it here You have to download these zip files infact which is being downloaded so both of these have come to us one this one here it is let’s cut it from here And we come to CG O Pinions We had the folder here called Characters Now let’s create a folder inside it are the environment the spelling of is wrong let’s say it’s okay no and let’s put it here now others place the other file here as well Now let’s see what you have to do at this place That is to right click on it and select xxx Simply click on it and the file Delete it and delete both of these as well. give it to me and delete this one above it as well just jpg jpg which is the file j pack it should stay with you okay it’s with you Now it is important for me to get the same slide with the other one do the same with the zip file, ok and this too Delete them now both of them have reached you so we got the characters as well and The reference of our environment is also we’ve come here okay so inside this our which was a lecture on environment designing Scuttle four is ok so environment If for example client of designing Tell you I didn’t like it okay so what you have to do is you have installed Adobe Adobe Photoshop has to come inside Photoshop to come inside of So then what we need to do here is we need to do a little drawing sketch you will have to make it, what is its method There is a tool for this called Pen Tool or this Pen Tool Use If it happens then we will use this tool We can hide the picture from here. let us give and inside this we have here But now you have to prepare your reference So how to make a reference, it is very easy What you simply need to do is click here second one you have to use the shape tool and Second, use the pen tool here okay we have to do it, we will use the pen tool ok to create custom shape Here we have the paint and here we have the shape tool so what we do now is that here Let’s grab a rectangle tool from here and But we create a white board okay here this is our white board Well it’s not a white board but a black one This is a board, now it has become a white board The white board is done right and now after that We here at If you want to bring a table then you have to make a table How to create a table simply again You have to take rectangle two from here okay here it is and press control t your from the keyboard and then scale it like this You can show its length here by pressing two more shift increase it from above ok and you can change its color You can do any of this from here we’ll make it black okay [music] And now what we have to do from here again take the rectangle tool And this is how we created a desk here. You have to do it, okay, so now copy this press lowlt and on this side here like this Tax Then press Alt again to select it do sorry press lt This is selected then alt and move it Let’s take this okay on this side and a little bit on this side then art Let’s press and move it up here like this So this is our table here It is ready now, the colour of this is We change the color of this one here we do it Here we go and this color is fine and this is our This means it has legs, not a table If you want to keep your legs behind then we do it like this that this thing which is ours, it is ours this rectangle in fact we call it If we bring it to the top then this is our front has come over okay this is our table This white board is gone and now what’s next here the wall will come we are here again Let’s take the Rectangle Tool from and place it here and below place it below And let’s color it here. From Like, we give any color friend and its There is no issue, it can be given in any colour I gave it that color, okay, so this We have a wall behind us here okay and This table has come, the teacher will be standing here and what is here next is here next to this Chairs etc. will arrive and the children will sit I am telling you the way that How did you create your own reference? I want to know how to make an illustration in Photoshop inside it’s okay and there’s this space left underneath it so what we do is again make a rectangle Let’s take two and here but and the color it has is we make it solid white and this one let’s place it at the bottom okay this is it Now see how easily we have done this method I have prepared a reference for the classroom okay if you want to make dice here then You can also make dice using the same method, so now What is the use of the Pen Tool here? Pen Tool What is the basic purpose of the Pen Tool? It is necessary to create a custom shape somewhere You need to create a custom shape for For example, if we want to make a pencil here, then How will we make a pencil Press Alt I want to make a pencil at this place so I To zoom in on this area, press Alt After that what do you do that the mouse there is a scroll wheel, turn it up okay scroll it up and now here But this is how we want to make a pencil now here if we want to make it further then We could have grabbed it a little and moved it like this hold down the left mouse button press the left mouse button and rotate it a little If we do this, then this circle is formed here And now simply click here like this and now this side is on this side okay and this we have a pencil here for this sorry now you right click on it and make Click on the selection and then OK to make the selection. After clicking on it you can do this from here do the polygonal lace tool and then you can go here Click on this plus icon Do the new layer, now this new layer has been added inside we have to fill it on fill then click here Let’s click on the color and click on the color After doing this, let’s see that the pencil What should the colour be, it can be any we look at the references Let’s search for pencil here. So we have this yellow pencil here. It is the color of a pencil and there are some lines inside it so here we are But only yellow color fills it inside I filled it with yellow color and pressed OK and then what do we do here now right click and select d And now let’s see what colour it is. what is the color of this thing guys which color is that, it is a little brown is light brown color so what we Let’s do this by selecting it here like this This area is right click on it and fill it of the same layer we get the color from here are these I took this color and after that we If you want to create lines here If you want to make anything we can make it here i will make an eraser like this by taking it out a little bit in place, that means makes a razor and then Let’s give it white color, let’s do it okay okay and the rest of it from the back if you If Majeed wants to do something, he can do it too okay this is the way to go here anyone can Create custom shapes to create custom things if it’s okay to create something then this The shape of a classroom is what we have here If you have given small things in PNG Even after bringing it here it is transparent inside You can add it inside and if you want 2d animation If you do it then do 2D animation So if you are a 2D animator then this lecture is for you A very wonderful and one for you I mean it is quite suitable, it is like this Munfarid is different from this, a bit 3D This is why it is a little different from animation that for 2d animation its actually same as it The background is what is used Whereas in 3D we first design it like this designing has to be done and then Prop props had to be designed in 3D is like designing this table separately You will need a separate white board and a separate wall And its floor is separate, so it’s ours This lecture has also been completed Environment Our next lecture will be on designing Again of voice recording and audio editing In the final we worked on story boarding we will do it and then our module two is be complete will go assalamu alaikum guys our module To pre production and our lecture today This lecture is voice recording and audio Editing today’s lecture is our cup of tea It is going to be interesting and very important the reason for this is that as many also most of the students have come at this time they are mostly adults and adults for what happens to the adult characters are their voices, they themselves are Whatever it is, they can generate that voice. Artist being and voice artist that is You can record voice on your mobile from phone or any recorded There are audios of kids which are for kids Dialogues are those dialogues that make us I and she are enough to generate us problems occur such as the one we have today This is the script we are working on Inside the one on which we want to create the animation The two adult characters are teacher and librarian but with this Joe Maine The characters are those two kids or you take the kids or else it is of little use Take that teen infact about teenagers If the characters are of teenagers or Audis for Kids Characters That Are What They Are It would have been very difficult to generate them So basically in today’s lecture This is the problem you have, I will solve it So in today’s lecture I am going to tell you Aa these two will solve your problem It will happen that if you are an adult character if you are raising voice for that then on that You don’t need to do any editing You just need to clear the audio a bit in that. will fall from behind aa the nice thing has to be removed and something further i.e. take its pitch a little or You will have to do all that editing Things Come Butt Joe Kids Characters or will they be teen characters How do I make the audios I will tell you the method, so first of all your your normal voice your normal voice even if she is an adult, she is in it for you Now I have to record all the dialogues. Let me tell you what kind of dialogues you read I have to record the guys dialogues you sowed m1 is a mic, it is a very powerful mic and It is also within a very reasonable price You can get it within 1500-1600 Pakistani Rupees. It comes from local market and also from India You will get this in India for Rs 8,900 If you get this mic then with this mic you Your dialogues in your mobile phone Now we have to record our script All the dialogues in the Most of the dialogues that are coming are from this Time comes first for these two or three characters There is one Ali and Sara and now see the most First of all, the character of the teacher and the children These are the important historical events that One should always remember that there is a good Another thing that is very important is that of females and mail which are voices and its also I I am going to tell you the solution, okay You get three solutions in one video you’re going to if you’re a male character He himself is a male artist and has created his own animations Want to make your own audio You don’t want to hire any voice artist in this If you want to start then what do you have to do I will tell you the way, you have your own Normal voice which is in your normal audio I want to record the voice from whom did you sow m1 There is a different microphone inside the mobile phone You have to record the dialogues After recording, you took them away it is inside my pc now look at these By the way, I had recorded this These are our normal records I had a mic lying with me, I did that with it You did not do well with my bones which started my There are five to six lectures You must have seen the audio of all the It’s very amazing and wonderful audio I recorded all the audio from Bo M1 itself. All those lectures are recorded by Boya M1 I have recorded it from okay so The m1 can also be connected to the PC It goes and you have a mobile inside it too It connects with the phone as well inside which its basically b m1 i am here I am showing you the screenshot here You can see that there are two options in this there is one called micro its sorry one The option is for this mobile phone okay and secondly you have option if the camera is ok then If you want to connect it with your PC then When you connect it to the PC you switch to the camera and if By connecting it to your mobile phone you can make voice calls. If you are recording then you have used your mobile phone it’s okay if you switch it to You have to do so much work, then after that You need to record your audio in which Also do it if you are doing it inside a mobile phone So after recording there you clicked here But save all those dialogues in your PC. put it separately in a different folder I have to keep it here as I have the first one There is a dialogue, I will play it for you hmm what a boring topic this is no it is such a boring topic right yes this is in this He is saying that this is such a boring topic I haven’t edited this audio yet I want to enhance the audio further tells him the way but if you record from soya ave If you do it then you will have to do most of the editing There will be no need to do the audio first it is very good from this then rest of it is All of these are dialogues of the teacher. Dialogue and children, these are the important ones Historical events that will always be remembered yes in this the teacher is saying that and Children, these are all important Historical events that we will always remember you should remember okay this is a dialogue so All these dialogues of mine have come, Ali ka ali two ali three ali four sara one sara two saara three and this is teacher’s okay now How did you convert them into male or female? want to do and teen teen characters or else How did you choose kid characters in kids? I have to convert them, okay first step what will we do inside so that we can get all these You will record it in your normal audio in your normal voice and then again Save them on your computer and After that we’ll go here again The website is 11 l you guys can tell me about it You must have heard that you should not worry In this you will get 10000 credits which are They are available for free, okay So see this is 10000 total credits are the ones that I have 9,535 left and that’s a lot of them right now I generate a lot of deos from these I can do at least 10 to 15 Animations can be made using free credits. okay you will go after that then whatever you are You can create new accounts by using multiple G mails You can do that by making it and as long as you have g Till the mails are over you will remain the same you will reach this level that your channel it will be monetized and after that whatever you are You can subscribe to this if you start If you want to take it, you can take it too You can afford it, no issue it’s not that expensive ok You have to pay this monthly and for this You would have received the credits yes by the way right now we have it here a There is an option, it is text to speech And this is speech to speech, so you have two ways You are here if you want to record your audio I don’t even want to afford a mic if you can’t do anything then you simply Paste your text here and After that you have to generate your audio Select the character from here and click OK All of these are characters below You have to play it and see and if you Much of the audio is recorded The professional way is to Record the audio and then use speech to come to speech come to speech After that you clicked on upload audio here After clicking on upload audio, do it You have to go inside the same folder where you have you’re keeping your dialogues okay so this There is a dialogue of a teacher, I am posting it here I select it and now I am here We have to select it because our teacher is female If you had looked inside the script We should consider the female character here. So now you have played them all one by one I want to see which female character it is Just trust yourself here or this one Correct this female character has arrived now you Simply click on generate speech And kids, this is that important historical Events that should always be remembered are amazing Friend, now look at this it automatically takes care of me The audio has also been enhanced How bad was my audio at that time? You must have heard, I will play it again and show you yes this was our actual dialogue see more Children, this is that important historical Watch the events, there are two things you will find in it You will be seeing that one of its The audio is very low but the quality is ok It is bad and this is the male voice on the second number But what has he done to us that we He also converted the male voice to female. and then enhanced its audio as well I did it and kids this is it important sorry ya historical Events are generated every minute Speech But kids this is what’s important Historical events that will always be remembered you should look at this okay now you have simply You just have to click on download and it’s done One of ours has been downloaded and it has arrived We would have done the dialogues for everyone in turn first And now you should delete it from here. again I have to go to upload audio and now pick up ali from here After taking Ali, now from here you have I want to take a character from a teen actor group Fifth note of musical scale I Fifth note of musical scale I’m good. I’ll get this for Sarah. Jessica’s gut will be good for Sarah re single row b ma government of the people by the people f the people yes this one is it This will work for this teen character It’s ok, Ali’s will do for the tractor So let us choose this one, click on it. and then click on generate speech Click Look, this is such a boring topic ok and download this as well Are so here it comes teacher let’s rename it teacher because he has changed his name It has come to us Ali one ali one okay it’s done and now after that Then delete it again and come here again Let’s go to Ali To Ok and generate speech let’s go to the library there’s some Interesting Mill will go and download this as well renaming it Are its ok with ali u then i will take it in turns I generate everything here and then Then I will continue the video further You have written all the other dialogues using the same method. do it ok This is such an old book it seems It has been there Time Travel Adventures yes friend i wish we could see All yes, anyway there is nothing new in the library the books have come Yes, there are some new books in the library anyway. have come [music] Look what is the name of this book So guys, all our dialogues are here But I am ready, I will close it I’ll give you here and now I’ll take you along These are our dialogues and we From here, press Control Shift select it and cut it and keep it in the same folder Here are our dialogues and now we know there’s a little bit of Adobe Audition If you want to do editing then I have Edible Edition The Edible Edition is available here 2021 I had also provided this If no one has it then let me know I will send you the link when you open it After that you click on close here have to do it after that You have to do it in such a way that whatever is your first This is a dialogue, I am here to just give you a I will edit the dialogue and show you the rest you can do yourself. If you want to edit everything then we are teacher’s guy it’s dialed let’s bring it here just simply drag and drop and It’s here now look here it is yours The whole timeline goes like this And here your frames are showing up. And this thing, this DB where it is written this is what has happened, this is its volume, if If you want to increase or decrease it then do it like this you can do it from the middle well if you have If you want to cut any part then simply click here Select it like this and press delete from your keyboard and this end one too Delete it and do it a little bit from the beginning too you can also delete it okay now if you The noise needs to be removed from the back If there is any noise in the background then how do you want to do it then you have to do it for that All you have to do is click on facts Noise Detection and Adaptive Noise Detection You have to click on it and by default all Leave the settings as is and apply it okay it’s done and then now you I have to normalize this and go to favorites And here by clicking on Normalize -1db If you want to give this, then normalize your audio it will equalize all the audio, okay If it makes it equal then its waves will be equal It has happened a little bit here and there where it is more its value is less I spoke a little loudly, there were some waves there If it is up then there is no issue now If you want to enhance it a little more if yes then how do you do that on your effects You have to go there and now you have clicked on filter and here go to equalizer and graphic Click on equalizer 10 bands And from here you set this one to 16 hertz. You have to take the one for 15 and 10 You have to keep the 8’s in the middle a little bit above five and with that you Just turn these three up a little bit I have to tease you a bit and now try playing it and Children, this is that important historical events that should always be remembered okay So how was our first audio that you heard and now its quality is so amazing and It has been perfected, now you just apply it You have to click on it and now you go to the file Go to & export and click on file and click on browse and wherever Do you want to put your dialogues there? you can keep amo lap teacher and you can do this Save it, OK and click on Yes Do it, and do the rest of your tasks in the same way You have to edit the dialogues as well Be it dialogues or your voice You have to do the voice over also using the same method If you are doing voice over then you have to edit it. and you don’t want to go to lab 11 So you simply have to record your From mic voya m1 or any normal from the mic and then here same method You have saved your audio in Adobe edition from here You have to edit these two to three settings which I just repeated to you After doing this your audio will be four times If it gets better then you can close it now If you can then our dialogues are ready here So this is our today’s one Lecture Voice Recording & Audio Editing Lecture five is complete, let’s go now we are story boarding On the other hand guys our module is for pre production And our lecture today is lecture six. Story boarding on top of story boarding So in today’s lecture we will talk about story

    board If you know the method of making it then you will To create a storyboard, you need to It is very important to have knowledge of these things and not only having knowledge of these things it is necessary but all of this Have the items and their assets ready with you You should have a script ready like this You should have the characters ready You should have your environment ready And you should have your dialogues Should they be ready, we have all of them Things are available, we have done voice recording We had designed the environment I mean prepare the reference of the environment had made references to the characters We already had the script and On the basis of this script we have created the characters had created and designed the environment designed the environment and Dialogues were recorded voice voice voice over or dialogues which are there we recorded it okay and these Now we will make a story board with these things take all these things and use all these things While doing this we will make a story board and today Our module two after lecture six of Our pre production will be finalized It will be finalized, after that we will start production He will start his work properly So let’s go for the story board for this. Basically you can use cava as well There are multiple softwares even that you can find You can also make your story in points You can also make the board in Adobe Illustrator Whatever software you know how to use Anything related to graphic designing If you know how to use software then You can complete your story board So I’m ado And within this, whatever our Our work will also be ad Our project is now complete here We have some photos here for the story board. Graphs to set up what graphs are How to set it, it is a very easy method Simply take a rectangle from here and draw it here like this and its color is solid white Now after that you have placed it here and take the rectangle tool and now this You have used the Rectangle tool here it looked like this here give it like this ok and its color is what you have keep it solid black and now what do you do That is to press Alt on your keyboard and move this side is like this hold this one a little bit turn it this way And you hold it and turn it to this side, this is equal should happen okay guys it’s done and now Similarly, all the rectangles here You can access all these by pressing shift select it and press control g So their group will be formed, now you have created this group To copy something press Alt and paste it Place it above like this: This group has been copied to you And by holding this group you will move downwards Sorry Click and select this group and You place it at the bottom now how will I I’m dragging it down to my There are three or four arrows on the top of the keyboard. There are keys that have arrows on them. You See there are four keys with arrows on them which keys are there So if you have ever played games GTA Y City etc then these three arrows are always in the background These four arrows are used by a vehicle It is okay to drive exactly those are the same arrows those are the same sorry keys arrows If that is okay then press the down arrow down If you turn it to the side then you are going downwards like this okay guys put this here place and what your group one should do is give it a little turn it up Take it and now group A, group one which is the copy one. you just turn it up a little bit and now you have Making another copy of Group C Lat Press and then do a little deck on top, then another The copy is made and you can see this copy below bring it here in this way now you have One thing to keep in mind is that amid all this The distance between them should be equal The distance between all should be equal So I think in the middle of all of this The distance is almost equal but the difference is huge there is no almost equal distance right now Now what you have to do is you have to do it like this Now here we have to take another rectangle tool And this is how you have to drag it here like this okay guys again here But this is how it grew bigger, a little control ji We do well the best way is that we Let’s copy this by pressing ‘L’ above. let’s move it to this side and then move it to here But let’s move it, okay, like this Let’s press make another copy and let’s move it this way okay so this Here we have it set up I have set my background and here But this is the place where we add our pics We will choose our background and our environment and your characters and then after that here But this is where we will write our script. I will write my dialogues and I will write them that this is scene one scene two and like this ok now let’s write scene one here Scene to scene th like this and now from here Take the Guy’s Horizontal Type Tool Text Type Tool And delete all this here which is bye The whole font was written by default I deleted it and now I write here are scene one and below Select the text tool on the side and select the text from here Select the layer and scroll down on the side it happened And here comes our scene one guys this is scene one came and now it’s like this We have to copy this using the same method By pressing L and dragging it to this side you can do it. Do it or grab it and pull it this way, here okay this is our scene here scene Two and similarly inside all the rest you have seen one scene two scene three and this one is a copy I did it, now I have to edit it, scene two If we have to write here then we will again go horizontal Type Tool But let’s select it and somewhere here But you can also click like this in the middle of the text So I selected it and removed it. After doing this we will write it here Now that we have our background that’s what it is for our story board If it is ready then remember what we have to do now to you that we created the characters and If we converted it into PNG then You have taken those characters first open it up hey where did we keep the characters I think we created a folder by the name By default this one and here it is our we have characters but before that we have to You have to see that your script is what is basically in the script so you remember what is in our script inside our script I’m going to go here But let’s see what happens with our script what’s inside Tha guys is ours The script is ok but the topic is boring no okay this was our script this was our The characters have arrived, scene one, see this, scene one it is written classroom 2 minutes and if you If you want to write this thing here then click here But can you write where here scene one and Scene one, write its duration here like that I would write here hmm what is its duration its duration 2 minutes so it is necessary that you include duration along with it so that when you create the animation Sit down so you don’t have any difficulty Story Board That is why it is made So that you do not get confused during animation So here we write Duration minutes okay now click here this is four over the arrow and place it here it it is quite big press control t your from the keyboard and then minimize it Here like this here But okay this is our scene one here Duration 2 minutes and now what do we do that now we have here in scene one Do scene one according to your script? is the camera zooms into a building classroom students are chatting some Reading and the teacher is explaining a lesson about historical events okay so now See this is our scene one and of this scene one There are so many things inside that the camera can zoom in Now here it has given the proper details. how the camera animation should be After that you went further into the scene This thing we have is that the camera zooms into a belling classroom okay this thing We did not add anything inside the story board. inside the story board we have just Placing the Environment and Characters Correct and now here we are with our character whatever is there, open it are here now But this is our character Ali and this Sara, okay these two characters have come We have opened them and You have to hold and drag it here within a project with a story board and press t tomorrow and paste it here Now let’s come towards Ali like this here too place it here I’ll show you scene one here. You have to create the rest of the scenes yourself. It is okay to make it according to the script Hey guys so these two characters have come to us I saw that this is what is inside the class room Both characters are sitting back to back now There should be a reference to the classroom as well A reference to the last time we did a classroom it was made, we see it lying with us or else if not then what we have drawn I didn’t save it myself but We took reference from the classroom, we Let’s open it here now with this as well You have to slow down the same from here first unlock and then drag do it in your story board section and press control t several times like this It happens that the resolution of the pictures is very it is very high and for our project if it was not matching with you then you simply You have to press Alt from the keyboard and then Place the wheel of your mouse on your side If you want to rotate it then it will zoom out like this It will go and now you can hold it and make it smaller like this Take And place it here now alt again Now press scroll up Scroll the scroll wheel up and here you have your classroom okay Now this needs to be adjusted here so now what have you to do is that now you This is the classroom layer, this layer put it at the bottom right here But at this place ah sorry down below majeed it will come down here it The white rectangle will come right above it. if yes then the background is your environment There are as many layers of environment as I have brought the background reference for this Background means environment reference Whatever layers there will be, all those layers Whatever background you have, it is yours The solid white background we used Below that for your story board you have has to place so that you have to place the sorry on it okay so that your background comes behind And on top of that, what you have is the environment. if go then See now it must come to your mind that when Our environment has come here, so this Then what about this solid white one? what is its purpose i will tell you Now I will tell you here basically I am going to tell you the first method I have already discussed with you that I have created different assets here. References were made to the characters References were created and references to the environment I had made it, you just need to place it and you just write it here it is not completed complete it first Let’s see the environment has arrived Characters have arrived, scene one has been written and duration I wrote it for 2 minutes but here is our If the script did not come, what did you do here? You have to do that, your script is here But I want to write it down, okay so the script is here But are the students inside the classroom? chatting some are reading so here we have Students simply have to write this here r chatting and some r We do the reading color White if you want to write complete that zoom into classroom is okay where Are the kids studying or talking amongst themselves? they are doing it and the teacher is giving them lessons is it about some historical event I am telling you all this You can also write the details here but I am simply writing this here The students of R chatting and sum r reading ok guys so this is how you write it here and you can reduce the font size let me keep 30 from here There are 48 this is done this is your scene one here if scene If you want to write forest here then you can write it here also Can I write in a little more details? I am going with Mazrat so this is the method basically its okay to make a story board Now what is a professional method story To make a board, you need a drawing inside it. you need to do drawing You must have drawing skill the method that was there, this was the method that In which we have separately defined the reference characters. The environment was prepared separately Like was free with the help of AI tools by going to the pic and then after that we have here bring this and place all these things You have given this method inside this section then To use when you have drawing skills not if you have a drawing skill If you do a little bit of sketching then then what you have to do then you have to do this that here you get This work will be done professionally, here you will get it brush tool is available guys here this brush The tool is okay, let’s place it once, okay let’s do this and see this here is the description of this brush We get these readymade presets See all of these We have all these different presets here You can get it now, pick any one of these For example let’s pick this one okay we have picked this up and after that we You can start drawing here as per your wish Now we have to select the color, let’s see which is the by default color bye the default color is ok so I I press control g and I see that what is inside my scene two where is it now is scene to scene to school library okay School School School Library and Duration 3 minutes the bell rings okay and and Further signaling the end of the class students pack their bags and head towards the The library is now available for this script here Accordingly you have to draw here Now you will not need proper characters not just creating a proper environment You need to prepare a reference, understand to do or else give the client a little It is ok to satisfy you for that He approves your reference and says that things are exactly in their places and this is the place this thing should be here like i would make a little book here yes, we make one here yes we have made one got the wardrobe right here is a cupboard okay and here it is his who have shells come went to that cupboard and we call it ji What is here is not inside these shells here but the books are kept okay here in these I have kept such books inside the shells here is a little bit of my drawing so good There are two ways of drawing: no and good to do a digital drawing such as that’s what I’m doing right now what is it digital drawing is ok both are doubtful for digital drawing in conditions and also paper for drawing What is drawing that we learnt in school? I had done my own drawing in j j maane over the notebooks we used to draw There was a copy of the drawing on which we used to draw with the help of pencil hard The copy which is called soft copy above we’re drawing and if you’re a Using a Pencil End Razor Help Razor help you to make your notebook more beautiful You can also write a page of text on top of a copy of a drawing. do you draw above do you draw something So that would be called a hard copy drawing, okay? and what do we call it soft copy drawing or we can call it digital you can also call it drawing okay so digital Drawing is a little tough You will get investment in digital drawing You don’t have to do it but it is a bit tough which is on your hard copy which you have For that you have to do drawing What investment will you have to make to get a I’ll need a copy and a pencil You will need to take a razor and with its help you will I have to do my drawing but that is easy, okay So this became a wardrobe and here we go Let me give you this one, it is the floor here But whatever is there is lying for sale, it’s ok there is a chair here Is Sorry there is a chair here as well and here But two The character is sitting and reading Okay, so with this method you have made your How to Create a Story Board Story Board This method is to be made professional method is this most of the animators or Then there is a video editor who uses this method Use your own story board okay to make and in this method You might even enjoy it a bit If it is interesting then this method is the story Now our next lecture is on making a board. which are our next modules Now it is up to the proper production Our next module is Production Our pre production has been completed Your idea generation in production script writing character designing Environment designing infact all these References of those who had prepared the voice record and audio editing and story boarding well one thing is left that the voice recording which We did it inside the story board what is the work so guys you have put your You had recorded the dialogues, just mention Ali has to do his first dialogue In which scene should the first dialogue come? You did not write the dialogue properly Here you just have to write dialogue one and You have to provide reference along with it that you have The dialogue that Ali had recorded What was the number one dialogue of Like Ali? dialogues like we gave our numbers and told our If you remember, did you save the dialogues? We saved our dialogues by giving numbers These were our dialogues, here they come, see this Ali one ali two this is infact ali one ali two ali th sara one sara to sara th teacher and Teacher one okay so now which dialogue is of one You have to get inside the scene, read the script after seeing and reading your script Use that dialogue in your story board. Just add the reference, that’s all the work If you have some confusion here So I will guide you properly Simply write the text above OK So now we move on to our next towards the module named Character creation and basically what we have from this The production work is about to begin okay so let’s meet again in our next of new lecture saath so guys our module to pre The production has been completed and now Our module three is the name of this module Character Creation Basically from here we about to start production going to start production now In this module three we will discuss the characters You will learn to design cartoon and Both types of realistic and complete characters that have characters Rigging is also included and in addition Characters’ outfits and accessories we will work on etc as well so let us Let’s start with two softwares for this we will use cc f means that character creator 4 end z bush with it character Headshots is a plugin from Creator Fur The plugin that I provided to everyone if no one has it then text me Do it, I will provide you a head shot Plugin to this we use If you do then I will tell you our first this is the lecture this is our first lecture getting Started with Character Creator for this We will basically introduce its character Using Creator 4 and Its Interface and Tools I will tell you in detail about so let’s get started this is what we have Character Creator 4 as you can see right here But by default one project is open in this I haven’t given any name to the project. If CC project is written here then Its interface is very simple and very user friendly It is friendly for you to work in it No need to have much knowledge about it there are some basic things if I talk about them Let me tell you here in some detail You will understand it well first Watch the lecture that inside the character creator How do we basically get started? and how our characters will be formed and how we how to arrange things and How we use the tools So here you are looking at the top menu bar First of all you can go to the top menu bar like here that you see in every software we get the first of 1 we have the file In which we can create a new project You can open the project Recent You can open the projects from here you can save the project You can save the project with a new name can import with inside it We can make any file and any 3D object And we can export our own made The character which we are discussing here did we create that character or will we create it If we want to export it then it In different format we are here We can export and here if we If you want to export only the head then that too can do and these were some special things There were important things that I I told you and by clicking on exit You can turn it off and on from here as well You can close this if it comes in edit Here in the edit you will find more things. You will not need anything else here, just Preferences only if needed what happens in preferences Use the tools of this software according to your needs You can order it from here Go to preferences and do some editing can make changes for example The shortcut key here is the pen camera. I want to zoom the camera for example Zoom the camera here and there is no one here right now there is no object lying there so we I don’t feel like I am zooming in here Or it is not happening when there is a character So that character will zoom in and zoom out so what is its shortcut command that you can Its shortcut is the best one that the scroll wheel of your mouse if you move it up and down then this zoom in zoom out well these things these are the outputs to this area which The area is ours and we have control over that area To do this, keys will be used and when we do this when you reach the area here then I will tell you in detail First, we’re starting here. and in this we have inference from the file started is now in edit and in edit All you need is NEET Preferences that if you have done it according to your own Gals you have to control what’s here ok so I need it anytime today I did not need to go into preferences to set my yes one thing to do according to settings Whose icon is also needed here yes and you also need character creator what matters is that you know that someone also when you open the software like is it a blender or else Are you using Unravel Engine or Maya or use any software in 3d If so, you will see grid lines showing up What are grid lines? Basically, they are Grid lines are the lines that define your objects Match your props to your characters to the ground to align What you have to see is where the ground is and according to that ground you do your things needs to be aligned so if you here If you want to show grids then simply Show Grid You can show grids here. I have to give and close the grids now what’s going to happen is the show is that this grid which This is a kind of reference to the ground because this is our ground and above the ground above these grid lines All our objects will appear on top our characters are to come Accessories related to the characters or whatever it is you are making your okay inside the software so this grid That’s why lines are important but After rendering when you render the thing if yes then after that you will get grade grade lines which she doesn’t show up So let’s go after that comes the character In this you will never get any information about anything Not Neat about Using the Tool it will be necessary because all these things that we have shows here and We can also do this in a shortcut way here You can select it later on slowly Slowly you will start taking care of everything yourself You will understand it and get into the modification So here you can merge some materials You can optimize the materials you can and now here are the skin weights etc You can click on all these things You will understand later when we see the characters and while creating the characters process during the manufacturing process We don’t need anything anywhere in between Have to apply on the character in the character If you want to make any changes or do anything then According to us we have to pick up things from here It will be ok, you will understand it yourself later It will be revealed what neat and mash they had like this it is here and this is the render and for rendering you know any If you have made something and given it a final If you want to see the look then click here the render for it You have to go to and its shortcut command You are getting it here f10 and if you come here in view then here But You can see these shortcuts inside the view here XJ & C & HOME & REMAINS center end camera view and camera here The view comes here, it’s the most It is important but you need to come into view There won’t be any need as we have All the tools are openly available here You have come here openly in front of us It is done fine and neat inside the plugins You will need plugins and Windows see this These two things are important if your work Space as per your requirements according to the show is not happening or as you you are watching the tutorial for example that you you are watching this tutorial right now and In this tutorial you will learn how to use this character creator that the work space looks something else and you When the character creator is opened For practice, you will need some workspace And if it is visible then you have to go to Windows He will need to arrange his workspace then you have to go to the workspace and Standard Advanced Visual Effects Final Render and preview and all panels all of this You have got all of these according to your needs here The first number is the standard, which This is the best, you have to keep this for yourself OK when you click on Standard If you do then you will have all your information here All content will be shown from the character creator Related content will be shown and if you have If this content is not showing then there is no reason for this there is no problem there is no issue because I had as much content as I could about the character The creator will provide it to you separately. It is given that when will we need that content Now she reads, see I have content here I am here for the characters For example if I come to hairs Here I have this in her hair style All the hair is visible but here it is If the download icon is appearing then Why does the download icon come that we We keep the character creator separate and the content that the character creator creates if we have to buy it separately If you have a content manager here It shows up but here in the content manager You are getting download issue like this If it is then you don’t have any problem with it If I need anything then I will buy all of them Folders Different folders Content there The one with the manager, I have given you the link I had given it to him, it’s lying inside it, okay There is a separate folder for actor and skin The makeup is different, the hair is different All the folders for clothes are separate Just keep your folders separate You have to open it as per your wish You have to open the desired accessories Do you want to pick accessories or outfits? there you are and just here is the character that you Just drag and drop it on the one you have created I will tell you how to do it later Explains everything in detail and practically hmm okay so now we’re basically here We don’t need this content manager We don’t see the content manager here. We have to do it, let’s close it and hide it If we need it here, we will give it to you We have an addon and a plugin We need that plugin of character creator You have to keep it visible here if you Click here on the headshot and then even after clicking here If the headshot plugin is not showing then you What you have to do is go to plugins Then go to Headshot and you have Headshot v2 Or if you have Headshot version one I have version two if you have version two If it is one then you have to click on it, okay If you have a head short then show it You will know what a head shot is for If you know it well, if you don’t know, I’ll tell you Let me give you the help of a head shot here we are Design your own characters ok you can create characters of your choice So this was our plugins menu. It arrived and it has this script inside it Now these scripts here are basically All the software we have 3D animation or 3D animation Now these are different scripts Who makes the scripts now? Just like there are developers, there are third parties Whatever they are, they make the script every When we add a script inside a software In fact, we do this on our back end coding happens on top of it okay now coding In which it occurs mostly which The scripts are python Python consists of What is Python a language is ok just like atml is one language, similarly python is a language Most of what is in Python is scripts There are more Pythons than Cinema 4D in the same way you get the effect of a blender Scripts are also available in Python Most of the blenders are donus ok in the same way as adobe after effects You also get scripts if you This is free and you can run it from anywhere in Python. Scripts are available for any specific and a specific task for the software more than one thing to do Any work within specific software To make it easier you need to do some get plugin get script So keep it saved with you so that you can learn coding. In appearance, it is fine in the form of coding There will be Python programming and that script You simply have to load it here but okay for example do you have any script that is used to edit a text document is it lying inside the file or on its own If it is in the format then you have loaded it Go to Python and open it by clicking on it. You can add a separate plugin here. Okay, so there are two types of plugins There are basically addons, one is zip The complete software which is made with the file which we simply install Like the headshot plugin we have separately I had installed it from and it would show up here and there are scripts on the second number You can simply open those scripts. You need to install them It does not happen and when you open the script if it is of automatic software then it There is coding, it gets added inside it happens and then whatever happens to that script With the help of whichever plugin you are It was created so you have a show becomes visible inside your software It goes and you complete your task in it. can do it ok and help you in neet you will never have to or just what you have If you need help then open the Plugins window and its Apart from Preferences and Files in Edit etc but you will get shortcut commands for all these All these shortcut commands are visible in front You have to remember what you are and what they According to work it is good here is a I’ll give you a little tip, here it is that if you need shortcut of any software Commands don’t come If so, you You have to go to youtube0 gpt and there I have to go and give him the command, I have to prompt him that Brother I am using character creator 4 and all the shortcut commands it has He defines what I am in details. give it to him and he will write the shortcut commands and then Their detailed work will also tell which What is the purpose of shortcut commands? ok so i think it happens like this This will make it easier for you and I will be able to remember you You won’t even need each one Separate shortcut commands of the software It is not prompted and you have the text Inside the document files, you have The script was generated using the shortcut command He made it for you, you saved it You have to take it and keep it in a separate folder and Whenever you open any software and If you start working inside then do the work during that text document file You have to open it and after opening it, your I have to keep it close and minimize it And wherever you need any Shortcut commands that you are missing So simply you can edit that text document You have to open the file and use the shortcut You have to see the command and then according to that It is ok to work so now let’s come down here and sleep this is it, this is a shortcut created here is to create a new project such as the file I was here to make a new project but But it is also visible that it is open in the same way to open the project and save to do that we won’t need them If you press the shortcut command control s That will save our project. okay or if we control o then our will open the project and press control n If you do it, it will create a new project. then you have used more shortcut commands you have to use it, it saves your time and Your work is also professional when you work If you are doing it then you look professional okay or whenever in front of anybody you will open the software, run it and or When you go to give an interview somewhere then If you have a grip on shortcut commands then what will happen to you that you are a professional You will write it and your CV will be your glory You will become stronger and people will accept you well here it is again for export that export as OB and FBX as you no these are the formats of 3d fpx OJ is a 3D format. OJ is also a 3D format. if oj fpx or usdt all these all formats are ok if these We can find any file inside the format so that means it is a 3d The file is there and we can open it. for any of your 3d software inside and that’s how we use our 3d software When I make anything, then that We exported the object or character You have to do this for any of your 3D formats inside it’s ok inside any other software for example to take it here We designed the character and If you want to take it in a blender then In which we will export it, we will call it as a FB will do an export ok that’s me I will tell you how when I reach the finals. You have to do well, then you will come again Here is the shortcut for undo and redo commands you know well this is goji now There is a show going on here but we unable to select because we have No character is present here but upload to sketch fab that if we We created the character directly from the sketch If you want to upload then do it from here maybe this is a brush we need it We will need it when we Here you will create your base character and taking that base character inside the g brush You have to go, this is the selection tool, selection If you have selected the tool and After selecting you can click on any thing When you click, that item will be selected which will lie within your view point It must be lying inside your work area. And this is your move to tool any To move an object you first need to First you have to select it then move we have to do this but we are not able to select it stay because right now we have a view point Nothing exists and it is the same thing to rotate the object or character This is for scale up and scale down One thing I would do is to be nice Let me make it clear here that what we characters here you will create those characters We can manually do this here using the scale tool Cannot scale up or scale down from In fact, we cannot be made bigger or smaller. have to work on her different muffs Then that character becomes bigger or smaller its reason is this its reason is that that character A it is not boneless it has bonus inside it they have rigging in it okay So whatever things involve rigging which have bonuses that we have We have to animate them manually or cannot minimize any software ok inside so now after that we have this home and The center is fine, there won’t be any need for them, yes This is zoom pane pane and rotate these are three isn’t it this one rotates the work area or To pan or move, zoom in and It is used to zoom out. ok See there are two ways, zoom in and zoom out To do that you can turn your mouse wheel down Rotate it upwards so it zooms in If you turn it towards you, it will zoom out and the other way is that you Select it and then click OK Hold down the left mouse button and If you drag the mouse forward then this It will zoom in and Drake will be drawn backwards. If you do this, it will zoom out, okay like this In the same way you can download it here using the same method. can move right left up down ok right to left and up to down and so on you can kind of rotate it okay Well, this thing is very important when we create the character here then You have manually added that character here. is that by zooming in or zooming out or From the center or from right up down you If you do not want to see any specific part If you want to focus on then do this method you don’t have to do that what you have to do If you want to see it from the front then That’s your overall character show from the front It will be okay, look at it this way from the right If you want then the show will be done right like this you can from the bottom, from the back and if on her face If you want to focus then you will click on the face It will focus on the face, okay so here If we don’t have any character then So right now no condition applies to it All these things are not happening here leave it, there is no need for them, okay and all these that’s also good now we come down to It’s all about our work I have already told you what our view is This is the port where our character show will take place our output will show ok our Character or accessory objects etc we will have shows this is modified Whatever character we create here, that panel Use this panel to modify the character We have to come inside where this is this panel Inside we go to the modify panel What work will have to be done here Majeed What tools do we have here in the menu What is there will be shows and inside each menu What all do we need to know if we go there individually? we will have to do this work when we become characters If you make them and work on them then you will also things on their own slowly step by step you’ll get it okay now here it is headshot plugin from here basically this thing isn’t this the area from here we You have to start with your character if its ok for designing then our first The lecture was character creator getting Getting Started with Character Creator and its E-Books his introduction and cc introduction to cc4 interface and tool now i am not feeling well My throat is down for three to four days now it’s bad and that’s why I I was unable to create the tutorials as they are And on number two here is our flood The situation remains the same The weather has turned very bad, very bad It is raining and our area is a bit sa becomes backward due to which here But there is a lot of problem with the light, okay? So my lectures are a little late these days. I am very happy with you I am sorry I am sorry I apologise that this thing a little try to understand that here But things are a bit bad these days The light comes because of the rain She comes and goes and I have no idea It does not happen like this most of the times but it happens many times It has happened many times that I have lost half of my The tutorial is recorded and the light goes out and all of it it gets spoiled ok its all his The output is what goes like this since this condition remains, then just as The weather will become a little normal and so will my health If everything goes well, I will give you 15 to 20 Within a day, all the All of them are remaining lectures I will try to upload it but I will tell you the next thing within 10 days There are 10 days, within those 10 days everything is If I upload all the lectures then our The next lecture will be a creating Base Character We have a base character inside it and design that base character Some very important things to design I’m going to give you some tips okay which I very recently which I have tried them and have done research on them and The ones I’ve tried myself Practically it was quite useful for me I will definitely share it with you thank you so Much friends our module is three Character creation and our lecture today This is a lecture on creating a base character Today we will be designing a base character Use the Character Creator and Headshot Plugin While doing this we need a reference image As much time as you want in 3D animation You feel like doing things practically Only as much time as you spend on research The better your research, the more Your character will become better I took a reference image so I would make an animation There are many more to see on Pinterest here If the reference image is there then you have The reference image needs to be taken Guys you have to take it in such a way that Both airs should be shows and of course Straight face of your character should be okay and looking into the camera and Any kind of expression on the face shouldn’t be like it is now this I downloaded the reference image After downloading the reference image we have to take this first ado it is not ready yet how can it be ready This is the thing that I am going to tell you today I’m still what I’ve never told anybody before Haven’t you told me Shadows were coming from one side to the other side But that face would have been perfectly fine It was a big problem for me, so I A very simple solution has been found for this it’s easy i will tell you what you All you have to do is close this now and you’ll leave. Straight Ado what did you do now after doing this here to do is that what is here No, you have to take it, it’s a tool, polygonal tool this center one is ok pick it up After picking this up you have now absolutely its nose is in the center or the nose is the tip is right in the center of it you see here You have to draw a line from it exactly in the center Okay, so I’m here to center it like this I absolutely drew a line Lee A did not come to the center Let’s start the selection from here or is it okay now and in this way you have on either side whichever side is your correct side No, you have to take that side from here Okay, this is how the selection should be done After doing this, now you have to right click And click on layer by copy, ok hey guys this is your layer which has been copied Now what have you to do, you have to come now on the image and from here you click on duplicate You have to click and do ok, now do the second one The image that you have, I mean that you have two here The projects have been completed. a project and what do you do now Is that this is the one that you duplicated You have to flip it, I’ll tell you how you have to flip it now you have it here It has to come on the image It has to come on the image rotation and flip canvas horizontal okay here You duplicated this and now the one above the layer above was the one you put the one you split, copy and cut You had to grab it like this and pull it Bring it here to another project Correct and right here in the center you have adjust it exactly center or now it’s ok what do you do now Now you have to take the brush tool from here you have the brush tool to get the brush tool After that you have to decrease its size It’s okay from here and now from here you You have to select the color wherever you brush You want to use yours from there If you want to select that color then I will do it here I select this color from here and I would reduce its opacity I would pay you round about 25 to 5 i am ok ok now this thing matters a lot here depends on which layer you have selected That’s it, now you have two layers, now below You can click on that layer from here If you try hiding it, you will see it here in the middle A line is visible which is the line in the middle In fact, basically this is the line We have to cover the line so how did we do it We have to cover this line, we will put it here than select OK and unhide Do and my brush is here like this Ferate ok now you have to select the color No, from here the color comes exactly in the center You have to select the one that is available here But it is fine and the size of the man is this much You have to take it as much as this line of yours comes here Just covering this line a little bit you just take And this is how you position your brush from here Keep moving around if the opacity seems low increase the opacity a bit okay now come back down here now this Select the color and place it here Kind So now select this one here do it okay now come down a little bit Select I am sorry now here But a little hard work is required for this, your guys So we can do one more thing as well sa do it let’s hide this one and the one above Select the layer and move it a little bit move the side a bit and see yes this will let you use the brush tool You don’t have to do a little down here We will have to do it anyway but here it is for us Only this area, this one is so small This is what matters, the rest doesn’t, but Its nose has become a little smaller If it is then we can go and adjust it later maybe that is not an issue so now we will solve this Simply go to file and save it. I have told you both the methods which you you can do it which feels better if you If you want to work harder then use the first method You can do this by using the brush tool Your image will be clean here but we After generating the character again you can bring its textures here and then if you want to generate the character here After doing this the texture remains same on it We have to normalize the way things are If you want you can bring it here again So now you go to the file and save the image again Save it on your computer and here Select the format JPG from here and save it from here two ok this is done now do one more thing this The image that we had set up in Photoshop Inside we have to scale it up a bit is image up scaler this is the website its use I told you earlier that select it at 400 take it and now wherever you are your character reference image is lying you have to select it and have to click on start You just have to wait a bit here depends on your internet speed you can download it take it and it will download your image ok This is your reference image see the quality He has made it so much better, now you can generate it you can do it now you have to get the character In the creator and from here if like this If the interface is not showing then try the plugins Go and get your head shot by clicking here okay so this is the interface like this now what you have to do is to show it The image that was there friends track it and You have to drop it here, at this place and As soon as you drag and drop it will appear to you will ask what your body type is and your what is your skin type so you I want to keep the mail here clean and soft You have to keep it and if your character is female So you have to select female and if If your character is a small child, a baby You selected here here also baby You have to select it, okay and if here After selecting, do not check here So it is necessary to make noise that here There should be a check right but our If it is not a character baby then what do we do with it should we do it or simply leave it unchecked Click on mail and clean and save and do it on generate okay so if your The character is such that if someone adds a little If yes, then it is right for you to click on Old here mail and here Old now we click on generate here it is within two to three minutes Your character will be generated and given to you Depends on which PC you have Which processor is it? Which graphics card? Fitted to You don’t have to do anything just wait for it Letting go of your work This is the work that is being done by you putting a dent do it in blender or maya This is all auto system its manually it’s sorry what has it done here We have seen the characters here looking at the reference I have generated it and given it but in this and in this a little difference So how do we eliminate this difference now? to do we have two methods the first method that we can do here by using morphs can but a lot of students have This issue is coming that these muffs have work with them If these mobs are not working for you then If you are not doing it then leave them to it ok what you should do is simply live together You have kept your character in the brush as it is you have to take it there okay then you Do all the work within your heart Right now we have a little bit of work to do for it Now I have to do it on textures and next Inside the lecture we will use it inside the G brush will take this realistic character Try to make it in a little cartoon style Now we will try on its mobs If your mobs are working for you Let me tell you about it on the fly That’s how you should work with headshots You must be working on the rest of your body Are the muffs working or not? matter we have head shot muffs here okay so let’s see that we have this has come to our head And see this there are two kinds of muscles, one for the head The second head shot is for the head shot which muffs it is quite detailed The hand muffs are not very detailed so You must have either of these If he is coming then try to control both of them It’s the same method, I’ll tell you how it is Suppose you have opened your eyes a little here if you want to scale if you want to scale up then you have Simply click on the eyes and select the eye scale But you have to click here now you see this is over by going to 100 It’s not happening much more than this even if If you want to do this then simply do this here See slider okay this bake slider on top of it You just click and as soon as it’s back If you click on the slider then it will appear here changes still exist ok but here But it is back and you can see it more You can increase it but it is so big And if it doesn’t look good then I’ll undo it does hmm yes it came so fine Its done and now its left like this You can suggest as many things as you want here. can you like the nose, the nose has a little scale Do you want to increase its height? Do you want to decrease the nose? You want to adjust the depth to what it is The nose tip is here The nose tip is here Bring it down a little and the nostril width is increase it a little bit, this is all work You can do it in that as well, even inside the bush You can do it in a better way there okay now you have to do one thing that you control Press wherever you want to save it Save your character there. so that if the power goes out, it will be available for you So that you do not have any problem, I will tell you further that we what to do now next which is our lecture there will be this character in it we will use g brush We will take you inside and after going there I will tell you in detail inside the brush that you have made its body parts bigger or how to do a little cartoon style How to make mobs of it in Minecraft You did fine and with that you can save your objects If you want to add extra If you want to add objects then how do you do that? You can do it and I will also tell you that you have done it Outfits inside G Bash to keep your custom how to wear outfits ok if for For example, the assets I gave you You can choose the outfits of your choice from them If you don’t get it then you do as you please how to make outfits inside g bash If it is professional then I will tell you the method I will give you the opportunity to work hard on it It’s ok to work Guys, we will meet again in the next new lecture Our module three is underway with Character creation and our lecture today This lecture has three sculpin characters in g Brush and this lecture is a little bit It is possible that in some places you will find There may be confusion but I will try to I will keep clearing things up with time and If you understand it well, then you have understood it Focus on watching this lecture Because there are some complicated things in this is about to come and this is all of us This is the lecture within the course that You may see some complicated things You will get the rest of our previous lectures It was very easy and the upcoming lectures were also ours Our lectures on blender will be easy He might be a little bit older than this It may be more complicated, but still If you can pick things up very well If you take it then I hope that you get it in the first go itself If you will understand this well then let us now The character needs to be taken inside G Bush So I have G Bush I have given you the same version in 2024. It has been provided and now you have to do it like this that is if you already have an open hedge brush So you can close it, there is no issue So now we have to first teach this character a T pose. Now you have to bring it inside in T pose How to bring it till you are in T pose I will not keep this character unless you you can take this inside your brush yes but when will you bring me back for sculpin After working on it, when the character If you bring the character back to the creator then This will cause a lot of problems for you Let’s do this inside a T post. What we need to do is to have t There is a preset inside the post here now let me show you how it happened Now I have asked where the preset is. That preset has been provided to you Along with that, if the assets were given to someone If you don’t get it then I’ll tell you whatsapp2 this one is simply a preset We have to drag and drop it here on the character and as soon as you drag If we drop the end then our character will be T it will come inside the post okay now we will z If you can take me inside Braj then now What should you do by taking this to Jee Braj? Select the Selection Tool to go to and then select the character and Then you click here to go to z A before this step you have to install The Bash in your PC and you’ve seen the 2024 version Install the one I provided I hope you have installed it already and you simply put z b here After installing, click here Now you have to do some settings on Goji here I am asking you so why don’t you put all the information here Settings should be left by default like Yes, just select the T pose here. To get it go here and click on Goji is like if you click on goji then now you You can see that your G brush is here If the cursor has appeared then it means that G Brush Yours is opening, you haven’t opened it yet you have to wait don’t click now you have waited Do you want to do it or see now that your G bash is open went close it from here and now Simply click once on the light box click on the light box and now you have Look carefully here what to do Hold down the left mouse button and Drag it in any way and your character will appear Now after doing this you did not click You don’t have to click anywhere just After dag you have to click on edit I have to start making it, I have clicked on edit If you do not click on edit then You can’t do any work here. Now you understand the shortcut keys Shortcut keys are very important now the same buttons on your keyboard and mouse You have to control this interface from your which is a character or any object interface I am lying down, I have to control it, okay see how to do it now press lt Hold down the left mouse button and keyboard button and move the mouse downwards then it will Your character which is moving up and down right and left Left is ok so whichever side you want to move the mouse to You can also drag your mouse to any side your character will move in that direction okay so this is your character right here now In the same way you can zoom it in and zoom it out. If you want to do it then how will you do it, press ult again from the keyboard and mouse of the mouse which is sorry the left and right of the mouse The button is used to move it it happens but alt alt with alt key It is okay if you engage with Alt key If it is from your keyboard then left or right mouse button If you use both right buttons then this move will happen your character will move okay and if you You will press the control key on your keyboard control key then after that you can use your mouse Press the Right button along with the Control key to You have to press and hold from the keyboard and also the right mouse button is what you need to do is hold on Press the Control button and both buttons on the keyboard the right mouse button with the mouse to press both of these Hold down and move the mouse upwards If you drag it will zoom out and If you drag it towards you it will zoom in it will go okay so in the same way now if If you want to rotate then press For this you need to press the key from any keyboard. There is no need to select, just your Hold down the left mouse button and in this way you just drag the mouse this will rotate your character okay your The scene will rotate and you can control it from here as well you can see this will give you some navigation It can be seen here here When you clicked, this is exactly our character It’s completely straight now, okay We will press it alt and move it to end center So now after doing so much work You got an understanding of the shortcuts to the interface Now after that there is some more effort to control These are things that you will understand as you go along Now you will go to the next task which you have to do This is what you have learned here on geometry. You have to click and you will see its vertices and You can see its polygons that Its polygons are not smooth then you have to change its You want to smooth out the polygons If you smooth it out you can go into more detail about it If you can work then you can work on the divide You have to click here to see this divide You have to click on it just once you divide If you click on it it will become smooth okay See it got smoother after that one time Again you click on divide twice Just click on divide and it will be smooth it will happen and it will become so smooth that you You can work on it if you want more If you keep dividing on this issue, then you will keep doing it its polygons will keep increasing okay so this It will become smooth but when you do it like this You will take your character back In the creator, you may find something The problems that we have to face Could it be just one problem It could be that your character creator will start lagging because your The character will become very heavy, okay? You just clicked on divide it twice if you want to do it then you have to do it so smooth that you Can you work on it now, what have you done? you have to do that look here are some things We can see this when we move our cursor if you are bringing me here then you should come here A small circle appears in red color This circle which is here is actually ours There is a brush, it’s ok, with the help of this brush We have to do a scull here so look now This is the size of the brush here like this we You can increase this 1000 times It has increased but we want more than this If we are not able to do it then we need more than this If you want to increase it, what will you do, double it click it up here Or you doubled up on the dynamics here Double click on OK Dynamics If you click this Look what you have now, that is the size of your bush This makes you appear bigger than your character okay now from here it is giving If you can decline, what should you do now? that whenever you have to sculpt inside then You have its mirror which is inside the brush, You have a mirror on your brush, you turn it on to take a mirror means that one Whatever changes happen on one side, they will happen on the other side Those changes will be applied automatically If you don’t need to work hard then Simply press X on your keyboard press x and you can see that I I’m bringing the brush to one side, so On the other side also you will see red color here. The circle is visible, if it is ok then it means one If there are changes on one side then on the other side It will be automatic, what should I do here now? I think Bush’s style is here I’ll change it and I’ll move it here but okay let me take a brush and see Here is how to select a brush Click here and then Select the brush of your choice You just used the move brush which is I have selected it, okay, I have taken the move tool here. But what do I do now that its If I want to make some changes on my face on its head like I can see from here on its head I want to pitch it a little bit so I like this it see okay i got it and like this I want to control it a little bit in the center as well I am doing it and if you have any idea about its organs Doing detail working on the upper face organs If yes then you should do it according to your organs You have to select the brush size, it’s ok Like I have done here according to the nose if I have done this then I will touch the tip of the nose I want to move it down a little bit here But this is how I did it, okay And I want to spread it out a little bit, like this So basically the purpose of the move tool is to spread it out what happens what is the purpose of this It is used to move the mesh so whenever you have done it in cartoon style If you want to create characters then you need to use the move tool will it be okay with the organs to tamper But if you want to add a separate mash on top of it If you want then what you have to do I will tell you later but first Now let’s do a little work on it We need to make its eyes a little bigger So what will we do, let’s increase it here The size of the brush is a little smaller like this From We’ll move it And as we look at it from every angle will move So our eyes will get bigger ok but if you want to enlarge your eyes then The inner one is what you see here The eye ball is visible in this eye ball according to what you have to do okay so now we Work on it in a little more detail I want it to be whatever face is there on the face here I am but I want to make some wrinkles okay if yes then how will I make that character If I want to look a little old or You want to show me a cartoon, look at your Work has to be done according to imagination Whenever you have to do it, whenever you have to do it then your imagination and your requirements according to your To work according to the script It is very important for you to know the basics of the tools. The basics of tools are important I told you what tools you should use How to do it, what to do in which software Which tool will do the work in which software For what purpose am I used I’ve told you the rest is up to you now depends on your creativity It depends as long as it is inside you You will not bring creativity to things If you cannot make things unique then If you want to make it unique then you need a little unique level But there is a need to go and think, okay this is it the whole responsibility, the whole execution, It all depends depends on your thinking about what you are You think unique and what unique do you make well now it is like that If you know how to make unique things then do it like this You have also brought unique things into animation Your characters have to come, no matter how many The environment should not be too good, it is this good There might not be props, the visuals might not be that good You may not be that good but if your script It’s good if you are unique then people will watch your videos I will share it further, okay so here it is now what we do is use the brush from here Let’s change the style a little bit Let’s change the brush style a little bit and Now we can use the brush that we need from here. Look there are a lot of them to take so I will take a few I myself get confused as to who I am If we want to take a brush here then we have to put it here brush up or let’s take this dumb standard and After this, decrease its size a little. and see if that works Let’s increase the brush a little bit Now after that set the size of the bush to let’s change the style from here And this is the standard brush, this one Take it here Now the work that a standard brush does is No, basically it is used to increase the Would here it looks

    like this here it has mixed the mash a little okay increased the polygons a bit increased it and now it has been increased a little let’s zoom and do some detail work on the nose it is like this So when you depict the organs of any character You spoil it a bit with reality Apart from this, it is made in cartoon style. goes okay so if you’ve If you want to keep it realistic then you should use G brush You don’t need to bring it inside Realistic your character in the character creator itself So the character is formed in the same way but if If you want to make it a little cartoon then You need to bring it inside your brush. I would have studied neat so here I zoom out and now Next I will tell you what to do Here But now look, we have done some work on the face. Now I don’t want to work on it any more I told you the method, I told you the method that’s how you should work on this right now If you look forward to watching the video then If you practice by watching the tutorial In practice also you have to do it like this I have to work as much as I have worked Once you practice and become proficient at the tools If you get a grip then after that Then you have to show your creativity. You can do your work according to your imagination. You have to focus as much as possible on your character The more time you give to your character, the more your character will grow It will be even better, just that much Perfection lies in your character If it goes then we can do some work on it Are Guys, you could have done some work on the rest of the body If you do it on the face then it will be fine for the rest of the body Once you’ve worked on the top, now work on the rest of the body To work here we first have to So we had to take our move tool move the brush and increase the size a little I have to do it and with this I can zoom a little bit I will do these And I will move it now, okay? I want to make it in a cartoon style. If we press Ctrl+G then it will undo Whatever work you have will go from anywhere If it goes wrong I adjust the brush size I’ll decrease it a little and make it’s neck I will make this in a little cartoon style This way I will increase this now So this is our work done so much on this and Now if Majeed goes into detail and works If you want then this is your whole brush here The styles are available, it is fine as per your choice Take the brush here and paint over your character Keep working, it is right, mind the shortcut keys to be kept inside and a) your brush, enter the size of the brush here looking at it and then the rest of it Things that are important to your character’s appearance Accordingly here you have added things on it have to keep doing it, have to keep applying and one I forgot to mention here that if did you get your own brush from somewhere For example, I have taken the I have taken the brush, is it standard? What is the purpose of a standard brush It is okay to increase it here. It is used to increase polygons here if you want to smooth it out If yes, then you will press shift from your keyboard And you will smooth it out from here like this. if it is then it will make your mash smooth This made the mash smoother so I undo I do it here I don’t need to create a mesh here so I would have done it by the way from here also it’s done okay it’s just that it’s okay And now let’s see what work you have to do now You haven’t worked on accessories yet Keep one thing in mind here, that you yes the work that a man has to do inside him has to be divided into two parts, the first one which The part is to work on your character and in the second part you have created a character If it is right then you need to work on the accessories Now you have worked on the appearance of the character I have done whatever you mean to do on this You had to do a sculpt, you have done it character After sculpting the character you have now I will take it back once you make sure That the sculpting of your character is complete It has gone and you needed it that much to sculpt so now you have sculpted the character need to go back to character creator okay then after that again what do we do We will work on this accessories But now you have to click on All, see It is good here when you are here for the first time If you click on All for the first time then this will happen to you Which other software do you like Is it a blender or is it Maya or cinema? 4 It’s done one by one about all of them If he asks then you have to skip it, okay? So when the turn of character creator comes in the end then when it comes to character creator If he asks then you have to continue, ok If yes then he will ask for the first time, not after that I will ask you to continue this here now and as soon as I continue it will View Goji Options here and buy now Everything has to be left as default Settings and you have clicked on Just Update here Click on It’s good to see whatever changes we have made I made some changes on my character You can see from here we I had enlarged it a bit, its chest was It had to increase its width a little bit I had done some work on the neck so she did it completely You can see all the changes Work on the nose of the character inside out You can also see that here it’s been ok So now this character is a proper cartoon How to look stylish and still look a little If it looks realistic then it is realistic The region of visibility is its textures and It has accessories as we work If we go, our character will become a cartoon character Okay, now we have focused on its accessories. Have to work after working on accessories then what we will do is that we can We will only work on textures Not making a cartoon out of a mash up of characters infact we know about the character They have textures and they are a bit cartoonish too It has to be brought in style only then Our character looks like a cartoon OK, so now we are working on its accessories. to do so our next lecture will be G Brush Key Inside G Brush we have created character How to make accessories for if You don’t need to make accessories inside the brush so you can see the assets that I have given you Go and see the assets given below The clothes of character creator are outfits You will find the outfit inside it Just drop the dragon on the character The dragon has to be brought from outside and dropped which it’s your choice it’s okay If you like shirt then drag and drop the shirt if you want to do hairs then drag your hairs and you have to drop it, if you have paints then you have paints Drag and drop lets you create outfits there is no need but if you wish that the outfits are not available there and you Outfits or accessories of your choice If you want to make it then I will tell you how to make it I will tell you about this in the next lecture Practice and learn from anywhere, any way is there any issue or any confusion So without any hesitation ask me I will guide you guys our module Three is character creation and our today’s Lecture is lecture for making custom Accessories & Outfits So to create custom accessories and outfits The ideal software for us is If you are a fan then we have to be careful about our character I want to go inside G Bush What did we do in the previous lecture? sculpted inside the brush its After sculpting the character, your The character took the character back In the creator and now again we are talking about character Create your character with G Brush from the creator The same method will take you to it, click on Goji Have to keep all settings by default You have to click on tea post and goji Clicking we are just within few seconds here The brush will come open and now we Click on the outfits to see what the outfits are We have to design outfits anyway by moving the character inside the G brush You can design there without even going there there is no issue but what will happen here is that If we bring the character then our according to the character’s reference for If the character becomes a reference for us Character’s Body Type Shape according to body shape Accordingly we are here to design accessories and then go to character creator We need to do more work with accessories We just won’t need the skin You will have to deform your character’s body with and apply to then you have to click on the light box and Drag your character like this And click on edit and now click on the bottom Let’s move the character here right here like this and now we Zooming out the character yes this is enough and now here But let’s click on the nose here. Our character has become absolutely straight now We have designed character accessories here. Here you have to do the geometry of the character There is no need to go in and divide anymore There is a need to increase its sub divisions here infact now what we have to do is that Now we have to add a new mesh here If you want to add a new mesh then click on add new mesh It is very simple and very easy on the tool Click here and then see all this tools this is all tools okay click on it and Now click on insert here. After clicking on it, you have now seen a If you want to take the raw shape then in raw shape we have to take it here But plane and sphere are also available here You are getting cylinder and you are also getting cube I am getting it too, ok, I am getting the ring too so now for example you have For example one of the accessory accessories Create a ring for your character’s neck if your character is female or a Fantasy characters that appear in fantasy movies if characters are used inside then for that how do you do that i am here But I’ll get a ring right now I am talking about accessories here because Making accessories is a little easier Better than cloth outfits Then I will tell you that you how to design the outfits You have to pick up the ring here, okay now Your ring has arrived here, it has been added It has been added inside, now you have to do it like this You have to press Dab from the keyboard press dab and now let’s see that Where is my ring I think It is very small and there is an add on here somewhere if it has gone then Okay, now let’s move the character a little bit. here we do it in fact w of the character The purpose of clicking on this is this what happens when we click w Then the options of move tool would appear here Press Alt and drag the mouse what would have happened if we did that our area which is our interface, user interface Move the place where our output is being shown It is happening but what do we have to do now We have designed this work inside this user interface inside the area that we have here objects are lying or characters are lying If we want to move it then we have to dub it Despite this the move tool is not shown here. The reason this is happening is that here our The ring is selected And that ring is so small that it covers its body then when the ring is hidden inside the body hidden inside is the automatic move tool which if they are also hidden inside it then Now what should we do in this situation Now we have to select the character We will select the character only then we will see the character If you can move it then look at it carefully You will see an arrow key, click on it If you do this then your character will be selected it looks like this character is clicked on As soon as it is selected, the character will be ours It has become prominent in the front, okay so first It was not prominent, now it has become prominent It’s a little light now what do we do now double press that right and now we have the move tool now If it is not showing then the move tool is at the bottom it must be somewhere near his feet, okay So we’re going to drag this up here towards the foot. let’s do it okay and now we’ll catch it let’s take it to this side see this side ok this is where we took it and now we’re going to take it zooming out a bit This is it and now we click here again on this arrow down arrow so this Look, our ring is lying here. This is our ring lying right here If it has happened then what do we do now that it happens again Let’s undo this with the Control key Why do we need to control the character? I want to take it back to my location because The character has just come to us that character’s eyeball and its cavity here we have the character If the line doesn’t line up then we will control it let’s do it again let’s do it again ok there is a minute It is not getting undone by pressing control-G So we do this manually with our arrows press the key once and click Are And let’s do this here manually, okay so it’s a bit messed up here But if something like this happens Even if a situation arises or any matter arises here It may go bad, some problem may arise and somewhere But if you are not able to understand then there is no issue You can have a backup in the character creator it is lying there just simply ji brush Close your eyes and live your character again take it inside the brush okay so now Bringing the character inside the brush again We go there and there is confusion about one thing It happened to me, which I am accepting what happened was that the move tool ji Ring move tool not showing inside bushing He was infact lying right at the bottom While I was here before I could ring I never brought it here ever I did not insert Always insert sphere I do that and the sphere always comes to the center Whereas the one I added to the ring She had come down to the bottom so the light box Let’s click on and drag the character here and on edit and now move it down and Zoom out a bit too let’s zoom out okay and this Our character is here, now we are on the tool go there and then click on sub tools let’s click on insert and now here Let’s take the ring from there, the ring has come down Guys, it is lying down near us the ring is lying here okay and now What we’re doing here is scaling up This ring has to scale this ring So press Dab once more and this center one Click on it and it will be your ring scale it is getting scaled up it is ok Neck according to character’s body Accordingly we have to scale it and now Just move it upwards and it will happen automatically The move tool came because I already had it here But the DUB was selected properly Is and to go back to go back to go back To hide the move tool, you must press If you want to do it then it will be hidden, press the button If you do this then the move tool will be shown. Okay now. We focus and zoom are the characters in this area where its neck is right and let’s move it here like this now We scale it down to its neck according to this or this has happened and now you rotate it down it is like this so you should rotate it like this ok guys rotated it and now we have to do it on this When Sculpin makes sure your The object is properly aligned with the body Is That’s okay it’s done and now we’re over it So let’s do the sculpin Press Q to hide the move tool will go will disappear and now we have here I want to sculpt according to my body, it is ok So let’s take the move tool from here, which This is my favorite and the brush size is increasing the and I reduce it a little bit like It was told in the previous lecture that If you double click on Dynamics then the brush will appear. the size is doubled will go okay now we can adjust this Choose the right one according to your body type. Is [music] and make the size a little smaller and I Just this area, put it a little down towards here something like this We have to make the shape of and here you can see ho that I am doing it from one side to the other side But if it is not happening automatically then do X come on both sides Went Okay, so this is a simple example. The main problem was that a new mesh With Assisting Mesh you have created the new mesh How to add and both meshes you how to control it ok how I have to arrange one after the other on both of them one how do you work and both of them How do you choose one after the other? So the method is exactly the same, more than this There is nothing rocket science in it now It depends on you which one you choose You just have to make all kinds of accessories using your tool I have to go to all the tools and whatever want to create that by clicking on insert You have to add this type of shape here ok And you can freely customize these shapes You can do it if you are completely independent When you are independent and you can create any shape You can customize it for you Design whatever you imagine you won’t have any problem doing it, it’s correct So these are all the shapes that You are completely independent here. You can customize their polygons which he is changing it completely you can do this inside polygons with their vertices inside the edges inside okay so this is a Now that the method is done, we have made a small accessory I made a simple sea and put textures on it How to apply it, we will know later when Our next lecture will be on textures. okay inside of that we’ll talk about it will do it ok so guys here is this ring we had designed it, now here we are If you want to make outfits for this then make outfits The method of making it is If you make it manually, absolutely Use the same method as I used for this made an x-ray here a ring here I am saying sorry for this here I have a locket like a necklace which is like this I have been calling it a ring for a long time now Had been If it is meant for ring fingers then it I made a locket for this so I guess So here we have the outfits for it If you want to make then you know inside the outfits shirts and pants and things like that Much comes and nothing else comes So here we have made a simple shirt. yes I will tell you the method, it is very easy You have used your own skills to Making things according to the requirements If you want to stay, it’s ok, very easy way, simply you Click here and your character will be Selected by clicking on the arrow The character has been selected, first you did your This locket was selected here and now here But now you have to do one thing here You have to click this which you can stock here It is written, you have to click on it and From here you drag rectangle above it Click on the drag rectangle After clicking, you press Control You have to do it from the keyboard and this is how it works The more area you want to use, the more accessories You have as much area as you want to make outfits You have to select this area, it should be selected okay it’s selected and now here But you will find a tool like this one from Ext See this article by clicking here and keep the by default settings and Simply click on Extract And this is how you did it in an exclip After doing this you click on accept okay guys this is so much work Now what you have to do is that now you have But You have to click on the dots again and here you have to select the move tool from there or you also want to do it ok And now this is after selecting the move tool Look here this is what has happened What is its reason, why is it built here but it is made so that this area no this had also been selected so if so If these things appear in front of you then you will see such things The meaning is visible for example here This extra mesh is created here So you did not select this place okay so you just have to do this Select the area till the neck That’s right, I control it like this I’ll let it be because it’s done now We can’t do anything more with it now We have to do it like this, now we have to take it with us We’re back to our character creator inside so I click here I make the character absolutely straight and Let me zoom out and take a look Majeed if you adjust it a little with this If you want to do it then you can do it with the help of move tool you can adjust it and if you want to smooth it out So you can simply divide it into the following: was coming You have this geometry and by dividing it can you smooth it out ok like this So if you have this one then even if it is like this This goes for example if this ever happens to you If it is gone then you can do this one thing too You can shift here by going to the standard bush by holding down and reducing the brush size If you smoothen it here then this will happen to you The mesh which was created, this mesh slowly It will slowly start to end okay So let me go, okay, I’ll do it this here but increase the size of and and shift We can end it here by pressing ok give it So it would have been better if you had turned on symmetry But if you didn’t do it before, you won’t do it now We still don’t do it because now a If it happens on one side then put it on the other side spoil it further I will give it to you okay guys so this is fine this is ko hi Like the high neck, it is of that type Once it’s done, let’s go, okay, this and this adjust it a little bit are according to the shape of its neck I think it’s okay to tamper with it further I don’t do this with this and this once divide it again and a little bit let’s smooth it out okay so now I’ll just I will do it sir, I press my hair. sorry, let me press control and zoom it out I do it and now You have selected the shirt and this shirt is fine The shirt is selected and now you clicked on lt and clicked on all sorry Here But And where did it go? Click here. ok and continue with this and that is yours You can update it here now Do the same with the locket that you had made You can also buy neck pendant for neck by first selecting the shirt in this way You can export it by clicking on All. I have to give it back in the character creator okay and after that you have here his rather that She has also come along, it’s okay, thankfully she too It has come together, okay, so see this This was such an easy method to make an outfit here here we have tried to make it so many times Here is a shirt for this in simple way have you made it or have you made a top or whatever you can also say this ok now its your turn Now comes the option to apply textures on it So the method for applying textures is He When we apply textures to the character You will learn the method to do the character Just a little bit of adjusting the textures If we learn the method then our outfits or accessories will suit them How to apply your textures above Or you can also know the method to edit it It will be detected automatically and with the same method You have also tried to match the textures of your outfits. Is it okay to apply or do you want to make it so by the way These things are ours which are in our next lecture I hope that there will be a discussion inside it today Within a short time of the lecture you have you would have learned a lot of things that You probably never got this much results with this method before I could not learn from the beautiful and easy method yes hello guys i hope you You will be fine today after a long time I am uploading the lecture, first of all I will tell you I am sorry to everyone and I regret this thing that I was missing for quite some time in this matter There was a reason for this, although there were many There were reasons but one reason which was common to you and me It was very useful to everyone I was looking for one thing And finally I found textures end something related to the material that our How is it going to be very useful It’s going to be useful, you’ll know it now The hard work of our days is our few It is going to merge within seconds How do you see now our previous The lecture was on making custom accessories and outfits module thi ka lecture four tha Today we have detailed working on taxes and I just found something related to this First, I’ll show you my A project that The final time we made it character we open it The interesting thing is that now you can do this in Photoshop. There is absolutely no need to go also this is basically for cartoon characters if you are making cartoon characters so its best for them Here we have a skin preset We have both available for mail as well We have also added skin presets for females. We have to apply it on this and we have to use Adobe There will be no need to go inside Facebook There is a need to work on taxes You won’t need it but I will tell you both methods I will tell you how to do it if you have Do you want to work hard and do cartoons? You are working specifically on characters as you can see our cartoon This is just a character, this is not realistic We did a lot of tinkering with its muffs I have done the changes so let me show I will provide this thing to you One thing you have to do is message me pay taxes Both of these we Apply to any one if the character is female So apply it for a female character if there is mail then our character is on mail If there is mail then we will pick it up and just drug and Let’s drop it at the end here No changes need to be made, it will remain by default give and apply give it to ok guys You can see our character cartoon it’s done exactly now here on top of it There are many things that you will do at this time I can’t see like her eyebrows here we will bring that and moreover We will apply the rest of the things on top of this. Like hair and the things I told you about You will find those that have been provided You are provided with a content manager loan premium content all things inside it you will find it okay then I will go into it I’m here and now I’m going to go to the hair First of all in the group, we are eyebrows If you apply eyebrows on top of it our character If it’s a cartoon, then we will draw these eyebrows on it You can also apply this much realistic stuck and dropped is not an issue it is done Now we of this applying bed on top I’m gonna drag and drop it Its right above you can see that our The total look of the character should change Just these three things have to be applied From eyebrows hair which is your sorry skin which It was preset and apart from that its bed end must Both were in the same group, okay Now apply hair on it I come in here and this is done by dragging and dropping it on top of it Are So it’s a bit like Disney style Our characters are like that, It’s done, okay, so pretty much its look Change has happened, now one thing comes on top of it that is the texture of its eyes Where will you get them, I will tell you this I will provide inside what I have you here Now I am providing you the template AI as well I’ll do it okay this is the mail and this For females then stag and drop it on this Do not click on replace here You have to click on Material Only here have to do it okay keep this in mind now see Can you first imagine what kind of character we have? was and is now our It has totally changed now when we work do its which we custom its mean shirt We will work on what was created here If you work on its textures then You will see a lot of effects because right now its over his shirt There is no tax applicable of any kind the shirt here we have a necklace like this yes it happens he made this okay so this There are two things that we have to work on now There is no need to work hard, simply You have to go and search here PBR textures so this is pbr which is textures Take note of this website which is pb.com There are lots of textures here for free It is available to you here Now we have the fabric which is taxed here ok to look for There is Cloth and Fabric, click on it And now here are the textures you like. yes you just have to get it from here okay then I go to the next page and these ones look good to me I’ll take it and it’s good here He has told me to download every texture set on this website well here this thing is very important okay this See A I Have Texts Sets for Unity Unroll Engine and Many Others for the Users off bander maya 3ds cinema 4d sketch fb And more choose BL file from here You have to download the BL file which is there. This is a z file, you can download it Take Like it will be downloaded on the open folder Click to open it Take these and you can use all the textures drag and drop it outside here so now This is one of the things that we work on normal map and the other one is this diffuse this is it okay you should have seen these two first What you need to do is that you have entered the character creator I want to come back, make sure that your the shirt is selected not selected If yes, then double click and select it After that come to the modify panel here click on above text and see this a layer of it is formed here now this which This is the base color, above this you have But these ones Drag and drop textures here Have to apply it over the base color, okay it’s done And now this one, which is the normal map, you here But here you have to drop the dragon on the bump okay over here and like dragon drop If you do this then it will ask you whether it is a bomb or not If it is normal then you have said normal, normal, but normal You have to click on it, it’s ok, you have to do it ok And as soon as you click on normal You can see that you have a lot of Details can be seen on the map which It is basically for details ok to create the details If it happens then you can do it in the same way from this website Who metal is metals okay go into it and You can see any metal from here, You have to download the texture and On which you have to drag and drop Here is the necklace we made okay above so now i will delete it here I am doing it so I told you the method So you can see that you can also see the roughness in it giving details are also visible and You can also see the luminance on top of it. yes everything is visible ok good Now, we come to those things which We have accessories and outfits lying around related to okay good one thing here And now we have to do it To this its did not deform the skin Deforming is very easy because Unless we deform the skin This shirt does not merge with the character’s body Now I will tell you how to select its character I will do it and you will see it by changing its pose Let me show you so you can see the edited post and here I am He did it automatically yes he did it automatically this is very good it was good when we We created the character inside G Brush and When I brought him here, he automatically removed the skin deformed or it could be that I did it in the previous lecture I don’t remember if you guys you guys see In that lecture if I saw skin deformity if you did it then you would know the method If not, then he did it automatically you don’t have to do this thing okay And if he didn’t do it, for example he washed his skin It does not deform your skin the thing is your shirt is properly animated If it is not happening then you have modified the panel I want to come here at Etuber Ettringite You have to keep it and apply it, see this is the default If you want to keep it and apply it on the skin The shirt that you have with you is made of skin it will deform with ok So let us now come to what we have We have assets lying around which are shirts and the paints are lying there we kissed them If you want to use it this way then I am going to download it from here I will delete it and now I am back To my content manager, which I have provided you with provided to the people and here come the shirts in clothes People to whom I provided this file I didn’t do that for them with the Animation Pro Pack. You must have given the file, please check it There are shirts lying inside it too With the same method you can just drag and drop okay and now we will give this one to you Just pick up any shirt from here and that’s it drag and drop it here It looks fine like this on the scrap tati Watch as the drag and drop according to the skin according to her body I am absolutely fit, no extra effort We don’t need to do this now in the same way we come into folders with paints go and from here this paint is on top of it I would have dag and dropped it it’s done and this is how we come in shoes and from here these shoes on this do drag and drop yes, our character is complete Is Now if you want to wear glasses then You can do that too, you should come here sir Back to Accessories inside here in the head and this is what we have accessories are here you’re getting a hat and more glasses so here we have sunglasses but let’s just drag and drop it onto it and if you wear these sunglasses a little bit want to do it in [music] Do you want to adjust it this way turn it up a little bit ok This is our character completed and I hope you will like it a lot and If you want to go into more detail about this and work on it you do it specially on sculpting and your You can do any kind of work according to your imagination You can make any character even I used these skin presets. Those cartoon characters of kids are complete like the cocoa melon inside you It appears that the beans are made like that I did not get the same quality but it was very better quality such that you We will watch our next lecture. We have also discussed the use of presets for this I put it inside, it didn’t have that much space for us Let’s remove the lecture from here Six because using presets It’s not that hard, just duck and drop It has to be done, okay so now we will move on moving on to our module four, in which we Create props and environment Fine Inside the Blunder If yes then the next module is interesting going to happen and to a large extent it is difficult for you people too But you might not have paid any attention to it If you want to see it then you will understand things well. If there is any confusion, I will go somewhere You should tell me what is the need and thank you so much good Now do one thing, that character Select it first and then save it go to file and then export as Avatar select this and by default All other settings and click on export do it And you can put this inside any of your folders where you created the character okay let’s keep this and save it now this is ours The character is all ready for animation 100% and inside iClone we have its animation but before doing the animation we will Environment of Props inside Blender so that the same environment of Props We prepare our character keeping this in front of us do animation well here I’m going to show you a I am going to talk about something which is very important for you It will be useful if you guys The animation seems a bit tricky So you want to avoid this problem and If you want to save your time then my I have a package, inside that package you will find You can also find my advanced animation course whatsapp2 characters will be found human Animal characters will also be available You will also find human characters Characters give you accessories and outfits and you can choose the one you like You can make changes, you will get the environment you will get the visuals After taking this package you will feel very happy You can start creating animations quickly and You can complete an animation in a day. where you have to spend weeks That’s where you can go to create an animation. An animation can be made in one day using the package By completing Details and demo description inside one You can view my website using the link There is a link, go there and you will see a total of three There are packages which you want to buy. You can buy three different packages with different prices and within them again According to the prices we have assets which are They are integrated so you can try the demo first see see details and after that if you If you are satisfied then you can say bye hey guys our module four is props and environment creation in blender today Our first lecture is introduction to Blender Now What is Blender a Software Do you know the purpose of 3D animation It is very famous for this, 3D is very common According to the developers this is the software Basically it is also used for 2D animation and also for 3d animation but mostly The developers at this 90 are doing 3d animation for 2d animation do not use it because its for 2d animation This is not considered so good 2d Many more for animation There are softwares, well our debate is that on top of our 3d animation so we’ve Using Blender for 3D Animation Purposes I have to do it now and you open it I will show you, do you have any version? If you have a blender then there is no problem for everyone The interface is more or less the same There is a slight difference in his tools It doesn’t happen much and you are using 3.2 Or 4.2 so I am using 3.2 because the donuts that are inside it are like Sketch Fap addon must be properly installed It was done and similarly the rest of the add ons are We use car for car rigging for animation or we can do it for simulation So he works quite well in it. If it is ok in comparison to 4.2 then I recommend it to you I will tell you to do the same thing which will previous version is ok So it has been opened so now you saw it It must have been like that once I opened it Again, let me show you, double it You have to open it by clicking and click on General You have to click here now a question has arisen It must be going on in your mind that we will how to install blender Organization View this Blender Me Search Do it simply with your blender and this blender mark came on in a minute you Simply search for Blur and see this Bander d and this is what it is right here The version you have is the latest version right now blender 4.2 okay bander 4.2 so you Blender You can install either 4.2 or 3.2 You can also get its previous version In this search it here get blender 3 Fifth note of musical scale 2 Okay, look, this is where I brought you. All these versions are coming from here This is ver 3.2 3.3 LTS is written I don’t know about it What do you mean we went so deep no never So you can download it from here You can see where you can download it There is an option for 3.2, it is fine, you can do 4.2 also. There is no issue, it is the latest version and I Install the advance I’ll give you and see. ok otherwise you can do 3.2 Well, I hope that most of you are on 80. developers they already have it well ours Our topic is relevant and it is Take a good look at the Blender interface Understanding Blender’s Introduction yes it is ok and use its tools in proper way to understand from so that inside this we can do modeling Do this and modeling in a very easy method Easy method and advanced method to make We can adopt a better method Now we will click on General, simply 2D Its on animation not on sculpin or vfa do it on general always you always do it like this and there are so many things to do here You can do this by holding down the left mouse button You have to keep it and select it and delete it Now you have to press its user interface The work area has become MT And here you see the lines below these are called grid lines okay And now let’s start from here Blender icon has appeared on the top menu bar you know that inside the top menu bar You always find the File menu in every software inside it is visible then there is edit What happens in the file is that we create a new Let’s create a project Already a project If it is ready then let’s open it Save the project and click on Shortcut commands are used: Control/S end control shift s to save a To save with a new name, click and Apart from this, Control O is already made OK to open the project and Along with this, their shortcut commands are also mentioned. is also gone and if we click on edit So here in the edit, whatever we need The thing that needs the most is that it is needed Whenever you change any settings within Preferences Installing New Plugin or New Addon if it is there then you should always have its zip file with you I need his rar file, you can have his zip file with him You must have the files available that plugin of the addon ok come on edit and you have to come to preferences and here Click on ads and install and Wherever that plugin has the requirement of that addon, By selecting the file you have You have to click on install addon and that is it the addon will be installed so I told you I told you that I will provide you advance are ok If yes, then you need to install them. If necessary, you can install it using this method okay it’s very easy and now after that Render is the render option we have at the end we use it whenever we have any After preparing the animation here, its I need to take a render and export it in mp4 or any other format After that the window will open a new window window or a new main window these things that we never need it here This is so that you can use your brain more there is no need for it here its okay and right now we Here is the layout and this is the modeling Look here we are inside the layout If you click on layout then you will see here But the timeline will be the show, okay and If you come into modeling then you will find the timeline below The timeline will not be shown when you see it then you will have to neatly see it when you Click on the layout and see the timeline This will be useful when you have the animation ready. You’ve done it and want to preview it okay you have to see the preview of it and Modeling then sculpting then UV What is the need of all this editing? Menus are used for a purpose when Slowly slowly we will move forward will do modeling inside this then after that If you apply textures on it then you will get you will understand everything okay and Now here you will find some more tools as well. Their base basic purpose is visible what is this selection tool To select any object it’s okay to move that thing sorry to move from center point this this is move tool world move tool it is called Four arrows are visible now suppose that I Let me add a mesh here, add a cube If I want to move this cube so it is important for me to have Select the move tool from the Move Tool Until I select I will not be able to move the object right left or up down I can’t move from such a center You can move it by holding it but If you want to move with accuracy then use this this way you can move it okay it’s three arrows point you towards three dimensions okay it’s three dimension of 3D The meaning is clear from here with these arrows three dimension up and down right to left And then after that this arrow is there Basically it is used for back and forth and if we take it this way, then this If there is right to left then it means three These things move inside the dimension she acts as if she is a realist happens in the real world and so on If you want to rotate it then use the rotate tool You have to select it and you can rotate it are from here and this is also ok and if You want to scale this object If you want to scale then look at this thing You have to understand if you see this side If you want to scale then look like this here You will grab the green one from this side of the scale It is happening and if you hold the blue one then go up is scaling towards okay and this If you hold it, it will be a scale in front and back right now you are not able to see the proper one that’s why because I changed its rotation There was a cube again and look here it’s red The scale is turning green from here to here is scaling from this side and Its height is above the blue one it is increasing ok so in the same way whatever other things are there There is no need to understand them here and now We delete it from here and Now we come to this side, this is what it is You are seeing this view here port view port shading is okay and it It is basically used to give you the final render to show that you have placed something here If you have made it then its final render if you I want to see you like me here once again here But if I add a cube then now for this cube I have not posted any material of any kind above It is okay if it has not been applied nor is it But do not add any kind of lights or light effects It is done so its final render is like this you look kind of tired is that okay If you want to see this a inside your tex mode that on top of it you Look at the materials that you have applied if you want then click here ok And if you want to see it in solid mode If yes then click here, it is correct so this is the difference and if the wire frame mode If you want to see inside then click here You mean the wire frame, inside it is like this Understand that wire frame means this that you can see its x-ray, is it okay So now after that there’s this little arrow here It is visible, if you click on it then This arrow is a transformation for this arrow here inside this arrow You mean that any object that you added is there any character lying here So you have calculated its location rotation and scale Or if you look at its dimensions If you want to customize then do it from here You can ok like this see its location Change is happening on X axis and Y axis this is happening on the z axis this is happening on the In this way its rotation is also changing so There are two methods for getting its rotation location And what is the method to scale it? First I told you from here that You can move it using the move tool from there You can rotate it with the rotate tool and here you can do this with the scale tool and so on Similarly you can also transform from here Even after coming inside its location is on x axis axis and z axis okay I mean that the one which You could see the arrows, I will show you right now Let me bring it into Y-frame mode and here But if we select it, look at this what is this this is the z axis okay and if This way you can’t figure out which is the z axis Which is the Y axis and which is the X axis If so, you can find out like this Object mode is available in Simply Modeling You have to come in and then go to your view port You have to come inside the shading and move from here move the red one by selecting the tool by selecting the move tool and moving it to this side If you move, it is telling you here Whatever these changes are within the access If changes are happening then it means that it is the same Access means getting an access so this is access if it is happening in If it is happening in the y axis then it means this one The green one is this axis and this one Our z axis is done, just like this Then you will know the rotation automatically that how many on the x axis x axis degrees it is rotated on this or that axis And on the z axis so now on the x axis It has moved and rotated 9.6 degrees sorry okay so after this other than that you just need to transform here but here you don’t get to see You can also see all these amazing tools I will meet you specially here to see you you get ads from here go to preferences and install it ok Now you can go to preferences and delete any I installed the addon so now here is my I have two addons installed, one is Sketch second rbc is ok and this is a third one as well this is a screen cast keys are ok so now whichever addon you want to install If you want to use it then simply click on that addon Click on it and activate it it was just a little work okay and now come this way Go here and you can see the layers like in any software For example I can add a cylinder here. when I do this then a separate layer of the cylinder is created Now you can remove these layers from here If you do modeling then it is possible that something If some models are mixed with the layers You have customized a specific model If you want to do it then you will have to know that one Specific means hiding the other model If you want to do it then you can hide it here and if you want to delete it So you can delete it by selecting it from here. You can also delete it by selecting it from here. can you do it okay so right now we have no No layers within any collection these things are lying here You will understand later what these are This base is used basically here right now You will need to specify the output properties for the render which it is showing here and layers The tool is showing the properties Here and you will find textured materials There is a tool for this that is being shown and the rest This is what it looks like inside the blender about the interface, about the tools and its later on when we model things Proper then you will understand very well that how things are designed inside it See how it’s animated Blender seems a bit difficult at first but when we are inside it well practise the basics If we understand then after that our If it becomes very easy for I would try to show you the blender It should be understood well so that DP can be understood You have to work inside it It should be easy for you even I I will tell you the process of modelling which I will tell you the method, it will be very easy You will feel as if it is really it was child’s play alright so now what we The next lecture is going to be basic modeling techniques so we will focus on this Guys we will debate, this is our module four Props and Environment Creation Blunder and Today’s second lecture is basic Modelling Techniques Basic Modelling Techniques Inn Blunders are now a days a part of understanding the basic techniques first think carefully about some things Understand do it like blender is a three dimensional the software is a D software and our This world is also a three dimensional world where we go up, down, left, right, and forward can move backwards If so, I will give you a simple example Now here you have created an environment we have to do it because our lecture is ours Module is basically what we have here We have to create an environment for the environment Anything could be inside here There might be a road here too There could be a forest as well as a city here There could be a small house here as well It could be a very big bungalow also It could be anything that is ours found in the real world okay So the method that I am going to tell you here You can make any kind of thing using this method You can do anything that you keep inside your house Do you see anything inside your room? if that too is lying there and you want to design it then you can also design it ok so now look inside blender we have here But if an environment needs to be created then So I will give you a small example The thing is that now we have started living our real life which is our three dimensional world inside We have to make something inside it Construction has to be done, let’s assume that We want to build a house so its construction To do this we need two things it occurs what are those two things first of all one skilled person who gives us that construction do it and we need it on second number You will need raw material like steel bars Cement Gravel Gravel and Also Bricks etc. bricks etc. come, okay and Apart from this, one more thing will be needed We must also have space on which to We have to do construction, i.e. a plot If we want then let’s go here first So let’s make a plot but look at the raw We get the material inside the blender itself. Now when it comes to a skilled person Who is the skilled person around you? Look around, who is there to guide you Infact you will do the construction yourself who wants to build something here You are a skilled person, you are a developer ok just follow my instructions and then you have to work further on it Later you will see to what extent you are capable in modeling you can go deep okay now here I am a I will take whatever plot there is, good one a one of the things in our previous lecture guys i skipped it was that we This interface, the user interface, we have called it How to rotate is the best way It was an important thing friend, how could I do it I can forget it so if you rotate it If you want to do it then see this from here with the mouse From here you can hold the left button and you can rotate it any way it’s ok You can see this everywhere in your real world. you are fine now we will move on to our second lecture If we continue then first of all we have to I want to take a plot here, I will go to add And let me add a plane here on the mesh. Now I understand the dimensions of this plane Take this and I have a five marla house here. I have a plot and on top of it If you want to construct then first of all this plane that whatever dimensions there are I need to know those dimensions Making according to 5 marla plot I will have to I go and search K How Meni fit yard by fit in one meter not yard Ok fit in five marla The plot is fine and now look at the five marla plot The square feet inside are so square meters ho so many square meters it fits okay so now here But we also have to see one more thing, how many fit in fi marla plot how Meni Feet just need to add one thing in leth and width f okay now let’s see 25 feet by It is 45 feet, okay, one of five marla If the plot is 25 feet wide and 10 marla then He will be 50 or 90, it’s simple and now Here we have to search for blender look inside us here now its go into transform as before I had told you about the dimension in this Aa G transform If you come in then here you will see the meters show You don’t get to see fit shows here If the meter were to show, now it would be interesting to see that 25 feet How many meters are there in it? Search here How do I move into the new tub? Meni Meters in m These 25 feet are 7.62 sir You have to get the meter from here copy and now come to blender and then later here you see now one thing you Each side also has its own width and length You can keep it this way or it depends on you if you want to keep it then keep it on this side now it is on this is going towards the x axis then this side is its width and this side is what is its length so now we have this no this thing needs to be added to the width okay Because there were more than 45 who were more fit Those varieties will come in length and those which are shorter It would be less, meaning it was 25 less than 45. so in which width will it come If we go then we have equalized 25 There are more meters built inside the meters 7.62 So now we add this to the width itself so if you want to do it then now turn this side a little bit let’s scale it up and see that it looks and Let’s see what changes happen here changes are happening in the y axis So now this is what we copied Let’s paste the value v in the y axis press it and then press enter, ok hey this will be the width of this and now we go it is here, now let us add it here 45 and 45 equals 13.7 166 which is in meters let’s copy these and now the dimensions We are here to give you access to your ex inside Let’s paste this and it’s done height sorry length ok So now there are two things that have been added here are its length and its width and height then will be When we do construction on it and it It depends on us how much height we have But how high do we have to go? construction has to be done, okay now this is our The plot that the guys have is ready. Now we have to do construction on it So the basic modeling techniques are These are the things that come inside and more There are also many things that I will do further I will tell you now the construction on this We need raw material to do this We get the raw material here mash Come and see, click on the add in the mash and This is all the raw material here, this is a total of eight Here you will find materials and meshes You can see raw meshes These ones in which there is a plane, a cube, a circle is u sphere is esu sphere is cylinder who is this toso is this torres now this is joe raw these are the material, these are the meshes, these meshes We go so deep inside and work we will modify them, we will customize them We will do that lying inside our house You can make anything you want ok so now look i will add it from here hmm for example a cube now this cube I want to learn how to modify first. It is important to model that I need a method to modify this cube Now modeling does not mean this that you placed a cube here and this cube gave it the shape of a brick and here I kept on applying it, I kept on applying it, it’s okay here And adding multiple things and modeling No, it doesn’t mean that you Modelling will come only when you can process this cube in this way value to this extent By then you will learn to customize this cube You can create anything using a single cube make it right here and see now First of all, to customize it What we need is for us We have to take this into edit mode until we We will not take it into edit mode If you cannot make changes to it then click here Look, we’re in object mode right now here. You will click on the small arrow and go to edit mode If you click on it then we have now come to Edit Now in mode, please understand this here my face, edges and what is inside it These are our faces, these are ours those ages have come and this is what it is When vertices come then edges face and tucks this A complete whole is made up of three things the object is created okay now look at this no this is what you see here What is this edges these are our vertices right this is the ones with corners, these are the vertex, these are the you can see these ones right now i am here I click on edges what is this this s okay these men should know these three things To select separate separate you have to first you have to go to them like ages If you want to select then first divide the edges into edges You will have to go here for the edges tool You will have to select it irrespective of your age I have to click on the sorry face If yes then your face has been selected what is a face or is there a face if there is a face then How many faces are there in total like laddu It has a grain of how many are there inside it There are six in total so one doti and this in a way there are three here as well so this is our total of three what is the face at this time and inside it what is this one is edges and what is this its vertices are correct so these edges are Catching up with Faces and Vertices we are here the object of any object on the We can modify it by doing a small thing Let me show you for example that I am making this cube I want to stretch it a little and make it longer I want its height from the corner If it increases a little, what will I do with it? First in this I will click on its vertices and then Then I’ll select this vertex and then I’ll take the move tool and move it to this side I will move it from here Its width is increasing, this scale Everything is going well from here and that’s how I do the control ji and I have to select from face and If I want to increase my face then I will increase my face I will select it and move it to this side with the move tool I will increase it ok now here we do it like this that everyone Let’s select the cube To and select the vertices on the right Let’s click and click on subdivide So as soon as I gave it to you, I divided it all up if I clicked then this is my cube multiple Multiple has been added inside the cubes Now what is the total number of cubes inside it? The cube has become four here, four there My total is inside eight cubes The object is divided like this So if I divide it further into sub-sections then now There are total 16 cubes inside this Majeed Cubes whatever is there has been added in it, okay In the same way, the more you do it the more you When do we need to divide everything? We need to divide when We have defined the object as any object A lot of customization is required inside it More changes have to be made I have to go deeper into it okay so then we have to divide it into sub It is neat but keep one thing in mind Keep in mind that you can hold any object as much as you want Everyone will keep dividing you more and more the heavier the object becomes When the object is heavy then your project If it also becomes heavy then again once again I will do everything If I divide it, I have done this much that I am fully in favor of the changes Look now Now as soon as I came into edit mode and opened everything If you divide then there are some fun tools here too I have it available to see here Now, out of these tools, whichever tool we need The one that will need the most attention is here from extrude this one extrude okay Now if I want to extract it I’ve always What is the meaning of extude happens inside anything, inside anything Anything is fine to increase the If you want to increase then you need to use Extude tool Now you will have to use Extude always You have to apply it, look above the faces click here this is a face and now I want to extract this fus face from here If I want to increase it then I have There are two methods, either I will press my e from your keyboard and then simply e Just press it and then do nothing After that you tracked the mouse a little towards this side If you want to do it on this side then do it from here it has been excluded ok execute it now this face is also done in the same way Do you want to execute the plus icon? You can also move this side of the mouse by clicking on it You can do it by holding the left button but The easiest method and the most professional one That is, select the face then press and this side ok here it is It is not important to execute the thing Select it, only then you will get selected is selected and the face is selected I have done it, even if you press and e it will still appear like this it will be done ok you have to execute it You won’t have to be neat to select but you You will select execute only when you Click on the plus icon and click on it you want to do okay one more thing here What is even more important is that as soon as you stop If you go here all the divisions will be added now you stay here i stayed here So he divided everything It is okay for him to stop here, now he has to do more If you divide it then you add all the divisions if you want to do it then you have to stop here when You have to make changes inside this face as well I have to bring it from here to this side, okay stop here and then do this a little I moved forward and selected this face and this way it went this way okay guys So these were some basic modeling techniques if If you understand it well then Doing the modeling inside Blender for you There is a lot of this and I hope that these things help you You must have understood that it is not that difficult it’s not that difficult okay so now what do we do Let’s do that now a new project is done here I make Sorry our next lecture is next We do all the rest of our work within the lecture itself. in which we will create a proper environment Will design, create props and model Various Props for Animation Guys Ours Module Four is Props and Environment Creation in Blender and our lecture today Lecture Three Creating Props Modeling various props for animation okay so joe We designed the characters Animate those characters inside the creator If you want to do it in any environment then I will create an environment here. Use a simple environment and this method While doing this you can use any kind of environment can you make it I added it here okay yes i have placed any dimension here there is design matter and then you pay attention to the dimension Keep that when you have someone company you are making it and giving it to For example, there is some such company which is related to house etc. architecture it provides services ok and inside it What is different to them is The maps of housing societies are have to build or have a house made inside D then you notice the dimension now what we need to do here is to keep If you want to build a small house here then So first we build four walls and for the four walls you know that here You have to take a simple cube and of The dimensions have to be changed and It has to be given the

    shape of a wall and add here You have to do it and after that its height We reduce it a little bit from here, keep it like this taking Now focus on one thing here. here at we go we are different because of this we get views Here in our wet pad we are working on the forest If you click, we can see this from the front showing okay this is how we When we click on to, it will show us from the bottom showing a little let’s click on five Majeed went to the bottom by clicking on Sen so it’s showing us this from the top view We have to see it from a different view If you use it then you can click on it If you do it with a damp pad, you will see this from the top it’s from the top angle okay so from the top angle After watching you can adjust it here. have to take accuracy With and this I think this is okay and this is how you do it now Do this by taking the move tool and holding Control C and control and can If yes then it has been copied and after copying it to this side also a wall here Make it ok and control it again in the same way c and control b take it and now its rotation If you want to change it then I will do it The rotation is shown here changes from and I’ll move it this way here and now I’ll shorten it here so ok now again control c and The control and this side are also marked fine Now look here are our four walls It has become what it is, but now it is here what we have to do in this place is that a Making the gate We have to make a door through which people can go out as well If possible, select this cube Then we will go to edit mode and click on right By clicking we will divide everything and then Later you will divide everything again you will divide it okay And then again they will divide everything now You did not want to take it out from the center If it is there then check in the center which one is here What is there is becoming a friend 6 sa 89 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 a friend’s 6 years and eight this one is the one in our center If it becomes possible then what should you do that you have to select the face from here And in this way it selects all the faces you have to take it and press delete and then end click on the vertices yes sorry it’s this one okay so it’s cut right down the center it’s done and this is our path here It has been built from where we can get out yes the green gate is ready okay now we have done it here But basically construction has to be done here now But we want to build a proper small villa If you want to build a house then again the same method is here We take a cube from the top and now we take a cube from the bottom Let’s make a cube Subdivide Subdivide subdivide it happened so much that it We can make full changes in this go to object mode and first you Locate it carefully at its place give and sorry his group has been formed with him [Appreciation] Let’s go to object mode and then click on add Let’s go and add a cube here. and first give it a location are here But we have set its location and now we go to edit mode subdivide yes i think this is enough okay and now what do we have to do guys we have this The faces below are all select them. You have to select all of these by pressing shift We do You should select it from all sides all the faces are This is done now you do this with the scale tool take the and scale it from here like this Look at this and move it a little downwards do it here like this it’s ok like this So this is done and now you come here again and again Only if you practice will you learn things well you will understand that you have done modeling inside this how to do it how to work in it Is Now this thing that I’m making, it Basically I’m building a futuristic building it happens right, it stays here okay now By pressing shift, select as many faces as you want yes, let me select these as well and now I I press E to execute and just a little bit of it out I will take it out, that’s it, it’s okay and now again I Press shift from here And select these faces. I take it, press e and now these I have to put a little bit inside here I press shift again and the one here I will also select the faces and make them a little let me take it out from here ok see it’s done So I’ll make it a little bit easier Ok inf now i do it like this in object mode go huh see this is a futuristic little thing Our building which has been constructed now I here i do it like this I’ll take one from here the cylinder and this cube that I put on top I’ll pick it up from here and I’ll take the cylinder I scale down I right click and click on Shat Smooth If I click it, it will become very smooth Already happened With the damp pad I selected the intake and the top from view its showing me this so i have tried this Place it in every corner by giving it a perfect location. have to give Now let’s do this so that this cube select then press shift and select these cylinders And now we’ll place them down here like this Are Now let’s select this cube in edit mode I go now here’s one thing I’m going to do in my in your mind according to your own mind Create your own concept here I’m living in a futuristic building so you Always look at any reference before doing anything If you want to make it then it will be easy for you to make it You will know what you really are when you are not aware that If you are making it then you are proper till then If we cannot work in this way then now we will do it like this Let’s do a good job of making a selection here There is also another method, from here If you click on Select Less then you will see this You can make the selection in this way by seeing this See the whole selection from this center it has already happened look look it’s okay and now I Let me take the move tool. Okay, now let’s extract it. And if we do this with the move tool then what is the difference between that and extract If we move it then what is the difference and If we move it with the move tool, what is the difference then if you do it with move tool then it will This is how you do it Look at the rest of them who are also edges will mix it together and make it exactly one it’ll make a slope it’ll make a slide okay But if you exude, then only The area you have selected Only that much area of ​​yours will go upwards. and now I want it to go up from here What should I do then if the slope is towards that now I want to grab the scale tool from here Having more do it this way okay and now I I do it from here And now I’m going to move it this way I’ll scale it I think it’s enough, it goes into object mode so this is my little futuristic The building is as it is without any concept that it has already been made so when you look at the reference If you want to make it then you have to make it using this method only So it will be very easy for you to make it now see One thing has to be understood here that If we have to apply tax on it then First of all to apply for tax We have this base that we have, we have used it We have to select the base, we have selected it have to do it and I want to come to the material here okay and I have to click on new sorry I have to come on this

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • CorelDRAW 2021: Power Tools, Features, and Productivity Tips

    CorelDRAW 2021: Power Tools, Features, and Productivity Tips

    Roger Wambolt, a Senior Product Trainer at Corel, delivers a session exploring the capabilities of CorelDRAW 2021. The presentation covers various components of the CorelDRAW Graphics Suite, such as CorelDRAW.app and Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021. It goes over the interface and features, including the Welcome Book, workspaces, the new document dialog box, and the Pages docker. Moreover, the training discusses importing and exporting, working with templates, object selection and alignment, shaping, the crop and knife tools, interactive tools, transparencies and lenses, and the power of PowerClip. The presentation also explains many types of creative effects available and how to customize the CorelDRAW experience.

    CorelDRAW 2021 Study Guide

    Quiz

    Instructions: Answer the following questions in 2-3 sentences each.

    1. What are the primary applications included in the CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021, and what is the main function of each?
    2. Describe the interactive property bar in CorelDRAW. Why is it also referred to as the context-sensitive property bar?
    3. Explain the purpose of dockers in CorelDRAW. How can you access and manage them within the software?
    4. Outline the different workspaces available in the Welcome Book. Which workspace would be most beneficial for users migrating from Adobe Illustrator, and why?
    5. When creating a new document, what considerations should you take into account regarding the rendering resolution? How does it impact performance and file size?
    6. Describe the autofit feature in CorelDRAW 2021. How can it be used to adjust page size to fit the content on the page?
    7. Explain the multi-asset export feature in CorelDRAW 2021. How does it streamline the process of exporting multiple objects in various formats?
    8. Describe the differences between “copy” and “duplicate” in CorelDRAW. Why is “duplicate” generally recommended?
    9. Explain how the “Alt” key and “Control” key can be used to make selections.
    10. Describe the process of creating a cut line around a raster image.

    Quiz Answer Key

    1. The CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021 includes CorelDRAW (vector illustration and page layout), CorelDRAW.app (online graphic design via the web), Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021 (raster manipulation), Corel PowerTRACE (bitmap-to-vector conversion), Corel CAPTURE 2021 (screen capture), and Corel Font Manager (font exploration and management). Each application serves a distinct function within the broader graphic design workflow.
    2. The interactive property bar, or context-sensitive property bar, is located below the standard toolbar and dynamically changes based on the tool selected in the toolbox. It provides additional functionality and options specific to the active tool, offering a streamlined workflow.
    3. Dockers are panels within CorelDRAW that provide additional tools and functionality, such as object management, effects, and more. They can be accessed via the “Windows” menu under “Dockers” or by clicking the dockers icon, allowing users to turn them on or off as needed.
    4. The Welcome Book includes workspaces like Light, Default, Touch, Illustration, Page Layout, and Adobe Illustrator. The Adobe Illustrator workspace is designed for users migrating from Illustrator, as it places tools in familiar locations, easing the transition to CorelDRAW.
    5. When creating a new document, the rendering resolution determines the quality at which lenses and transparencies are rendered. For large-format prints, a lower resolution (e.g., 96 dpi) can speed up rip time and decrease file size without significant loss of quality.
    6. The autofit feature adjusts the page size to fit the content on the page by creating a margin around the selected objects. It streamlines the process of resizing the page to match the artwork, ensuring a perfect fit.
    7. The multi-asset export feature allows users to export multiple objects in different formats and resolutions simultaneously. This is found by opening up the Export Docker via the Windows menu. This is a faster way to generate assets for web and print from a single document.
    8. “Copy” creates a temporary file in the Windows clipboard, potentially bogging down the system with temp files. “Duplicate” (Ctrl+D) creates a copy directly within the document, avoiding temp files and improving performance, so it is the recommended method.
    9. Holding down the “Alt” key while clicking allows you to select objects layered beneath other objects, “digging down” one level at a time. Holding down “Control” will allow you to make selections within a group of objects.
    10. A cut line can be created around a raster image in CorelDRAW using PowerTRACE. Convert the image to vector using outline trace, reduce the colors to a minimum, set the option to not delete the original, and then use the boundary tool on the resulting vector object to create the cut line.

    Essay Questions

    1. Discuss the importance of workspace customization in CorelDRAW. How can users tailor the interface to enhance their productivity and workflow efficiency?
    2. Explore the capabilities of Corel Font Manager and its integration with CorelDRAW. How does it simplify font management and selection for graphic design projects?
    3. Compare and contrast the various interactive tools available in CorelDRAW, such as blend, contour, envelope, extrude, and drop shadow. How can these tools be used to create unique and visually appealing effects?
    4. Analyze the role of PowerClip in CorelDRAW for creating layouts and designs. How does PowerClip facilitate the placement of objects inside containers, and what are its practical applications in graphic design?
    5. Evaluate the significance of PowerTRACE in converting raster images to vector graphics. How does PowerTRACE benefit designers working with logos, illustrations, and other bitmap-based assets?

    Glossary of Key Terms

    • Vector Illustration: Graphic design using mathematical equations to create images that can be scaled without loss of quality.
    • Raster Manipulation: Editing and modifying images composed of pixels (bitmaps).
    • Bitmap: An image composed of pixels, with resolution limitations when scaling.
    • PowerTRACE: CorelDRAW’s tool for converting bitmap images into vector graphics.
    • Docker: A panel in CorelDRAW that provides access to various tools, settings, and features.
    • Workspace: A customized arrangement of tools, menus, and palettes in CorelDRAW tailored to specific tasks.
    • Rendering Resolution: The resolution at which lenses and transparencies are rendered in a document.
    • Autofit: A CorelDRAW feature that automatically adjusts the page size to fit the content on the page.
    • File I/O: File input/output, referring to the processes of importing and exporting files.
    • Multi-Asset Export: A CorelDRAW feature for exporting multiple objects in various formats and resolutions simultaneously.
    • Object Docker: A docker that displays and manages the objects within a document.
    • Marquee Select: Selecting objects by dragging a rectangle around them with the pick tool.
    • Grouping: Combining multiple objects into a single unit for easier manipulation.
    • Shaping: Modifying the shapes of objects using tools like weld, combine, and simplify.
    • Virtual Segment Delete Tool: A tool for quickly deleting segments of lines or curves.
    • Interactive Tools: Tools that create dynamic effects, such as blends, contours, and drop shadows.
    • Blend: A tool that creates a smooth transition between two objects.
    • Contour: A tool that creates a series of outlines around an object.
    • Envelope Tool: A tool that distorts objects by manipulating their outlines.
    • Extrude: A tool that creates a 3D effect by extending an object into depth.
    • Drop Shadow: A tool that adds a shadow effect to an object.
    • Transparency: Making an object partially or fully see-through.
    • Perspective: Creating the illusion of depth and distance in an image.
    • Artistic Text: Text that is treated as an object, allowing for more creative manipulation.
    • Paragraph Text: Text contained within a frame, suitable for larger bodies of text.
    • Variable Font: A font with adjustable parameters, such as weight, width, and slant.
    • PowerClip: Placing an object or group of objects inside a container.
    • Graph Paper Tool: A tool for creating grids and tables.
    • Power Trace: The process of converting a raster image to a vector image within CorelDRAW.
    • Scripts and Macros: Automated sequences of commands that can be executed to perform repetitive tasks.
    • Pointillizer: A tool to create pseudo halftone effects.
    • Workspace Customization: Tailoring the CorelDRAW interface to suit individual preferences and workflow.

    CorelDRAW 2021 Training: Features, Techniques, and Productivity

    Okay, here’s a detailed briefing document summarizing the key themes and ideas from the provided transcript of a CorelDRAW 2021 training session.

    Briefing Document: CorelDRAW 2021 Training Session Review

    Source: Transcript of CorelDRAW 2021 Breakaway Session presented by Roger Wambolt, Senior Product Trainer at Corel.

    Overview:

    This document summarizes a training session focused on CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021, highlighting new features, interface elements, and time-saving techniques. The session covers a range of topics from basic interface navigation to advanced features such as PowerTRACE, multi-asset export, object manipulation, shaping tools, effects, and workspace customization. The presenter, Roger Wambolt, emphasizes productivity and ease of use for both new and experienced CorelDRAW users.

    Key Themes and Ideas:

    1. CorelDRAW Suite Components:
    • The training begins by outlining the core components of the CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021.
    • CorelDRAW (Vector illustration and page layout)
    • CorelDRAW.app (Online graphic design)
    • Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021 (Raster manipulation)
    • Corel PowerTRACE (Bitmap to vector conversion) – Part of CorelDRAW
    • Corel CAPTURE 2021 (Screen capture utility – Windows only)
    • Corel Font Manager (Font exploration and management)
    • “in CorelDRAW Graphic Suite 2021 it includes CorelDRAW which is vector illustration and page layout; CorelDRAW.app is an online graphic design interface via the web; Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021 is for raster manipulation or editing bitmaps; we have Corel PowerTRACE, which is part of CorelDRAW itself and it, allows you to convert bitmaps to vector objects; Corel CAPTURE 2021 is a screen capture utility, and I should point out that it’s only available for Windows; and, then finally we have the Corel Font Manager with uh giving you the ability to do font exploration and it’s a management tool allows you to create collections and that sort of thing.”
    1. Interface Navigation and Customization:
    • The session provides a detailed overview of the CorelDRAW interface, covering the menu bar, standard toolbar, interactive (context-sensitive) property bar, toolbox, page navigation, status bar, color palette, and dockers.
    • Emphasis is placed on the context-sensitive nature of the property bar, which adapts to the selected tool.
    • Dockers provide additional functionality and can be accessed through the Windows menu or a dedicated icon.
    • “Now let’s take a look at the interface from the top we have a standard drop down menu across the top where you find most of the commands below that is a standard toolbar or button bar and it includes some of the more common features such as new document open print import export and that sort of thing below that is the interactive property bar also called the context sensitive property bar as it changes depending on the tool that you select within the toolbox and it gives you more functionality to these tools”
    1. Welcome Book and Workspaces:
    • The Welcome Book offers quick access to new documents, recent files, templates, learning resources, and the Corel Store.
    • Multiple workspaces are available, including Light, Default, Touch, Illustration, Page Layout, and Adobe Illustrator (designed for Illustrator users transitioning to CorelDRAW).
    • “Now let’s take a look at the Welcome Book now the welcome book is located this tab right here if this by chance isn’t opened up you can go to your help menu down to welcome screen and in here we have the get started now get started allows you to start with a new document you can continue editing when you’ve previously edited or recently edited”
    1. New Document Features:
    • The “New Document” dialog box includes options for naming the document, selecting presets, specifying the number of pages, choosing single-page or multi-page view (a new feature in 2021), and setting the primary color mode and dimensions.
    • Rendering resolution affects the quality of lenses and transparencies. The trainer advises lowering this for large format prints to reduce rip time and file size.
    1. Autofit Feature:
    • The Autofit feature automatically adjusts the page size to fit the content, allowing for margin adjustments.
    • Objects on master layers are not affected by Autofit.
    • “now one of the other features that we’ve added in 2021 is the autofit I love this feature I’m going to deselect the everything on the page you’ll notice my interactive property bar shows my page information here this icon is referred to as autofit so what i’m going to do is I’ll click on the autofit icon and here I can set up a margin”
    1. Pages Docker:
    • The Pages docker facilitates editing multi-page documents with single-page and multi-page views.
    • Users can rearrange pages by dragging them within the docker.
    • Objects can be moved between pages by dragging them in the docker.
    • “now let’s take a look at the Pages docker the Pages docker gives you the ability to easily edit multi-page documents from the windows menu I’m going to go down to dockers and I’ll select pages now within the Pages docker I have the ability to do a single page view I can do a multi-page view”
    1. File I/O (Import/Export):
    • The training covers importing images, with options for external linking, high-resolution output (for OPI servers), resampling, and cropping.
    • CorelDRAW 2021 introduces multi-asset export, allowing users to export multiple objects in various formats (JPEG, GIF, PNG, PDF) with customizable settings.
    • “so i’m going to import an image i’ll click on my import icon alternatively i could have done a control I or file import and i’m going to bring in this image here one thing I want to point out here is bottom right hand corner on the import icon i have a drop down here i have the ability to import this i can import it as externally linked i can import as high res for output provided i’m using an opi server in this case i am not and that’s why it’s grayed out i also have the ability to resample and load or crop and load”
    • “one other new feature that we’ve added to CorelDRAW 2021 is the Multi-asset export to access the Multi-asset export from the Windows menu I’m going to go down to dockers and I’ll select export”
    1. Templates:
    • Creating new documents from templates is simplified with the “New from Template” option in the File menu.
    • Templates provide a head start on designs.
    • “so new from template or templates as I mentioned very easy to create new documents based on a template it’s simply a matter of going to the file menu and selecting new from template and what this is going to do is it’s going to open up a template dialog box in here we can see that I have my templates I can also select all templates and with all templates selected we’ll be able to see the templates that are provided with the software”
    1. Object Docker and Selection/Alignment:
    • The Object docker provides a visual representation of objects within the document, allowing users to turn visibility on/off and lock objects.
    • Selection can be done with the pick tool (single click or marquee select).
    • The tab key cycles through objects in the order they were created.
    • Alignment tools (T, B, L, R, C, E) are used to align objects.
    • The Alt key allows “digging down” to select objects underneath others (e.g., in a stack of objects). The control key allows selection of multiple elements within a group.
    • “now I mentioned the uh Object docker. Object docker is a docker that parks on the right-hand side as most dockers do and in here I can see elements that are within the document here we can see I have a number of pages if I wanted to I can select this icon and that’s only going to show me the elements that are on this one particular page I can change pages up here as well and one thing you’ll notice if you’re a user of older versions of krill draw we enhance this quite a bit in CorelDRAW 2019 where we now have a visual representation of the objects that are on screen”
    • “selecting and aligning objects so selecting of course is done with the pick tool i can single click on an element and that will select that i’ll do a ctrl z to undo that if i left click and drag it’s what we refer to as a marquee select so i’m going to marquee select this area and you can see that i can actually take this and pull this aside now if we have objects grouped together i don’t need to do a marquee select it’s simply a matter of single clicking and moving that element”
    1. Copy vs. Duplicate:
    • The presenter strongly recommends using “Duplicate” (Ctrl+D) instead of “Copy” (Ctrl+C) and “Paste” (Ctrl+V) to avoid creating temporary files that can slow down the system.
    • The “Duplicate” function can remember the distance for duplication.
    • Ruler origin can be reset by dragging from the intersection of the rulers.
    • “so copy versus duplicate i usually recommend that users do duplicate rather than copy when we do a copy of an element i want you to watch my cursor i’m going to do a ctrl c to copy and you’ll notice that my cursor turned to a little blue circle spinning circle it’s actually called a throbber but what was happening there it was taking the content from that image and copying it to the windows clipboard to do that it creates a temporary file watch my cursor once again when i do a ctrl v to paste that back in again i got that circle back it was reading from the temp file and it was dropping it into my document for me now the problem with that is that we end up building up a lot of temp files on the system”
    1. Shaping Tools:
    • CorelDRAW provides various shaping commands (Combine, Weld, Simplify) to modify objects.
    • The Shape tool allows for corner rounding, chamfering, etc.
    • Shaping commands are based on the last object selected.
    • The Freehand tool can create straight lines (with Ctrl key for constraints) or freehand curves.
    • “so let’s talk a little bit about shaping now shaping in CorelDRAW is done of course with the shape tool there’s also a number of different shaping commands so if I select this rectangle you’ll notice on my interactive property bar at the top there’s some some things i can do with this I can change the type of corner rounding on this so for example if I grab my shape tool now I can change this to a chamfer let’s go back to the rounded corner”
    1. Crop, Knife, and Virtual Segment Delete Tools:
    • The Crop tool crops selected areas. If nothing is selected, it can delete the entire design.
    • The Knife tool splits objects. It offers options for two-point lines, free lines, bezier curves, overlaps, or gaps.
    • The Virtual Segment Delete tool removes segments. Holding the Alt key allows marquee deletion.
    • “i’m going to show the crop tool now so in my toolbox i have a couple of different tools here i’m going to grab the crop tool i’ll left click and drag and i will double click that’s going to crop this out but you’ve noticed that it’s gotten rid of the entire design this is actually a common call that we used to get on the support line the reason it did this is because i did not have anything selected”
    • “the next tool i want to show is the knife tool and with the knife tool i’m going to tap my space bar marquee select this get my knife tool back and you’ll notice on the knife tool setting on the property bar i have the ability to do a two-point line i can do a free line i can do bezier a number of things here i also have the ability to set an overlap or a gap now if i’m doing a vinyl for windows and i want to span a couple of window panes then maybe i want to do a gap to allow for the aluminum uprights in there if i’m doing embroidery and i want to create a split front then i’ll want to go with an overlap”
    • “virtual segment delete tool we used to have to take a circle if i wanted to cut a piece out of this circle i would have to convert the circle to curves i’d have to add nodes break the nodes apart break the entire thing apart and then delete that element with the virtual segment delete tool it made it much much easier i can draw a line across here i’m going to grab my virtual segment delete tool and then simply click on this line here and that will delete that and then of course i can select this line and delete it and so i’ve cut the top off”
    1. Interactive Tools (Blend, Contour, Envelope, Extrude, Drop Shadow):
    • These tools provide interactive effects.
    • The Blend tool creates a smooth transition between two objects. Blend objects have control objects that determine their color.
    • The Contour tool creates multiple contours inside or outside an object (useful for creating applique designs).
    • The Envelope tool distorts text or objects. Double-clicking a node removes it.
    • The Extrude tool creates a 3D effect.
    • Drop Shadows include regular drop shadows and inside drop shadows (new in CorelDRAW 2020).
    • The Block Shadow tool creates a block shadow effect, which can be broken apart.
    • “i’m going to show you some of the interactive tools within CorelDRAW now i’m going to right click and i just want to make sure that i have lock toolbars deselected that then will allow me to click and hold and i can grab the gripper bar at the top and pull this toolbar right out so this gives me the ability to bring the tools out at hand and this is just to start to customize the interface so if i use these two little tools a lot i don’t want to have to go digging through that i can bring them out on screen the first one i want to show is a blend and i simply left click and drag and so i’m blending from one object to the next”
    • “select this element and then I’ll click on extrude and this now allows me to pull this back and i can change my vanishing point to wherever i want to zoom in a little bit and in the interactive property bar at the top there’s a number of different features”
    • “the inside drop shadow and this is a new one we added in 2020 with this one i simply click and drag and that will create a shadow for me”
    1. Perspective:
    • CorelDRAW 2021 adds the ability to draw in perspective (not covered in detail in this session).
    • Perspective can be added to bitmaps via the Objects menu.
    • “in CorelDRAW 2021 we’ve added the capability to draw in perspective I will not be covering that here you’ve already seen that in the in the previous presentation but uh I do want to show you perspective with bitmaps that we’ve recently added to CorelDRAW”
    1. Text (Artistic and Paragraph):
    • CorelDRAW supports both artistic and paragraph text.
    • Artistic text is created by clicking on the page and typing; paragraph text is created by dragging a text frame.
    • Text can be fit to a path using “Fit Text to Path” (either right-click and drag or Text menu).
    • Variable fonts allow for modifying font parameters.
    • “in CorelDRAW there’s two types of text we have artistic text and paragraph text they’re both created using the same tool so on the left-hand side in the toolbar I’ll simply click on my text tool and now if I click on my page I can type artistic text to create paragraph text with the text tool selected it’s a left click and drag and i create a paragraph text frame now in this frame if i was to right click for example i can insert placeholder text and that will give you a visual representation is what this is going to look like”
    • “one more thing on text is variable font support and that’s relatively new in CorelDRAW as well so with variable fonts you have the ability of changing certain parameters of that font with the font selected and let me just move my page over to this side with the font selected i’ll click on this icon it’s a drop down with all the different properties that i can change for this piece of text now this particular font has quite a large number of variables that i can modify most pieces of variable text that i’ve seen or most fonts that i’ve seen will typically have one two three or four options that you can play around with”
    1. Corel Font Manager:
    • Corel Font Manager allows users to explore and manage fonts, create collections, and use watched folders.
    • Fonts don’t need to be installed to be used (reducing system slowdown).
    • Fonts can be filtered by various criteria.
    • “let me just bring up Corel Font Manager and in chrome Font Manager you’ll notice that i have libraries on the left hand side i have a number of filters here on my toolbar across the top i have the ability to create what we call a watched folder now a watched folder is a folder that’s located on your hard drive and any font that you put in there the Font Manager will pick up on and we can make use of that you no longer have to have the font installed in order to be able to use it in fact if you look on the right hand side fonts that have the green bar are fonts that are installed those that have the yellow bar they’re not installed”
    1. Clipart:
    • Clipart is accessed through the Connect Content docker.
    • Users can add their own clipart collections (local or network).
    • “clipart is very easy to access so to access my clipart i’ll go into the connect Content docker i already have that open so I’ll click on that and in here you can see we have a add the clipart up here i have the ability to search so just type in horse and very quick it’s found a number of images that have horse as a keyword to use that of course simply click and drag and i can bring that in on the screen and then make use of that of that image”
    1. PowerClip:
    • PowerClip allows users to place objects inside containers (text, objects, etc.).
    • Right-click and drag is the recommended method.
    • Containers can be centered, and their contents can be edited.
    • PowerClip can be used in conjunction with the Graph Paper tool to create effects like murals.
    • “gives me the ability to take an object or group of objects and put that inside a container now this container can be a piece of text it can be an object or a group of objects I’m going to select this bitmap image I’ll right-click and drag and left the mouse button go and power clip inside it’s as easy as that a lot of people will go to the objects menu and do power clip there I find this quite a bit quicker”
    1. PowerTRACE:
    • PowerTRACE converts raster images to vector images.
    • “Group by color” is important for vinyl cutting or screen printing.
    • Color reduction and editing are possible in the PowerTRACE dialog box.
    • PowerTRACE can be used to create cut lines around bitmap images.
    • “so power trace allows you to convert from a raster image to a vector image i’m going to start with this one here and if i go to the trace bitmap menu i can also access this from the bitmap menu as well but we have it on the interactive property bar so much quicker to access from here i’ll click on the drop down go to outline trace and then i’ll select clipart this opens up my powertrace dialog box i’m going to make that full screen”
    • “with this image I’ve often been asked how do I take a bitmap image and create a cut line around it so I want to do a print cut solution I need a cut line around this easy way to do that is within power trace I’m going to go to outline trace again I’ll select clip art and here what I’m going to do on the colors tab I’ll reduce my number of colors right down so I’m going to bring that down to about three or four colors”
    1. Bitmap Handling (Cropping, Resizing, Resampling):
    • Be aware of the difference between cropping with the Shape tool (soft mask) and the Crop tool (permanent). Convert to Bitmap after cropping with Shape tool to make it permanent.
    • Rotated bitmaps can increase rip time; convert to bitmap to resolve.
    • Resizing images by dragging the sizing handles only changes the visual footprint, not the actual bitmap size. This can lead to increased file sizes and printing times. Convert to bitmap to reduce the bitmap size.
    • CorelDRAW 2021 integrates bitmap upsampling (previously BenVista PhotoZoom).
    • “customers will import bitmap images click and drag to size them the way they want them put them on their screen maybe they’re doing a uh a catalog of sublimatable items that you create so you’ve got 25 bitmap images on a page that you’ve imported resize down and then you go and print it and you wonder why it’s taking so long to print when you resize an image down in this manner by using the shaping handles take a look at the resolution down below you’re not reducing the size of the bitmap itself you’re only reducing the visual footprint of it”
    1. PHOTO-PAINT Labs (Cutout Lab, Image Adjustment Lab):
    • PHOTO-PAINT includes labs for advanced image manipulation.
    • The Cutout Lab removes backgrounds.
    • The Image Adjustment Lab adjusts temperature, saturation, brightness, contrast, highlights, shadows, and midtones.
    • “i’m going to select this image here I’ll right-click and I’ll select edit bitmap now this is going to launch PHOTO-PAINT for me um now I’ll maximize the screen and from the image menu I’ll go down to cutout lab this gives me the ability to remove the background”
    • “next is the image adjustment lab so I’ll select this image right click and select edit bitmap and let’s maximize PHOTO-PAINT and now from the adjust menu I’m going to Image Adjustment Lab”
    1. Distressed Effects:
    • A distressed effect can be created by converting an image to grayscale, adjusting the tone curve to intensify blacks and reduce whites, converting to black and white (line art), and then setting the fill to white and the outline to nothing.
    • “effect now this can be done with a raster image i find that rusted metal this is an old piece of weathered wood maybe a photograph of ripples on a a swimming pool stuff like that work quite well what i’m going to do is i’ll start off by resizing this image to completely cover my artwork now from the bitmap menu i’m going to go down to mode and i want to select grayscale next i’m going to go to my effects menu down to adjust and i want to bring up my tone curve”
    1. Non-Destructive Effects:
    • CorelDRAW (from 2019 onward) supports non-destructive effects (applied to both bitmaps and vectors).
    • Effects can be turned on/off, edited, and reordered.
    • Object styles can be created from bitmap effects and applied to other objects.
    • “new to quell draw 2019 we’ve added the ability to create non-destructive effects these effects can be applied to both bitmaps as well as vector so i’m actually applying bitmap effects to a vector object”
    1. Art Styles:
    • Art styles (Acrylic, Neon, etc.) can be applied to objects through the Effects menu. These effects are fairly processor intensive.
    • “styles are a lot of fun to play with if I go to my effects menu down to creative and in here I have art style now there’s a number of different art styles that we have available to us first one is smooth acrylic these effects are fairly intensive and there is a control within tools options that I can have it use GPU processing as well to improve the speed of that”
    1. Scripts/Macros (Color Swatch Creator):
    • Scripts and macros can automate tasks.
    • The Color Chart Creator macro creates color swatch documents based on open color palettes. This script only works with color palettes that are currently open.
    • “down to scripts and then run in here under macros in i want to select color chart creator and i’ll click run once again in this dialog box when i hit the drop down you’ll see i have a number of palettes in here these are the palettes that i’ve just opened up as well as my document palette across the bottom so i want to select this palette here i can add a date printer information i can also set the spacing i’m going to bring that spacing down to two i can put an outline around each color i don’t want to do that and i’ll simply click ok and as you can see it’s created the document for me”
    1. Pointillizer:
    • The Pointillizer effect creates pseudo-halftone patterns.
    • Patterns can be based on circles or custom shapes (e.g., for creating cross-stitch patterns).
    • “i want to show you one more with this process so I’m going to select this clipart image under shape you can see I have circle I also have custom I’m going to select custom I’ll click on select and I’ll click on this it’s just a piece of text I created with the letter x and I’ll apply so I’ve taken this clipart image and I’ve now created a cross stitch pattern”
    1. Custom Color Palettes:
    • Custom color palettes can be created from a document or selection (Windows Menu -> Color Palettes -> Create Palette from Selection).
    • “from time to time you’ll want to create a custom color palette based on a document or a selection i’m going to select this element and then from the windows menu i’ll go down to color palettes and then create palette from selection so very quickly it’s brought the dialog box i’m just going to call this flower and i’ll click on save and what that’s going to do is it’s going to create a custom color palette for me and it’s docked over here and this is based on the colors that are in this particular file”
    1. Workspace Customization (Keyboard Shortcuts, Toolbars):
    • Workspace customization is a key feature for productivity.
    • Keyboard shortcuts can be customized (Tools -> Options -> Customization). The presenter uses customized shortcuts for page navigation, wireframe, and grouping/ungrouping.
    • Custom toolbars can be created by dragging commands onto the screen (using Ctrl+Alt+Left Click).
    • Workspaces can be exported and imported (for sharing or upgrading).
    • “I want to talk about I briefly mentioned this at the beginning is learn.corel.com this is our Discovery Center and it’s here where you can access all sorts of items things such as tutorials so there’s tutorials for graphics, for PaintShop Pro, VideoStudio that sort of thing you’ll also find a Q&A series this is a Q&A series for CorelDRAW as well as a PaintShop Pro so when we get customers sending us questions or common questions that come in through the support line we have videos on here that will take you through the Q&A of that you’ll find a link for free stuff we have regular contests in here that you can enter with your artwork support as well as community so it’s a great place to visit it’s easy URL to remember it’s learn.corel.com”
    • “from time to time you’ll want to create a custom color palette based on a document or a selection i’m going to select this element and then from the windows menu i’ll go down to color palettes and then create palette from selection so very quickly it’s brought the dialog box i’m just going to call this flower and i’ll click on save and what that’s going to do is it’s going to create a custom color palette for me and it’s docked over here and this is based on the colors that are in this particular file”
    1. Learn.Corel.com (Discovery Center):
    • learn.corel.com is the Corel Discovery Center, offering tutorials, Q&A series, free content, contests, support, and community resources.

    Conclusion:

    The training session provides a comprehensive overview of CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021, covering both fundamental and advanced features. The presenter emphasizes the importance of customization and efficient workflow techniques to maximize productivity within the software. The session highlights several new features in the 2021 release, making it a valuable resource for both new and experienced CorelDRAW users.

    CorelDRAW 2021: Frequently Asked Questions

    Frequently Asked Questions about CorelDRAW 2021

    • What are the main components included in the CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021?
    • The suite includes CorelDRAW (vector illustration and page layout), CorelDRAW.app (online graphic design), Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021 (raster editing), Corel PowerTRACE (bitmap-to-vector conversion), Corel CAPTURE 2021 (screen capture, Windows only), and Corel Font Manager (font exploration and management).
    • How can I access learning resources and templates within CorelDRAW?
    • The Welcome Book (Help > Welcome Screen) provides access to “Get Started” tutorials, recently edited documents, templates (File > New from Template), workspaces, learning materials (learn.corel.com), the Discovery Center, and the Corel Store for purchasing content like applications, plugins, and fonts.
    • What’s new in the New Document dialog box in CorelDRAW 2021?
    • The New Document dialog box now includes options for single or multi-page view. You can specify the name, preset, number of pages, page view, primary color mode, and dimensions. You can also set the rendering resolution, which affects how lenses and transparencies are rendered. Lowering the rendering resolution for large format prints can decrease the file size and speed up rip time.
    • How does the Autofit feature work in CorelDRAW 2021?
    • The Autofit feature (found in the interactive property bar when no objects are selected) allows you to automatically adjust the page size to fit the content on the page with a specified margin. It does not affect elements on master layers.
    • How can the Multi-asset export feature in CorelDRAW 2021 help me export assets?
    • The Multi-asset export docker (Windows > Dockers > Export) allows you to select multiple objects and export them in various formats (JPEG, GIF, PNG, PDF) with individual settings (resolution, transformations). You can duplicate assets with different settings and add assets with existing settings for streamlined export.
    • What is the difference between copying and duplicating objects in CorelDRAW, and which is recommended?
    • Copying (Ctrl+C, Ctrl+V) uses the Windows clipboard, creating temporary files and potentially slowing down the system, and it is therefore not recommended. Duplicating (Ctrl+D) creates a copy directly within CorelDRAW, remembering the distance and is the recommended practice to prevent build up of temp files.
    • How can I customize my workspace in CorelDRAW for increased productivity?
    • You can customize keyboard shortcuts (Tools > Options > Customization > Commands), move interactive tools out for closer proximity and export the workspace (Tools > Options > Workspace > Export) to share with other designers.
    • What are the benefits of using Corel Font Manager with CorelDRAW?
    • Corel Font Manager lets you explore, organize, and manage fonts without needing to install them in Windows, preventing system slowdown. Fonts that are not intalled have a yellow bar and fonts that are installed have a green bar. You can create collections, use watched folders for automatic font detection, and filter fonts within CorelDRAW based on your collections.

    CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021: A Quick Overview

    The CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021 includes several components:

    • CorelDRAW is for vector illustration and page layout.
    • CorelDRAW.app is an online graphic design interface accessible via the web.
    • Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021 is for raster manipulation and editing bitmaps.
    • Corel PowerTRACE is part of CorelDRAW and converts bitmaps to vector objects.
    • Corel CAPTURE 2021 is a screen capture utility, available only for Windows.
    • Corel Font Manager allows font exploration and management. It helps create font collections.

    The CorelDRAW interface consists of the following:

    • A standard drop-down menu at the top.
    • A standard toolbar with common features like new document, open, print, import, and export.
    • An interactive property bar (context-sensitive) that changes based on the selected tool. It provides more functionality to the tools.
    • A toolbox on the left-hand side. Tools with a small triangle in the bottom right corner have additional tools underneath.
    • Page navigation in the bottom left corner to move between pages.
    • A status bar at the bottom to indicate what is selected and provide information about that item. The right-hand side of the status bar shows the fill and outline.
    • A color palette on the right-hand side, set up based on the color mode of the document.
    • Dockers on the right-hand side that offer additional tools and functionality. Dockers are accessible via the windows menu or by clicking the icon.

    CorelDRAW: Vector Illustration and Bitmap Conversion

    CorelDRAW is used for vector illustration and page layout. Corel PowerTRACE, which is included with CorelDRAW, allows for the conversion of bitmaps to vector objects.

    Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021: Raster Manipulation and Editing Bitmaps

    Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021 is used for raster manipulation or editing bitmaps.

    CorelDRAW has features that allow a user to work with bitmaps:

    • PowerTRACE converts bitmaps to vector objects.
    • Bitmaps can be imported.
    • CorelDRAW 2021 has added the capability to add perspective to a bitmap.
    • Bitmaps can have effects applied to them.
    • Bitmaps can be cropped.
    • CorelDRAW allows a user to up sample bitmaps.

    PHOTO-PAINT labs include:

    • Cutout Lab to remove backgrounds.
    • Image Adjustment Lab to modify image properties such as temperature, saturation, brightness, contrast, highlights, shadows, and midtones.

    CorelDRAW Interface Overview

    The CorelDRAW interface includes:

    • A standard drop-down menu at the top of the interface where most of the commands can be found.
    • A standard toolbar that functions as a button bar, which includes common features such as new document, open, print, import, and export.
    • An interactive property bar, also known as a context-sensitive property bar, that changes depending on the tool selected within the toolbox. It gives the user more functionality for the tools.
    • A toolbox on the left-hand side has tools, and any tool with a small triangle in the bottom right-hand corner indicates that there are additional tools underneath.
    • Page navigation in the bottom left-hand corner, which allows the user to go backward or forward a page, or to the end of the document. The user can also click on specific page tabs to go to that specific page.
    • A status bar located at the bottom provides an indication of what is selected and gives information about the item. On the right-hand side of the status bar, the fill and outline are shown, allowing the user to see them when an object with a fill and outline is selected.
    • A color palette on the right-hand side that is set up based on the color mode of the document.
    • Dockers on the right-hand side provide additional functionality and tools. Dockers are accessible from the windows menu down to dockers, or by clicking on the icon.

    CorelDRAW Customization: Workspaces and Keyboard Shortcuts

    CorelDRAW has several customization options.

    Workspace customization options include:

    • The user can export and import workspaces. Workspaces can be shared. Workspaces from CorelDRAW x7 and forward can be imported.
    • The user can customize the interface by turning features on and off.
    • Commands that are used often can be added to a custom toolbar. To add a command, hold the control and alt keys down while left-clicking and dragging the command onto the screen.

    Keyboard shortcuts can be customized. Go to tools, options, and then customization.

    • To customize, select commands, then the menu where the command is located. After selecting the command, a shortcut key can be assigned.
    • The user can assign single keyboard shortcuts.
    The Power Behind CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021 | Full Tutorial (90-min)

    The Original Text

    Welcome to this breakaway session entitled the  power behind CorelDRAW my name is Roger Wambolt   and I’m Senior Product Trainer  at Corel. During this session,   we’ll be discovering some of  the powerful tools and features   that are available in CorelDRAW 2021 so  without further ado let’s get started. in CorelDRAW Graphic Suite 2021 it includes  CorelDRAW which is vector illustration and   page layout; CorelDRAW.app is an online  graphic design interface via the web;   Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021 is for raster manipulation  or editing bitmaps; we have Corel PowerTRACE,   which is part of CorelDRAW itself and it,  allows you to convert bitmaps to vector objects;   Corel CAPTURE 2021 is a screen capture utility,  and I should point out that it’s only available   for Windows; and, then finally we have the Corel  Font Manager with uh giving you the ability to do   font exploration and it’s a management tool allows  you to create collections and that sort of thing. Now let’s take a look at the interface  from the top we have a standard   drop down menu across the top  where you find most of the commands   below that is a standard toolbar or button bar  and it includes some of the more common features   such as new document open print import export and  that sort of thing below that is the interactive   property bar also called the context sensitive  property bar as it changes depending on the tool   that you select within the toolbox and it gives  you more functionality to these tools speaking   of the toolbox down the left-hand side are your  tools any tool that has a little triangle in the   bottom right hand corner that’s an indication  that there’s additional tools underneath that   looking down at the bottom left hand corner and  let me just do an undo on that bottom left hand   corner we have page navigation this allows me to  go back a page i can go forward a page i can go to   the end of the document or i can click on specific  page tabs go to to go to that specific page   below that is the status bar and the status  bar will give me an indication as to what i   have selected and give me information about that  item on the right hand side of the status bar we   show the fill and outline so if i had an object  selected that has a fill and an outline i’ll be   able to see that there looking at the right hand  side we have our standard color palette this is a   color palette that is set up based on the color  mode of the document itself so this one for   example if i do a mouse over one of the colors i  can see that this is actually an rgb color palette   to the left of that we have dockers now dockers  give additional functionality there’s additional   tools in the dockers dockers are accessible  from the windows menu down to dockers and   you can see them all listed here another way to  access those is by clicking on this icon here   and it will show me a list of all the dockers and  i can just turn on and off the ones that i want all right let’s move on to my next page next we  have the Welcome Book now the welcome book is   located this tab right here if this by chance  isn’t opened up you can go to your help menu   down to welcome screen and in here we have  the get started now get started allows you to   start with a new document you can continue editing  when you’ve previously edited or recently edited   this is what i refer to as give it a try and so in  here you can actually click on these icons they’ll   launch an application they’ll launch a document  and give you some steps on how to use some of   the things within it below that we have open  document so if it’s not a recently edited document   you’ll be able to come down here and open  that document you also have new from template   next we have workspaces within the workspaces  tab there’s a number of different workspaces we   have the light workspace default touch workspace  for those that are on the road and maybe using   a tablet or something like that and then we have  some specialty workspaces illustration page layout   and Adobe Illustrator now the Adobe Illustrator  workspace is designed to make it easier for   those who use Adobe Illustrator and want to  migrate over to CorelDRAW so we put the tools   in a familiar spot for you make it easy  to use we have the learning where you have   different tutorials in here and access to  different content we also have in here our   discovery center and you can access that from  learn.corel.com and finally the store and the   store is where you’re going to be able to access  purchases that you want to make for software   we have applications there’s plugins maybe we want  to purchase fonts and that sort of thing you’ll   also notice that I have something called free and  this is where you get the free content that comes   within CorelDRAW so things such as the fonts uh  various textures fills bitmap fills as well as the   clipart to access any of this content it’s simply  a matter of clicking on the pack that you want   and simply click on download it’s as simple  as that okay let’s go back to our next slide   now let’s take a look at the new document dialog  box so from the file menu i’m going to select new   in the new document dialog box we have a spot  for the name the name is what’s going to appear   in your title bar at the top there are a number of  presets i can dictate how many pages I want this   new document to be i can also select either  page view as a single page or multi-page   and this is new for CorelDRAW 2021. here’s my  primary color mode and this will dictate what   color palette is appearing on the right-hand side  and under dimensions there is a number of preset   page sizes that I can have access to I also have  the ability to create a custom page size and then   my rendering resolution now just a little point  about the rendering resolution what that is is   the resolution at which lenses and transparencies  get rendered out as and so if you’re doing a large   format print let’s say you’re doing a banner that  is maybe 48 inches long and you have a piece of   text on that with a drop shadow that drop shadow  is going to get rendered out at 300 dpi something   like that I would probably recommend bringing  that down to 96 dpi you’re not going to lose any   quality and what it will do is it will speed up  the rip time for you and decrease the file size   when you’re saving this file out I’m going to hit  cancel on this and we’ll move to the next slide now one of the other features that we’ve added in  2021 is the autofit I love this feature I’m going   to deselect the everything on the page you’ll  notice my interactive property bar shows my   page information here this icon is referred to as  autofit so what i’m going to do is I’ll click on   the autofit icon and here I can set up a margin  now i’m going to set up a margin of an eighth   of an inch rather than trying to figure out what  the decimal point is for that i’m just gonna go   one divided by eight and then i’ll select autofit  now it created the page it autofit the page it did   not take this into consideration simply because  this is on what we refer to as a master layer   and i’ll talk a little bit more about that in a  moment so it’s a great way to take an object or   take a design and shrink the page or stretch  the page to fit the actual content on screen   now let’s take a look at the Pages docker  the Pages docker gives you the ability   to easily edit multi-page documents from the  windows menu I’m going to go down to dockers   and I’ll select pages now within the Pages docker  I have the ability to do a single page view   I can do a multi-page view and  with the multi-page view I’ll just   zoom out a bit and you can see that I have my  multiple pages set up here for this particular video within the multi-page within the multi-page  view I have the ability to dictate the layout   whether I want it as tiled I want vertical  horizontal or maybe I want to do a custom   layout of the pages themselves I can also dictate  how many columns and the spacing between columns   so if I was to drop this down by one  then this is going to refresh itself   and it will give me seven columns across now  another nice thing about it is that I can select   any of the pages within the docker itself that  then becomes the active page you’ll notice the   active page the page number is in blue one  other really nice feature about dealing with   the Pages docker is if I had an object on the  page and I want to move it to a different page   then I simply need to click and drag and  that object will now be on this next page   so it makes it very easy to edit across pages I  also have the ability to sort the pages or reorder   them so in the docker I can select a page click  and drag and move it to a different location and   thereby reordering my pages now let’s take a look  at file i o with file i o or file input output   we talk about importing and exporting so i’m  going to import an image i’ll click on my import   icon alternatively i could have done a control  I or file import and i’m going to bring in this   image here one thing I want to point out here  is bottom right hand corner on the import icon   i have a drop down here i have the ability to  import this i can import it as externally linked   i can import as high res for output provided  i’m using an opi server in this case i am not   and that’s why it’s grayed out i also have the  ability to resample and load or crop and load   if i selected crop and load for example  it’s going to allow me to crop this image and then I’ll simply click ok and it will bring  this image in now here I can simply left click my   mouse button which will drop it in place at full  size i can hit enter it’ll center it on the page   or spacebar for original position I can also  click and drag and dictate what size I want   this to come in at and so there’s my my image  importing now one other new feature that we’ve   added to CorelDRAW 2021 is the Multi-asset  export to access the Multi-asset export   from the Windows menu I’m going to go  down to dockers and I’ll select export   in the Export docker I can select an image and  then click on this icon here which will add that   to my export list here we can see it’s picked up  the name based on the name that i’ve given this   in the object manager and here I can see that  I have the ability to change this from jpeg   to gif to png or pdf I’m going to select png  for this under the settings I have the ability   to set the settings for the png and of course  there’s different formats of png or different   flavors of png in here under the transform I  can set my resolution so if I wanted to use this   on a web page something like that I might want  to drop this down to 96 dpi and I can click ok   now here I have the ability to duplicate this  and what that will allow me to do is it will   put another copy of the alamo here and I’m going  to change this and I want this as a gif image   I’ll leave the settings as default I also have the ability to add an asset  with these settings so if I selected this   image here and I clicked on I’m going to  go with png add asset with the settings   it’s going to add the greek runes to this with  the same settings as the png for the alamo   so if I had multiple objects selected I can select  these objects I can come down here and I can add   these objects to my export list as well and now  it’s simply a matter of clicking on export all and   what this will do is it will export these files  out to a folder that I’ve already set up in here   now that I have the images exported I can open  up the folder where I’ve sent them to and we can   see that I have my images in here so I have the  jpeg the png and then these other png’s as well   all right let me close this docker  off and we’ll go on to the next page so new from template or templates as I mentioned  very easy to create new documents based on   a template it’s simply a matter of going to  the file menu and selecting new from template   and what this is going to do is it’s going to  open up a template dialog box in here we can   see that I have my templates I can also select all  templates and with all templates selected we’ll be   able to see the templates that are provided with  the software and this allows me as I say to get a   head start on creating a design so I can scroll  through here I can select a specific template   if I want to see these thumbnails larger then  I can certainly do that just sliding this open   a bit and then it’s simply a matter of clicking  on the open and start to work with that template now I mentioned the uh Object docker. Object  docker is a docker that parks on the right-hand   side as most dockers do and in here I can see  elements that are within the document here we   can see I have a number of pages if I wanted  to I can select this icon and that’s only   going to show me the elements that are on this one  particular page I can change pages up here as well   and one thing you’ll notice if you’re a user  of older versions of krill draw we enhance this   quite a bit in CorelDRAW 2019 where we now have  a visual representation of the objects that are   on screen so for example if I select this flower  you can actually see it in the Object docker also in here I have the ability  to turn that visually off   or I can lock it and do a number of  other things within the Objects docker okay selecting and aligning objects so selecting  of course is done with the pick tool i can single   click on an element and that will select that  i’ll do a ctrl z to undo that if i left click and   drag it’s what we refer to as a marquee select so  i’m going to marquee select this area and you can   see that i can actually take this and pull this  aside now if we have objects grouped together   i don’t need to do a marquee select it’s simply a  matter of single clicking and moving that element   if we take a look at grouping for those that are  relatively new to CorelDRAW and that term grouping   if you visualize taking a bundle of pencils and  putting an elastic band around it you still have   your individual objects but they’re tied together  with something so grouping basically allows you   to tie objects together all right let’s take  a look at another way of selecting elements   i’ll select this ellipse and if i use the tab  key it will cycle through objects in the order   they are created so i’m going to select the cyan  tab i’ll select my green tab yellow and i’m just   hitting the tab key each one here’s magenta and  then finally i’ll go with purple now aligning   objects is very easy as well so with this object  selected i’m going to hold my shift key down   and i’ll start selecting these objects i’m  going to select the red object last and now i’ve   selected the red object i want to align these so i  can align the top with t b for bottom l for left r   for right c for center and e for even so very easy  to align objects so if i had something like this   over here i would marquee select these elements  and then tap the letter l for left alignment   and it would do that for me now two more things  i want to show you about selecting elements   first i’m going to take this cyan ellipse i’ll  make it larger in fact i’m going to make it cover   the entire image i’m holding the shift key down  and that’s going to resize from the center out   now i want you to watch in my Object docker over  here if i hold the alt key down and i click right   here it has selected the green element if  i click again i have my yellow my red my   and and then finally the purple element so  selecting with the alt key down we refer to that   as a dare key and it allows you to dig down one  level at a time each time you click an advantage   or a situation where you might use that is you’ve  got a bitmap on screen with a lens over top of it   maybe there’s some text on top of the bitmap  and then the lens and you want to edit the text   without having to move the lens  you can simply use the alt key   now another keyboard shortcut that  helps with selecting is the control key   so i’m going to take this element and do a shift  f2 to zoom into it now with the control key held   down i’m going to start clicking on some of these  elements within here you’ll note that my sizing   handles are round dots so i’ll click here and  i’ll simply with the shift keyhole down as well   i’ll select some of these elements and so very  easy to select elements within a group using   the control key one more thing you can use  the control key for is in the color palette   if i hold the ctrl key down and click on a color  it’s going to add 10 percent of that color each   time i click on it so each time i’m clicking  it’s adding 10 percent more red to that element   i can go and click on a bit of orange and change  the color of that so 10 is added each time i   click on a color within the color palette with  the control key held down one more thing about   the color palette is if i click and hold on  it you can see that i have an array of colors   that i can use and these are based on  hsl or hue saturation and lightness   let me just move out to my full page  and let’s move on to the next page   so copy versus duplicate i usually recommend  that users do duplicate rather than copy   when we do a copy of an element i want you to  watch my cursor i’m going to do a ctrl c to   copy and you’ll notice that my cursor turned to a  little blue circle spinning circle it’s actually   called a throbber but what was happening there it  was taking the content from that image and copying   it to the windows clipboard to do that it creates  a temporary file watch my cursor once again when i   do a ctrl v to paste that back in again i got that  circle back it was reading from the temp file and   it was dropping it into my document for me now  the problem with that is that we end up building   up a lot of temp files on the system there’s  other processes that will build temp files as   well such as printing and importing and exporting  but temp files excessive temp files can really bog   down the system if i was to draw an analogy it’s  like hair and a drain it just plugs it right up   now usually what i recommend is ctrl  d and that would duplicate the element   if i select this hold the ctrl key down to  constrain it move that over i’ll do another   ctrl d and you can see it’s duplicating and  it’s remembering the distance that i used   let me show you one other thing i’m going to  marquee select these and delete them we’ll   do this once again so i’ll do a ctrl d and you’ll  notice on the interactive property bar this is an   inch wide by one and a quarter high this is the  position based on the zero zero coordinates of   my rulers now if i want to change the zero zero  coordinates of the rulers let’s say i do laser   engraving and i want my zero zero to be top left  simply clicking in the intersection up here drag   this out i’ve now reset my rulers to zero zero  being top left so i’m going to select this element and you can see I’ve duplicated that let me do a  ctrl z I’ll duplicate that again and now in here   I’m going to click plus one inch because  that’s the width of it plus uh 3 16.   3 divided by 16 and hit enter so that has now  created a copy of that 3 16 of an inch apart   and if i keep hitting the ctrl d it will create  an array for me i’ll marquee select these ctrl d   and it’s 1.25 so in here I want to go minus 1.25  minus and I can mix and match units of measure   so here i want to go one millimeter and I’ll  hit enter so these are a millimeter apart and   control d and it will remember that so if  you want to do for example you’re doing a   name plates and cravings some name plates and  your name plates are three quarters of an inch   by two inches or inch and a quarter by three and  a half inches whatever they might be you create   those rectangles duplicate them into an array  cut that out to make your jig and then simply   put that in the engraver create your document  and you’re ready to go so it’s a great time saver   all right let’s talk a little bit about shaping  now shaping in CorelDRAW is done of course with   the shape tool there’s also a number of different  shaping commands so if I select this rectangle   you’ll notice on my interactive property bar at  the top there’s some some things i can do with   this I can change the type of corner rounding on  this so for example if I grab my shape tool now I can change this to a chamfer  let’s go back to the rounded corner   and now if I hold the shift key down  and select the yellow object as well   I have two objects selected now my interactive  property bar is changed here I can do a combine   and a combine will create a knockout where the  objects overlap i’m going to do a control z to   undo that I’ll do another control z I’ll select  the yellow object first hold the shift key down   select my blue element and then hit combine  and you’ll notice that they’ve changed blue   so shaping commands are based on the last  object selected let me do a ctrl z for   this and now with the shift key held down I’ll  click weld and think of machine shop metal shop   welding two pieces of metal together they become  one and that’s basically what we’ve done here I’m   going to do a ctrl z and the final one I want to  show is simplify so selecting these elements i’ll   click on simplify and that acts as a cookie cutter  and it cuts down below so I can move this element   out of the way and you can see that it has cut  out of the red it’s also cut out a little yellow   I’ll select my yellow i can move that aside and  that’s actually cut out of the red let’s just go   ahead and i’m going to move this back here now one  more thing with respects to shaping and freehand   drawing and that sort of thing dealing with  curves i’m going to grab my freehand tool and if   i do a single click and move my cursor someplace  else it will allow me to create a straight line   if I hold the ctrl key down it will constrain that  on 15 degree increments of course i can change   that in tools options but for now I just want to  point out that if I left click now it will lock it   in place you’ll note that my cursor is a downward  pointing arrow if I left click now it’s actually   going to join to that element i’ll click over  here a second click and then I can click up here   and that will end that off i’ve now created  a solid shape but I can then give a fill   i’m going to tap my space bar now the space bar  here’s another little tool tip the space bar   will actually toggle back and forth between  your pick tool and the last tool selected   so if i have the rectangle selected and i draw a  rectangle i tap my spacebar it goes back to the   pick tool that allows me to move elements around  or select other elements okay I’m going to show   you some other stuff with the freehand tool so  i’ll click on my freehand tool I’ll left click   drag down here i’m going to double click  i’ll double click over here in this spot   up here as well and then finally i want to move it  do i get that pointed arrow and I’ll single click   now if i grab my shape tool and I marquee  select this on the interactive property bar   I can convert these lines to  curves and now with the shape tool   i can come over here and zoom in a little bit and  I can actually move these curves into position   and this is a typically how you would recreate  a logo or redraw a logo by by grabbing these   elements and move them into position I’m just  doing this very quickly to give you an idea   now i’m going to tap my spacebar I’ll come back  over here and I’ll grab my freehand tool again   and again I’m just going to do this very quickly close that off grab my shape tool and  marquee select this convert to a curve and then I will move these into position   tap the space bar I’m going to do a control d to  duplicate that and i’ll just move this down here   it’s not accurate but you get an idea now if i  marquee select this i’m going to give them all   a color and if you remember combine creates  a knockout where objects overlap i’ve now   combined that and we now have created this shape  again let’s do it on f4 to zoom out to my page   and i’m going to move on to my next page i’m  moving back and forth on pages and i’m using   number one and number two on the keyboard i’ll  explain why later on when we get to the end of   this session and i’ll show you some other ways in  which you can save a lot of time in design work   okay i’m going to show the crop tool now so in  my toolbox i have a couple of different tools   here i’m going to grab the crop tool i’ll  left click and drag and i will double click   that’s going to crop this out but you’ve noticed  that it’s gotten rid of the entire design   this is actually a common call that we used to  get on the support line the reason it did this is   because i did not have anything selected so let me  just do a control z to undo i’ll tap my space bar   i’ll marquee select this element tap my  space bar again gives me back my crop tool   and now when i crop i can double click and it  will crop out from what i have selected and this   is typically the way you would want to do it now  the next tool i want to show is the knife tool   and with the knife tool i’m going to tap my space  bar marquee select this get my knife tool back and   you’ll notice on the knife tool setting on  the property bar i have the ability to do a   two-point line i can do a free line i can do  bezier a number of things here i also have the   ability to set an overlap or a gap now if i’m  doing a vinyl for windows and i want to span a   couple of window panes then maybe i want to do a  gap to allow for the aluminum uprights in there   if i’m doing embroidery and i want to create a  split front then i’ll want to go with an overlap   i’m going to set my overlap for this design at  quarter inch and that’s simply a matter of left   clicking and dragging hold the ctrl key down  to keep that constrained when i let the mouse   button go you can see it’s actually cropped it  for me now if i marquee select this area here   i’m going to move this straight down you can see  that i’ve created a bit of it let me move that   down a little bit more you see that i’ve actually  created an overlynch a 1 8 overlap for this   let me just move that back into place temporarily  all right so the next thing i want to show is the   virtual segment delete tool we used to have to  take a circle if i wanted to cut a piece out of   this circle i would have to convert the circle  to curves i’d have to add nodes break the nodes   apart break the entire thing apart and then delete  that element with the virtual segment delete tool   it made it much much easier  i can draw a line across here   i’m going to grab my virtual segment delete tool  and then simply click on this line here and that   will delete that and then of course i can select  this line and delete it and so i’ve cut the top   off now with the virtual segment delete tool i  can go through this design and delete whatever   lines i want um that to make my design also if i  hold the alt key down i can left click and drag   and whatever this marquee touches will be  deleted when i release the mouse button all right i’m going to show you some of  the interactive tools within CorelDRAW   now i’m going to right click and i just want to  make sure that i have lock toolbars deselected   that then will allow me to click and hold  and i can grab the gripper bar at the top   and pull this toolbar right out so this gives me  the ability to bring the tools out at hand and   this is just to start to customize the interface  so if i use these two little tools a lot i don’t   want to have to go digging through that i can  bring them out on screen the first one i want to   show is a blend and i simply left click and drag  and so i’m blending from one object to the next   when we create something like a blend or a drop  shadow even an extrude there’s something referred   to as a control object i’m going to tap my  space bar i’ll deselect and now if i select this   magenta element you can see that i have in  the status bar a control ellipse selected   if i change the color of this control ellipse  it will change the way the blend appears   there’s so with the blend there’s two  control objects the other one is at the back   and i’m going to change that i also have the  ability with the blend to change the number of   steps it’s going to make it a lot smoother there’s  a number of features up here where i can change   the the rate at which it blends and that sort of  thing next we have the contour tool so with the   contour tool and the object selected i can set the  number of contours to the outside or to the inside   i can also dictate the width of that so if i’m  creating an applique i may want two steps to the   outside i can then take these elements and from  the objects menu i can i can break that apart tap my space bar and i now have these separate  elements that i can use i’ll need to ungroup that   and so these are my three separate elements  i can use if i’m using tackle twill or   something like that i can simply send  these to the engraver and cut them out   or whatever method you use for cutting your twill   all right next one is the envelope tool so  with the piece of text selected i’ll click   on the envelope tool i’m going to zoom into this  a little bit you’ll notice that i have nodes here   if i click and drag this node you can see it’s  not a very smooth curve do a control z if i double   click the node it’ll remove it if i double click  anywhere on the line it will add a node for me   and so i can move from there if i wanted  to if you want a nice smooth curve   delete that node and simply move my line straight  up let me do a control z delete this note as well   that sort of got in the way and i can move this  straight up so i have a nice smooth curve here   i’m going to show you another little tool tip  is if i hold my rollerball on my mouse down it’s   going to change the pan tool and i can pan around  my document now i could use the letter h for pan   the drawback with using that is i then have to go  back over to my toolbar to select a different tool   in order to get it away from the pan tool so  the rollerball on your mouse is very easy to   zoom around one other thing you can do is tap the  letter n on your keyboard i refer to this as a   nano preview and what that’s going to do is it’s  going to show me my entire page and so i can move   to a different area when i’m in the area that  i want i’ll simply left click my mouse button   i also have that capability down the bottom right  hand corner clicking here would do the same thing   for me i prefer the letter n it’s a lot easier  so let’s take a look at extrude i’m going to   select this element and then i’ll click on  extrude and this now allows me to pull this   back and i can change my vanishing point to  wherever i want to zoom in a little bit and   in the interactive property bar at the top  there’s a number of different features so   for example if i wanted to i could add color  to this and within the color i can change   whatever color i want maybe i want that to go  from red to to green then i can certainly do that I’m going to do an f4 to zoom back out and the next is drop shadow now in 2020 we added a  new drop shadow called the inside drop shadow and   so we’ve changed the drop shadow here uh this used  to be the regular drop shadow now if I select that   I have to come up to the direct property bar for  my regular drop shadow and I will click and drag and that allows me to create a drop shadow uh i  can set this drop shadow any position i want to   if i was to do it from the edge of the document  or from the bot let’s say from the bottom   creating a drop shadow allows me to change  the angle of that the perspective and it now   makes it look as though the light is coming  from above and behind i’m going to undo that   and

    let’s just do your regular drop shadow  with the drop shadow one thing you can do   is i can come up here on the interactive property  bar and i can change the color of that drop shadow   i could also grab a color from the color palette  and drag and drop into the square now the next   drop shadow i want to show is the inside drop  shadow and this is a new one we added in 2020   with this one i simply click and drag  and that will create a shadow for me   so this is an inside inside drop shadow and it’s  now made it look as though this is a cut out   depending on where this is will  determine how that’s going to look   i want just a little bit on there  and so that’s a pretty cool effect   and the final shadow is the block shadow now  the black shadow is part of the effects toolbar   so with this object selected i’m going to hold  my roller ball down just pan up a little bit i’m   going to select my block shadow tool i’ll click  and drag and i’ll just move that off a little bit   on the interactive property bar i  can do a number of things such as   changing the offset changing the  angle of it i can change color   i have the ability to simplify simplify is  actually kind of interesting i can remove   holes and whatnot i’m going to simplify that and  now from the objects menu i’m going down to break   block shadow apart i’ll tap my space bar to give  me my pick tool and then i’ll just move this out   of the way so we’ve created an interesting  effect right here with our block shadow tool let’s move that back onto the page I’ll do an f4  to zoom to the entire page and let’s move on to my   next page we talked a little bit about enveloping  a very quick way to create a virtual sample simply   matter clicking and dragging and there we have  it actually this doesn’t really look like a very   good virtual sample we can easily dress this up  a bit I’m going to make this a little bit smaller I’ll position this I’m going to grab my envelope  tool and now I’m going to double click this node   to remove it and I want to bring this down  and I’m going to try and match the curvature   of the top of the mug and here I want to  match the curvature of the bottom of the mug   and so now that looks a little bit more realistic  for a virtual sample I can use my cursor keys to   nudge this up a little bit and now I can send this  off to the customer and potentially get the order transparencies and lenses  so they’re fairly similar   with lenses there’s a number of different things  you can do I’m going to grab this magnifying   glass and I actually have a magnifying  lens that I grouped into this lens itself   so when I click and drag and I bring this over  my image you can see it’s magnified in there I’m   going to open up my lens docker from the windows  menu down to dockers down to effects and lenses so you can see that I have no lens effect and  that’s because I’ve selected a group of elements   I want to select just the lens itself so if you  remember control plus click allows me to select   an object within a group I can now change  the type of lens so if I want a color limit   maybe I want a fisheye lens or  something like a heat map lens   so there’s a number of different lenses in  here that you can play around with and create   various effects tinted grayscale transparency  wireframe bitmap effects and that sort of thing transparencies allow me to take an object and  actually let’s go back to the previous page where   I have a little more space I’m going to draw a  rectangle I’ll give it a solid color fill and   I’ll select my transparency tool now here I can  left-click and drag and create a transparency   so we faded out to this position if I move this  up here I can set the fade on that and actually   have it fade away to nothing if I was to put this  over top of an image you can see that I’ve got   it faded down this way let’s take a look at that  other page in here we can also do this to bitmaps   so I’m going to select this element I’ll hold  the shift key down I’ll select this image here and if you remember the alignment keys it’s l for  left b for bottom and now with the transparency   tool selected i’ll left click and drag and i  basically cause the image above to fade into the   one in the back so i’ve created an interesting  effect let’s do it one more time with this   i’m going to do a shift f2 and that will  zoom into this element i’ll tap my spacebar   i’ll left click and drag on a bit of an angle  here and so i’ve taken this front image and   i’ve created transparency on this half of it i’m  going to tap my space bar to return to pick tool   i hold my alt key down I’ll click once more  that has now selected the second bitmap down   i’ll tap my spacebar and i’ll left click and drag  with my transparency tool and just bring this up   a little bit and so i’ve actually created another  transparency in here move that down a little bit   make a little bit more realistic so very easy i’ve  taken three separate images and created a rather   interesting effect with those if i was to pull  this apart you can see what that would look like okay let’s undo these and I’ll move  on to my next slide so perspective   now just a little side note here in CorelDRAW 2021  we’ve added the capability to draw in perspective   I will not be covering that here you’ve already  seen that in the in the previous presentation   but uh I do want to show you perspective with  bitmaps that we’ve recently added to CorelDRAW I’m going to shift f2 to zoom into this and  now by selecting this bitmap i’m going to   position the upper left hand corner in this  and this is relatively new the ability to   add perspective to a bitmap so from the  objects menu i’ll go down to perspective   and then select add perspective now it’s simply  a matter of moving the corners of this image   onto this billboard itself and that will make it  look as though the image is right on the billboard   let’s move this in i’ll let it go and  that way i can see where i want that to go   so very quick and very easy i’ve given  the illusion that this image is on the   billboard i’m going to zoom back out  here it is with text the same sort of   thing i’ll move it on to this easel and  from the objects menu down to perspective   and then add perspective and it’s simply a  matter as i say dragging these four corner nodes   into the corner areas of the chalkboard or  blackboard and there we go so we create a   sandwich board that we can stand outside  the restaurant maybe i’m doing a mock-up   of a restaurant and i want to put something  like that inside then i can certainly do that all right let’s talk a little bit about text  now in CorelDRAW there’s two types of text   we have artistic text and paragraph text they’re  both created using the same tool so on the   left-hand side in the toolbar I’ll simply click  on my text tool and now if I click on my page   I can type artistic text to create paragraph text with the text tool  selected it’s a left click and drag and i   create a paragraph text frame now in this frame  if i was to right click for example i can insert   placeholder text and that will give you a visual  representation is what this is going to look like   so if i wanted to create a mock-up of a newsletter  or something like that then i can certainly   do that just to to draw the differences  between artistic text and paragraph text   as an analogy if you take a look at a box  of cereal the brand of cereal on the front   or the the name of the serial in the front is  going to be artistic text the contest rules or   ingredients on the back is going to be paragraph  text one common question we get is i want to be   able to wrap my text around a circle or around an  ellipse and i want to be able to read it properly   so with the text selected right click and drag  i’m going to let the mouse button go and i’ll   select fit text to path that’s put the text on  the path for me now bottom left hand corner or the   of the piece of text itself i have a little red  glyph it’s kind of hard to see here but it’s there   and as i move my text you’ll see a red beam appear  so the text is starting at the 12 o’clock position   it’s centered at 12 o’clock and i have these  red beams at 3 6 9 and 12 o’clock positions   and it allows me for easy centering i’m going  to select this piece of text now because this   object is no longer an ellipse is now considered  a compound object i cannot right click and drag   so instead what i’ll do is i’ll go to my  text menu and down to fit text to path   and then i’ll point to where the path is once  i position the text where i want it i’ll let   my mouse button go and then i want to flip this  around so on the interactive property bar i’m   going to mirror horizontally mirror vertically and  now if i want to i can just grab the glyph here   and position that text in place you’ll also notice  that there’s a little flag there that says it’s   .375 inches that’s a great way to ensure that this  piece of text is the same distance as that one all right one more thing on text is variable font  support and that’s relatively new in CorelDRAW   as well so with variable fonts you have the  ability of changing certain parameters of   that font with the font selected and let  me just move my page over to this side   with the font selected i’ll click on this icon  it’s a drop down with all the different properties   that i can change for this piece of text now  this particular font has quite a large number   of variables that i can modify most pieces of  variable text that i’ve seen or most fonts that   i’ve seen will typically have one two three or  four options that you can play around with so for   example i can change inline i can bring that up a  bit and you can see we now have a little bit of a   an outline type font maybe i want  to change the weight of it as well   so i can bring that up there’s a number of  different uh options for this particular   font that i can do as you can see very easy to  to modify the text let me just bring this back   centered on the page and if  i type another piece of text and we’ll type a piece of  text let’s call it breakaway   I’ll select this with my pick tool selected select this piece of text right click and drag  let the mouse button go and copy all properties   so i’ve now included those properties or added  these properties to this piece of text and it   makes it a lot easier than me having to go back  in here and figure out exactly what settings i had   okay let me just bring up Corel Font Manager and  in chrome Font Manager you’ll notice that i have   libraries on the left hand side i have a number  of filters here on my toolbar across the top   i have the ability to create what we call  a watched folder now a watched folder is   a folder that’s located on your hard drive  and any font that you put in there the Font   Manager will pick up on and we can make  use of that you no longer have to have   the font installed in order to be able to use  it in fact if you look on the right hand side   fonts that have the green bar are fonts that are  installed those that have the yellow bar they’re   not installed we can also see that these are  open type fonts this is a true type font and i   can scroll through here and see all the fonts that  i’ve got and actually if you look at the bottom   left-hand corner you can see i have over 8 000  fonts on this system they’re not installed they’re   not all installed into windows and therefore  it’s not going to be slowing my system down   further on the right hand side if i was to select  a font over here i’m going to be able to see   the glyphs that are within that font i can also  filter those glyphs so i want to see what currency   glyphs are in that particular  font or mathematical symbols   and that sort of thing now for me to install  a font if i scroll down to a font that’s not installed I’ll select a font right click and  it’s simply a matter of clicking on install   if I have a font that’s already installed  and I want to remove it then simply matter   right-clicking and uninstalling with respect  to the collections if I pull this down a bit   you can see I have a number of different  collections in here so here are my chalk fonts   I have grunge fonts poster these are collections  that I’ve created to create a collection it’s   simply a matter of clicking on this icon and  that will allow me to create a new collection   and I can give that whatever name I want and  then it’s simply a matter of going to my fonts I can right-click on a font  and I can add to collection   and then in here I’ll just dictate  what collection I want to put that in   and now if I was to go to that collection  I can see that I have that font in there   how does this work with curl  draw let me just minimize this i’m back in CorelDRAW i’ll select this piece of  text up here i’ll go to my fonts drop down and   in here you can see i have filters actually turned  on right now just click the funnel it’ll turn your   filters on i’ll deselect this filter actually i  can clear all filters that are currently selected   and i can go through looking for specific  filters maybe i want to go into my grunge folder   that i’ve created i can click on this and that  will select all the grunge fonts and it will   allow me to pick from those instead of having to  scroll through a great big massive list of fonts   all right let’s move on now clipart is very easy  to access so to access my clipart i’ll go into   the connect Content docker i already have that  open so i’ll click on that and in here you can   see we have a add the clipart up here i have  the ability to search so just type in horse   and very quick it’s found a number of images that  have horse as a keyword to use that of course   simply click and drag and i can bring that in on  the screen and then make use of that of that image   if i have my own collection of clipart and  i want to bring that in it’s easy enough to   do i’ll select the drop down and at the very  bottom i have add new in here i can click on   create alias and then browse to a folder where i  have that content now that content can be on the   local drive or it can be on a network share so  i can have access to that clipart and that can   be shared out for other people that have licenses  for CorelDRAW that also want access to the clipart   let me just close off the Connect docker and i  might as well close off these other ones as well okay let’s talk a little bit  of PowerClip now PowerClip   gives me the ability to take an object  or group of objects and put that inside a   container now this container can be a piece of  text it can be an object or a group of objects   I’m going to select this bitmap image I’ll  right-click and drag and left the mouse button   go and power clip inside it’s as easy as that a  lot of people will go to the objects menu and do   power clip there I find this quite a bit quicker  now I want to center that properly you’ll notice I   have a small menu up here I can hit the drop-down  and I go center content if I want to edit this   hold the ctrl key down and click on the container  itself that will put me into the edit state and   I can move this around I can resize it or do  whatever I want to with it to finish editing   control-click outside and that takes me  out of the editing of the power clip image now in this scenario I have an image and I do  sublimation I’ve got a customer that owns a   restaurant and I want to pitch to him that we can  take this image and make a mural on the back wall   of the restaurant using ceramic tiles in CorelDRAW  something like that is very easy to do takes me   very little time and to do a mural on ceramic  tiles I can probably earn a pretty penny on that   to do it in CorelDRAW in my  toolbox underneath the polygon tool   I have my graph paper tool now this particular  image is 4×6 so with the graph paper tool selected I want to change it to I want to have 12 by 8  and now if I left click and drag I’ll create   a grid over top of this tap my space bar I’m  now going to move this grid over here now if I   take this image I can right-click and drag power  clip inside and then I want to center my contents with the contents in here I’ll select the element   I’m going to use ungroup and it’s now ungrouped  the individual cells for that graph paper tool   I’ll marquee select the top  row I’ll move it straight up and I’ll take this element here and I’ll move  that straight over now if I marquee select this   I can do a shift e for evenly space and I  can do it for the subsequent roles as well   so if I was to move this up here align  that with this object here marquee select and a shift e you get the idea so we break all  this out I’ve then go ahead and print this on   my sublimating paper sublimate the tiles and then  I can take it to the customer site and install it   we have a beautiful mural in  the back of his restaurant wall all right power trace so power trace allows you  to convert from a raster image to a vector image   i’m going to start with this one here and if i  go to the trace bitmap menu i can also access   this from the bitmap menu as well but we have it  on the interactive property bar so much quicker   to access from here i’ll click on the drop down  go to outline trace and then i’ll select clipart   this opens up my powertrace dialog  box i’m going to make that full screen   now for those that are doing excuse me for those  that are doing vinyl cutting or screen printing   i want you to pay attention to this one item  here this is group by color and this will become   evident in a few seconds so i’m going to select  group by color then i can go to my colors tab   and in here i can reduce the number of colors so  i’m going to hold the ctrl key down and click on   this and i’ll merge these colors i also have the  ability in here to edit the color so if i wanted   something other than blue i can certainly do that  so i’m just simply reducing these colors down   we’re doing a screen screen print we don’t  want to deal with too many colors in there   seven colors is a bit much but  i’ll leave it like that for now   on the adjustments tab here i have the ability uh  if it’s a low quality jpeg image that i can remove   the jpeg artifacting i also have up sampling  options available as well for illustration and   photo realistic i’m simply going to click ok to  this it’s going to return me back to CorelDRAW   let me go ahead and select the background and are  the bitmap image rather and i’ll delete that now   if i select this element and i look in my Object  docker you can see i have a group of six objects   i’m going to ungroup this now i have ungroup  and i have ungroup all i’ll simply ungroup it   with it ungrouped you can see i have a group of  seven objects by selecting that double clicking   the outline fill or sorry the fill dialog  down here in here i can select color palettes and I can go into my spot color so very  quick and very easy we’ll be able to take   this image and convert it to spot colors  so I can get ready for making my screens once I’ve gone into the proper palette that I want  to use it will automatically match the closest   color to it I’ll simply click ok and now all  of these items all these blue items are now the   spot color blue of course I do have the  ability to change that if I want to grab a   specific Pantone color then I can do that as well  now with this image I’ve often been asked how do I   take a bitmap image and create a cut line around  it so I want to do a print cut solution I need a   cut line around this easy way to do that is within  power trace I’m going to go to outline trace   again I’ll select clip art and here what I’m  going to do on the colors tab I’ll reduce my   number of colors right down so I’m going to  bring that down to about three or four colors on the settings tab I want to make sure that  I have d delete original image not selected   I’ll click ok to this now with this vector group  selected I’m going to go to my objects menu down   to shaping and then to boundary that’s now created  a hairline outline around the perimeter if I hold   my alt key down I do a single click I’ve actually  selected the group of elements of course i could   do this in the Object docker and it’s simply a  matter of hitting delete I now have a cut line   around the perimeter of that bitmap that I can go  ahead and send that out and then do the cutting all right continuing with bitmaps this  is just a couple of little watch outs or   things not to do within CorelDRAW or ways to  to overcome particular issues so for example   we can crop a bitmap and of course you can use the  shape tool to marquee select these two nodes hold   the control key down and i can move that in and i  can crop the the image that way the drawback that   with that is i haven’t really changed the image at  all all i’ve done is i’ve created what we call a   soft mask now if i select my crop tool and marquee  select i can double click and it will crop that   for me if you do want to use this method here you  certainly can for example maybe i wanted to round   one of the corners then i can do that if you’re  doing that i strongly recommend that after you do   that go to the bitmap menu convert to bitmap set  whatever resolution you want and then click ok   what that’s going to do is it’s going to get rid  of that soft mask and make it the bitmap the way   it is resizing an image very similar as well this  is actually a power clip so if a control click you   can see that my image is actually rotated  when we have a rotated bitmap in CorelDRAW   and send that down to the printer it’s going to  have to rotate those lines of of a pixel sort   of thing as it’s ripping it and that’s going to  increase the rip time at when you’re printing   to overcome that bitmap menu convert to bitmap and  then set your resolution in here that’s all there   is to it one other very very common mistake is  customers will import bitmap images click and drag   to size them the way they want them put them on  their screen maybe they’re doing a uh a catalog of   supplemental sublimatable items that you  create so you’ve got 25 bitmap images on a page   that you’ve imported resize down and then you  go and print it and you wonder why it’s taking   so long to print when you resize an image down  in this manner by using the shaping handles take   a look at the resolution down below you’re not  reducing the size of the bitmap itself you’re   only reducing the visual footprint of it so if you  need to reduce a bitmap down like that once you’ve   done that go to bitmap convert to bitmap and then  simply click ok that now has gotten rid of that   extra weight on the bitmap and it will increase or  sorry it will reduce your file size tremendously sampling up until CorelDRAW 2021 we provided  ben vista photo zoom uh which was an application   that allowed you to up sample bitmaps we’ve  now brought the capabilities of up sampling   into CorelDRAW 2021 and it’s done a beautiful  job i’m going to select this bitmap here it’s   150 dpi and you can see it’s roughly 6×7 inches  if i go to my bitmap menu and down to resample   in here i have the ability to increase or decrease  if i select that i want to increase the size   and i’m going to do something  crazy i’m going to go 800 percent   automatically you’ll see i now have these options  down here so i can do the up sampling illustration   photorealistic or just leave it as is for time  photo photo realistic is going to take a bit   of processing time i’m just going to leave  it as is just to show you that keeping in   mind that photorealistic will give you much  higher quality so simply click ok to this   and you can see very quickly it’s upsampled that  image now i had two copies of this image on this   page so if i hold the alt key down and i click  right about here it’s going to dig down it’s   going to select that bitmap below i’m going to  bring that to the front and now i’m going to do   an f4 and that zooms out to my entire page  this is my original image that was 150 dpi   this is the resized image at 800 percent larger  it’s now 56 by 34 at 150 dpi so really does a   beautiful job of up sampling i’m going to select  this and delete that and move on to the next page let’s take a look at a couple of the  labs that we have within PHOTO-PAINT   I’m going to select this image here I’ll  right-click and I’ll select edit bitmap   now this is going to launch PHOTO-PAINT for me um now I’ll maximize the screen and from the image  menu I’ll go down to cutout lab this gives me   the ability to remove the background so let’s  maximize this screen as well first I’m going to   grab my highlighter I’ll zoom in a little bit  more and what I want to do is I want to draw   a border around the element itself or the  object that I want to cut out notice that   I’m trying to keep half on half off I’m not  being super critical or super careful rather   that’s not a problem at all I can fix that up in  a few moments let me just zoom out a little bit and I’m going to come straight across here and we’ll go up this side as well now I can change  the brush size to make it finer or coarser that   basically allows me to go a little bit faster  I probably could have made this a little bit   wider and gone a little bit quicker but that’s  fine once I’ve got the area marked off that I   want to keep I’m going to use the fill bucket and  that will preserve the area that I want now bottom   left-hand corner I’m going to click on preview  this allows me to preview my image I can zoom in and it’s going to pan down a little bit you’ll  notice some areas that I’ve taken out too much   and other areas where I haven’t taken  out enough this allows me to add back   areas that I’ve taken out too much and it’s  just a matter of brushing over this area and sometimes it’s a little difficult to  see with this grid pattern in the background   so what I can do is under background  I have none I can select grayscale   I can set matte black or I can set white  matte and this allows me to better see   what areas that I have to remove or  what areas that I have to fill in   now for speed or sorry for time-wise I’m not  going to go around the entire image just want to   show you basically how this is done so it’s just a  matter of brushing out the areas that I don’t want and we’ll come down here and to brush in the areas that I do want and I’m  going to leave it like that you get the idea I’ll   simply click ok to this that’s going to return  me into PHOTO-PAINT with the background removed   I can click on finish editing or simply close  out the application I’ll answer yes to this   and it’s going to put me back  into CorelDRAW with this image   cut out from the background now  let’s take a look at one more lab   and that’s the image adjustment lab so I’ll select  this image right click and select edit bitmap and let’s maximize PHOTO-PAINT and now from the  adjust menu I’m going to Image Adjustment Lab and let’s maximize this now in here there’s a  number of different changes that I can make to   this image first off I can change the temperature  so that’s brought made a little bit warmer   brought the colors a little bit more natural  I also have the ability to increase saturation   can modify brightness contrast highlights shadows  and midtones and basically bring up the image   to get something that is acceptable also within  the image adjustment lab bottom left-hand corner   you have this camera icon by clicking on that  it’s going to create a snapshot so I can go   through I can make some additional changes maybe  I want to bring up the contrast a little bit and let’s play with the shadows I’ll create another snapshot try bringing this down quite a bit and see  what happens there that’s a little bit too dark and so we can play around with this I could  have tried the auto adjust to see if that   how that is this allows me the ability  to set my white point and my black point   and so once i’ve gone through and i’ve gotten  an image that i like the the coloring to   i’ll simply select it you’ll note the blue bar at  the top and when i click ok that’s the image that   i’m going to be bringing back into PHOTO-PAINT so  let me just close this down again that’s going to   return me to CorelDRAW with the image update um  this is a little effect i like to show creating   a diff distressed effect now this can be done with  a raster image i find that rusted metal this is an   old piece of weathered wood maybe a photograph of  ripples on a a swimming pool stuff like that work   quite well what i’m going to do is i’ll start  off by resizing this image to completely cover my   artwork now from the bitmap menu i’m going to  go down to mode and i want to select grayscale   next i’m going to go to my effects menu down  to adjust and i want to bring up my tone curve   now in the tone curve what i want to do is  i want to reduce the amount of white in the   image and intensify the blacks something  like that and i’ll click okay to this   all right now that we’ve got this what i’m  going to do is i’m going to go to my bitmap menu   down to mode once again and i’m  going to select black and white   now with black and white i want to make sure i’m  using line art and here i can set the threshold   to make it more or less noticeable i’ll leave  it like that and click ok now one thing about   a black and white image image is that it’s a  one bit image that bit can either be on or off   what i can do is i can change my fill to white  and my outline to nothing and what that’s done   is it’s basically giving me the white area  so this allows me to create a distressed look   all right the next i want to show is  non-destructive effects so new to quell draw 2019   we’ve added the ability to create non-destructive  effects these effects can be applied to both   bitmaps as well as vector so i’m actually  applying bitmap effects to a vector object   so if i go to my effects menu i’m going to go  down to art strokes and i’ll select impressionist let it process that I’ll click ok now  if I go back up to the effects menu   I want to go to creative and then to fabric we’ll apply the quilt effect and finally back up  to the effects menu down to blur and I’m going to   add a gaussian blur to this and I’ll accept the  defaults that I have here and click ok now if I   right-click on this you’ll see that I have object  properties selected so that tells me I have the   object Properties docker already opened up on the  right-hand side I’m going to click on properties   and in here when I select this element I now have an effects tab I’ll click on my  effects tab and you can see that I’ve applied   a gaussian blur fabric impressionist in here I  have the ability to turn that vision on or off   I also have the ability to edit it directly in  here and I can add another effect if I wanted to   i also have the ability to delete the  effect or change the order of the effect so   we’ve been able to add effects to this element  without actually causing any distortion or any   um degradation of the original element now  one more thing about this that makes it very   useful is if I right-click on this and I  go down to object styles new style from   bitmap effect and I’m just going to call this  uh test and I’ll click ok I’ve got open object   Style docker selected so when I click ok  it will open up the object Styles docker   with this style in it that I can then make use  of so I have my style that I’ve created I can select this element click apply to selected  and this will apply that same style to this   I have a piece of text over here I  can apply it to this object as well   it’s simply a matter of selecting the  text and simply click apply to select it   now if I wanted to I can come back in here I can  select this effect I don’t want that I simply hit   the delete key and it will delete the effect  from all of the objects that I have on screen all right let me close off the Styles docker and we’ll go on to our next page so art  styles art styles are a lot of fun to   play with if I go to my effects menu down  to creative and in here I have art style   now there’s a number of different art  styles that we have available to us   first one is smooth acrylic these effects  are fairly intensive and there is a control   within tools options that I can have it use GPU  processing as well to improve the speed of that   so this is the acrylic style I’m going to grab  neon for example and I’ll make that medium and here we have that effect so it’s a lot of fun  to play with this I’m going to hit cancel on this   let me go on to the next slide now in here we have uh scripts and macros I’m just  going to show you one macro and that is the color   swatch so you have a you’re doing sublimation  or screen printing you’ve approached a school   phys ed class they want track suits made and they  also want um sorry track suits printed on and they   want their gym bags to have a logo on them as  well so you want to be able to match the school   colors so what colors are you going to  use if we go to the windows menu down to   color palettes and i’m going to click on palettes  now in here i’m going to go to spot palette   i’ll click on pantone and then i’m going to  go into previous version and i want to select   the first one which is the corel8 pantone palette  this is the pantone palette that has the pantone   white in it now this particular script will only  work with color palettes that are currently open   so if i was to open a couple of other color  palettes and here’s the pastel color palette   now i’m going to launch the script so  if i go to my tools menu down to scripts   and then run in here under macros in  i want to select color chart creator   and i’ll click run once again in this  dialog box when i hit the drop down   you’ll see i have a number of palettes in here  these are the palettes that i’ve just opened up   as well as my document palette across the  bottom so i want to select this palette here   i can add a date printer information i can also  set the spacing i’m going to bring that spacing   down to two i can put an outline around each color  i don’t want to do that and i’ll simply click ok and as you can see it’s created the document for  me I’ll go back to the beginning of the document   and now I have the ability to go through this  document let me just go to my windows menu down to   dockers and I’m going to select pages in here I’m  going to select multi-page and I’ll just zoom out   and you can see that we have a number of pages  in here with my color palette on that so very   quick and very easy I can print out whichever  sheet that I want to and then and then go from   there all right let’s go back out to a single  page I’m going to close off the Palettes docker   I’ll close off my Pages docker and let’s  just close off this file completely all right Pointillizer so this is a used  to be called an extension that we shipped   with CorelDRAW x8 and it’s a great way  to create a pseudo halftone type pattern   uh within document so with the file selected  I’m going to go to my effects menu and down to   Pointilizer and in here I’ll just leave the  defaults as they are I’ll simply click apply   very quickly it’s gone through and it’s created  a half tone pattern using 16 colors let me do a   ctrl z to undo that I’ll deselect color limit  and I’ll click apply once again so it’s going   to go through the file and it’s going to  create that image with the multiple colors I’m going to delete this and I  want to show you one more with this   process so I’m going to select this clipart  image under shape you can see I have circle   I also have custom I’m going to select custom  I’ll click on select and I’ll click on this   it’s just a piece of text I created  with the letter x and I’ll apply so I’ve taken this clipart image and I’ve now  created a cross stitch pattern so if you wanted to   sublimate something like that onto a cotton towel  or something like that then you can certainly do   that I’m just going to do an f4 to zoom back  out to my page and let’s go on to the next okay I’m going to close off this docker  and I also want to close out these color   palettes so go to my windows menu down  to color palettes and then to palettes   now I could drag these off and close them out  one at a time I can also come in here and I will   simply deselect the pallets that are in here  and that will effectively turn them all off okay I’ll close up the Palettes docker so from time to time you’ll want  to create a custom color palette   based on a document or a selection i’m  going to select this element and then   from the windows menu i’ll go down to color  palettes and then create palette from selection   so very quickly it’s brought the dialog  box i’m just going to call this flower   and i’ll click on save and what that’s going  to do is it’s going to create a custom color   palette for me and it’s docked over here and this  is based on the colors that are in this particular   file so if i bring those out you can see we have  that all right let’s go to the next page and   we’re actually at the end of this almost  workspace customization i’ve saved the   best for last this is uh in my opinion is my  favorite tool within the entire application   the ability to customize you’ve seen that i’ve  been moving forward and backwards on the pages   without really doing much of anything i’ve  customized some keyboard shortcuts for that   to customize a keyboard shortcut we go to the  tools menu to options and then customization now in here I want to select commands   and once I customized are in the layout menu and  what I did is I changed the next and previous page   so next page shortcut key I’m using the number two  and previous page I use the number one my thought   is this I’ve got my right hand in the mouse I’ve  got my left hand on the keyboard if I want to do   page up page down to go forward and backward  I have to take my hand off the mouse and use   my keyboard that takes time with my left  hand on the keyboard I tap the one or tap   the two it takes me forward and it takes  me back other keyboard shortcuts I use   are in the view menu and I go to wireframe and my  keyboard shortcut for wireframe is the letter w and I assign to get out of  wireframe I go to enhanced view   and the one I use for that is the letter q an  easy way to remember that is that I want to quit   wireframe a nice thing about it is there’s side by  side on the keyboard so I can very quickly toggle   back and forth I’ll click a sign for this let  me just double-check my wireframe to make sure I   did click a sign on that I did that’s good next  ones I’m going to do is under the objects menu and I’m going to go down to group and if I have a problem finding it here  I have the ability search I can also go to   the objects menu here down to group and then  select group and so it’s automatically found   that for me currently it’s ctrl g I’m going to  delete that and I’m going to use the letter g   from time to time I have arthritis in my hand  and it acts up it’s difficult to do a finger   stretch uh to control u or control g so just use  a single keyboard shortcut and I can do that with   my left hand tapping those keys so I’ve assigned  that and then of course I want to do an ungroup and the keyboard shortcut I  assigned for that is the letter u and I click assign so very easy to assign keyboard  shortcuts I’m going to click ok to this now one   more thing about customization is you’ll find  that around the screen we have these icons here   I’ve got another one over here and I have one  for my dockers as well over here for example   when I click on this I have the ability to  turning on and off features you’ll notice   that by default we don’t have the outline pen uh  on the on the bar so I can actually click on this   and it will add the outline pen for me if  I want to create a custom keyboard shortcut   it’s very easy to do some of the commands I use a  lot is contour so I’ll click and hold I’m going to   hold the control plus alt key down I’ll left-click  contour and I’ll bring this out onto the screen   I’ve now started to build my own toolbar  back under the tools here I want the   envelope tool click and drag and I’ll drop  that right there next is from the text menu and I want fit text to path so control plus  alt-left click and drag and I can drop that right   on there and the final one I use a lot is convert  to bitmap so again control plus alt-click and drag   and I’m going to bring this right out here  so I’ve now effectively created a toolbar that I can dock wherever I want on the system  and it’s a great way to save time and really   speed up productivity within the application  once we’ve done that from the tools menu   to options to workspace in here what I want  to do is I want to export the workspace   and that’s going to export with my keyboard  shortcuts my layouts and everything else so if I’m   in a design shop maybe there’s three designers we  all want to use the same workspace for efficiency   then I can export my workspace and share that you  also if you have a previous version of CorelDRAW   from CorelDRAW x7 and forward we’re able to bring  in previous workspaces so if you’re upgrading   from CorelDRAW 2020 to 2021 then of course  you can save your workspace and bring it in   and it’s simply a matter of clicking on  import to import the previous workspace now the final thing I want to talk about I briefly  mentioned this at the beginning is learn.corel.com   this is our Discovery Center and it’s here where  you can access all sorts of items things such as   tutorials so there’s tutorials for graphics, for  PaintShop Pro, VideoStudio that sort of thing   you’ll also find a Q&A series this is a Q&A series  for CorelDRAW as well as a PaintShop Pro so when   we get customers sending us questions or common  questions that come in through the support line   we have videos on here that will take you  through the Q&A of that you’ll find a link   for free stuff we have regular contests in here  that you can enter with your artwork support as   well as community so it’s a great place to visit  it’s easy URL to remember it’s learn.corel.com and that brings us to the end of this session  I do want to thank you very much for your time   and uh I hope you’ve enjoyed uh what I’ve  presented I hope you’ve learned uh some   tips that you can take away with and become a  lot more productive and a lot more prosperous   thank you very much and have a great day

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • CorelDraw Tutorials: Design, Logos, Shaping, and Effects

    CorelDraw Tutorials: Design, Logos, Shaping, and Effects

    This document serves as a comprehensive guide to using Corel Draw, offering step-by-step instructions and examples for various design tasks. It covers essential tools and techniques such as color manipulation, guideline usage, page management, and theme customization. The document also explores advanced features like creating shapes, filling gradients, welding objects, and applying effects like perspective and transparency. Ultimately, this guide aims to empower users to create logos and other designs by thoroughly explaining Corel Draw’s features and capabilities.

    CorelDRAW Study Guide

    Quiz

    1. What is the primary color mode recommended for documents intended for print, and why?

    CMYK is the recommended color mode for print because it is designed to produce accurate and vibrant colors on printed materials. It uses a subtractive color model that mixes cyan, magenta, yellow, and key (black) inks.

    2. What considerations are important when choosing the width and height units for a new document?

    When choosing width and height units, you should consider the intended use of the design, choosing units (mm, cm, inches, feet) that are commonly used for that purpose (e.g., feet for flex banners, millimeters for visiting cards). This helps ensure accurate dimensions and ease of communication with printers or manufacturers.

    3. Explain the difference between “portrait” and “landscape” orientation.

    Portrait orientation refers to a page layout where the height is greater than the width, typically used for documents like letters or resumes. Landscape orientation refers to a page layout where the width is greater than the height, often used for presentations or wide images.

    4. What is the recommended resolution for most design work, and why?

    The recommended resolution is 300 DPI (dots per inch) because it provides a good balance between image quality and file size, ensuring sharp and detailed designs suitable for both print and digital displays. Using a lower resolution may result in pixelated or blurry images.

    5. What is a “Docker” in CorelDRAW, and what are its main functions?

    A Docker in CorelDRAW is a panel that provides quick access to various tools and settings, such as properties, color palettes, and page options. Dockers streamline the workflow by keeping frequently used functions readily available.

    6. Explain the function of the “title bar” in a Docker.

    The title bar of a Docker is the strip at the top of the Docker that displays its name (e.g., Properties). It often contains buttons for collapsing, closing, or docking the panel, allowing users to manage the interface layout.

    7. Describe two methods for duplicating an object in CorelDRAW.

    One method is to copy (Ctrl+C) and paste (Ctrl+V) the object using the edit menu or standard toolbar. Another method is to click and drag the object while pressing the right mouse button, releasing the button to create a duplicate.

    8. What is the purpose of the “handles” that appear around a selected object?

    Handles are small squares or circles that appear around a selected object. They are used to resize, scale, rotate, or skew the object, providing precise control over its transformations.

    9. What is the function of the “Ctrl+R” shortcut in CorelDRAW?

    The Ctrl+R shortcut repeats the last action performed. This is useful for duplicating objects, applying transformations, or repeating formatting steps quickly and efficiently.

    10. Why is it important to be aware of the CorelDRAW version when saving a file?

    It’s important because saving in an older version ensures compatibility with users who may have older CorelDRAW versions. If a file is saved in a newer version, it might not be opened correctly (or at all) by users with older software.

    Essay Questions

    1. Discuss the importance of color modes (CMYK vs. RGB) in graphic design and how the choice of color mode affects the final output for different media (print vs. digital).
    2. Explain the different methods of object duplication in CorelDRAW, highlighting the advantages and disadvantages of each method in various design scenarios.
    3. Describe the purpose and usage of the shape tool. Explain how one can round the corners of a rectangle with the shape tool.
    4. Explore how the Combine, Weld, and Trim tools contribute to creating complex shapes and designs. Provide practical examples of when each tool would be most effective.
    5. Elaborate on the impact tool, the artistic media tool, and the dimension line tools. Describe how these tools can be used to enhance designs and provide necessary information.

    Glossary of Key Terms

    • CMYK: A color model used primarily for printing, consisting of cyan, magenta, yellow, and key (black).
    • RGB: A color model used primarily for digital displays, consisting of red, green, and blue.
    • Resolution (DPI): Dots per inch; a measure of the detail in an image, with higher DPI indicating greater detail.
    • Portrait: A page orientation where the height is greater than the width.
    • Landscape: A page orientation where the width is greater than the height.
    • Docker: A panel within CorelDRAW that provides access to tools, settings, and options.
    • Title Bar: The top strip of a Docker that displays its name and control buttons.
    • Handles: Small squares or circles around a selected object used for resizing, rotating, or skewing.
    • Orientation: The direction in which the page is printed, either portrait or landscape.
    • Outline: The border or stroke around an object.
    • Fill: The color or pattern inside an object.
    • Ctrl+R (Repeat): A shortcut that repeats the last action performed.
    • Combine: A tool that merges multiple objects into a single object, removing overlapping lines.
    • Weld: A tool that joins two or more objects into a single object, creating a seamless outline.
    • Trim: A tool that removes the overlapping area of one object from another.
    • Intersect: A tool that creates a new object from the overlapping area of two or more objects.
    • Simplify: Removes areas that don’t contribute significantly to the shape, which reduces the number of nodes in complex shapes.
    • Front Minus Back: A shaping operation in which the front object removes the part of the back object where they overlap. The front object then disappears.
    • Back Minus Front: A shaping operation in which the back object removes the part of the front object where they overlap. The back object then disappears.
    • Create Boundary: A tool that creates an outline around a group of selected objects.
    • Convert to Curves: Converting an object into curves allows each letter or section to be altered individually.
    • Group: Binding objects together means they react as one.
    • Ungroup: A feature that separates a previously grouped set of objects into the separate, individual components.
    • Contour: Adds evenly spaced concentric lines to the inside or outside of a shape or text object.
    • Artistic Media: Used to add brush strokes to the design.
    • Blend Tool: Used to blend two objects.
    • Distort Tool: Applies push/pull distortions to a shape.
    • Envelope Tool: Distorts objects by dragging the nodes of an envelope around the object.
    • Transparency Tool: Adds varied levels of transparency to shapes and designs.

    Corel Draw: Interface, Tools, and Logo Design Tutorial

    This briefing document summarizes the key concepts and procedures detailed in the provided text, which appears to be a transcript of a tutorial on using Corel Draw.

    Main Themes:

    • Introduction to Corel Draw Interface and Basic Operations: The document introduces the user to the Corel Draw interface, explaining color modes (CMYK for print, RGB for screen display), setting document dimensions and units (mm, inches, points, cm, feet), orientation (portrait/landscape), resolution (recommending 300 DPI), and how to create a new document.
    • “We will use the mode of CM WA do it for your printing industry.”
    • “The resolution is basically what our default would be It is 300 but you can buy it for less if you want you can also set it here but I I would recommend that you work on 300 only 300 is enough for you any design”
    • Docker Panels: Explanation of Docker panels: title bar, collapse/close buttons, docker tabs, adding/removing dockers.
    • “Look at the dockers, it is written here Properties: This strip that you are seeing We call this the title bar…”
    • “If you want, remove this docker from this list You can simply click on close here”
    • Basic Shape Manipulation and Color Filling: Filling objects with colors (left-click for fill, right-click for outline), removing outlines, using handles to resize and reshape objects, copying and pasting objects.
    • “…if I click left on it If I press click then whatever I feel it will move but if I stay there I press the right click of the mouse Look, my outline will be removed”
    • “We call them handles and these Maintain your shape with the help of handles”
    • Duplication and Repetition: Copying objects using copy/paste, right-click dragging, and the “Ctrl+R” command for repeating the last action.
    • “Press the Ctrl+R button on your keyboard what control r does is that whatever your It was the last action, I would repeat it again and again”
    • “Right-click it with your mouse or left click drag this from okay and if I You have to copy this shape here Drag it to the right side of your mouse Press the click and see as soon as you You will press right click and see it now You can see on the screen that here See, a plus symbol appears in the cursor it’s representing you that a copy of this is going to be made”
    • Saving Files: Saving Corel Draw files, understanding version compatibility, and saving to older versions.
    • “See the current version here what is showing 24 version okay if you If you click here, you will see it here You will get the other versions which came before 24.”
    • “If I can email you this file or pen it If I put it in the drive then that file will be in your system pay will not open because your corrol The draw is of a lower version and you have filed The higher version you want to open”
    • Logo Creation Examples: The tutorial provides step-by-step instructions for creating logos for Domino’s Pizza and Android, illustrating the use of various tools and techniques.
    • Object Alignment and Grouping: Aligning objects using keyboard shortcuts (C for center horizontal, E for center vertical) and the “Object > Align and Distribute” menu, grouping objects using “Ctrl+G” to treat them as a single unit.
    • “Here is the shortcut key for C center for and e is for your middle or you If you want, you can also go through the option Simply go to the object and here you will see See, you get the option of alignment”
    • “You are given the option of group what does any object mean it’s ok to give each other binders means you two but reacts like an object If you do then I will group it with The shortcut key for group is Ctrl+G”
    • Shape Tools and Corner Rounding: Using the shape tool to round corners of rectangles.
    • “Select your object which You need to round the corners and then After that you come here above the shape tool Look, the shape tool is given here.”
    • Working with Lines and Outlines: Using the line tool, creating straight lines with the shift key, adjusting line thickness, and accessing outline properties (F12) for color, width, style (dotted, etc.), and corner rounding.
    • “Press the f12 button on your keyboard or you can If you come down, look here You get the option of outline and Click here twice means double Click like I double click here I will do what I have, see the outline A complete dialogue in the name of pen The box will open”
    • “The shift button should be a straight line so if I don’t press the shift button it is coming If I press my line, I will send it anywhere A straight can move in the direction”
    • Freehand Tool and Curve Conversion: Using the freehand tool to create custom shapes, converting nodes to curves, and adjusting handles for smooth shapes.
    • “…we come here first. over the free hand tool and create us here There will be a shape, so we will make one here A simple shape with the help of which we can make we will design the logo…”
    • “We will convert all the notes in Convert to Curve and then we have I will have to give it a slight curve so how will that happen”
    • Combining, Welding, Trimming, Intersecting and Simplifying Objects Detailed breakdown of each command and the practical applications.
    • Impact Tool Using the impact tool to imply movement or drawing attention in a design.
    • Transparency Tool Using the transparency tool to create a more blended layered design.

    Most Important Ideas/Facts:

    • CMYK vs. RGB: Understanding the appropriate color mode for printing vs. screen display is crucial for design output.
    • Ctrl+R: This keyboard shortcut is a powerful tool for quickly replicating actions.
    • Shape Tool: It is a fundamental tool for refining and manipulating shapes.
    • Version Compatibility: Saving files in older versions is necessary for sharing with users who have older software.
    • Grouping/Ungrouping: Efficient object organization and manipulation.
    • Ctrl+G Quick way to group selected objects.
    • Outline Properties Use the outline menu or F12 to edit properties such as the appearance of the outline (including the caps).

    In summary, the document provides a comprehensive introduction to Corel Draw, covering essential interface elements, basic operations, and fundamental design techniques. It emphasizes practical application through logo creation examples and clear explanations of various tools and effects.

    CorelDraw Practical Tips and Techniques

    CorelDraw FAQ

    1. What color mode should I use for printing versus screen display in CorelDraw?

    For print projects, use CMYK color mode. CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key/Black) is the standard for the printing industry. For designs intended only for screen display (e.g., websites, social media), use RGB color mode. RGB (Red, Green, Blue) is optimized for screens.

    2. How do I set the size and units of my document in CorelDraw?

    When creating a new document, specify the width and height. You can choose units like millimeters (mm), inches, points, centimeters, or feet, depending on the project. For example, use millimeters or centimeters for visiting cards, inches for smaller documents, and feet for larger formats like flex banners. To change the units once the document is open, go to layout settings. Changing the units will automatically convert the measurements.

    3. What is the significance of resolution in CorelDraw, and what resolution should I use?

    Resolution determines the level of detail in your design. The default resolution in CorelDraw is 300 DPI (dots per inch). It is recommended to work at this resolution for most designs, as it provides sufficient quality for printing. Lower resolutions can be used if file size is a concern, but it may affect the final output quality.

    4. What are Dockers in CorelDraw, and how do I use them?

    Dockers are panels that contain various tools and options. They are usually located on the right side of the CorelDraw interface. The “Properties” docker, for example, displays the title bar and has buttons for collaboration, closing, and expanding the docker. To open or close a docker, go to the “Windows” menu and select the desired docker. The active docker is highlighted in blue.

    5. How do I duplicate objects easily in CorelDraw?

    There are several ways to duplicate objects:

    • Copy-Paste: Use the Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste commands or the corresponding icons on the Standard Toolbar.
    • Right-Click Drag: Drag the object while holding down the left mouse button, then right-click before releasing the left button. This creates a copy at the new location.
    • “+” Key: select an object and press the + key on the numpad. A copy is made directly on top of the original. Drag the new copy to the desired position.
    • CTRL+D: selects an object and use the duplicate command to create an exact copy either through the edit menu or by pressing CTRL+D. Drag the new copy to the desired position.

    6. How do I rotate an object around a specific point in CorelDraw?

    1. Select the object.
    2. Click on the object again to reveal the rotation handles.
    3. Drag the center point (usually a crosshair) from the center of the object to the desired rotation point.
    4. Rotate the object by dragging one of the rotation handles.
    5. To create multiple rotated copies, rotate the object, right-click to duplicate, and then press Ctrl+R to repeat the rotation and duplication.

    7. How can I fill and outline objects with color in CorelDraw?

    To fill an object with color, left-click on a color in the color palette. To change the outline color, right-click on a color in the color palette. To remove the outline, right-click on the “no color” swatch (usually the first swatch in the palette with an X).

    8. How do I save a CorelDraw file in an older version format?

    Go to File > Save As. In the “Save as type” dropdown menu, select the desired older CorelDraw version. This is useful when sharing files with users who have older versions of the software. However, some features from the newer version might be lost when saving in an older format.

    CorelDraw: Color Modes, Options, Filling, and Transparency

    Color modes include CMYK for printing and RGB for screen display.

    Color options in CorelDraw:

    • The right side of the interface displays colors that can be used to fill objects in a document.
    • More colors can be displayed by expanding the color options.
    • A color palette enables users to select a desired color.
    • The color that is currently selected will be displayed.

    Color filling in objects:

    • To fill an object with color, simply click the desired color.
    • Left click to fill the shape and right click to fill the outline.
    • The outline can also be removed.
    • Fountain fill is a gradient with two or more colors.
    • To use a gradient, create nodes and apply different colors of choice.
    • A color can be transferred from one object to another.

    Color samples can be picked from an object or image using the Color Eye Dropper tool. The Atril Eye Dropper copies properties of a shape such as the outline, thickness, and fill color.

    Transparency can be applied to objects and images.

    CorelDraw: Understanding the Status Bar

    The source provides information on the document status in CorelDraw.

    Here’s a summary:

    • The status bar displays the current status of a selected object. For example, if an ellipse is selected, the status bar will display “ellipse”.
    • The status bar keeps showing the status while the user is working.

    CorelDraw Ruler and Guidelines

    The source mentions the ruler and guidelines in CorelDraw. The ruler helps with measurement and bringing guidelines.

    Key points regarding ruler guidelines:

    • The ruler is located below the document tab.
    • The ruler helps with measurements.
    • It assists in bringing guidelines.
    • To use guidelines, click and drag the mouse from the ruler.
    • Guidelines can be brought from both the horizontal and vertical sides.
    • The use of guidelines inside a design will be explained later.

    CorelDraw: Document Creation, Page Options, and Modification

    The sources discuss page options in CorelDraw, including how to create, view, and modify pages.

    To create a new document, these steps can be taken:

    • Click the “New Document” button.
    • Use the shortcut key Ctrl+N.
    • Go to File > New.

    When creating a new document, a popup window will appear with document options such as:

    • Presets, including pre-defined sizes such as legal, letter, and tabloid.
    • Custom document creation, where you can define the document’s settings.
    • Name.
    • Number of pages.
    • Page view.
    • Color mode.
    • Page dimensions (width and height).
    • Units such as mm, inches, points, or centimeters.
    • Orientation (portrait or landscape).
    • Resolution.

    Page view options:

    • Single page view displays only one page at a time.
    • Multiple pages view displays multiple pages at once.

    To navigate pages:

    • Click the page tabs at the bottom.
    • Use the navigation buttons to go to the first or last page.

    To modify pages:

    • Right-click on a page tab to see options such as rename, insert, or duplicate.
    • Rename: To rename a page, click the “Rename” option and enter a new name.
    • Insert: To insert a page, choose “Insert page after” or “Insert page before”.
    • Duplicate: To duplicate a page, click the “Duplicate” option. You can choose to copy only the layer or the layer and its content.

    CorelDraw Theme Customization Guide

    The source explains how to customize the theme in CorelDraw.

    To change the theme:

    • Go to Tools > Options.
    • In the customization options, find the “Theme” setting.
    • There are four themes available: Light, Light Medium, Dark, and Black.
    • Select the desired theme. The dark theme is similar to Adobe Illustrator.

    Additionally, the size of the icons can be increased if desired. This can be adjusted in the customization options.

    CorelDraw Full Course Tutorial (6 Hours) | Hindi

    The Original Text

    Hello friends all of you are welcome Your Graphic Designing Channel Simplified I am your instructor on TET, Ashish And brother, I am getting a lot of requests from you guys I asked Sir I need a single video in Corel Draw above where we can complete the course Brother, if you can follow then it is your request. The video has been released on Welcome to Coral draw master class guys if you are a If you are searching for the best Corel Draw course then You have come to the right video friends Do you want to become a graphic designer? Do you want to do something by designing or Start your own business in the printing industry If you want to do this then this crash of Corel Draw This course will be very helpful for you The crash course has been designed absolutely For beginners, if you have done this before today I have never opened Corel Draw before this The course is going to be best for you Coral In this course of the draw no one can tell us Previous knowledge is not required in this course We provide practically important tools and You will learn some techniques through video it is long so if you want to do graphic designing I am seriously interested and you I want to become something by learning graphic designing and want to make a good earning So you can see my complete course. if you are into graphic designing Illustrator Myself Before I begin I want to tell you a little about myself I would like to give a brief introduction of my name Ashish and I have been working together for the past 13 years Designing and Multimedia Development I am associated with many Indian and multinational Companies, Government departments and I have also worked for freelancing houses. Friends, I have completed this course a lot of hard work and effort went into making the I have given you a lot of time, that’s why I have full rights with you before the start of the video I want a like from you and those who If you haven’t subscribed to the channel, brother Subscribe to the channel for you I keep bringing videos, what are you will do in corel draw friends this digital Any business or any firm in the world Advertising and good marketing Can’t do without good advertisement A very nice add on to It is very important if you want to pursue a career Digital advertisements or graphics If you want to make a career in designing then use coral You can start your career by learning to draw. Friends, can I help you with some work? I want to show you how to use Corel Draw what can you do like you guys design visiting card design invitation card letter head doctor Prescription Pads Flyers Brochures Books Certificates Form Invoice Book Which of the following You can design all of these things. After seeing all this you might be thinking that friend coral draw is very difficult but This is not the case at all Corel Draw is very It’s easy and I’m going to explain it further in this course making it easy for you to understand hoon career after learn graphic design In this Simplified Tuts course, we’ll cover Corel Learning Draw Software with Corel Draw Logo inside bill book flyer and visiting Making lots of things like cards You will learn these are some top sectors where Lots of graphic designers There are requirements like magazines Newspapers Advertising Agencies Print and electronic media publishing houses Web Designing Industry Corporate Sector or brand For whom is this Management course because in this course I have If you have started from the basics then you can I am a student and doing graphic designing If you want you can check out my course. or if you’re a designer and you’ve started working on something today I have never even opened Corel Draw before then this course is perfect for you or if you have worked on Corel Draw but skilled graphic designer You need more clarity to become You can also follow my course What You Will Learn From This Master of Corel Draw In the course I covered everything from basic to advanced Topics are covered in this complete Very easy to understand course I have divided it into different chapters That topic has been discussed in every chapter I will tell you about the classes related to this in this video I will continue to provide access to the courses To make it easier I have divided all the classes and You can see the time stamp of the chapters in this video given in the description box of With the help of which you can read any part of this entire course Access any topic without any hassle We can do it and we have to move ahead with the times So it is very important to stay updated that is why I In this course, the latest version of Corel Dr. 24 I have used it and I will give you the same I am going to teach you so let’s go to Corel Draw Enter the colorful and creative world I welcome you Ashish Your own graphic designing channel Simplified Tuts [music] But if you want to buy Corel Draw then you You can buy it from their official website Simply you are here google.com so you can download it from here By doing this you can simply install it Whenever you download it, you will You should see it in this way here You will find the files where they are given setup.exe you simply click on this The gift is very simple, next next in it you will keep coming by writing latest, simply you You have to do it next and that is your whole The entire software will be installed because I already have this software in me If it is installed then whenever you open Coral Dr. When you install Corel Dr you will see its There are some or all four softwares in the package provides you the first one is Corel Draw The second is Corel Capture, followed by Corel Fonts manager and then you get coral photo paint in which our jo main The software is Corel Draw Photo Paint because we don’t use it Instead of this, we So friends, this will start happening whenever we draw coal If we open it for the first time then our An interface like this should open in front of you It does this and we understand all the things Here you go, look at them all one by one Corel Draw Welcome is coming with the above written message this is our screen title bar title bar Display our logo here on top of it Our contribution here has been that of software Below the name that is displaying you If you look here, look at us here now In total four menus are visible but now When we create our new file Then we also have another menu here So right now we have four menus here. The bars are visible below that if we If you come here, you will see the strip here It is visible, we call it Standard Toolbar Standard Toolbar Our common or basic options are like that creating a new document is like saving the file to your computer Open the file Save the file Cut to top of the file Applying the copy/paste command or We have commands like undo or read They are available here below our This is the strip you see nearby this is called property tool bar there is a very important strip okay what happens in this is that we who are currently in the current Related to the options being used You can see the options here or whatever tool we’re using Whatever options you have related to the tool You can see them here Below that, there is a tab here. it is visible where it is written Welcome screen Here we can select this tab if we want You can also close it from its left side if you look here you will see a The Toolbar panel is now visible. All of these The options here are deactivated this is because we have not yet released any new The document has not been opened yet As soon as we create a new file You will see all these options here. After getting activated you will get the payment here But if you look here you will find a new A button for the document is also visible By clicking on it we can create a new document you can open it and here is an open You will see a button here for the document. It is being read where we can click and get our Any document that we have previously saved It is kept, you can open it here Look, we see another button On which it is written New from Template With its help we get lots of coral drops If it provides some templates then also we can open it from here so simply If you want to click on this then click here See many templates made here which Corel Draw provides us If you do, you can also do it by clicking on this Check out the pre-made templates here Use it and make changes to it to make your own If you can design it then I will post it here Let me close it like this and if we here But if we come to the right side then here look you can see some things We call them dockers right now We will also read some dockers in the future but We also understand that these are dockers after all So what are dockers basically Whatever options we have inside Docker We use it related to us here Pay options are still visible here I don’t see any option on because right now we haven’t released any new I have not created the document, let’s start with it First, we will create a document here. You can do it to create Simply click here or you also use the shortcut key control n Or you can click here You can also create a new document Or you can go to the File menu and click here You can click on New to create a new document. You can create a new document by If yes, then there are many ways to create a new document To create this you can simply go here Click and you will see a pop up here This popup will open up and appear This is largely inspired by your latest from Adobe Illustrator there also your Pre defined templates here on the side comes and here are the rest of us When the document options appear Here we have some presets it can be seen it is written here legal letter table bold size so basically this Is there any readymade sizes here? I am providing you Croll Drop since so that you don’t have to create a new size May your work be done quickly and swiftly So if you want you can use some presets from here. Use it to quickly access your documents You can create it immediately or as per your wish You can also create your own custom one here You can create a document, see here We see two drop down menus at the top. It is available simply if you click here We need some readymade things here The sizes are shown here as we It is written here that it is the largest page size If you click here, you will There are big page sizes, you can find them here You will see it if you click here Small page size then the small ones The size of the pages can be seen here you will read it okay after that here next to it if If you come here it is written on all pages Sizes as per your requirement You can also choose your document if We click here to print then you We will see that look here what we The presets that are visible are the same There are presets that we use for printing. can be used for example a4 size okay c4 size letter size or if you need If you want to create something for the web then you can create something on the web Click here if you are on the web If you click here you will see that You will get all the options related to the web banner You will get it if you want for any website If you want to make any banner then you can also select that size here You can choose from this or you can choose from social media from here There is also a button for this, you can choose that as well so what would happen here is if you could making a design there is one here in f in custom custom What happens is that we choose a size of our own You can define it from here, okay? Look here the document is written Settings We can create our custom documents from here. so let’s see what are the things in it first Here it is given what is in the name That if you need a name for your document You have to pay in advance, however you can pay later also You can also give it your name when saving it. But if you want to give the name in advance then you can You can define your name here. The document is then given here Number of pages that you need in your Corel Draw How many pages are in the document There are requirements like if you make a book If you are then you should get 2, 4, 10, 50, 100 or more More pages may be required Okay, so here you can see your number of pages. you can increase or decrease it Afterwards, the page view is given here Option is the first here single page is the second There are multiple pages, single page and multiple pages What is the difference between a page and a page if you Multiple pages are maintained from here So I have created 10 pages from you. And you have selected single page view then what will coal draw do to you once upon a time I will display only one page to you But if you have selected multiple pages then what will the code do for you Displays pages to you at one place will give okay give here we have here There are two color modes given We have the first one in CM YK the second one hai rgb so those who watch my videos first those who have been watching since would know that We will use the mode of CM WA do it for your printing industry Inside means if you have any document You are creating any design yes and you want to go ahead and do that If it is ok to take it in printing then you can here from which you will choose the mode of CMY but If you are making a design that You just have to display the screen like above facebooksignup.in its width and You can choose the height of that document What should be the width and height and that should it be in MM or you can choose any other If you want to buy the unit then click here You can also choose the unit of your choice by doing this. whether you want to take it in inches or Should I take it in points or centimeters? You have to take it like if you make some flex If you are there by chance then we will kiss Flex I take it, we take it in feet so you can get it in feet or if you If you are making a visiting card To get the visiting card size either Many of us are experts in millimetres. or some people use it If you use centimeters also then you You can get it from here as per your choice If you change your unit here then you You will see that your units have changed here as well. will go and what did kolda do automatically This has been converted into centimeters You can choose the width and height of your choice from here. you can give the donation here Orientation what is the orientation of our page You should have a portrait here mode and there is a landscape mode so you which As per your wish, you can come here as per your work You can choose your orientation from here The resolution is given in the last The resolution is basically what our default would be It is 300 but you can buy it for less if you want you can also set it here but I I would recommend that you work on 300 only 300 is enough for you any design It’s okay to work if you want to Simply as soon as you press OK here whatever we have mentioned here dimension or whatever We have provided the mode for all those modes By following you can submit your document which is It will be created and come, see this We’ve got a page up here We have a single page created here it has come and now you will see that look this All the options are activated here as well If I come to the dockers you’ll be You will see that all these options are also available You have come here after getting activated ok Let’s first understand Docker a bit that what things are where in dockers exist and what are they called Look at the dockers, it is written here Properties: This strip that you are seeing We call this the title bar and here look here you can see a button There is a collab button, if you like it then click here If you do it then your docker will be here means there will be claps or that it will close And if you want to show it again then You click on this and it comes back here The money will expand and come here See, a close button is also provided. If you want, remove this docker from this list You can simply click on close here try it here we have lots of Dock tabs are provided but the ones that are currently active It is weighted, see it here in blue colour You can see that the Docker that we just created it’s open, okay, and for the rest There are dockers, you can also see them here above Or you can see these dockers and You can also bring us lots of Corel Draw Dockers provides that for Simply you have to go to your Windows and You can find Docker here Look, we have opened two dockers. Both are ticked here and the We haven’t opened the dockers yet If the check mark is not marked then simply you If you need another docker to work then You can simply download that docker by clicking here. you can also open it here after that if we clap this here So on its right side, in the last you will see See, you can get these colors here Options are here and with their help you can to any object in your document You will fill the color here, you will get only a few colors butt are visible but if you look down come here you can expand it yes and here you can see other colours also will be displayed as soon as you you will click outside then this will come back to rest g will hide it a if we scroll down If you come here then we will find some pages related to Options are available like Pay Plus here is the symbol of We insert a new page from here You can do it like this by clicking here Let’s say I first draw a shape here. so that you know okay so if I If I click here, you will see this before we had a page here Our page has been inserted and arrived The plus symbol has already been given to you and it is also given here later It means that the document which you has been selected if before that you If you want to bring the donation then click here After that you have to insert a new page. Then you will click on this plus button So look here we have some more buttons. are also given, now see we have the total There are two pages made, out of which we are working on number one page number one See how this page is working now Our tab is highlighted so look here Whatever work we do is coming with pay one written on it We will do that, our page will be number one if we want to go to pay so we are here on pay to pay Simply go to your page number 2 by clicking You can see here you will be moved to the page You have the option to do it here if you want You can move your page by clicking and After that there is a button given here also This is for your last page means if You have created 100 pages by chance and If you want to go to the last page then you If you click here you will be at the last You will reach the page like this you will see here Please also see the first page option which is not activated yet because We are already on the first page so you If you click here, your document will be displayed you will reach the first page of ok after that you will see a color here There is also an option available which is this strip Your help comes when we Use colors in your document Suppose I drew a circle here and If we click on the blue color here Look at this, you will see that here you have a blue The color is getting displayed, is it ok Whatever colors we have used, which we have it is used in the document We keep seeing colours displayed here will go look at the end of it, you would find it here the status bar right now since I’ve got a circle it’s called ellipse so this Look, our writing is showing that right now We have selected the ellipse So whatever work we do here He will keep showing us his status here After the document tab if you look below So here you get the ruler. basically what it does is it gives us a little It helps us in measurement At the same time, if we need guidelines then This also helps us in bringing the guidelines We also talk about the guidelines Read further, what are the guidelines how is it used but if you If you want to get the guidelines then simply come here Click and drag your mouse So look, your guideline is ready. This is how you can do horizontal and vertical You can bring guidelines from both sides and You can use it on your design I will explain you later what is its use inside the design that how do we use it using from yes alright if you go down to this page above number one or two so as soon as you click on the page If you come to number one then look here you will get a You can see the arrow like here If you click, you will see some options here It is coming open and it is the first one If you want to rename the page then click here You can give a name to your page by doing this Look, I have given the name try here. it is there and you have done ok then see your page The name of this will change here just like that If you want to insert a page here So here we have two options Insert page after and insert page before If we click on after then the page which we have selected and then one A new page will open if you pay before If you click then our before that page A page will open and say ok then The next option we have is Duplicate If we click on the duplicate page of the page If we do this then a popup will open here He will come after doing it and will tell us some things here he will ask as if he is asking that this page Brother where do you want to duplicate it I have to do it after means I have to do this later of the page or should it be done first before Later, see some more things from us here asking as if asking copy layer Only means you only need to copy the layer Or copy layer and their content I mean if you have done any work on this If you have made any design then Duplicate and bring to a new page Let’s say if I select here I copy the layer and their content and do hmm okay so look here we have page two It has been done and we have it on page two as well Look, guidelines are coming here We have a shape forming here. It is the same shape that we saw on page number one I made it, okay, after that you’re watching it you will see it here whenever you When you install a new CoreDrop, open it If you do, you will get one here The theme of white coral draw which I personally like I don’t like it because it’s quite in my eyes This white color theme is silent and since I love working as an illustrator So I like that black theme very much. So if you also want to change this theme If you want you can do that very easily Yes, you simply have to be on top of your tools And here you get the options option You can come here for customization by coming here above and if you look in it then here you will see You get the color option and it is given there itself Theme option is gone, you can click on theme so do it here basically you have to do it here Four themes are available here: Light and Light Medium will look something like this Then here you are given dark theme As soon as you click, you will see You will get the dark theme like this and Then there is also a black theme here which If it comes completely black then it is black I don’t like the theme but I like the dark theme I like these themes, they are some Adobe Illustrator if you make me feel something then you are here Click on it and choose dark theme I can do it okay if you want then whatever you want If they are seeing the icons here If you want to increase the size then you can do that too You can simply come in this size and We could increase it a little bit here so look we have a little bit of everything If they come in big size then this You can adjust it according to your needs if you want and the size you need to work for you According to that you can buy that size from here If you can do ok here then these things of yours There are options and their sizes have also become bigger. we will go alright so let’s do it now We will delete it from here and also this guideline let’s delete it okay so friends if We have to make any design using Corel Draw So first of all we need a shape ok so first i’m going to create a shape here and then on top of that I’ll give you something I will make it and show you and in related matters I will also tell you about the options I will continue to describe, so first of all we go here to the top of your toolbar and We can grab the Ellipse tool from here. I clicked on the ellipse tool here. I have given it to you and if you want to draw it then You can also use the control key Control key will help you in this: Your circle is a perfect circle The draw will take place now see what I do First, I don’t press the control key so if I draw any circle So look at this, draw a perfect circle from you. It won’t look perfect to you It may seem so but if you look here for this Check the dimensions and you will see If the dimensions are not perfect then this means It’s not a perfect circle, I would make it delete and now I draw the circle Using the control key, I press control key and then I click here If I draw a circle then look at this now that my perfect circle comes as a draw It is available, you can check the dimensions here be that we have both dimensions same to It’s the same, you can draw any circle. After that you can fill color in it. what can you do to fill the color You can simply go to this color palette of yours And fill any color of your choice here. If you can, I put a color fill here. it has been done now if you look closely here Look, an outline is coming out I don’t want this black outline what will we do for him from here on out It will come on Colors and see a new one here There is an option for fill so if I click left on it If I press click then whatever I feel it will move but if I stay there I press the right click of the mouse Look, my outline will be removed Whatever is yours with the left click of the mouse There will be a shape, you can fill it with color or fill it You can do this and with the right click of the mouse you You can fill any outline color in it Or if you can remove it, we will see it now I have drawn a circle here, slightly If we make it smaller then to make it smaller here’s what we need to do if you look here we have something Dots are coming out of black We call them handles and these Maintain your shape with the help of handles If you revisit this then look we have seen this If you have reduced the size from the receipt then you can use these Create any shape with the help of handles You can also recycle it, how will you rotate it I will tell you about that later, so right now I what did you do, you filled it with color I have made the shape, make it smaller a bit I have taken it now what should I do here I want to make a duplicate of this shape so Look there are two ways of doing this, one is very easy The way is that you can simply edit here go copy it okay or else look at you You can also get the copy option here. On the Standard Toolbar you can copy and paste the Click on paste here and see Your shape has been pasted here. Because it came pasted on top of that. so you don’t know if you you can drag this and keep it aside okay You will get two different shapes. I’ll do it back, undo it okay And there is another way to do this, which is to copy what should you do to duplicate it or not Right-click it with your mouse or left click drag this from okay and if I You have to copy this shape here Drag it to the right side of your mouse Press the click and see as soon as you You will press right click and see it now You can see on the screen that here See, a plus symbol appears in the cursor it’s representing you that a copy of this is going to be made and as soon as You will release your mouse and see this We have a bean and its object is duplicated it has arrived, i will delete it and I’m going to bring this back here with a small one if I want to copy it then I will return it From This regimen is similar to that of Reciform I will copy the right click of the mouse Press it and see, there is a shape here. I have got its color copied and it has come to me If I change then I will simply go and From here I will fill it with a light yellow color. I will do it, okay I have color fill here It has happened now since I have to If we have to make a sun then we have to do it here But it would require some raise So for that I will use it here from polygonal to i polygonal to a polygonal I will do it okay and in this what you have just mentioned here you can see the angles on the five I will reduce them to three, then see Here you get an option of sides yes you can reduce it to three ok i will make it a little thinner I am doing all this from here with the help of the shift key you can shift the If you don’t press it, it won’t happen from both sides Rather, assume that there will be a reset from only one side For example I undo this and Now if I reduce it from here So look, reduce it in this way okay so this is the way you do it Reduce to what you like and I’m going to place it here like this After placing it, now I have this I want it all around me If it wants a race then we will do it for that What will you do first of all the color of its race if it is there and we change it then I will tell you about it I have done the same color and whatever it is If there is an outline, I will remove it. I have removed the outline I have told you how the mouse is done by pressing the right click key, it’s ok This much has happened, now after that I want all four So for that you just click on this So look here its rotation handles are created I have done it and let me zoom it a little If I do it, look at its rotation here The handles have come ready if I just If I rotate this you will see that It is rotating from the center whereas I want it to be like this I don’t want it from this place it should rotate means this circle of ours If it is rotated from the center, then this center of it You are seeing the point, right? We have written it here Click and we’ll bring it here in its center and then we’ll put it like this So now if I rotate it normally I will rotate it and then I will drag it So look, this was its original shape See, it is rotating while we don’t want it to If we want a copy of this then copy it what will you do for this simply read it here Rotate it from and do what I told you that you can use your right click of the mouse press ok and then you Press the Ctrl+R button on your keyboard what control r does is that whatever your It was the last action, I would repeat it again and again so if I hit control r here So you will be able to see that this See, I’m going to press control R here again and again. I am pressing this, see this whole thing The whole design will come out like this Look at this, it completely looks like a sun here If a design has already appeared in front of you We need to fill gradient in it what is gradient where we have There are two colors, we could have filled them too But I will explain that to you later on too, okay So what did we learn here Here is how to perform the repeat action We learned that by right clicking the mouse we We learned how to copy colors We can add outline and We also learned how to do the fill Learned how to reset an object to an object we learned to rotate okay so that’s it We’ve done a lot of work here in creating this object. We have learned that, now let’s make one other people and there we are something else Let us learn the options but before that we will learn about the file to save the file What you have to do, see here you will get the save The button is visible, click here you can save the file by doing this or you The keyboard shortcut key is Control You can save it from there or you can Go to the file menu and look here it is written It has been saved and look it is written next to it what is the shortcut key for control s control s is there as soon as you click here If you do this then you will see that this whole popup will open will come from save the drawing with the name and Wherever you want to save it You come to that location and assume that I I’m on the desktop and we’ve clicked on this here The file has been saved as testing I have given the file name here. If the testing is okay then you can post it here can you give me the file name ok one thing I will make it clear for you here See the current version here what is showing 24 version okay if you If you click here, you will see it here You will get the other versions which came before 24. Here they are also showing that version When do we use it many times It happens that we have to save a file in a version that someone else also has For example I am giving 24 versions here. I am using it but you don’t have 24 do you use 17 18 or whatever mine is lowest version what will happen in that case If I can email you this file or pen it If I put it in the drive then that file will be in your system pay will not open because your corrol The draw is of a lower version and you have filed The higher version you want to open If it has happened then what happens in that case many times we use this what do we have to do we are simply the ones who love the person in front of us I want to give the lowest version we can choose that from here okay so You can do that from here You can give it here Click on save and your file will be saved It will simply be saved here, see this Our testing is being written here The file is saved, now let’s create a second logo for that we go to page number Above two we insert a new page from here let’s do it okay look here we have a The new page has been inserted and now we We will create another logo here, so that logo We are going to make Domino’s Pizza Have you seen the logo of Domino’s Pizza? If it happens then today we are going to create that. for that first of all we are here If you take the rectangle then what have I done here did you draw a rectangle perfectly Go back to drawing a rectangle If you press the control key, you will see a A perfect rectangle will be drawn okay look here i have a I have drawn a rectangle and I will copy the rectangle here. I just taught you how to copy how do we copy it and after that we can do this We will select both and in this we will fill we will make red color ok and whoever does it This is an outline, I would remove it from here so I removed its outline from here I have removed the outline for you You have told me how it feels right now what should i do about its corners That little bit of rectangle that I’m rounded off Now look, a new task has come up how do we do this now Select your object which You need to round the corners and then After that you come here above the shape tool Look, the shape tool is given here. As soon as you select this, here Now look at the small dots here. It is coming in black colour, you simply buy it Click and drag like this If you do it then look at this corner of yours Whatever number you get after coming round You have to round up. You can round up as much as you want okay so let me round up very lightly so I made a very light round here The value of the round is done, look at me It is showing here 0.09 ok so i will copy this value I take it because I feel the same about this too I want to apply, I selected it And now I went here and I did the same Paste the value here and enter Look at this, both of my rectangles are the same I have it here in rounded corners After that we have to go one more down here If you need a box then I have placed this box here I made another copy of and after that I We grew it up and we treated it exactly like this ok bring it along with domino’s pizza The color of the box above is in red and the boxes below are ours If it is in blue then we will color it back in blue if you do it then I have put it here in blue I have filled the color and then later What we need to do is draw a circle here. How to create circles using the Ellipse Tool And here we will draw a circle and We will fill its color here as white I will fill in the white color from here I don’t need an outline so I can create an outline I will remove it now, look at what I have This circle has come in the form of a little circle I want to make it a little bigger I will make it bigger and now this circle that I see It should be right in the center of this box So, now we are going to learn one more thing here. we are going to eventually turn any object into a Align with another object how to do it for whichever object you need First of all you have to align that object I have to choose what is in my case that I need to align this circle with this red In the center of the rectangle, first we will We will select the circle and then we drag this rectangle by holding down the shift key will select now see we have both the same objects have been selected and Now you can do whatever you want with your keyboard You can press the shortcut key, see Here is the shortcut key for C center for and e is for your middle or you If you want, you can also go through the option Simply go to the object and here you will see See, you get the option of alignment and Look here you will find it aligned If the options for MENT are correct then what happens with C Our align centers are horizontal and E what happens to align center vertical then I like it perfectly horizontal and central I have to align it in both of them so I here you can use shortcut keys c and e also I can use it so I pressed C and after that press e then see my Come to the exact center and form my circle After that I made a copy of this circle If I do, I have copied it here I have copied this, how did I do it now? I told you that you can use your mouse by pressing the left click of your you will move the object and along with it You will automatically press the right click of the mouse So your object becomes a copy of it it will be done and I am here to tell you about it I’ll copy them and then set them both I do this and group it like this See here what you need to do You are given the option of group what does any object mean it’s ok to give each other binders means you two but reacts like an object If you do then I will group it with The shortcut key for group is Ctrl+G So if you want you can also take help of Control ji You can take it, see, I have created a group here if you have done it then what is the use of grouping now Now see these moves of both of them together Now I have to do this also in the center So for that I will select both. On the keyboard I pressed c then e Look, I have come to the center now If you want to write about Domino’s Pizza then do it for that I’ll go over here to the text tool and As soon as I click here Look, the cursor is blinking here and Now I can write anything here. I wrote here Gave Dominoes Enter Pizza, you can change its font if you want You can do whatever you like according to your So let me change the font here. I got a new font here Poppins I would have bolded it here and I would make it a little bigger hmm okay i have enlarged it color me I had to make it white so I made it white yes but now if you pay a little attention to it then Look, there is too much space in the middle I want to reduce this space so for that What we’re going to do is go back to the Shape tool here. Click and then look here An option has come into being, what do we make of it the lines in between can be drawn So we can reduce the spacing here. I’ll click and drag it here. And now I’ll take as much of it as I need by bringing the line spacing to that much When I release it, check it out here Line spacing is here and now I’m going to use it we have to center it from back how to do c and e very good okay so I will press c like this and Press e and see it has come to the center Now I will select this whole thing and I I will group this okay this is the group is gone and then what do we do with it How much do you want to rotate? 45° I want to rotate it so what should we do for that You will simply click on it one more time If you do this, look, I have a rotation handle It is ready and now we will rotate it at 45° I will do it, okay, look at my logo nose pizza that’s ready so some This is how you can make the logo of Naz Pizza If you can then what have we included in this logo? Learned In this we learned that we can make a rectangle how to make corners of rectangle How to round any object how to bring the center into another and After that, whenever we use the text tool When you write something, how do you maintain line spacing? If we reduce it then it will be with the help of so many people I made a logo and taught you let us save it back now If I go to the desktop you can see one thing Notice here’s a picture of my file And a copy is coming whose name is my file name is backupoftesting testing and the name of this file is backup of testing so what does corol draw when Whenever we save any file, then it has a It also creates backup copies, it is very useful for us Sometimes our file is useful The original gets corrected at any time So we can work on our backup file from the region You can do it but if you want then you can backup it You can also do the setting, what do you need for that All you have to do is simply go to the Tools menu Come to options and you will see here You can click on this customization and then Afterwards you look here, come here you will see You get the options of Coral Draw and in it You get an option to save as you like If you click on save option then here Look, you are getting an option called auto backup in the name of okay look what’s here now there is a tick here and here It is written 20 minutes means our file what is happening is every 20 minutes there is a The backup is being saved. Where is the backup saved? You can decide what to do if you want Now look, the set here is the set Temporary location is ok and see here We have it set up so that our backup Whether it will be made or not, we have written it here We have kept it ticked where our backup will be made Folder as original file means wherever Our original file is being saved in the same format. Our backup file can be created anywhere But if you want to change the location Then you select it on browse Go to whichever location you want and you can go there you can go and choose your location ok If you want, you can backup from here You can increase or decrease the timing, if you need 5 You need backup every 5 minutes or you Do you want to avoid making backups again and again? hours backup is made ok so you can also do that here you can choose from it alright i would do this hmm okay so here we have a logo, a new I have tried making it and also how to backup it It will be done, we have learnt that too, now it is good Look here, we have some tools If we are coming prepared then what will we do? We will not learn these tools but we will We will keep working and along with the work we will You will keep learning the tools here, right? See if I were to select this How will we do it, simply click on this will do it and select it but if do I want this or not Selecting only the circle that is in it so what should we do for that because I also think this is a whole group, We have to ungroup it first I click here to ungroup I will do it okay so look at all this now It has been ungrouped, now here we simply If you click like this then you will see my object it has been selected and is it ok or if I’m going to draw a rectangle like this I will make a selection, then inside this selection All the objects that are coming Everything that we have now will be selected Look, the selection is being made, it has become a rectangle but if we want we can have a free hand You can also make a selection for that What you have to do is come to this pick tool and You see this corner here If you click here you can see it here it is written free hand pick you can see this Select it and after that, as much as you want You will make a selection, suppose you see, I have done this much If you have made it, just see it by selecting this or if I made it from here ok so look at both of them this way If you are selected and come here then you can come here if you want Also through my free hand pic from you can make a selection okay so here I am Let me choose the pick tool again and After that we make another new logo and Let’s learn some more options from him So I can insert a new page here. Let me take it, I pressed the page down button on my Look at an insert page from the keyboard Look here, an option has come, if you want So you can insert a new page from here also. Yes, here we have to simply tell that How many new pages do we need if we want one page So here you will write one, 2, 3, 4 are required. Then, input that number here. It is asking where the page you just viewed is placed In my case page is selected If it is number two then page is after number two or before page number two if If you do it after then it will be later, if you do it before then it will be first okay and whatever you want new page What will be its page size if you all If you want something then you can click OK here. Give this a look, we have page number three A new page has come up with insults, okay now what are we going to make here let’s draw it and after that we This needs to have the corners rounded which I did I’ve already told you how it goes You simply click on the shape tool and Round your corners from here Here you go after rounding the corner youtube’s this line that’s going straight to you isn’t it a straight line so now If we have to do that in Corel Draw How to do it? What do we need to do for that? First the shape needs to be curved now what is the curve Look, things happen, we can see the curve in any You can curve an object or text Its simple meaning is that the object that which has original properties finish it right now which means its original property that we have here click on shape doing its rounded corners if we curve it, then it will Simply behave like just one line will do it and not in the manner of an object If it behaves then what to do to curve it So you come to the object and here you will see See it is written convert to curve whose The shortcut key is control key, you can do the same like this You will click on it, see all of them here All the options have changed now if you go here But taking shape to round the corner If you want it, it won’t happen while something else is happening Now here we are going to teach you a new thing. Here is a look at what happens after curving What is happening is that I will zoom in here Look here, you may see some notes It is small and what you can see no these are notes what is the purpose of notes With the help of notes we can define any object Let’s give it some shape, okay, like I am doing right now here I’m going to give you a shape so I like this the line a little bit higher If you want to bring it in rounded shape then click on this line I’ll bring my mouse cursor over and click this I’ll take it a little higher and see what happens it is happening it is not happening round but this whole thing which is the both nodes of both they are shifting upwards now How do we solve this, I will explain it here I first undo and then click these I select both notes After selecting, look here If you look at some of the notes, you will Related options are available like any If you want to bring the note in a straight line so you’ll click here which is now I have mine here but what do I need I want to curve this line so I’m going to put I will click on Convert to Curve OK And now if I click on this line and if I move it a little bit then this Look, you make it in such a rounded shape it is coming isn’t it so you give it a little You can round me up like this note also from here you have to convert to curve and I just need to round it off a little bit here Similarly, I also need to read the two notes below. You have to select Convert to Curve a little bit I need to round this up and at the end I need to curve this as well a little bit I need to round this off okay now you You will see that this is its shape Look, the middle one has become slightly round and we have selected it completely and I filled it with red color and I have removed its outline. okay now i want it here Its symbol which youtube2 sides if you look here Look here it is written five sides I want to do this three times so I will do it here I should do three sides on this And now we have to rotate it, so rotate to do this what will we do it here We will click on it and rotate it from here. We can do it at any angle we want and After that we have to do it in the center Alina so I’ve told you all this That’s why I’m not telling you this again how to align both of them press c and e to align it to the center It has been done, fill it with white color Give it and remove its outline If you do it, you will see this in front of you youtube1 It has been done in a very simple way I hope you got everything in a very easy way It must feel good, someone might understand also question if you feel in between the video Pause there in the comment section below It is given there, ask your question I will answer that for you, okay one person we And let’s learn to make banana but before that let’s learn What did we learn from this logo? Here we have learned how to process any object How to curve any object after curving it how do we use it You can give shape, use polygon here learned How is polygons made and how is objects is rotated then last how The object is aligned to a comes together with another object On top of the new page I have created a new page here I have inserted it and let’s create it here Another logo which will be the logo of Messenger We will create that here with the help of the ellipse tool. So here first of all we have a lips tool will draw it something like this okay and After that, we have to fill color in it. If you have ever seen the Messenger logo There are two colors used, one is blue and you have one pink color which we call People say magenta color so we are here I will use the blue one here Shades used are light blue and dark If both blue and blue are used then we are the most First you will bring your object here We will select it and then we will come here You will go to this option which is given below With the help of Interact Fee Tool, we You can create the gradient simply here Click and by clicking here you will Look, here you can see some options yes you have to choose fountain fill here Option of fountain fee as per your choice Look, there is a default color fill here It will come in black and white but if you want can you change this what do we have to do We have to do pink and blue first We will choose a note here and we will Here you will click on pink and then After that we select the second color node. we will do it and we will click on blue Look, it has arrived in pink and blue Now its direction of colour is also If we need to change then you can use the note for that Select it and simply go to your destination You have to keep it there and then apply your color you can change the direction if you If you want to add a new color in the middle then For this, simply create a new note And beyond that you can fill in a new color what have you to do for that come on this line Click on the thin line above it Double click and you will see a new node It will be created here and in that You can fill it with any color of your choice, I I will fill it with blue color here. in the one above and the one below I want to do light blue color okay so I I go here and from here I choose the color I’ll do another light blue okay and now after that we’re here But we would have placed it in some way like this so we need a little bit of pink color in it If I want to increase it a bit then I will use pink Let me shift the color a little bit more On the down side, this is our brother circle and we have filled it in fountain fill but if you look here you will see a Even a small corner becomes a part of us How to make it, we make a pen With the help of a tool or a free hand tool Where to get free hand tool from Help come here go to the top of the toolbar and here See, you get a free hand tool. Select this and you will simply click on it What you have to do is just click once and you are done Look, he will draw a line here and come as soon as you click the second one okay The line will end there and if you want So we can create a new line from the same node so I clicked here again Here I made a new shape again. And I’m back where I started I brought it back there and gave it back in a Click and see the whole thing It has taken a shape and we can make it look like this You can move wherever you want We think it is the perfect place What we have to do is place it there Can so here I feel like this is perfect and now what do we have to do These two have to be connected together to connect what will you do with both these objects Select it and as soon as you select it You will see that some options will appear automatically here. We will go to the first option which is There is an option to weld about all these options I can explain you further but right now I am only here Teaching you how to use pe weld what happens to the weld is that any two or weld two or more objects together I become one with you Like I will click here you can see it Look, that object has moved away from here and they both together became there is a single object if you want to color If you want to change anything then you can change the color as per your choice You can set it back to whatever color you want Looks like it’s okay, you can put the color here. yes, I can also add some radish here I take it upwards so just a little bit of me looks more perfect right up top Slightly redder than pink and blue here and then a little bit lighter light blue which A very slight light blue is okay So, this much work is done, now I am here There is one more thing to do and in between there is something How do we get the design made? We will make it here for free With the help of hand tool you can simply free hand Choose the tool and make any shape you want in my case they can draw I am drawing a shape like this here hmm okay so a shape something like this It will become ours and look at this, this shape of ours will be formed If someone has come to you in this shape If any changes are to be made then they You can simply do this with your shape tool. Choose your shape tool and apply whatever you like You have to make changes to your shape tool By selecting these notes from the help, can you okay so where do I get the shape I am there that yes it is perfect I’ll leave it alone until I see this Here you can try to give yourself a perfect shape tries to So this is our Y shape now. I want to fill it with white color I have filled it and the outline is She is coming from black, she removes me from here You have to do this outline which you are seeing If I remove this then I will go here I will remove it, after removing it I want to align it in the center so We will select both then c and e ok Look here it’s aligned in the center it has been done and it has come okay so look at this our The Messenger logo appears nearby In a very easy way you can change the Messenger logo If you can make it then we have made it in this logo What have we learned from these people? how do we draw a circle We can apply gradient color in it. can that which we call fountain color and along with it we have learned that we How to Draw Any Picture With Any Free Hand Tool How do we create an object? You can merge them together or weld them If you can then I hope you can make this logo right now People should practice it near you You can do this very easily on the system You can move forward and create a new logo we learn to make and along with that we learn a new If you also learn options then for that I what will we do first so first of all we are here If we take a new page then we have clicked on new page I’ve inserted one here and now we Here you are going to make the A logo which you Do you use a mobile phone and how can you see its logo? We will make it here, we are going to learn it For that first we have to create it here on a circle so first of all we’re going to put a how to make a perfect circle With the help of control key I clicked here Look, it has come in a circle and in this whole I don’t want the circle, I want it If this only forms a half circle then whenever you If you make a circle then look here you will see something You get options related to the circle Here we will choose the pie option which given in the center as soon as you put the pie You will click and see the pie closed like this she will come after doing it and after that since I If you want it here then I will choose it here After choosing the Shape Tool and Shape Tool You select this note and light it If you move your sa upwards then you will see your This shape will change back Now look I have a perfect half The circle has been formed and after that We have to make a rectangle with the help of So we will take one shape here, rectangle tool and we will make a shape with it here, okay so We have created this here, shape and shape since a little bit is coming together I need a little space in between so I I’ll give it some space here. and then these bottom corners If I want to round off, then for that I Here I will choose the shape tool and I will I will select both the notes and I I can round this up as much as I need to I have to round it off, I will round it off that much I think it’s a little big So I’ll make this a little smaller These two have turned out to be absolutely perfect Select it and fill it with color Let’s take the light green color now after that we what do we have to do we have to make its hands that are made in the android logo We’ll go back to the Rectangle tool and With help we will make one here rectangle and we call it its corners That will make it round and we will make the same copy Let’s take it to its right side also here And we will give both of them back Green Look at the color, both of its hands have come ready now its turn to love it so we Let’s copy the object and paste it let’s place it here okay and its Let’s make another copy and slightly right it Now let’s place both of them in We select the object by pressing the Shift key how to do it with help first do one Click then hold down the shift button, then click on the second Click here to see both our selections It will happen and then what will we do after that We have to do it, we will do it in groups Ctrl+G is the shortcut key for this or Then if you don’t want to use the shortcut key If you want then you can see it here also You are getting the option of group, you can simply Click here to find your object The group will be done now why did I do the group There is a reason for that as I have never felt any pain in both of these Place these objects at the center of this rectangle If I have to bring it in then now since the groups have been formed now i will select this later I chose rectangle and then clicked on keyboard If we press the C button, you will see this in the center will be perfectly placed After that I have to make it here How will we make the eyes here ellipse tool and here we’ll draw ellipse to circle ok will do this Fill with white and this is where I feel it that I want to place it there I’ll place it and make a copy of it The group will select both of them again I will tell you how to do a group and center it If you take it then this much is done now its here I want to make an antenna now how to make an antenna We will make antenna, we will make line tool With the help of I will take it here for free I have provided the help of hand tool for free here. I chose the hand tool, click here did and click below to see it now She’s coming to me in a straight line why is she coming as hers i am I am going to answer you but before that you Let me know in the comment section below how is the straight line coming out yes you have guessed it right I pressed it on my keyboard The shift button should be a straight line so if I don’t press the shift button it is coming If I press my line, I will send it anywhere A straight can move in the direction If they don’t come in a line then I have said here Press Shift and it becomes a straight line Now I want this line to be thicker I want to do something a little bit about it I need to increase the width, how will I increase it You first select this line and Look here you will find its options When you go, you will see whatever thick line you want You want to do that, draw that thick line here you can ok i will take it here 4 The point which is enough seems too much to me if I make it three then this I have done three now I am here I am going to teach you something new every time you Do you draw a line like I did here If a line is drawn on it then in this line also there are a lot of properties ok that’s it We get all the properties How to open it above the Outline Tool panel to open it either First, select your line and Press the f12 button on your keyboard or you can If you come down, look here You get the option of outline and Click here twice means double Click like I double click here I will do what I have, see the outline A complete dialogue in the name of pen The box will open and you will see it here See there are many options given First of all here related to outline Color option is given, if you want then choose the color You can change it, simply come here and You can buy any colour you want from here you can decide ok after that There is an option to adjust the width of your line What should be the width? I took it here. It has happened, you have to take 3 points if you have 16 points you take 16 okay i will take it back I will do three and then give it here Your outline of the unit is given below: What is your unit for the width? Would you like to prefer points in my case if you want you can call it picas or millimetres or You can use any measurement in centimeters Whichever you find easier Look at the style given here what can i do that you can line you up Do you want dotted one, in which style do you want it you can also choose from here ok Later, see what is useful for us here. this option is corners here if you If you look, you will see what is exactly here The corners are not rounded when are you because what is in the A logo What happens is that these corners become rounded I want round corners So, this line cap, I use it I will make a round, see I have done it here I clicked on the middle and look at the round cap Look at the corners, they have become rounded I’ve gone I’ll do it ok now its color is green to me If I want it like others have it then I will give it to you I will select it and I will click right on green I will click and see it has turned green and I want to rotate it on this What will happen if I click again here? Look, the rotation handles are ready too And I can rotate this here. ok above 30° and after that simply What can you do? Make it a little smaller And you can put it where you want Place it as per your convenience, if it is okay then I placed this one here I made another copy and now I need it I have to rotate it but which way, the other way what do we call him, we call him Let’s say what happens in flip flip that you are in the same size as your shape and What is the angle at which you are It will do a flip, meaning it will go to the other side If I go then how do we do that See, whenever you select any object you do it, see you will find it here can i find the handles ok If I zoom in on this, what do you do? This handle is the middle handle because I need to flip it right side means I need to flip it to this side So I’ll select this handle. I will press the troll button on my keyboard and I’m going to move it like this, I’m going to drag it and See, I’m showing you a preview here. I will bring it here and release it I will give you this, see what happened

    to my object it came back after doing a flip okay i’ll put it here I place them both from I select and group it and I I’m going to put this in the center of this circle let me place it okay so it should be like this Now what am I supposed to do those black outlines that I don’t know If I want to remove them then I will select all of them I will do all the objects and from here I I will remove the outline of this Look, we have got perfect shape it’s gone and the andrew logo’s okay so something like this You can easily create Android logo in this way We must have learned to make this logo I will tell you what I have learned Here we first learned how we Let’s create a circle, then we will call that circle How to draw a half circle using the shape tool from this we made a rectangle We rounded off all the corners that were there We drew another rectangle around it rounded the corners after that we made that Copy the rectangle and place it here When it came we grouped it and put it in the center then we placed the ellipse here Create two circles using the tool and center them And after that we used the line tool or we used free hand tool We have created a line here. We filled the color and then rotated it So we did this flip copy here. okay so i have given you quite a few options If you have got something to learn from a person then come Hope you are liking this thing that You are also getting to learn options in this way And you also get to learn how to make logos If you are getting then there is enough practical knowledge They move forward and learn the creation of a new people and at the same time its I also want to work on options for that I will create a new page here and Now we’re going to make one here. okay it comes how do we create those people we will do that we will learn it here okay so For that we come here first. over the free hand tool and create us here There will be a shape, so we will make one here A simple shape with the help of which we can make we will design the logo okay something like this This way I made a shape here and after that we will choose shape here tool and select all these shapes or We will select all these notes and here We will convert all the notes in Convert to Curve and then we have I will have to give it a slight curve so how will that happen We’ll curve it a little bit here let’s do it and after that we have to do it here also If we want a curve then here first we have to You will need to create a new note here. because I need to keep the line here straight If you want then we have a new one here for that After we have created the node, we have this We will select this node and We can easily give a curve or shape here. okay so whatever shape you want to give You can easily give it a shape here. Look, I’m giving it this shape right now, so what? it’s happening i’m choosing this handle So this other handle is also moving to us If I don’t want it then I can undo it let me select this note and Look here, you are given an option what is the name of the floral node what does it do that both your handles will now perform different functions I will do it if you work on this handle See, only this handle of yours will be used You have no performance on other handles something will happen okay so I have sent this note I want to delete it, I did it delete okay and now we can put this shape in our We adjust accordingly, whatever suits us we need shape and after that we will do this The node is ours, we have to return it too in shape okay something like this Very easily we can create a new shape here we can create and whatever our Nike if we have a logo then we can make it here Look at our shape in this way he has come to us as ours, we have to give him I will have to fill it with black color here I will fill it with black color, alright, this much Our shape is now formed, after that We also have to write here Nike so its So what we will do is simply edit our text We will come to the tool, select it and here We will click and after that we will write here Nike, can we make it a little bigger? Let’s take it and I’ll make it a little bold as well I will do it and after making it bold we need to do this a little italic this See it is italicized and I am calling it my I place it at the proper place where I want to keep it okay see this it’s something like this in the way that our Here you will create a new logo free hand With the help of the tool and whose logo will it be You must have seen the logo of Motorola company I must have seen all the phones of my mother I am going to make a logo here so for that what will we do first we will take here Ellipse tool and here we draw a circle After I draw the circle I will I will fill color in it, blue color I’ll pick up a light blue one here. ok if I want to change the color to blue So we can do that too, simply use this color Click here and see it in front of you You will get the option to edit the fill here. Go to the color viewer and select the color you want It is in blue, you can give that color as per your choice You can, okay then I can choose the color which I like It’s right, I’ll take it according to my convenience am giving Okay, so here’s ours, look, here’s a circle. Its outline has been prepared and is ready It is also coming in black, I will remove it Let me give you my outline has been removed And now we have to make a shape here. We create that shape with the help of the free hand tool So for that we’ll have to take it from here Free hand tool and help of free hand tool From here we can create any new shape if you can then I can do that by clicking here let me start making this okay i’ll do it right I am not telling you the perfect logo I am telling you again and again but I have an idea for you I am telling you how to create this logo If you can then look at this, I have posted one here A small one has made a shape here and I will make changes in this shape and add the rest of it If I want to make shapes then how will I make them I will do it lightly, you should pay attention Look, I have taken shape here After I picked up the tool and the shape tool, I I selected all these notes and I what did you do with this click on convert to curve I’ve done it, right? And after that I Let me reduce it a little bit, this area I have reduced it a little here I have taken it according to my own will and downwards Come here so I want a new node here If I want then I will double click here I’ll get a new node just like that If I want a new note here too, I can double click. I will get a new node now this one New nodes have come to us for these With the help of this we will create a shape here Simply we have to click it like this and Here we have to make a shape like this For the logo or click here and then I hope you can fix this thing Look like this, it is coming here also, I have seen it Select the flower note and click on it This is our handle, we put this handle here you can correct it with okay so look at this We have a shape formed here now these two nodes are I need to shift them up a little bit, so I I selected both of these nodes and I I’ve moved it a little bit upwards here has shifted something is above this position No rest if you see this circle in the middle I have given it in my If you want to do it then you can do it according to your requirement Wherever you feel is right then this is ours Look, I have formed a shape now You need to flip this shape and make a copy So we will select this by pressing the control key I’ll press it and then I’ll flip it and make a copy of it I will make it and after that I will take the shape Shift it a little bit to the left here I will do this, meaning I will overlap these I will select both of them and we Here we talked about weld option first We have discussed about the same weld option here We will click and see as soon as we reach here Clicked this and see both the shapes of both. Look at these beaches that have welded together The area is of which we can adjust Use your shape tool to shape it as far as you can You can adjust it to the size you want can you adjust it okay so I’m here I’ll try to adjust it If I bring it down a little bit, I what do i do i put a new note here I create something by double clicking and Let us convert this to line ok and now what do we do here Let’s also convert it to line, this is fine Look, I have both the notes. She has been created and now this We get it back into its proper shape According to that, wherever we feel it is right So look, this logo has come to us It has happened in between, now we will take it according to our own You can make it bigger or smaller as per your requirement I can adjust it so I can center it I take what it takes to get to the center I have already told you about C and E and you can read this Fill the outline with white color Remove it and see your logo Is Allright, go ahead and learn something And we will bring new interesting things for him. Let’s go to a new page, I’ve clicked here A new page has been inserted from back to front we are going to study in corel draw Shaping About Shaping Commands We will learn to combine in commands Or weld and trim it this way There are many more commands inside it If we talk about them then first of all How to activate it first If you understand then here I have made it there is a shape so for the shape I have chosen from here The Ellipse tool is selected and we have selected it here I drew a shape on it, okay, inside it we Suppose you fill any one color I have filled it with red color here. So look now we have the property toolbar No shaping commands appeared on the Whatever commands we have here are displayed That’s happening with our Ellipse tool Related our commands are shaping commands we meet when we have two or more more than one object is selected and alright so for that we have a of the object and make a copy of it, and Let’s change its color a bit, let’s say I have set its color here to blue. So now we have two objects have become of different colours, so now we If you select both, then see As soon as we select these then here Here you will see that we have property We have some new commands on top of the tool bar These commands are being displayed There are commands for shaping here, see the best The first command which we get is displayed here what remains is the command of the combine What does the combine do? It works on two or more than two objects into a single create it in the object on which we Can I make a common fill or a common outline We can atrail the combine into a rectangle Ellipses Polygonal spiral or graph even we people You can apply this on text as well Simply we need a single curved Let’s convert it into an object So let’s understand what it does after all Look here we have two selected objects and if I combine both of these If I combine it, I will click here. I’m on top of the combine whose shortcut I’m on So there is also control L, so here you You will be able to see what these two objects are Look at the groups that have formed among themselves, such as The forms are done I’m moving one so both are moving and if I go here I will change the color then see both of them together the colour of both of them will change again in what do we need to do to differentiate we have to do a break here Part hum jese here break a part ka Will you use command or control shortcut? We will use K to break the parts for that you will be able to see that look at this both The objects are back to us separately and now we are going to separate these two again We can change the colours if we do both of these overlaps the same objects then what do we get to see let’s go They can also see if we see these two overlaps back to back, meaning one by one we overlap this one on top of the other And then we connect both these objects and now if we combine If you do this then you will be able to see that look here You will find a blank area then combine What does combine do to two objects what does all this do together The path creates us here look we have one here in the middle We have a part of an intersect visible this is our blank part here there is no object there is no color Even if we change the color on this you will be able to see that the rest of the two There are objects whose color is changing There is no color change in the middle part It has been good with the combine, we have got a lot of You can also create shapes or designs Let me give you an example I will make a single design and show you the rest Then you guys practice and tell us what Whatever you make of me you will make it of me I’ll give you the link right now In the description of the video itself you will find Join me and share your designs with me okay so first of all what are we doing here Let’s do it here, we can take any An ellipse is okay and it’s written something like this We can create such a design here. make it a little smaller and now I have to do this to If you want to make multiple copies then see Multiple To make copies we either use the mouse and or you use the command What command do you use for this command? You can click here for the command you need to do Windows come in here come in here to dockers and dockers Inside you will find a command Where did this go in the name of transformation As you click on this you will see your See the complete Docker on the right side This transformation will come by opening We get a lot of commands in Docker yes but now what we have to use currently So we have to use the rotation command what i will do is i need to get this object to 20 I want to rotate it at an angle and I want that we have a total of 10 copies of this object If he comes close to you, then you will see that I am like I will click on apply here and you will see Some such copies came to us now what did i do is select all of these and here we chose any one color If you apply then you will be able to see that All objects here have a single color The one which is green has been applied and arrived now what we will do is select all of these what do we do, we do a magic what kind of magic is this what will we do with it If we combine them then see how we If you click on combine then you will be able to see Look, we have a new design It has been done and it has come, okay now look here Look, he hasn’t come with a fill in two I will tell you the reason why this happens has not come because we have number off here We have taken a few extra copies Instead of taking 10 here, we want eight here You should have taken copies, okay so what about that what would have happened here we have more objects one on top of the other He must have come here after becoming one and we Since it has been combined, hence here If the color has not been filled then return it Let’s undo it before doing this to correct it So let me undo this and now what do we do from here an object this Look, we removed it here, look here look at this an object is created and an object this one look here one the object was made we could do both of these Let’s delete it and then the whole select it and do it combine so now you see we have a very This wonderful design has come out If you want you can remove its outline yes simply you go to the outline and print it Remove the outline like this we are here Can create many different shapes With the help of the combine you can do anything you want You take a random shape, suppose I have put it here It has taken a square shape now After taking the square shape you can cut it into square shapes. How can you make any design through this Let’s say we go here and We haven’t taught you this yet, though. I will tell you further about the distal tool. I will teach you but I will simply leave you alone here. I am showing you by taking an example that I have given here I chose a Dettol tool and with the Dettol tool We have seen one such shape here. Okay, we have created it and now what do we do? So we made copies of it so we did the same here I chose 8 copies here and applied. So look, we have multiple copies here. She has come readymade, now we have selected the whole did a and we clicked on combine here so this has been combined and now we have We have filled any one color here. If you did it then see, you are seeing how much By creating a pattern with the best of the best This is the way you can make a difference You can create patterns by exploring you can do some experiment with this okay so next with the combine tool Let’s grow and understand after the combine The next tool we get is weld and what ever work is done then for that also since we need at least two object so we have two objects here has been created and both of these I’ve placed the objects here like this: I have done it and if you want I can change its color To explain it to you in different ways And after selecting the color of both of them Now look, we have an option here. what is the weld of weld what does the weld do combining two or more objects into one Converts it into a single object This is a very focused approach with a single outline The thing to give is with a single outline look if we click here So as soon as you click on the blood, this Look, these two objects merge together and in between no one can see you You don’t see the outline of other objects You are getting a single outline show if you are talking about the whole object then you can do this You can also create an object of the method With the help of Ho Weld option, you can You can also create a picture by combining shapes and text Suppose we can create an object We made a circle here, someone here I also took an alphabet and wrote it a little So we grew it up this way and we I placed it on top of it like this okay and what have we done to both of them here Once weld it, you can see both of these look the objects are merged together and If we fill color on it, it will look something like this This way we will get the color filled So you can do something like this, let’s talk now We are moving forward in the next step and understand the next option which is what our trim trim does See we selected both and here Look at this, you get the option of trim Look what Trim does that Overlap of both objects area is, suppose what is the overlap area Let’s say we have created this object in this way When you place an object then this is what you see in the middle Are you seeing the area, this is our overlap? is the area where both these objects are If they are overlapping then what is that This cuts out this overlap area Who gets the cut is also something to be understood Let’s say we have two objects here I have taken the first one here in this color And we bought the second one in green color The green one is on top and the pink one is on top the one who is going to be there is down below or what is it called Magenta is below, first we selected it we did the green one later I have selected my magenta one and Then we trimmed it so you can see this You’ll find that our green one has turned magenta If you have trimmed that one then here you will see You have to be very careful that the object you okay that object You have to select it later, now I will select it Let me undo it again and what I did just now We had chosen green earlier but now what shall we do first we shall choose magenta after that we will choose green and Now we’ll trim it and see what happens next. what did he do was trim the green one see this is given okay so the object We have to trim on which we apply it We have to do whatever our effect is Later you will have to select A to proceed further Let us further understand about the next command that which is within this is ours intersect now what was intersect doing that like which trim did what work that trim The work was to ensure that the overlap area of ​​both he was cutting it but intersecting it what does that overlap area in the middle do There you will find a new object I create it and give it to you, look at these two has overlapped here we clicked above intersect and now you you will see that here you will see that you have a A new object has been found for both of them got an object in the middle okay Let’s go back and understand the next command about which we have here Simplify Now Simplify Something of Ours It works just like trim, if we look here If you click, you will see that our The object has been cut and has come Now you must have a question here that when Our job is to simplify the object the same thing for cutting or trimming Our trim command was also working What is the difference between the two, sir? In this it happened that when we were two or two Selecting multiple objects at once Let’s say we have taken this shape here. and we place this shape on top of it and We will create multiple copies of this here. let’s do it okay this is how we have done it here I created multiple copies, now look at me I am showing you both examples of this So I’m making two copies here now. I selected the whole thing and we Previously applied Trim command see Trim What will happen with the command, just see and Only this which is ours, which is the lowest, The last object was trimmed and came But now if we put all these aside okay and now if we choose this and Here we apply Simplify You can see the command, simplify it as soon as we If you do this, then see every object above Trim the object beneath it These look look at this you can see all of them All the eyes have come trimmed, so each one The object above has a different The object is trimmed. This is what we do people do it through simplify so okay If there is a difference between the two then from now on You should keep in mind that after all the trim and What is the difference in Simplifi going forward Let’s go back, I have made two shapes here. I have made both of them, I have filled them with one color I will take you through different ways to explain I have selected both and The next command we have here is front minus back front minus back what does it work the same way you Overlap both points first We choose this shape from the top The green ones choose the shape later Let’s click on the shape and here we go to front minus back so you will be able to see that here ours which is below or which we later what did the chosen one do? intersect what has been done to the object above us And at the same time, it got deleted itself as well. is ok with this whereas it is not happening in trim ok so what is in front minus back It happens that the object in our back He applies the object in front of us It trims it and ours is just like that The last command is back minus front What does the one above do to us? The object is the one that marks the object below It trims ours and it also gets deleted goes along well okay so something like this This is how we will use all these commands here Let’s give a command, we stay last here which is create boundary create What does the boundary do? No one can walk here. I will not make any changes on this, only here We are seeing an outline boundary We will get it by creating it like we are here If you click on it you will see that we An outline boundary is found here Okay, so these were all our commands. There are commands for shaping that we apply it to the objects and to differentiate different objects or shapes It is used a lot when we People use it to create their logos Where we create logos So we use it a lot there. So now let’s come to our same command use it in practical knowledge and We will show you something so that your Whatever doubts are there in between, they should also be cleared So first of all we make it here which We have a shoe company Ads, its here If we create a logo then that is created what we’re going to do first is we’re going to We will take a circle here and make a copy of it what shall we do now to make something like this I had explained to us that the middle place here This is the area we need, so we have it How will I get everyone, comment me quickly tell me how to get it ok then let me tell you further How to get this which I told you just now told if yes then the answer is that we will come here And here we will find the intersect If we click on this option then we will see this we have this one in the middle here which is our Look, that was the area, we have found a leaf is the area like the one we’ll be using in our AIDS logo and we look at this If you click once more, you will see our There will be rotation handles built in and this This is our point from where our entire what to do if the same object rotates This is our center point, we Let’s move it a little bit downwards We’ve moved it down a little bit, okay? and after moving down we get this The shape of the leaf which we are getting is of this Make a copy in the right corner and make the same shape We will make a copy on the left as well, something like this So look at this way we have two shapes we have come in shape and are a little far away So we pass them in some way like this They’ve come a little bit closer now We have perfect and now what are we We will do it on all three of these objects Let’s fill it with black color, see We have a leaf area here. He has come back after doing all this, what should we do with him from here we can weld if we want so we’ve welded it up here and After that we take it here rectangle tool and from here we create some of our rectangle shapes so we have this total We need to make three shapes so we drew one, two and three okay we have three rectangles here I have made the shapes according to my own choice and this You can place yourself wherever you like Yes, you can place it according to your convenience After doing this, these are the three shapes We also weld these together and Now what will we do is to weld these two We will select the objects here. And after selecting, we are here we will click on trim ok see like this As soon as you click on Trim, what will you do? You will find that if you remove this shape now, It is of no use to us, let’s do it are delete and look here we have this The logo has come as a trim object Ours is ready, simply you just enter the name below you have to write eddie das is ok and whatever you want its relevant font is ok font I’m not going to go into too much detail on the also do you like its font, did you like this take this and make it a little bigger okay so look at this we have our edge The logo is ready, you can simply do it this way You can create a logo like this only if you ever Definitely it will happen, you can create that too you can if you simply draw a shape here Create and fill any color of your own here Do whatever you think it is It’s the perfect colour [music] will have to be made bigger, for which we will have to The text needs to be converted To convert a curve to a curve The shortcut key is control-q or whatever you want So go to object here and here You get the option Convert to Curve as soon as you convert it to curve Look, all the notes are displayed here. It will be done and from here you can choose the shape tool. Click here to work on the notes and click below You can slightly play these two notes below Just shift it, that’s all you have to do After that both these objects Select it and here you can simply trim Click on Trim What will happen is you remove this and your [music] told about the next options which are Very simple option of group and ungroup And it is a very useful option Group and ungroup within your design what does two or more merges objects together So let’s say we have an object here here is the second object here The third object is not necessarily the same Meaning the object should have the same property as ours They may be of different properties also what I mean to say is that line it could also be a text it can also be a polygonal shape, Select the same shapes together and what can you do with it, you can group it what happens in the group is that it By not making all objects behave individually We come in the same category as here If you group it then you will be able to see that this We will be able to move all objects together Together we are small, together we are big or rotate it Even if we want to do it, we can do it together ok if we want to fill color on it then we can do that together too okay and If we were to take it apart again, For that we need to ungroup To ungroup please see here You get the Option Property Toolbar Click on ungroup or its shortcut key There is control over you, you can also control yourself through this You can ungroup if you want to go to the main so you go through the object menu and Here you get the option of group Inside the group you will find the ungroup Option from where you can ungroup it again You can, like, ungroup this. look what will happen all these objects back to individual objects and now you’re beyond these again Apply your own colors or shapes differently If you want to do that you can apply this Our ungroup option comes next grow and do something else on top of the objects things that we apply in our work Whenever we do it we also learn it You are working on one of your designs So there is one more command which is It is used a lot which is a copy The command to do means we need its multiple we have to make copies as till now we If you were making it then look at it with us There are two-three methods, the first method we have is this that you select this and whatever you The Property Toolbar is available here There is a copy command given on it, right? Select your object It will be copied to that and you will be able to take it back to where you want to go If you want to paste it also then simply click on it If you do it, it will be pasted, after that you You can keep it anywhere, this is one way There is a way to copy any object What is the second way that you can do this Select the object and you will see it here Do the same thing as per the menu through this too it is a long process you can do the same work You can copy and paste it or whatever you want So select it again using the mouse Keep it selected and drag it like this The right click of the mouse can be used as If you press it, a copy of it will be made and appear. This is the way and there is another way ok as you select it You will get the numeric key from your keyboard. There is a pad, you will find the plus button there As soon as you press the plus button So look, its copy has already been made and arrived You can remove it and keep it anywhere and in the last there is one more method okay that hardly anyone would know that you Select the object and use the mouse As you move, you will see here A preview showing what this object is If we leave it or if we click on it if we release it then where will it be placed If it comes then wherever you find a copy of it You should keep selecting it and your which is your space bar from the keyboard you Press it and you will see a copy being made It will come like this wherever you take it Let’s keep pressing it right there One copy will keep getting made, ok, see this also This is a very easy way to make multiple copies There are some ways to make it so you can have multiple You can make copies in the copy, one more way It also happens, we call it a duplicate So if you want, you can If you want to duplicate it you can do that as well what do i do first i am here There are too many objects, delete them and there’s only one single object I can see I’ll put it here and now what should I do? If you want to duplicate it then you can do it in edit okay so what we copied earlier Later we pasted both of these Commands are from our single command which is a duplicate whose shortcut key would be if you have control D then look at this you have it A bean object has arrived and its duplicate If yes then we can copy it in this way also. You can copy or duplicate the object We can also make multiple copies through Sometimes it also happens that the object We have to copy it on our Corel Draw It is not based on any other software Suppose it is on Paint, it is on MS Word it’s up there it’s above Excel it’s anywhere If it may matter then for example I am what do i do here i put excel here Let me open it and assume it’s inside Excel I have some data here, and I want this data to be given to me You have to copy it and take it with you to your Corel Draw Above, first we selected the data here From here we copied and copied After doing this, now when we come to Coral Draw and go back to the edit menu and here See, we now have three options activated. Pest and Pest Special is coming ok so then we will do the work of paste special When we take an object in such a way which may be from some other software Like now I copied the data from excel I have done it but I have to bring it here Okay, so here we’re going to use paste. For special, you can click on paste special. If you do this, you will see a window opening here she is coming after doing this and will ask you that what is this In which format do you want to paste it? If we want to paste then we will choose here Since I had to paste it into excel So we’ll choose Excel here and do that. okay so look we have this data It has come after being pasted and it is complete The data is editable if you want, just like this If you double click on it you will be able to access it again You will go single and you will have to make whatever changes Suppose I don’t want Gautam here. So we deleted Gautam here, okay and if we close it then you You will see that Gautam has moved away from here okay then here it is all yours The format is editable whenever you want it You can go back to the same software and make the changes can I bring you here again and again There is no need for you to edit it directly from here you can do it, okay so this is the paste The work of the special goes forward and Inside objects we put one more thing use what they have Copying properties to Properties what things come in may be its shape It could be its colour, it could be its outline these are properties of all objects then if we have to copy its properties If we want to do it then we can copy that too Here I have an ellipse tool I’ve drawn a shape here, and we’ve Another shape has also been created here. which is square shape now if we see this I have all the colors if you apply them on this what to do is to do all its properties which is its atrimed We have to apply, we have to select it so in our case I have a square shape is selected will go back to edit copy properties from here in command On clicking we will see a popup It will come openly and from here we will have to tell which properties do we copy suppose I have to do it outline pen copy I have to do it, I have to copy the fill, but I I don’t want to copy the color of the outline If we had to do it then we did not choose it back I pressed OK and see we now have an arrow This arrow is coming in the form of the object we are Click on it and copy the properties there It will come upon this shape of ours As soon as we clicked here, it Look at its color, see it here it has been copied and arrived okay so this In some way we are here to meet someone else The properties of the object are also copied You can do this, it is a very useful option Many times it happens that we put some pressure on someone I don’t have a gradient applied Do you know which colours we used on it? It was mixed at that time but I got the same color want another object in another shape I can use it there let’s delete this and move on Select your next command inside Corel Draw. about what our artistry is all about media so for artistic media we need What to do, very useful command if you look at it very carefully you will also be very You can create something new and make a video If you like it then like the video immediately Make sure to subscribe to the channel going forward Grow and understand artistic media about what exactly he does See where you can get artistic media first first let me tell you that Artistic Media gets you there Simply you need this rectangle tool You saw it, look at it, it is written here Artistic media has become a shortcut to If it comes to your keyboard then What is artistic media? One way it has a brush from where you can get lots of You can make shapes in this way Look, we have created a shape here and You can see many patterns here or what we call brush Stroke From there you can make any one of your own You can choose patterns or brush strokes that Whichever stroke you want to apply okay so look here there are lots of You have given different strokes By choosing any one stroke you can create that You can create the pattern here Here we have money in the form of a pattern. Now what would be its practical use first they understand this, we have understood this I asked what a brother is and what he looks like and where can one get its practical application now Let’s see what happens then For that we are here, suppose we have said here Any one has typed an alphabet Let’s make it a little bigger, something like this You could have made it a bit bolder as well look here we have typed some alphabets I had made her bold, if you want you can do it You can also change the font as per your choice. Here I have added another font for it I have taken it and it has had no effect on us It is okay to use artistic media See Artistic Media doing it always Work on what your outline is So first start working on the outline We need to get a little more creative here. what we do here is a simply here Let’s make an outline here and this We will make multiple copies of the outline here. Let’s create it, okay, so here we have I have created a very close copy and this If we repeat this then look we have If many copies are made then some In this way, we made a lot of copies. now we’re going to put all of these objects together Let’s select it and from here we click So look at the trim as soon as We will click on trim and you will see that what were all these lines This is what our alphabet was, A ok look at this i have trimmed it look here if you can see it Let us unfill it a little bit on this If you remove the color from the then you will be able to see Look at this, he has trimmed it here. I have given it, okay, if you want you can do it on top of it too You can use artistic media What I have to do is simply delete them all. Let me give you this shape here and Go to Artistic Media and you will simply use this brush at any place click on outline okay so this Look, now you can put whatever you want on it Whatever stroke you have, you have to apply it You can apply strokes and whatever design you have made I have made that design different See what you can create in the pattern If you want in this way then from here its smoothing, you can adjust that how much you need the smooth object that its the width of the lines which are coming You can increase or decrease the line width from here. If you can, look at something like this you can create a shape a style of a shape okay if you can make something like this then we will also make it Can use artistic media or sometimes it also happens that if you’ve ever seen the logo we’ve seen it okay You might have seen any Hindi logo, I will show you one Let me show you an example. I will show you one such example. I will import it and bring it here people yes ok hey look at these people now look here this Look at the logo here is something in English It has been written here in this manner many times This is also done here in Hindi instead of English It is written but in Hindi we have a a problem arises what problem arises First they see, first we solve the problem Let’s see the help of artistic media again If we look at its solution then here we have I have made a circle and made a circle later we took it here Before the Text Tool and After the Text Tool We used this text tool as soon as we If you take it above the outline, you will see here its shape will change okay and As soon as we click on its edge then look the cursor is blinking here After that we go here and select our font Let’s change the font here We have also taken a Hindi font here. yes, choose any hindi font here Let’s do it, suppose I took this, okay and we have to type anything here Suppose we wrote here Mercy Dayanand Yadav degree degree college suppose we have here I wrote the name of some college like this I have written some name here, okay sa i will make it bigger i have done it here I enlarged it to 72 points now you can You might be able to see the problem, look at the The letters are English, sorry, look at those in Hindi Look here pay2 is coming in breaks There is a gap in between here in English since I don’t know that much but You can see it clearly here in Hindi It is visible and it is a little bit visible If you are feeling bad then solve this problem The solution is our artistic media I am hiding in it, we are away from there You can solve the problem simply What you have to do is that you don’t type like this I have to move this a little to the side Let me do it and we’ll bring it back here Let’s type what we have already written If we rewrite this, we have here I wrote back the same thing that we had written here It was written Dayanand Yadav degree college okay i typed this here After typing this we have taken it what do we do, we make a curve from here so we went to object we converted here I made it to curve now what was this text tha this has been converted to a curve okay now what shall we do here will go to Artistic Media Tools and such Now if we go to the tool then look here we are getting a brush here this brush what will we do with this object We will click on this and see, we are like here If we click, we can now save it what we need to do is save it We say yes, click on save and here Let’s assume we give it a name We have given the text here and this It has been saved. Ok, so look at our Look at the design here Look, it has been saved and has come to us Look inside the list, it’s here right? Our custom, we call it custom We call it Artistic Media Brush Custom brush now we can do it simply You can delete it and do it from here as well. delete and now we have to go back okay And here this object is its If we want to make a copy then inside this first we will create a make a copy and this one above Our object was to take it from here Let’s convert it into arc we have why has this been done because what is ours Artistic brush was the one that applies That applies only to the strokes it happens okay so that’s why we have here The stroke is made in this manner and Now what we will do is convert this stroke You will do it in the same brush that we created. If it has been done then we are here for it You can choose Artistic Media Brush here But look, we had made this, we We will select here and simply this one which stroke is this we will click on it ok as soon as we click on this, then See if it is not applying then apply for it What do we do first? Someone else from here let’s take the money back, we can choose it now look it’s here now it’s okay okay so Now it is coming out very thin So let me adjust this a little bit The stroke it has to adjust We’ll extend it a little bit from here so that this Let us see a little bit clearly and this let’s make it a little bit smaller so that it can be Come and adjust yourself perfectly on this circle Go and come back completely fit Let’s go in this way, now you can see here There is no broken line at all Practical in a very good way If you are coming here after writing then this Your artistic skills have practical use Look at the media, I told you about the course I said in the beginning that whatever I I am teaching you the tools, I will give you a I will also show you the practical use If I don’t explain the tools then this is a practical use Our artistic media is ahead Let’s grow and understand inside Corel Draw whatever other shapes we have that we People talk about basic shapes and their uses what are they and how to use them So look, what do we call basic shapes? like our rectangles become ellipses All of ours have become stars, have become polygonal There are basic shapes such as these You can find the rectangle here: You will find your ellipse here. it is like this you can see some more here Shapes are obtained as if they were polygonal Our shapes have also become spiral so if you need to do some polygonal If it is there then you can see it in this way here One you can do polygonal sorry this is called this is our pentagon you draw a pentagon can you convert pentagon to polygon Simply you get the option of one side here You can get its points here or You can increase or decrease the sides So if you hit a six here then here Look, we have a polygon It is like this if you want to make a triangle You will have to reduce these sides You can take three here and see yours It has come here in a triangle like this You can make multiple shapes with this It is with the help of polygons, right? Then see Here we also have a star shape If you want, you can do one here in this way You can draw a star shape in a star also. Look, you will find many sites here. You decide what kind of star you want to become. You can simply become a star here This is the length of the star that you are seeing You can also increase or decrease the length How much or how little you need to do with your If you want to do the length, you can do that also from here yes you can differentiate the shape of the star yes to you If you want a complicated star See, he will come as a complicated person here complexion is common will run in all your outlines that if its do i need to make the outline thicker or smaller I want to change the design here There is a common option which gives you all the shapes I will get it okay so something like this If you want you can also create a basic shape here. Well, with the help of these basic shapes you can can make a logo then let’s learn that if We Or if you want to make me a star then make me a star I want this star, I want it simple If you want a star then we have made a simple one here Star drew and the one who has sides We reduced it here, we took it there are three sides okay and so much to do later you simple save this object as bring it to the center of the object so center There are two ways to get in, either you use the shortcut key or you What is the go by option shortcut key As soon as you press C from your keyboard C so see it has come to the center and if If you want to do it in the middle then you press give this, so look this has come in the middle and now you can make it a little bigger like this This way is fine, if you want you can curve it also You can do it simply as you wish if you do this then it will also become curved okay So now if you want then do it like this here But you can adjust it within your circle Where ever you want to place it is ok So look, I placed this here. and make the circle a little smaller you are equal to these people and now you You can fill any color in it, so this Look, here is your simple logo. very much how complexion and very How can we make it in a better way and also you will learn but simply I have told you very I have given you a basic idea that you can do any How can we combine two ‘sh’s to make a logo? If you can create it, then do it. Let’s delete it and move on to our next option towards which is our impact tool We get the impact tool for our Simply if you come into this star shape So here you see an impact tool okay now you get the option of impact First, they understand what the tool does See, many times you have seen your comics or have you seen a lot of illustrations if you are there then what have you done many times that you might have seen a shape, a background okay something that’s made up of For example, suppose someone is running, then a person is behind him The shape of running is made of something, if you like this If you want to bring some kind of effect then you Do you exactly bring impact tools? I will explain it to you through an example Let me assume we have an image here Let’s say we have imported a The image of the bicycle is ok, we have imported it here Now we have to show movement in this cycle that this bicycle is moving very fast towards us okay so that’s what we feel How will they come to bring that feeling For us, simply here to make an impact With the help of the tool, we have to create a shape here If you have to do it then you simply go and do this It is available here under the star option You can choose the option of Impact Tool as per your choice. If you choose the option of impact tool then click here But look at the property toolbar above. Get a complete property of this It goes from where you can get many options of it Can you bring changes to me first? See here you get what you want through impact tools that help you create a design What should the design be like to draw? should it be a parallel or a radical Radical means that it is round should come in form, should come in the goal circle parallel means that it should be in line form If it should come then we will take it here right now we take the radical from and after the radical Let us look at it from here in this way Let’s draw a shape here, look at this. we have one like this we have one It will take shape and we will do it a little I put it behind, I put it in the back of the image so now you can see that look here In this way, you will feel the movement that this bicycle is moving If you want, you can do it further above these lines and You can do a lot of work along these lines You can make it fat as little as you want do you want to make these lines thick or these lines You can also reduce the width of your steps You can increase the spacing between them You can also increase or decrease that as per the minimum requirement How much spacing should be kept and what is the maximum If you want to keep spacing then you can keep that spacing also From here you can decide in different ways like You can choose different values ​​from here. So you will also see the effects here You will get to see different And lastly you will find it here the style of the line that your line is what should be her style If you can tell from here then see you There are many changes like this or you can get the tools from where you can you can make different things here you can with the help of this okay so this was Our radical option here is if the same If you want to create a movement then you You can make one, see here Let’s say we use another image We have another image here let’s say we have this image okay image of someone this is a boy who is running now we have to show it here that It is moving very fast here but he is running then we got a If we want to make you feel the movement then we should Use the Impact Tool here to get this done you can go to impact tool Choose the parallel option here. After that, from here in this manner you can draw a parallel line, okay you If you want you can make the line thick here too You can make it as thin as you can, as thick as you can you have to do it okay you can rotate it yes you can flip it if you like it If you want to rotate it then rotate it Here, I’ll rotate it by degrees. Look up, it has rotated and come here If you want that this is ours, lines ahead lines are coming these may not come you don’t need it okay so look for it We have two options here Look, the inner boundary is given here and Second, I have given you an outer boundary now So look at what it does First of all, you should do this which effect you have It is made, you choose it and you Here you can click on the inner boundary As soon as you click on the inner boundary Look at you here, one by one arrow is made This arrow is coming as soon as you click on this image If you click, you will see that this The whole shape was like this, look at this it has been cut and arrived here in the correct manner This is our inner boundary, this is our shape The way we create the inner boundary If you want to make outer boundary then what will you do simply click here You will do it on the outer boundary and on your shape If you click, what will it do? The whole shape is there, by taking it inside I will go away and try to do this I do it ok I used this tool as my tool First we selected it from here which which is our inner boundary, I earlier called it We removed it and then we put the outer here chose the boundary and after that We clicked on it on our shape. what did he do to the whole shape Look at this shape that we had look inside he has placed something like this if that’s ok then you can do something like this yes, if you look at the next lines If you don’t want this then you can remove that too What you have to do is simply first you apply this effect Make it a little smaller according to your needs As far as it is concerned it is fine and after that You a little bit I’ll put a little bit of this here and I’ll make it smaller like this, okay Now you can see something like this that look here now you only have to look here The lines that you can see in the front are here If you are not able to see the lines then click here Look, I am feeling a movement that this Boy these two are running very fast So with the help of these lines you will get here I am feeling some movement okay So if you want you can make something like this With the help of your impact tool, do something like this You can use the impact tool to give different types of effects if you can use it then we will do it Let’s delete it and move on to the next one inside the corroll draw on the option side which is Our dimension lines dimension lines are a It is a very important option when you Do you prepare any design of your own for the client and send that design to you I have to send it to the person in front of me Sizes are not mentioned there If there are no dimension mentions then there you can use dimension lines to tell the person in front or the dimension We often use the line mechanically in designs or architect design designs I also do this to define that area for how big that area is To give you an example, let’s say I am here Pe a mechanical just to explain it to you I’m a mechanic here, a design for tomorrow If I get it ready then assume that I have put it here I made a rectangle on it and this rectangle After making this I did this which our There are two corners, we have done them in this manner rotate I just want to rotate this and I’ll just show you a drawing I am giving you an example, it is ok and something like this And in this way I have made a shape here. is drawn And make this, suppose I have one here the drawing is done now this drawing is ready for us It has to be sent to the client in front and we We have to tell you that this is our part, okay What are the dimensions of all these in this part If it is there then how can we tell it in front of us because I don’t understand it in this picture what are the dimensions okay so For that we use dimension Where do we find dimension lines? goes just right to our text toolbar look below you will find it here Dimension lines Dimension lines We have There are many ways, such as parallel Lines Horizontal and Vertical Dimension Angular Dimension and Segment Dimension then We also understand all these that after all What does all this do? Parallel Dimension What does the horizontal dimension do? what works so first of all we here Let’s choose parallel dimension and now this whatever works for you which is from a note The distance from the note to the second note gives you the parallel dimension, suppose we have clicked here and after clicking I dragged it like this and here we have another node and from here to here what is it They say that you have to show your area So look at that, you can show that here how far is it from here to here 2.64 inches Now if you want you can print it in inches Take it if you want, you can take it in centimeters take it, it is up to you, if you If you want to change then simply what will you do Choose this option and click here You can go there and see its dimensions, These are points, you can separate them if you want So you can take it here in centimeters. So look here yours is in centimeters If you want you can measure it in millimeters So here it is in millimetres, if you want so in short if you need to convert millimeter to mm If you want to write then you can do that from here or here Choose PayMM and see it from here The distance is what It is 67.6 mm, okay you can get it somewhere like this But if you want to tell its dimension then in your shape object then you can tell that very easily with the help of this tool Simply you have to do one click in this way It happens and you can use it in whichever unit you have You can tell it in the unit you want to the person in front that its from here to here The distance is 4.68 Semi is okay so this is what happened to us here But after that, we have the parallel dimension The horizontal dimension does the same work as ours. Our work has been the same in the parallel dimension Also does horizontal and vertical dimensions Simply what you have to do is click after that you have to go from wherever you want to The area you need is here But you can show me, you can tell me, now in your mind A question might be coming to my mind that Sir, if this both are same so both of them are here Why are we given different things? So look at this There is a difference between the two, what is that difference It happens, I will show you, accept it By not having this shape of ours like this we have a shape of triangle so I will first make a triangle here. ok let’s say we have a shape like this and what is its length and what is its width I will separate that little bit now What are its three sides which are equal no it’s okay now if someone gives you such a shape where you can find it now if you want to get it from here It is ok to give the area till here that the area from here to here How much is it, that is yours, This has horizontal and vertical dimensions It won’t come out, okay I’ll take you out Let me show you once again here You clicked on Pay Note and then I clicked here okay so this is it what did you do about its height I took it out and gave it to you from here to here What is the height but if you take this If you know the length of your line If you want to take it out then you will use it for that okay so what is that for parallel dimension You will choose this note and you will get the second note. choose the note ok and after that you If you click here, you will see this now yours exact whatever yours see this you should look at the width of the line Here it is found 2.79 and whose height is She is getting you 2.67 ok so if you need any such angular If you have any shape or any line in any form is there any stroke of it if you know its size If you have to give then you will give it in parallel dimension through okay after that see our here Here comes the Angular Dimension Angular Dimension what does it do between your lines I will tell you the angle which is It gives you as soon as you choose here If you see the angle here, If you want to withdraw then you can simply click on this note Do OK after clicking on the note me and you can go as far as you need You click and then you will see Here you will get a preview of one such angle. You will find it wherever you click on this release I will do it there, you can see a complete version of it One you get the exact angle of it now let’s see what is happening here Look here, our text is very big if so, let’s make it a little smaller so that So that we can see it clearly, I will tell you a little Here in six point or even smaller I Let me do this in three points, okay? Look at this now look at us clearly here Its angle is visible that its The angle is that [music] Gives simultaneous dimensions for example I would explain it to you to make you understand hmm suppose for example I have put it here a created shape and after creating the shape We have created some more shapes here. Just to give you an example I’m telling you okay I made this shape I made this shape, I made this shape, okay and what did we do among all these I did it and we welded it here see this Now suppose for example we have something This shape has been formed and look at it here We have a lot of notes now. Here we need that from here to here what is the distance from here to here What is the distance from here to here that we need to know the distance between all the notes If we have to give it then how can we give it Can be given with the help of segment dimension And after making this choice, look here Look at your Probity Toolbar here. The first option you get is You will get automatic successful die mentioning What you need to do is activate it After activating it, you will get the data from where As far as the dimensions are concerned, all of them should be the same May they all come with you and select you have to take something in this manner and as soon as you You should see this, you can take it up in this manner If you release it, you will be able to see it You will see that the dimensions of all the notes are same You will meet everyone here, see you got the dimensions together okay So in some way you can be very helpful here You can take all the dimensions together alright after that if you see here I am not able to understand it somewhere If you are not able to read it then it will be for you Manually here is its font size You’ll have to change it a little bit so that you All the dimensions are clearly visible to you look like i am changing here Similarly, you will find its dimensions here. You have to change your font size so that you can see all the dimensions clearly It looks something like this is how you can do it you can do it very easily like i do I am here now you will be able to see that here But look, you can see the dimension If you are planning to make some more changes then If yes, you can do that also here See, you get a lot of options. If you want, go here to read the text you wrote You can write what happened above the line look this is yours look at the text above the line will it come in writing or you will come with that line you can write it in me you can write it below the line Or if you want, you can also write a box to him. yes you can simply click here and see one If you come after writing everything in the box then where You also like that we have it here If we are getting good readability then You can tell me your dimensions anyway So look here there are lots of options. In this way here you can use dimension tool you can use let’s go ahead and Now we are going to understand the effects about how we use the effects do you use it and where do you use it So let us learn further Regarding the effects tool, for that we What do people do first of all these things Let’s delete it and our page Let’s blank that out so that we can go here you can make some more things and you can make some more things If you can make it and show it then see what we have It affects us even on text can apply and whoever is ours You can apply it to any object as well Or if there is any of our images, apply it on that too we can but it

    depends on what we have Which is the effect that we are going to apply? there is an effect because all of these effects which they do not apply to text Not all effects apply to our images Where do we get the effects? For effects you can simply come here above your tool and see here you will see You will get to see many effects Like shadow effect, contour effect Blend effect happened Distort effect happened If envelope is there, execute is there, block is there once We understand about all these effects and what is its practical use It will happen, let’s see that as well first So let’s look at the shadow effect The shadow effect which happens is on both of us it works our text also works and it works on our objects too objects we want vector objects or our image objects on both So let’s assume it works, first of all we’re here Let us write some text, suppose we I have written the time here and it is a little So we make it bigger after making it bigger A little bit of its font too if you want We can change it a little bit Let’s write it in small print like this So that we have time to read clearly it is written and now we have to draw a shadow over it Do you want to apply any effect? ​​What is shadow effect? It is like a little shadow If we have to put it here then for that what will we do here simply shadows will come We will choose on effect and shadow effect like If we choose then see our here We have a whole one right here Its property tool bar will open and then it goes and we get it first Here is the list of presets, how do you like it You have to apply preset to your text If you can tell me about it then I will go from here I take the small glow like we are small If you take glow then see you will see a lot here You can see a slight glow here if you want to make it a little darker If yes, you can choose its color from here yes, suppose I chose black color here It has become a bit dark here If I took the blue colour then it became blue in colour okay after doing that if we want You can change its merging mode from here are merging mode what happens is that when we People can also cast a shadow over another object. If we place it there then our these Merging modes are useful for example So let’s say I made one here. We make a shape and fill some color over it. Let me give you this, I’ve paid here this color and we’ll bring it on top of it So now if we want, we can do the merging here There are modes, look, you can change them So different is the one below us, which It behaves according to the object how will we have merging mode here It will come and how will our effect be formed So here you can see different You can choose any merging modes You can find the merging mode here as per your design The merging mode suits you according to your needs you can get it here okay so this is our There are merging modes of merging modes look later here you have a There is also an option of transparency that this The effect of what you have applied How much transparency should there be? Example For example, let me assume that we take normal here. So I have a normal shape here. his normal shadow is returning now How much transparency should there be, we will Look, you can choose as low as you want from here If we do this then the effect will be the lighter it will appear to us and the more The more we increase it the more the effect will increase The transparency will keep getting darker Look here later, it comes to us Feathering Feathering means that this which This is our shadow, how far can it benefit us How far will its effect go? So look here p has a value of 20, if we look at it If you increase it to 24 or 58 then look at it Look far away, is its feather going or this even if we have decreased i will make it up Just consume it and see its effect it’s limited to very close range okay so this one, … You have to give it from here in its feathering you can give it to us after that here we have It gets a feathering direction that The feather that you have given me, you should also keep it inside Should I give it or give it in the middle or give it outside? it is you can choose it here if we If I chose outside here then this is what Our feather is on the outside of this object we will see it in here You can see it, okay, we will remove it give the object something like this you can see a feather here ok so this gives a really good feeling Whenever we make a heading, our for some book or some other design we can use it there We use shadow as a shadow on the text We do it above as well and above the image as well for the image let’s say I have a Let me import the image and assume We imported this image here. And if we want to apply shadow here also So it’s the same process here on the shadow Come and apply whatever shadow you want, small I want to apply it, I want to apply medium, I want to apply large You can choose it from here, you can see it There are many more effects given, okay You can choose it from here, suppose we have Here I have taken the flat bottom right Look, you are coming here as a shadow You can also adjust it if you want Yes, where do you place it according to you? I want to do it here, look very flat It is coming in form, if you want then you can do it increase the feather from here okay so very little This way it will also come in a blurry form You can also make its color dark if you want. yes, according to you, you only need this Transparency needs to be increased, see here Its color has become dark and you have come just like this You can also use shadow on the image yes okay after that let’s move on to our next let’s do this for the effect We delete allright and then our here The next tool is given as control tool Troll tool is a great tool inside our coral draw and with this we people Very effective and very can make creative whether it is our over the text and whether it is our Basically a counter tool on top of objects The work of is to create outlines and These outlines can also be on our text. or could be on any object Many times we use our own printing of it It is used wherever there is a purpose if yes then how do you use it Where do you use everything Let us understand inside this control tool let’s go learn this control tool and second thing if you like the video If you are getting to learn something new then watch the video Please like and share more videos like this Subscribe to the channel to get Do not forget at all, then you understand the control First of all we will tell you about the tool here what do we do first here create an object that Where does the problem lie and its solution First they should understand how our control tool is let’s say we have our own one here Object Here we chose Square And through that we have here in a way We drew a shape and then we did it here But let’s also draw a circle, something like this the way it is okay and or else we here We can also draw a pentagon, something like this in a circle we are here together Let’s take the exact circle and we have one here let’s take it Oval and like this we have taken this shape here also okay so now we have some here Three or four shapes have come, we have one shape Here we draw a P which is a square shape it’s a perfect square alright Let’s thicken the outline a little so that You can clearly see what I am doing I’m here now right so right now we have here But in total we have five shapes here. now what do we have to do is make it in this shape If you want to draw another shape inside then for that We have the command to simply copy paste If we want then we can do copy paste a shape and draw inside it using If we can do it then simply we will do it You can also use the mouse, so For this we simply pressed from our keyboard the shift button and we pushed it in a little bit We dragged it towards the side and placed it where we wanted the shape. There we right click our mouse. If you have done this then look at this we have a It has taken a shape inside and come here if If you pay attention then you will see this here the gap and here on the left side Gap means the distance at the top which is in between the two and which is on your left Look, there is a distance, it is equal like this You will get equal rights here also Now you will get equal on the sides and bottom too We do the same work here in this This rectangle shape that we have made If we do it in this, then here we have done the same like this just pressed the shift button on your keyboard and By making it smaller we have made a shape inside I have drawn it, alright, now pay attention here If you do this, look at the space above it’s a bit much and whatever you The space on the left is a little less Now there is a problem here, so this method If we are facing problems So then we use our control tools Just like this you can see it here in the circle You will also get to see the circle being smaller Look inside and you will see a perfect circle you’ll find another one but if you If you do the same thing in the Oval, you will be watched You will get the same problem, see here You will get more spacing and here you you will get less spacing alright so its The solution is that it is in the control tool, it is good I will show you a practical use of this. Many times we design visiting cards okay i am going to make a visiting card I’m not going to design you I am just giving one example, so visiting The size of the card that we have is here i take it in mm so for that what have we done here I have changed the unit, mm, it is ok and this We have given the size of the box as A 88 and 55 Suppose this is the size of our visiting card So this is the finish of our visiting card The size is as big as a visiting card The cutting which we have to do at the very end after the finishing is done in which It will come in our hand, this is the size, okay But what do we have to do now about it also we have to give a size where we used for finishing and one inside we also have to give the size where we If you use it for your safe margin then Now if we do the same work here for this If you look through it, you will see a perfect shape If we cannot find it then we will come to this place also use only control tool and We have a safe margin that we need to draw we can draw that too and if we need to If we want to draw something on top of this as well which will be our cutting margin, then that too We can see here on the outside like this You can draw it alright in this way We are also here for tools for this purpose Good use it we can do it over text as well and many more You can also design all new texts if yes then what do I do for him I c First, delete all these objects. and we put some text here But let us write it down, suppose we have written here took is simplified tuts alright so for that we If someone takes a bold font here then bold font we have here in the system here’s a font that we have okay so this we have a font in bold I made it a little bigger so that you It should be clearly visible that whatever work I do I’m going to show you the proper thing now this is what we need now we have a text What is the effect of control tool on this? You can simply give control in this way Select the tool and then select the control tool. After that simply go to your text And wherever you have to provide this tool, that means If you want to give inwards then you can give inwards can also give its effect towards or If you see its outline on the outside, If you want to create then how far outside do you have to go? How big an outline do you need to create? You can give a donation for that too here But look, we have given an effect but what just happened is that our text was That too was black in colour and this fact It has come, its feel is also in black, that’s why something is coming this way if you want Change its fee color here You can do it in some way according to your convenience Look here you can do whatever you want You want to give the color, you can do that color in this way You can give it here, okay, see this, right? great stuff If you get the same effect back inside it If you want to repeat then what will you do then see There is already an effect contour applied on it If you need to contour it again, If you want to apply the effect then first You will get this text and this is your container it is an effect, it needs to be separated so so what we’re going to do is here in the object You will go there and you will get an option here. there is a break of a part which I will tell you first I have also explained its shortcut key As soon as you control it, you can brake it. See now what will happen if you participate The text is separated and this shape of yours He came as a man and now he is different from you If you want then apply the same effect on it again You can use the effect again as well ok so what did i do to it We selected it and then we went back to it I applied its effect again I can change the color again in some way like this watch this and i want it again I can brake and after braking I see it here, we have a shape It must have come to you already made, I am If I put it down then what is it for We’ll do the shift button and our page down Look at this, we have two of ours here. The pass is here outline what is it now I’m going to put an effect here and do the same thing and now if we have contours If you want to affect its inside then We can also do something like this inside it and you can choose any color you like You can choose the color you want from here allright So let us look at it this way also You can use the effect of the control tool Are Many times, you might have seen that a It is written on the cheese at 10 off, something like this If there are offers then we can provide some information there also You can design it with the help of the same tool So suppose we have written the offer here and We have written here that it is off at 10. We have chosen a font here. Let’s say I use the same font I take it alright and we have adopted it according to our convenience. I have designed it the way we want I put it here like this okay In this way we took pay off here and we Now if it is designed this way We have to apply the same effect here as well We can use the control tool if we want You can select the whole thing if you want. group it and after grouping You choose the same control tool and you will No matter how big it is, it will give a control effect you can give it to me in some way like this Have you seen it? If you see a border on it, If you want to give it also then you make a box and You can also design the box as per your choice Take it and if you want then fill some color in it too can do yes, fill it in light color like this I will give you the outline, if you want to remove it, please remove it. You can also apply shadow over it if you want. Like this you can create multiple effects if you want Very nice creative using You can design it as per your requirement You may also like it, see it this way Now you can use it wherever you want You can keep it anywhere you want yes, if you want to change colours etc. you can change it can we do that suppose we have a counter here We are influenced by it If you want gradient then will you do it simply First break it apart, we have done it here I clicked on it and broke it apart ok and now if we want then we can see the inner shape also use your gradient on top of we can do what we call feel interact now we will read further But I will tell you about the interaction feel I am just showing it as an example you can do all this in it too okay In this way you can use multiple colors here. You can use it in text as well if you want. you can use outline okay so There are so many endless ways to express your feelings To design you simply need to do just one You will need practice and be careful in whatever you do I am telling you everything is very You will have to learn carefully and not to hurry well it’s not like you have everything You can learn it in a day, it is not possible When you practice something over and over again, You can definitely learn one thing and I will learn the rest So I am here to teach you and tell you So wherever you feel any confusion, you you can ask me you can message me yes which is ours you can design a text like whatsapp2 Could it be for some offer or something? So this was The effect of the contour tool is already here Moving forward and learning further If there is something new then we are back on the first page If I blank out the text then I can see all this I will select it from here and delete it. I will give it and see what happens next which tool is that our blend is very Blend is a great tool, we have a lot of things They make it especially popular among the people We mostly use blends What the blend tool basically does The blend that is made is one way to give you What Straight Lines Provides You It happens many times that we balance we make it over one of our paths or we Compounds also form blood and its we basically use it To create realistic shadows or To highlight objects, use this So this was about some technicalities but Do you understand its practical use? If it happens then assume that we have something here If you want to design then we have to make it here If we want a leaf then we need to make a logo of the leaf Many times you have seen people in schools etc. You must have seen this leaf logo so today we will talk about this If you are going to make the leaf logo then its For this, first of all we will need a leaf Leaf we create this circle With the help of this we have taken two circles here ok let’s select both of them and what do we do from here select and after selecting I simply go here and If you click on intersect it then what will we have here in the middle which is a see, it was a portion, it will be prepared and it’s kind of like a leaf okay like a There is something similar to the leaves here It has got a structure in place We rotate a little bit to our left on the side and make a copy of this Same on our right side, alright, look at this we have a very nice leaf The structure of this has come into existence, we People can fill any color if they want What do we do to fill the color Let’s give it a green color here, it looks nice So we have given green color here and We have given it green colour as well. If you want to give shadow bag, you can give that too ho with the help of interact tool okay then you If you want, you can also add some shadow etc. here. If you can then what should I do here I’ll give you the green button and down here but i give it dark green alright And in the same color here also above it Let me apply it now, look at this shortcut The trick is to choose a single object transfer color from one object to another If you want then its meaning is nothing There is a possibility that it may have a color as well there might be an outline of it as well The outline color can also be any Property If you need to convert one object to another You have to select the object using the shortcut this way just with the help of the mouse then you you can simply do this object Select OK and right click Along with this, you can move it by right clicking on it. Where you get the same properties Leave it there if you want it It will ask you if you want to move it Do you want to copy or fill the copy or copy If I want to outline then I want to fill it So I will copy fill here then Look, the same color is filled here as well It’s alright, so we’ve done this outline If we remove it, we will have a leaf It has been done, now what should we do about it we want to make a logo of leaf so we will do that Let’s see how they will make it for that First we have made a leaf here and a We have made more leaves here above and We have reduced its size a bit. something like this in the middle of this size now and We have multiple sizes in between this size If we want it, then how will we get it? We will bring it from blend to you Simply go and here you can see the number of blends You can choose how many numbers of off you want If we want a blend then what will we do first Place this smaller size shape like this here We will click and bring it here like this If we leave it then look what we have in the middle 20 shapes have been created by blending it If you want to do this then you can buy a number of these can you reduce the strength i reduced it like this I am increasing it, okay, if you want If you want to subtract, you can also subtract some of it in this manner Look, we have less shapes here. are you right now what do we do let’s do this a little bit to the side and here we take it A circle is shaped in such a way that We convert the circle here into an arc. So what do we have now that we look at The line will not come and we will draw this arc a little bit let’s make it smaller and do something up to this yes, till here it is ok and we will follow the same arc People copy on the right side, so here But it has also come to us in a shape now what we want to do is we want to This is the shape that we have made of the leaf The shape should fit over this arch If it comes after doing it then we will do it, what will you do Simply you first cut this object as a whole Select it and you will see something here You will get to see the options first what was the option here so you number off The objects of the blades you were increasing or decreasing if you go here you will see a You will get another option by the name of New Path As soon as you click on the new path, now It asks you what your new path is. so since I want it on top of it As soon as I click on this line, so if I do this look at this object above it It will be ready and come but see what is it now This is perfectly blended and not yet It has come on this shape so what can we do for it you can come here and here See, you get many more options. If you go there, you will see an option given here it’s blended along the full path as soon as If you click here, you can see the full path it will blend over it but here Look, there is still something missing, what is missing Look at this shape, it is coming upwards Whereas the direction we have is that If you want to change then simply do the above select the shape and you will According to this, its direction can be seen here change it from as soon as you change Look at all the other shapes that were there also the direction will change here then you what do you do can you make it smaller a little I have made it a bit smaller here as well Let’s rotate it a little bit Like this we would have placed it here There are some things that rotate us a little Will have to do it Some things can be made smaller like this perfectly I feel so big, the shape of my line According to that we made it a little bigger I have also made it a bit smaller, sorry and right now it’s true here too but right now Look at the object in the middle Proper is not coming so now for this we have to What do we have to do to select it again? We will do the same shape and come here We will go and see it is written rotate all When you click on the objects See, all our objects are like this You will rotate according to the shape of this leaf If you want you can make it smaller and something like this In that way, the rest of our leaves are Ours should also be perfectly small accordingly if you see this object in the middle If you want to increase this then here you can click on the number of There are leaves, you can grow them here something like this is ok right if you If you want you can make it here on the right side too could or if since we have set aside I have done all the hard work so if you want then you can do this You can select it and put it on the right side You can paste it in this way but What happened here, look at our leaves it was it has vomited okay so for that What do we have to do to get it back These leaves will have to be rotated a lot It is simple, if you want you can put it here you can rotate it in this way and the same is yours You can also save the last leaf from here Rotate this whole shape of yours. It will be made again in a proper manner okay if you need a lift up here and If you want to plant it then you can use the same leaf again copy and paste it here take it, see this will come separately you can buy it Ungroup and place a leaf here in the center Here you can manually do it as per your convenience paste it some way like this Something like this is okay bean leaf if you want If you can do it here as well then we have made it here We have put it here in this way too Okay, if you want to make the outline thicker, You can give a little bit of it to yourself You can increase it as per your requirement If you want the outline a little thicker then this look i’ll take a bigger chunk of this ok what have you seen now we have a very Great look, this leaf has come in the form of a logo that’s how we made it we made it With the help of blend tool you can do this The concept must be becoming clear that blend what can the tool do okay a small We can see this example if we want We’ll move it a little to the side here on the right side and here we have another You must have seen it many times One of the old photo reels If it had felt negative then if we had seen something like that If we want to create a negative then we can do that too So you can create it here simply Take a rectangle, in this way you can make a box Draw it and fill it with black color Do it and we have put a box on the bottom Same we copied here, something like this okay that way now what do we have to make We need more boxes in here. If you want then here we have made a We have drawn a box, we will color it white let’s fill it with okay and what is its I will remove the outline and I have a copy of this box here But by bringing it here on the right side, let me paste it ok and now we have to do these If you want to make a blend between the two then We will make it simply blend it We will choose the object and mix the last If you click on this object then it will See, we have a lot of middle ground Blades have arrived in the form of these, if you want You can increase the number of strength as per your requirement ok i will delete it The one below gives the same to the one above and I give the same to the one below I will copy it alright if we have to I also need to make boxes, so we will do it in the middle You can also make it simply here but draw a box like this, right And if you want the same box, you can have it here as well you can draw and between these two you can make ballads so we did this on the beach I have also prepared some blends here But its number of strength is very high reduce it a little bit Here are the numbers that we have, and that is our strength It was there and it has reduced, what do we do now If we break it apart completely then what did we do to control it As soon as you press it, see the brake coming apart has been and now look at yours here is a See your negative design is ready. I’ll give this to the one below I would increase it a little by selecting it I am something like this and I like this object a little I will make it a little smaller, look something like this ok if you find someone else here also If you want to make anything then you can make that too You can make it easily as I have seen here I have made a single structure of the reel, it is fine So you can create something new as well Similarly, with the help of blend tool you can create many beautiful designs. You can make anything you like So let’s move forward and do this let’s delete the one I created and see So what is our next tool? The next tool which we have given here and it has been given to us it has been given to us distort tool ok what is distort tool does disto basically a whatever our There are shapes in them to bring destruction yours works suppose we have here There is a circle and we have to find something in it If you want to bring distortions then we can use this tool With the help of this you can simply bring your tool Choose and distort wherever you want You have to bring some distorts in this way can you bring it, see this is very In the best way, isn’t it? Sometimes we Let’s use this, let’s say we have a We took a square shape, now suppose we are here if we want to make one, if we want to make a flower then we can use dettol You can make a flower simply with the help of tools You bring your mouse to the center and you Look at it this way, drag it outwards If you do this then see, this is a very See, it will turn into a beautiful flower You can fill it with any color you like If you want to fill color then you can do it in this way Basically distort any shape whether it is your circle or There should be a rectangle where you will try this So you will keep getting many new shapes And the shape you want, look something like this Here you can create new shapes in this way We will keep meeting and you can do different things on this Create new shapes using different shapes palette you can create it, your all right increases Moving on to the next tool, which is ours here Envelope tool is given again envelope also We have a very good tool and We will also include this in a text which is very Used to give all the effects what the envelope tool basically does is you also have shapes in which the notes then you can drag the notes to a Do you understand that you can create new shapes? So first of all let’s go through some examples Let’s say we write something here I have written my name here I have written it Ashish and we have written it here We have given you the font, suppose we have given you this font okay and on this we clicked here So look at the envelope tool above Some notes will be visible here one two three chapa here in the center six here seven and this one eight okay total We have eight notes here now. By choosing any of these notes we We can give it a new shape, suppose we Here we chose the center note and we If you drag it upwards, see this A new shape came to us like this Now we dragged the bottom one so this See, just like this we have placed the left one here I dragged the right one sorry and this is how we did it If you drag the left one here look we have a different one here here is one that we have inside the text You have given many such effective effects you can also give effect okay so let’s do it Let’s make something and see what looks good Let us learn what this tool of ours is and What can we do for him Let’s type something here first let’s say we typed here is in the capital Air fire water and earth alright we will change this font would have done it and let’s center it a little Let’s make it a bit bigger so that you can see it clearly Show me what I’m going to do And we will take a break for the whole thing here. Let’s take part in it by taking a break What if all these lines are different? will go and we will move them separately something like this can be fixed and then what do we all do brings all the text in the same order we can make them equal in some way and we would have done the same to the air as well something like this okay now we have to do it Do we feel a triangle on it? You have to give it the whole shape If it should come in a triangle look then its so what we’ll do is draw a triangle here If you draw it first, we will make it with the help of polygonal and by going here we’ve drawn a triangle okay No, look, I have drawn a triangle. some way like this from now what do we want that this which is ours The full text that we have written is Coming in a triangle shape If needed, we will use it here You can use the envelope tool as soon as you click on the tool here If you click, you will see it here in front of you Some options may open up for you here. We will go and look at those options here An option is given called Create Envelope From If you click here you will see An arrow is coming here and this You move the arrow over this triangle and Click and you will see a shape here It has come in a triangle-like butt now Not perfect in our opinion If it is there then see many here There are different mapping modes you can choose from here You can choose whichever mode you feel like You can choose the one that is perfect for you look here we have it Horizontal mode and look something like this We have an effect created here It’s done, see it now you can see it anywhere You can use it in your magazine Or if you have created something creative somewhere If you want to make something in this way then You can make it, let’s delete it again Let’s see a new effect inside this Suppose I typed something else here Here we have written the runs and again we I have changed its yp font a little bit we’ve enlarged it, it’s okay and now we’ve made here here’s a pentagon convert this to this let’s do polygonum here this is our polygonum want this whole thing I have written the text for run, it’s ok this should come in our polygonum so You will apply the same method again You will select the text and you will see the envelope and From here we will create a new form. and we will do this polygonal see this we have polygonal here But this mode that has come now is for us If it is not proper then you can do it according to your wish Whichever mode you find perfect for you You can choose it based on the text Look, we have something like this The pass has been made here, it’s ok if Here you will see different colors for each alphabet. You should do this work beforehand you’re going to give this shape use the envelope tool okay If you want, you can take a different color of r You can take the color of y differently, take the color of n differently you can do it you can still do it but That would not be the proper way even if we wanted to From here, go to the object and click on it first curve okay from here we do convert to curve so now what will happen is that this All the letters should be curved with each other We have done it and now we have to do it here the parts of the break so the parts of the break are like us if we do it then this is our r which is in the middle This is a circle, this too is our feeling and it comes look it will go now we have to do it again Let us select this again and here If I go and trim it, it’s about this length There is a process but if you want you can do this also yes but if you do this work first then See, you can fill different colors here. yes but if you do this work first then like you typed and after typing I will delete this first To explain, I have come back here Now typed run again and now what do we do? Let’s change its color first Let’s take it here, we have taken a different color of r We took Y’s and N’s colors We took different colors, so now whatever shape you want you will make it yours already because you You have colored it so now whatever shape you make that he will come dressed in some way I look I went back here to the envelope And I took the path back from here we chose our path You can also make a design like this If yes, you can create many such designs. can you say envelope tool has some meaning There is no limit, whatever your shape, you are like that can you make this here i will make a small I take the example and the honour in front of you So here we take a circle and we a circle down here and took it and back We have inter selected it here intersected it see we have it here It has formed a shape but now we have to make it If you want to make a fish shape here then First, we will draw a shape of a fish here. If we take it then what should we do for it Here I have made a middle shape and like this we would have drawn a shape here as well it’s alright it’s something like this so here we are If people want, they can put a little bit here and this Ask a little bit here as to how its made we give you the tail at the back which is ours Fish that it’s okay alright and we will do the same Let’s copy it downwards and do something like this Now we have written here Fish F I S H and again we went here and put our font We chose a little and made it bigger We enlarged the font of our fish Okay, and again we have used the lap tool here. We got it, we took our new path and we Here I told him my new path that Look at the kind of path we need Here it is again, united Nice object and we did it Now this is our outline in the center We can remove that and inside this we People can do a really nice color fill Here we make fish eye so here But we have made an eye for our fish and Look at this, it is a very nice logo you can call it a design or a ready made one If something like this has happened to us here You can do it allright with the help of envelope tool So these were some of the basics here. Options for applying effects to shapes With the help of which you can create many new objects You can make many creative things too You can design with Corel Draw in moving forward and learning again a very important tool named What do we do for transparency? let’s delete this object and Back to the transparency tool, we’re here do you create any image or any We can also take objects as transference what the tool basically does is it there is an object that touches him a little Suppose it brings it in a transparent look We’ve created an object here and We will fill the color here. Orange ok and we created another shape here something like this is ok and we will take it as a A little from the side, from here we by increasing its sides here Let’s give it a try and we’ve drawn some shapes like this here. done ok And we can rotate it and create copies. If we have to do that then we have done that too here Easier to do this with Control R here Pay attention to taxes ok ok i selected the whole thing and after selecting the whole Let’s do this in a group and we’ve done this But we still used the same colour which was orange I have filled it, I will remove the outline and let’s bring it to this object at the center and what we do now If you apply transparency above then We have created this new design we select this and here Look at the transparency tool option You are given the transparency tool And from here you can enable Uniform Transparency You can choose and now you will see that what you Look at the object, it’s a little It will be transparent and visible to you here I am giving it to you okay but here I will put you inside I am not feeling it, this is the reason because your external object its color and the object inside Its color is same so if you want then you can You can change the color a little bit, I have done it here But I put it in a little red radish I have taken the red color now Look here you will find a very nice The effect is basically visible You can also reduce the transparency as per your requirement You can do more for that here Come to Transparency and see here You get a slider and a slider By increasing or decreasing it you can change your You can decide the transparency that How transparent do you need the object to be? ok sometimes we use it To give a background to an image Let’s also say for example I did this Imported an image here We go and from here we can take any one Let’s take the image, look at our There is an image lying here, this image let’s take it here okay and now I want the whole image to be In the background it is slightly If it comes in a transparent manner then for that What we will do is select this image Uniforms will bring transparency You will choose transparency and you will get as much I also want to make it transparent, please accept that If you want to do it for 80 then I gave you 80, so this It has come in a transparent form, if you If you want to place this image inside it then You can go to the object and look here. The power clip is provided You can connect the power clip to the Choose and click here Look, this was your object of the image Look at that, being placed inside this object It has come like this, if you want, there are many ways You can design creatives Well, with the help of transparency tool you You can design this transparency tool I’ll show you how to do it with the help of Here we have typed tik tok and If we change its font then we have changed the font have taken it from here We took the font from here hey we choose this font from here Let’s make it bold, okay, make it bigger Let’s take it alright and look at its side There is a logo made here as well If we have to design that too then we will do that too If you want you can design it for us What we need to do is draw a circle on it We have to do this and we will draw the circle here After we do that, we’ll do a little bit here. Another circle on the inside, we will copy it here we will do it and after that we will take it here Let’s take a picture with the help of a free hand tool line and here we draw a line something Like this we place it on top of it okay and we put a line in here We have copied the same line on the other side as well We have copied this line here as well. And we copy one line from this the object here in the center is something like this this is the way it is, see here we have have copied it and after that now we have We want to make a shape here, so for that we We are going to use a new tool here. Using the Smart Fill Tool I will tell you further about Smart Fee I will tell you in great detail that Smart Fee What happens basically now I will tell you here But what is the explanation of transparency tool I’m doing it so I’m here to tell you right now I will tell you about the transparency tool only So that you do not get confused and here also I Explain to you about small tools I’m not doing it, okay, so basically I I’ll show you just one shape here. remained so we can draw it here like this Can and we deleted it like this deleted this too deleted this too We can select the whole thing and weld it here. Let us tell you about the weld This would be to group multiple objects and brings it into a single object okay and like this we have created some new shapes here We have drawn money here through Smart Fee. we have taken this also we select this weld it and after welding This shape of ours was, whatever it is now We haven’t brought it in a perfect state let’s design yours perfectly ok Let’s go here and do it convert to curve and slightly shorten it here We would have given this shape in curve form some ways are ok here’s an extra line coming up So we don’t need this line here, so we would have deleted it and we have this one here as well Gives a slight curve to some If it’s ok then look at yours here Look at the shape of your TikTok logo It has already arrived here Now what do you have to do here If you want to apply transparency then for that what we will do first of all we have Let’s fill it with black, okay and Now what we do is create a copy of it so we have a copy of it here Let’s create it here and we’ll People do it here okay we’ll draw the outline in blue color Let’s remove it and make a copy of it and do it down here and this we People do it okay in red color Here we remove the outline and redraw it We send you the objects which are in color are at the bottom in some way like this now we have to But I want to apply transparency on the blue one So we will select the blue one here. Click on the transparency tool If you go in uniform, then look at us It has arrived here in a transparent state It is a little small, from here you can make multiple if you want You can also take many modes, whichever you want You can choose the mode you like from here You can I assume from here Substack I am using the mod so something like this Watch Substratum do the work for you You can also do this using the Subtract mode. You can select this here as well Can you give me any color? Okay, so look at this. You’ve got a logo ready in the object and the same copy that you have And you did it by filling it with red color. You gave the red one to the bottom you placed it and on the top you Some transparency has been applied here This is how you can see TikTok’s Look at the people, they are all dressed up and ready So we can make this With the help of transparency tool it looks ok Hope you have understood what this is Logo how do we create videos If you are looking good I will say it again Please like the video and subscribe the channel Please subscribe so that you can see my videos can reach as many people as possible Let’s move forward and learn new things About the Tools Inside Your Corel Draw So what do we do for it We give you the delete next tool which we get here it is given it is given it is given here dropper tool eye dropper tool very It is an important tool whenever we works on more than one object And we need color sample so this is it Dropper tool which is used to take color samples helps us whether it is in whether it is from an object or from an image For example I will take an image here Let me go, I posted an image here. Let’s say I import it here is there any image of pizza here I have put It has been imported here ok And here we also create an object there are some in this way and in this also we are here fill the color on it and make a new one We have created an object here circle and now I want this image to be is there any color which I like very much It looks good and I want to pick that colour and I want to fill that color inside it So we cannot do this work manually. if we just look at the colour here If we want to put color here then We can’t put it in but our Our color dropper can help you You can find the tool here Color Eye Dropper Tool Click Here If you want then look at me like an eye drop Here we see a dropper like this here it falls and on top of this you can see that you can buy any If you place this above the image then Look at the different colours here I will keep showing you this pick and whatever You have to pick up the color, just tell me from here I want to pick up this green colour from here What we’ll do here is click OK So as soon as you click here See the colours we had here It will be selected and will come to you Look, it will look like a paint bucket, you will see this If you want the bucket then go to this object As soon as you click, you will see this Look at the color that was filled here It has come just like this if you have purchased any other color Suppose I would have picked it up from here as well From here, I chose this brown color from here I would have picked him up and he would have found me here If we had to do it, we could have done that very easily If you could feel it then this was an example for someone Picking color from an image If you Picking a color from another object Even if it is so, it is the same process, if we have to You have to pick the color from here and fill it in So we can click this eye dropper here If you do this then see it by picking the color here It has arrived and now as soon as we click here If you do this then you will see that this color is also filled here It has come in the eye dropper, see here Some options are also given such as Look, here an option is given, add to What is the basic function of Add to Pallet? Whatever happens is the display color here It adds it to your color palette If it’s not already added, consider it okay. we took the eye dropper tool from here and we Assume you pick any color from here We picked this color and that color is this And I want this color to be here What would you do if it comes added to the palette If you click on add to palette then Look, as soon as you click, see here But that color has been added and now we have If you want to use it on any object then We need to look for colors here again and again The color you have here is not the same You can reuse the same color again and again In this way here you can use the eye dropper tool you can use it see one here Option is given and select from What does this desktop do? It works just like you Click here and see what happens now It will happen that this is only inside your page no even outside your page suppose our I like the color of this strip that you gave me. Do you want to bring it here, is that okay, or here? See, I have been given a lot of colors in these If you want to pick any color then all that work can be done now You can do this if you select from Desktop option is selected Look here, our color is purple. Like click here to see what we have This color came after being picked and we saw it here If you click on it then you will see that color on us Even if I feel like it, I will come here in this way You can also use Select from Desktop You can do this, see some more options here are also given like the color you have Select how many by how many pixels It should be whatever our default is It happens one by one pixel if you want here 2/2 pixels or you can choose 5/5 pixels here You can also take the option of this, it basically does this what if you took 5/5 pixels okay so now if you look somewhere here on the image If you click on it, what will it do around you? out of which there will be 5 baf pixels He will get the color and take a complete average of it And you can pick that average color here okay let’s see what it does picks up an average color if you you increase more pixels here Allright, this would have worked within its range Here we have a color eye dropper like this Our color is an eye dropper, just like that our Atridox Look here inside, you will find this arrow It is visible as soon as you click on this arrow If you do it then look here you will find a And you will get the option of Atril Eye Dropper What Atril Eye Dropper does basically like what a color eye dropper does is that it picks up your color but the atrial eye What does the dropper do? It’s the shape you have It also copies the properties of its shape like what is the outline of the shape how thick is the outline What is the color of your face, what is the shape of your thighs? What is the shape of the object, everything is known here I can copy this and apply it is on top of any other object then look As soon as you are here Atridox Options come in properties that you Outline of what you want to copy you have to copy it, you have to copy it fill Do you want to copy or transfer the text? Then if you do any transformation on it If the rotation of the size is already done then Do you want to copy that or any effect? You can copy and paste it into another object If you want to take such things then You can copy and apply here For example I will delete all of these. I will give you from here and I have posted one here I have made a rectangle and I will cut it a little I will make it thin and also rotate it a bit let me give it a try and on top of it I’ve applied color here I have filled it in red and now I have put it here I’ve made a square and now I want to that this same size should be copied here come with the same color or the same If the rotation gets copied and comes, then for that we Choose Atril Eye Dropper from here And whatever property we want to copy, assume Here, let me see what it is A you have to just copy the fill and along with it I also want to copy its rotation So we clicked here and then Wherever we have to apply it or or From where ever we want to copy we copy it After that we will have to apply it wherever we want As soon as we click there we have to do it So look at both its rotation and color. It has come as a copy, if you want you can make one Its rotation, color, size, everything is in the bar itself you can copy it even suppose I have posted it here I said I want to copy the size ok whose size do i want to copy i have come what did he do when he clicked on the dropper I have copied all its properties and As soon as I apply for the one I want to apply When I clicked there, see what he did Look at its size, copy it I have taken it, see what its size was Its size was 102 and 102 like this if I Let me see here its size and its ratio It is there in the same ratio, see it here as well Its size has been copied and uploaded ok So something like this, if you want, use an eye dropper Along with this I also used Atril Eye Dropper You can use it to increase your corrol Let’s learn something more in the draw itself And about the new options, the next one The option we are going to read is ours Interact Fim This is one way how Interact Fee works using multiple colors of a You can fill in a single object Meaning you can create a gradient in the same object you can create a field like suppose I Draw a square shape here and If we fill it with a single color then This was our solid color but if we If you want to apply multiple colors here then We can use that for gradient or we call it interact feel Like we interacted here on ev fill If you click here you will find The option of fountain fill goes away as soon as you If you choose here then you will see here two here you get two nodes this is the first node and this is the second node okay means the colour of the key from one note to the second note How many variations would you get? Let’s say we chose the first note We would have chosen between red colour and second note If the color is blue then look between blue and red As many shades as you see here in the middle You can get all those shades here If you want, you can put any number of notes here you can also increase or decrease them here You can also create some new notes There should be a minimum of two notes If you want more notes, you can make them What you have to do is this that you will get a thin The path is visible on this path as you If you click, double click then you will see a The new note will be made and you can use it if you want. You can also give a new color to the new node. We have given it green color here, so this Look what we have here now Look, it is coming in three color variations okay so something like this here you You can make different color variations Take a look here using the Interact Fill tool You get a lot of options in this Basically inside the tool look here The first option is that of linear fountain fee I mean look at this in a linear form. Whatever you are seeing is your linear There is a fountain fee, if you want you can buy it here You can also charge for the Ellipse Fountain, so this You will get it in elliptical form like this It will come as yours or if you want it If you can take it in conical form here then Your effect will be created in this way or if you want you can put it here or something else You can make it in different form also Okay, so whatever feel you want here If you want any effect of it then you can get it here You can choose the color, see here The option is also given here that whichever You will choose the color of that node here You can get the color you want from here You can also change it after that here See its transparency option is given let’s say this is the node that we have taken this node is our yellow node color you it looks like here you want this to be It is a yellow colour and a little transparent If there should be that transparency, we are here can you increase it from so see this is what he did Was there transparency of the yellow node Look there, he has paid it at 56 Look here you will also get a rotation option This is called reverse fill What is the meaning of reverse fill? All the notes are reverse in themselves will go meaning whichever is your outermost color That will be the innermost color and the one which is the innermost The color that is inside is the color that is outside What do you have to do for that simply? If you want to click on this reverse then see this These are your notes, they are your reverse If you do it then you will do it in some way like this There are lots of color effects if you want. You can make them and work on them too yes you must have seen a logo What you need to do is simply make a rectangle You have to take the tool and here you will see a square How to draw a shape How to draw a square shape After that, you will see its corners If we want to round it off then what should we do for that Here we will choose the shape tool and After that, we will write as much as we want on our notes. We want to make rounded corners as much as we want we can round it up then we have to What is the point of creating a copy of this shape? it is inside so here we are one of its Create a copy of a shape on the inside and this is what its rounded corners They are like that, we adjust a little according to our needs let’s do something like this okay and one copy and same inside this something like this and this also here we have rounded it There are some corners, we will correct them a bit Maybe it’s our turn now, in this way The first thing to do is to fill color in it This is our object, inside this we We fill it with any color and this There is an object inside it, we can also Let me fill it with a random color, now I have done this I’m going to explain to you why I did that What you need to do is to insert this object inside I need to trim this outside object So I selected both of them along with and I clicked on Trim here so what did he do to this object Look, I delete it like this, so see Now I am here all trimmed What you have to do is fill color inside it I need to do the white and outline remove okay i will do the outline remove from here and now I am going to do this one which The object is outside, I will select it I do it and I want to fill color in it which we’ll use here interact Phil’s and we use the fountain fee from here Let’s do it and buy color on one note Are We are on yellow yellow colour and second note Here we take the purple color I have also taken a purple color from here and this Let us bring the yellow note to this angle And let’s take the purple color at this angle. Let’s go to Okay, in the middle we have a color node. If you need more raid then we have a new one here We created the note by double clicking and Here we take the color red So here we have also taken a red color. okay so look we have some here The color shade has come into being And I fill any color inside it. and then I’ll trim this After trimming the inside shape Delete and make this shape white fill and outline remove okay and one us We need a small circle here, so we have I drew it here and filled it with white. let me outline it, let me remove it, then this See in front of you With the help of this we move forward and learn something it’s new i hope you feel good interacting I would have understood whatever your question was If yes, then it is in the comment section of this video You can ask me or you can You can join our group which is it is ours egramswaraj.gov.in Your Graphic Inside the design whose name is smart Fee tools then grow and understand that So what does our Smart Fee tool do? For that we delete it and our We will blank the page from here. And where do you find the Smart Fill tool? First they understand that you are watching this interactive film If you come inside then look here You get the SmartFi tool What the Smart Fee tool basically does first They understand what is the smart fee tool does whatever you created the objects for Whatever closed areas they have okay over that close area that one creates an object for example I will show you this through a very simple example I’ll explain it to you so I’m here for that I draw a circle on it and from here Suppose we took a star and we we drew a star here Correct and we have filled some color in it Look, I took the green here. We bought the blue one, now what should I do? I I want that here this is what you Give me a different shape, you see me here If we want to fill the color then how will we do it? Because it is a single object And if I change its color, then this The color of the whole will change, so for that we You can use Smart Feel here As soon as you click on the object If you want to do it then look at this tool of yours It will be activated and now you can see it here As soon as you click on it, you will see that what did you do here you got a new object I have made it and given it to you, see, I have made it I can separate this, look here you have one The new object is created and now you can You can fill it with a different color, okay? so basically what it does is whatever you Close, look here, it means close area. Look here, any one is open, you can find it If you do not get the nad open then all such things as you have There are closed areas where there is a new object it can create is allright then This tool helps you understand how to design a logo so that you can understand it better okay so i will delete this and You may have seen the logo With the help of this tool, for that we are here Let’s take a circle and inside it another one Circle small I have copied it here in this manner and now we take this free hand Free hand when using the tool Using the tool I did this here drew a line something like this and this I clicked on the line here and it The center point was me of this circle I brought it to the center and now what did I do? I made another copy of this here okay and again i copied another one some here look we have it here Some shapes have formed and now I am here I go to Smart Fee and select a color I fill it here in one click I will pay here and with one click I will pay here I will do it okay so after doing this much However much we drew these lines I will delete them all, this is what we have done I drew a circle here, okay, so this I’ll just keep it here, I’ll delete it I will not do it okay we have made a circle and I had made it, look it is here, I am making it Let me delete it and now I will fill it with color If I can, we have taken it here Here we have taken the red color and yellow color And here we have taken the green color okay look this is yours here you can give something like this There is something like this we have given it just the way we wanted it So here you can do the same in yellow also We took the thing here, color and we Here in yellow also we have filled the color in the same way We have given the same process here in Green If you do it for green then it is in green too We filled the color here, something like this Methods If we want we can remove all the outlines from so i removed the outline of all diya and this is the inner circle of it We can fill some other color here inside. Let’s take it in this manner and inside this also If we want we can give a gradient here I went here, I went inside this too I did a gradient fill like this alright so look at this we have [music] and we make a copy of a circle Inside this, it is cut in this manner So after drawing the circle we will go here on top of the rectangle tool and here’s a We will draw a rectangle something like this Methods from and now after that it will be useful to us This line of ours, so through this line we are here But let’s draw some lines, suppose we have drawn a few lines here But a shape has been drawn, something like this, and another shape we’ll draw some way like this okay so this is what we’ve drawn the shape on here now after that we will use it Here is the Smart Fee tool that I am going to tell you about: I have told you earlier, so through that we are here But we will make some shapes here, okay look here we drew some shapes and now what are we going to do with all the other things we will delete these or these circles I will delete these lines or delete them We will do it and now we can fill color in it So I filled a red color here. I have filled it with yellow here here i have filled it with green color and here I have mentioned all these three I selected the objects and clicked Weld I have done it and after welding I am here But I have filled it here a blue color and I saw this whole thing I will select it and pay it here

    outline remove so look here you have a You can create different logos yes alright so i hope you understand things What does this do after all Smart feed tools go a step further Let’s learn some new options of Corel Draw inside what do we do for him Let’s delete this first and then the next one Our option is the perspective tool What does the Perspective tool do and how does it work first let’s see that Where do we get perspective, after all? So for that you will go to the Object menu. look inside and here you will find it Look at the perspective option here There are three options given, one is add perspective is the second draw and the third is Edited look here now there are deactivated options Because right now we have not placed any object here I have not created it, that is why it is coming like this Let us understand what perspective does let’s see what perspective does a Creates an illusion of distance and depth For example, suppose I take an example here. I take it, we have taken an example here So if I import an image For that I went and I saved an image I have imported it, see this Look, this is an image where there is a board as you can see a sign The board is visible, pay here now what is there for me here please accept me as someone I want to put up a banner, okay I have made a design I have made a banner and that banner is posted here If we have to place it then how will we place it They will understand with the help of this tool what i do for that i am here Let’s say I import another image We have posted an image here, this is an image of children yes I have imported it ok and I found this image of children here If you want to place it then see what will happen right now If I place this, see It will not be placed perfectly for me okay that’s the feeling you should get from the depths You don’t feel that feeling of distance here You will get to see it but what will you do now? select this object object go to menu go to perspective and Here you can click on add perspective As soon as you click here you will You will see that here you will see four notes. You are reading and with the help of these notes you can read here But can you prepare a perspective and a feeling You can create an illusion so that you can feel the depth and you can balance the distance perfectly So this look look at this we have set it up here Here is the banner now see what it looks like that this image is exactly above this banner it has been placed okay so something like this If you want to apply some effects then You can use that perspective here If we want this option then we can click on the image You can also apply it to the object if you want You can apply it on top of that as well as some other Let us understand this through examples also so I’ll delete this and now we Let’s make Vij’s logo so here we have It is very simple, we have a total of four here. I have taken the boxes in this manner and in these I filled all the four boxes with one color. I have taken it and I will remove the outline And I will group it from here what will happen by grouping that all these The boxes will group together just fine and now I go to the Object menu here I went into perspective and I clicked add perspective and it’s ok and now what i did is it looks like this a little bit below and this one a little bit Okay above so look at this Vijay in front of you The logo is ready, it was a very simple logo And very easily you can use the Perspective tool with the help of this we can make people like this yes alright so i hope you understood That would be what a passivating tool does Let us look at one more small example to make things clearer for you Your concept is a little better You should clear your MA world which you Do you use MA World Excel Pa Point If you want to make a logo of MS World then You can also make it with the help of this tool Simply what you need to do is one you can go from here draw a square okay and inside it You fill it with any one color, I will accept it Look, I have filled it in here After applying blue color and blue color filling You need to get a copy of the square here And you have to place it here You can round the corners a little bit something like this and you have to fill it in The color is white and the outline is slight If you want to make it thick then outline it from here I’ll make it a little thicker from here I have taken 20 points and I am colouring it too Same, whatever color you have, I will take that color okay i’ll take it now this is the object I will place your white one below. If I give it to you then I will give it to you back inside me If you want to send it then put it back inside what is the shortcut key shift page down Like you will click here and see your The object should be placed back inside okay and now what do I do Sorry Object menu in Gaya Effects menu I went further and I went over perspective and We clicked on Add Perspective here. I did okay and after that I did this lowered the angle a little bit and I also placed the one a little bit up here did ok and I have posted it here need to thin it out some Okay like this and now I want to type on this W so I typed W on Y it I’ll enlarge it a little bit here. After bolding the W I’m okay and I have filled it here with white color. gave it in some way like this okay you should give it to me Perspective is to give a very light feel If you want then make it very light down here and slightly up here look at this okay don’t do much It is very light and here you will find some If I want to draw lines then I will draw some lines on this I will draw it, okay and you will also get it in The width of this line is a little I want to make it thicker and also add blue color here I will do it and I will tell you something about it here I will create copies, see, it’s okay Look at this, your MS World logo He too was ready and looked a little light I will enlarge it, look at this Look at the logo of your MS Word Look, something has come together like this With the help of the perspective tool, very It is an important tool and much more You can create new ones like this With the help of Prospective Tool, I hope you You must have liked this tool, it will increase your moving on to the next tool and understanding what that means See how our next tool works If you feel that I am taking things too seriously I am explaining quickly so this is my I will tell you all the options above the channel. I am making dedicated videos on all of them are also available, you simply have to go to our above the channel’s playlist and there you will You will see this Corel Draw playlist As soon as you click on it, you will see this There are many videos on Corel Draw here which I did for different topics made on top and separately and quite I have told you every single thing here in detail. the tool is discussed okay so any If you need a particular tool too much If you want to learn in depth then you can learn it These videos of mine also come through Learn more about your main topic Look at the next option, the next one which we People are builders and creators You must be seeing this bulge like this, this is us We also learn how to bring it ok so for that i am simply here I want to type so I typed it here Have done google’s new roman font and I use it I would make it a little bigger here After growing up I’ll be over everyone I want to fill different colors so I used G I have given it a different colour here. Here green colour has been given to the other I have also given yellow color to the O here. I have given this life to my life here I have given red color to the one which is L Purple color has been given here and this is I have given this the blue color again here. okay so look at this we have I removed all the characters from all the text I have given it different colors, now you If you want, you can change the colors you have given to them You could have given it through the break part also what happens in the break part that all these The characters themselves become different And you can fill them with different colors. okay and now if you want then you can apply plastic effect To apply the effect you will have to go to your inside the effects menu and you have to come here you will find texture within texture within texture Here you can get a thing called plastic As soon as you click on the option here Look here, I’ll give you something light You will be able to see the effect here You can increase the depth as per your requirement Whatever depth you want to give is fine or You can give as many smooths as you want If you can also donate here then see this In this way you can do it according to your convenience here The more depth you get, the more smoothness you get You can decide from here what you want to give okay look at this so alright so look at this We have a little look here giving effect to your bulge [music] Presets cannot be applied to the selected object now why does it say that because there is already a Plastic effect has been applied so it looks amazing If he is not letting me apply then what will we do for this we will go here over the effect and apply it here Will give flat effect flat n effect kya whatever our previous effect does locks it so that we can do the next can apply the effect now if I click here I’ll go into the shadow and I’ll be a shadow here If I want to apply then look I am very I can easily apply here I have taken black color from here Shadow I will reduce its feathers The transparency of this is also If I reduce it a little, then see this for you You have a very nice one, see here it is coming from behind as a shadow If you have to prepare something like this in logo so you can do that plastic If we move forward with the help of effects then this is how we were on top of some of our objects How do we work with objects Let’s apply the effect, now we will talk further that’s how we can do it on text What does artistic text do? what are paragraph texts We are above the artistic text What all things can be applied inside a paragraph text such as ours place holder done wap text done Bullet numbering We are talking about all these things Let’s discuss further in this video and understand what he does For that we delete it and Let’s move on to look at your text first First let’s understand how much text there is There are ways in which we work in this So we do it basically in Corel Draw These two methods work best on text The first is our artistic text and Second is both paragraph text what is the difference between right now we guys You will understand this in great detail, see both of them You have the option to work here only on pay There is a single tool available that can be used to You just have to use the tool to You will have to apply in a different way if You need to use artistic text So you can simply click anywhere on the page Give it and you will see that your cursor will appear. And whatever you type, it will be yours. artistic text right there if you If you want to create a paragraph then you can use your mouse to Press left click and you will see a Draw a box and see this. A paragraph will be formed and here Whatever you type will be a paragraph. it will behave like a text whenever we Make the headline of a magazine or a book When we make a heading for the cover, there we People use this artistic text and whatever other pages we have inside where we type the matter and everything we work on this paragraph Inside the text, first of all we Let us learn what is the use of artistic text What work can we do for it So first I delete this and then go to here But we have taken the text tool and here But let’s say we type something it is typed here title and now let’s do this a little bit I would have made it a little bolder too and now if we have some effects on it If you want to apply then we can do it People can easily apply fill color on it. meaning if we feel any color You have to do as much as I have told you to do before I was told that even if it was an interaction, It’s all about that, we are here You can apply from here, simply go On top of your interaction fee and any there should not be any color here that is the interact fee

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • CorelDraw 2020 Tutorial for Beginners

    CorelDraw 2020 Tutorial for Beginners

    Video Course

    CorelDRAW Full Course – Learn CorelDRAW in 10 Hours | CorelDRAW Tutorial for Beginner

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • Spoken English Learning Quickly

    Spoken English Learning Quickly

    This document presents a spoken English course, using audio recordings and repetition exercises to teach conversational phrases and vocabulary. The lessons progressively introduce various grammatical structures and tenses, focusing on pronunciation and fluency. The curriculum incorporates thematic units, including greetings, directions, and narratives, to contextualize language learning. Supplementary materials provide vocabulary lists and explanations of grammatical points, aiming to build comprehension and conversational skills. A fable is included to illustrate the importance of consistent practice.

    English Language Learning FAQ

    Basic Communication

    1. How do I greet someone in English?

    There are several ways to greet someone in English, depending on the level of formality. Some common greetings include:

    • Formal:
    • “Hello”
    • “Good morning”
    • “Good afternoon”
    • “Good evening”
    • Informal:
    • “Hi”
    • “Hey”

    2. How do I introduce myself in English?

    You can introduce yourself by saying:

    • “Hello, my name is [your name].”
    • “Hi, I’m [your name].”

    Asking for Information

    3. How do I ask for directions in English?

    To ask for directions, you can say:

    • “Excuse me, can you tell me where the [place] is?”
    • “Can you direct me to the [place], please?”

    4. How do I ask for the price of something in English?

    You can ask for the price by saying:

    • “How much does this cost?”
    • “How much is this?”
    • “What’s the price of this?”

    Grammar and Vocabulary

    5. What are irregular verbs, and how do I learn them?

    Irregular verbs are verbs that do not follow the standard rules for forming the past tense and past participle. It’s best to learn them by practicing and memorizing them. Some resources provide lists of irregular verbs with their different forms.

    6. What are helping verbs, and how do they work?

    Helping verbs, also known as auxiliary verbs, are used with main verbs to express different tenses, moods, or voices. They include verbs like “be,” “do,” “have,” “will,” “can,” “could,” “may,” “might,” “must,” “shall,” and “should.”

    For example:

    • “I am going to the store.” (“am” is the helping verb, “going” is the main verb)
    • “She will be here soon.” (“will” and “be” are helping verbs, “here” is the main verb)

    7. How do I use pronouns like “this,” “that,” “these,” and “those”?

    • This and these are used to refer to things that are nearby.
    • This is used for singular nouns: “This book is interesting.”
    • These is used for plural nouns: “These apples are delicious.”
    • That and those are used to refer to things that are farther away.
    • That is used for singular nouns: “That building is tall.”
    • Those is used for plural nouns: “Those cars are expensive.”

    8. How do I make my sentences more polite in English?

    You can make your sentences more polite by:

    • Using modal verbs like “could” and “would.” For example, instead of saying “Give me that book,” you could say “Could you please pass me that book?”
    • Using phrases like “excuse me,” “please,” and “thank you.”
    • Using indirect language instead of being too direct. For example, instead of saying “I need to leave now,” you could say “Would it be alright if I left now?”

    Spoken English Learning Quickly Study Guide

    Short-Answer Quiz

    Instructions: Answer each question in 2-3 sentences.

    1. What are three ways to greet someone in English?
    2. How do you ask someone if they are a resident of the city you are in?
    3. How do you ask someone the cost of something?
    4. Provide three examples of irregular verbs in the past tense.
    5. Explain the difference between “it is promised” and “he is promising”.
    6. What are two ways to express doubt in English?
    7. How would you ask someone to wait politely?
    8. What is the difference between “this” and “that”?
    9. How do you emphasize the verb “to speak” in the sentence “I speak English”?
    10. Provide three examples of modal verbs and their meanings.

    Answer Key

    1. Three ways to greet someone in English are: “Hello, how are you?”, “Hi, how are you?”, and “Hello.”
    2. You can ask someone if they live in the city by saying: “Do you live here?”, “Do you live here in the city?”, or “Are you from this city?”
    3. Two ways to ask the cost of something are: “How much does it cost?” and “How much do I owe you?”
    4. Three examples of irregular verbs in the past tense are: went (go), saw (see), and gave (give).
    5. “It is promised” refers to a promise that has been made, indicating a completed action. “He is promising” describes the act of making a promise, indicating an ongoing action.
    6. Two ways to express doubt in English are: “I doubt it” and “Please don’t doubt”.
    7. You can politely ask someone to wait by saying: “Wait” or “Please wait”.
    8. “This” is used to refer to a singular object that is close by, while “that” refers to a singular object farther away.
    9. To emphasize the verb “to speak” in “I speak English”, you can add the auxiliary verb “do”: “I do speak English”.
    10. Three modal verbs and their meanings are: can (ability), should (recommendation), and will (certainty).

    Essay Questions

    1. Discuss the importance of learning irregular verbs in English. How can understanding irregular verbs improve fluency and comprehension?
    2. Explain the concept of verb conjugation in English. Using examples from the source material, illustrate how verbs change form to reflect tense and person.
    3. Analyze the use of modal verbs in spoken English. Choose five modal verbs from the glossary and provide examples of how they are used in different contexts.
    4. Explain the difference between regular and irregular verbs in English. Provide examples of each type of verb and describe their conjugation patterns.
    5. Using examples from the source material, discuss the importance of proper pronunciation in spoken English. How does accurate pronunciation contribute to effective communication?

    Glossary of Key Terms

    • Irregular Verb: A verb that does not follow the standard rules of conjugation in English. Examples include: go/went/gone, see/saw/seen, and give/gave/given.
    • Verb Conjugation: The process of changing the form of a verb to reflect tense, person, number, and mood.
    • Tense: Refers to the time frame of an action or state of being (past, present, future).
    • Modal Verb: A type of auxiliary verb that expresses possibility, obligation, permission, or ability. Examples include: can, could, may, might, must, shall, should, will, and would.
    • Pronunciation: The way in which a word or language is spoken, including aspects like intonation, stress, and individual sounds.
    • Auxiliary Verb: A verb that helps the main verb express tense, mood, or voice. Examples include: be, do, have, and modal verbs.
    • Possessive Pronoun: A pronoun that indicates ownership. Examples include: mine, yours, his, hers, ours, and theirs.
    • Emphasis: Giving special importance or prominence to something. In spoken English, emphasis can be achieved through changes in volume, intonation, or word choice.
    • Infinitive: The base form of a verb, typically preceded by “to”. For example, “to go”, “to see”, “to give”.
    • Gerund: A verb form ending in “-ing” that functions as a noun. For example, “running”, “swimming”, “reading”.

    English Language Learning Quickly: Table of Contents

    Lesson 1: Basic Greetings and Introductions

    • Greetings and Farewells: Introduces basic greetings like “hello”, “goodbye”, and responses like “fine, thank you”.
    • Personal Information: Covers asking and providing basic personal information such as name and city of residence.
    • Numbers 0-1000: Teaches pronunciation of numbers, from zero to one thousand.
    • Simple Questions and Requests: Introduces phrases for asking simple questions like location of a store or the cost of an item.
    • Alphabet and Sentence Repetition: Includes practice for reciting the alphabet and repeating basic sentences.

    Lesson 2: Expanding Vocabulary and Verb Conjugation

    • Common Verbs: Introduces a range of common verbs with example sentences and their various conjugations.
    • Irregular Verb Conjugations: Focuses on irregular verb conjugations in present, past, and future tenses.
    • Alphabet and Irregular Verb Review: Includes practice reciting the alphabet and repeating irregular verbs.
    • Verb Tables: Provides a visual representation of verb conjugations for common irregular verbs like “to be,” “to look,” and “to watch.”

    Lesson 3: Questions, Answers, and Verb Practice

    • Questions and Responses: Introduces question-and-answer scenarios with various phrases and responses.
    • Yes/No Questions: Focuses on answering questions with a simple “yes” or “no”, including confirmation phrases.
    • Verb Conjugation and Practice: Offers extensive practice with various verb conjugations, both regular and irregular.
    • Alphabet and Irregular Verb Review: Provides additional practice reciting the alphabet and repeating irregular verbs.
    • Verb Tables: Provides visual representations of verb conjugations for verbs like “to be”, “to look”, and “to watch”.

    Lesson 4: Negative Sentences and Contractions

    • Negative Sentences: Introduces negative sentences and their structure, utilizing various verbs.
    • Contractions: Teaches common contractions used in negative sentences, like “don’t” and “didn’t”.

    Lesson 5: Personal Pronouns and Possessives

    • Personal Pronouns: Reviews and practices personal pronouns like “I”, “you”, “he”, “she”, “it”, “we”, and “they”.
    • Possessive Pronouns: Introduces possessive pronouns like “mine”, “yours”, “his”, “hers”, “ours”, and “theirs”.
    • Questions and Answers with Pronouns: Incorporates pronouns into question-and-answer practice, including yes/no questions.

    Lesson 6: Tense Practice and Irregular Verbs

    • Tense Switching: Focuses on switching between past, present, and future tenses using a given sentence structure.
    • Irregular Verb Practice: Expands on irregular verb conjugations, including “to decide”, “to hold”, “to let”, and “to see”.

    Lesson 7: Verb Conjugation and Practice

    • Verb Conjugation and Practice: Provides further practice with various verbs, both regular and irregular, including negative forms.
    • Irregular Verbs: Focuses on conjugating and practicing irregular verbs like “to become”, “to get”, “to throw”, and “to bite”.

    Lesson 8: Question Formation and Irregular Verbs

    • Question Formation: Introduces question formation using “why” and responses incorporating past tense verbs.
    • Irregular Verbs: Continues practice with irregular verbs like “to think”, “to go”, “to run”, and “to drive”.

    Lesson 9: Modal Verbs and Irregular Verb Practice

    • Modal Verbs: Introduces modal verbs like “can”, “could”, “may”, and “must”, focusing on their meaning and usage.
    • Irregular Verbs: Continues practice with irregular verbs like “to save”, “to question”, “to guard”, and “to grow”.

    Lesson 10: Sentence Structure and Common Phrases

    • Sentence Structure: Explains and provides examples of basic English sentence structure using subject, verb, and object.
    • Common Phrases: Introduces a variety of common phrases and expressions used in everyday conversation.

    Lesson 11: Verb Conjugation and Question Formation

    • Verb Conjugation and Practice: Offers continued practice with a mix of regular and irregular verbs.
    • Question Formation: Includes practice forming questions and providing appropriate answers, particularly with negative responses.

    Lesson 12: Verb Conjugation and Sentence Completion

    • Verb Conjugation and Practice: Further expands on conjugating and practicing irregular verbs like “to draw”, “to sleep”, “to have”, and “to drink”.
    • Sentence Completion: Includes exercises for completing sentences with specific phrases and verb tenses.

    Lesson 13: Irregular Verbs and Polite Expressions

    • Irregular Verb Practice: Focuses on conjugating and practicing irregular verbs like “to steal”, “to stick”, “to swim”, and “to swing”.
    • Expressing Opinions and Disagreement: Introduces phrases for expressing opinions, disagreement, and polite rebuttals.

    Lesson 14: Vocabulary and Irregular Verbs

    • Vocabulary Building: Presents a comprehensive list of vocabulary words categorized by theme, enhancing word knowledge.
    • Irregular Verbs: Includes extensive practice with a range of irregular verbs across various tenses.

    Lesson 15: Pronoun Usage and Sentence Structure

    • Pronoun Usage: Provides explanations and examples of how to use pronouns like “this”, “that”, “these”, and “those”.
    • Emphatic “Do”: Explains the use of “do” for emphasizing a statement in both affirmative and negative sentences.
    • Sentence Structure: Explains the use of “however” and “even though” to connect contrasting ideas within a sentence.
    • Polite Expressions: Offers examples of how to rephrase commands or suggestions into more polite forms.

    Lesson 16: Irregular Verbs and Sentence Completion

    • Irregular Verbs: Focuses on conjugating and practicing a diverse set of irregular verbs across different tenses.
    • Sentence Completion: Offers exercises that require applying specific verb tenses and completing sentences with given phrases.
    • Expressing Prohibition: Introduces phrases for expressing prohibition using “shouldn’t” and “need to”.
    • Politeness Strategies: Presents examples of how to make suggestions or commands more polite using modal verbs and softened language.

    The provided text does not contain any narratives or events to construct a timeline or a cast of characters. It is an excerpt from a language learning textbook, specifically focusing on English grammar and pronunciation.

    The text includes:

    • Basic greetings and farewells: Hello, goodbye, thank you.
    • Simple conversational phrases: How are you?, Fine, thank you.
    • Numbers and the alphabet: Pronunciation and repetition exercises.
    • Common verbs: Conjugation of regular and irregular verbs in different tenses.
    • Sentence structures: Examples of simple questions, commands, and statements.
    • Grammatical concepts: Use of articles, pronouns, and prepositions.

    Therefore, it’s impossible to create a timeline or cast of characters from this type of text.

    Please provide narrative sources like stories, news articles, historical accounts, etc., to allow for the creation of a timeline and character list.

    Briefing Doc: Spoken English Learning Quickly

    This briefing document reviews the main themes and key elements of the provided source, “012-spoken-english-learning-quikly.pdf”. This document appears to be a self-study guide for learning basic spoken English.

    Main Themes:

    • Practical Conversation: The source focuses on common phrases and questions used in everyday conversations, including greetings, introductions, asking for directions, expressing gratitude, and basic inquiries about time and cost.
    • Verb Conjugation: A significant portion is dedicated to learning verb conjugation, covering present, past, and future tenses. Both regular and irregular verbs are addressed.
    • Pronunciation: The source incorporates phonetic transcriptions and audio cues (references to “.mp3” files) to aid in proper pronunciation of words and sentences.
    • Grammar Fundamentals: Basic grammar elements like pronouns, possessive pronouns, and the use of “this/that/these/those” are introduced and explained.

    Key Elements & Facts:

    • Basic Greetings & Farewells:“Hello, how are you?” / “Hi, how are you?”
    • “Fine, thank you.” / “Fine, thanks.”
    • “Thank you. Goodbye.” / “Goodbye.”
    • Introducing Yourself:“My name is ___________.”
    • Asking for Directions:“Can you tell me where the store is?”
    • “Can you tell me where the bathroom is?”
    • Essential Questions:“How much does it cost?”
    • “How much do I owe you?”
    • “What time is it?”
    • Verb Examples (Regular & Irregular):To talk: “I talk / He talks / She talked / I will talk”
    • To promise: “He promised to be good.” / “Please promise.” / “I am promising it.”
    • To be: “I am / He is / She was / They will be”
    • Grammar Concepts:Possessive Pronouns: “Whose credit card is this? Do you own it? (Yes, it’s mine.)”
    • Demonstrative Pronouns: “This” (close by), “That” (farther away), “These” (multiple, close by), “Those” (multiple, farther away)

    Strengths:

    • Practicality: The focus on conversational English makes it useful for real-world interactions.
    • Repetition: The repetitive nature reinforces vocabulary and grammar rules.
    • Audio Support: The use of audio files enhances pronunciation practice.

    Weaknesses:

    • Limited Scope: The content primarily covers beginner-level English.
    • Lack of Context: Some phrases and grammar concepts could benefit from more contextual examples.

    Quotes:

    • Emphasis using “Do”: “You don’t speak English, do you? Yes, I do speak English.”
    • Using “However” for contrast: “I don’t have much money, however, I still need to buy it.”
    • Saying Things Politely: “You need to leave. Don’t you need to leave?”

    Overall, this source offers a practical, albeit basic, introduction to spoken English. The inclusion of audio aids and repetitive exercises is beneficial for reinforcing learning. However, further resources may be needed for more comprehensive language acquisition.

    Here is a discussion about English learning based on the provided sources:

    • The sources are excerpts from “012-spoken-english-laerning-quikly.pdf” which is a student workbook designed to teach spoken English [1].
    • The workbook is for university students, professionals, and anyone who wants to speak English well [2].
    • It can be used by both beginner and advanced students, and self-study is also possible [3, 4].
    • The workbook focuses on teaching spoken English quickly through normal, everyday sentences [5].
    • It emphasizes speaking aloud, thinking in English, and consistent practice for fluency [6, 7].
    • The workbook includes lessons on English sentences, pronunciation, exercises, and vocabulary [8-10].
    • It also covers essential grammar concepts such as verb tenses, sentence structure, and common grammatical errors [11-13].
    • The sources highlight the importance of practicing with an English teacher for better pronunciation, even if self-studying [4].
    • It suggests reviewing previous lessons weekly and recording oneself to monitor progress [14].
    • The workbook encourages learners to supplement their studies by listening to English audio, reading newspapers, and utilizing the lesson texts for further practice [15-18].
    • It provides advice on how to effectively learn vocabulary from newspapers, including identifying and practicing expressions [17, 19, 20].
    • It emphasizes the importance of persistence and effort in language learning, comparing it to pushing a heavy car—it requires initial effort but yields progress over time [21, 22].
    • The workbook includes a comprehensive vocabulary list covering a wide range of topics, and it also provides a table index for easy navigation [23, 24].

    The workbook advocates a holistic approach to English learning, combining focused lessons with practical application through listening, reading, and consistent speaking practice. It emphasizes the importance of effort and persistence for achieving fluency.

    Insights on Spoken English from “Spoken English Learned Quickly”

    The sources, excerpts from the student workbook “Spoken English Learned Quickly,” provide a robust framework for understanding and learning spoken English. The workbook emphasizes several key principles for acquiring fluency:

    • Focus on Speaking: The most important aspect of learning spoken English is, unsurprisingly, to speak it aloud. The workbook emphasizes that “To learn to speak English correctly, you must speak it aloud,” and to do so loudly and clearly. [1]
    • Think in English: The workbook stresses the importance of thinking in English for fluency. It cautions against simply reading answers, encouraging learners to make their minds work to formulate responses in English. [1]
    • Consistent Practice: The workbook encourages practicing for one to two hours daily, five days a week, for optimal results. [2] This consistent practice aims to help learners speak fluently and be easily understood by native speakers.
    • The Role of Rhythm and Pronunciation: The workbook distinguishes between knowing vocabulary and grammar, and actually speaking fluently with correct rhythm and pronunciation. It recommends continued use of the audio recordings for at least a year after finishing the lessons to master these elements. [3]
    • Normal, Everyday Sentences: The workbook utilizes normal, everyday sentences for its lessons, making it suitable for both beginners and advanced learners. The idea is that beginners benefit from learning practical phrases, while advanced learners can use the same sentences to refine their pronunciation and fluency. [4]
    • Importance of an English Teacher: The workbook suggests that while self-study is possible, practicing with an English teacher, even for a short time each week, can significantly improve pronunciation. [5]
    • Supplementary Learning Activities: Beyond the core lessons, the workbook encourages learners to enhance their spoken English by:
    • Listening to English audio recordings. [3]
    • Reading newspapers aloud, focusing on new vocabulary and expressions. [6, 7]
    • Reading the lesson texts for additional practice. [8]

    The workbook offers detailed instructions on how to effectively use newspapers for spoken English practice, including guidance on identifying, understanding, and practicing expressions. It also provides a comprehensive vocabulary list and a table index for easy navigation.

    The underlying philosophy of the “Spoken English Learned Quickly” workbook seems to be that by focusing on speaking, thinking in English, and consistently practicing with correct pronunciation and rhythm, learners can achieve fluency in a shorter time compared to traditional methods that emphasize written English and grammar rules.

    Effective Language Learning Strategies: Insights from “Spoken English Learned Quickly”

    The sources, focusing on spoken English learning, offer valuable insights applicable to broader language acquisition. They highlight several key principles:

    • Active Participation: Language learning is not a passive process. The sources emphasize speaking aloud, engaging with the language actively rather than simply reading or listening. [1, 2] This active participation forces the learner to think and formulate responses in the target language, accelerating the learning process. [1]
    • Consistent Effort: Just like pushing a heavy car, language learning requires persistent effort, especially initially. [3] The sources recommend a significant time investment, suggesting one to two hours of practice daily for five days a week. [4] While this might seem demanding, it underscores the importance of consistent effort for success.
    • Focus on Practical Communication: The sources prioritize spoken language and fluency over written grammar rules. [5] They utilize everyday sentences, equipping learners with practical phrases for daily conversations. [6, 7] This approach prioritizes real-world communication skills over theoretical grammatical knowledge.
    • Embrace Mistakes: While striving for accuracy, the sources acknowledge that making mistakes is an inevitable part of the learning journey. The emphasis is on practice and repetition, allowing learners to refine their pronunciation and fluency over time. [2, 6]
    • Utilize Multiple Learning Methods: The sources encourage learners to combine focused lessons with diverse learning methods. They suggest listening to audio recordings, reading newspapers aloud, and engaging with lesson texts for comprehensive language exposure. [5, 8-10]
    • Vocabulary Acquisition: The sources offer practical advice on learning vocabulary from newspapers. This includes identifying new words, understanding their meanings within context, and practicing their usage in sentences. [10-14]
    • The Importance of a Teacher: While the sources promote self-study, they recognize the value of a language teacher, particularly for pronunciation refinement. [15] They suggest even a small amount of time with a teacher can significantly benefit the learner.

    The “Spoken English Learned Quickly” workbook presents a holistic approach to language learning, advocating active participation, consistent effort, practical communication, embracing mistakes, and utilizing diverse learning methods. While its primary focus is on spoken English, these principles can be applied to learning other languages effectively.

    The “Spoken English Learned Quickly” course places a significant emphasis on vocabulary acquisition, integrating vocabulary study into each lesson [1-29]. The course provides vocabulary lists for each lesson and encourages students to engage with vocabulary actively [30, 31].

    Key Aspects of Vocabulary in the Course:

    • Lesson-Specific Vocabulary: Each lesson includes a list of vocabulary words that are relevant to the lesson’s content [2, 8, 9]. These lists provide the words that students will encounter in the lesson’s exercises and texts.
    • Vocabulary Study: The course instructs students to study the new vocabulary words before starting each lesson [30, 32].
    • Translation: Students are encouraged to look up the meaning of each new vocabulary word in their own language and write it down. This step helps students to actively engage with the words and comprehend their meanings [30, 32].
    • Vocabulary Notebook: Students are advised to keep a small notebook to record new vocabulary words and expressions. They are encouraged to review these words frequently throughout the day [30].
    • Repetition and Review: The course emphasizes the importance of repetition to learn new words. Students are asked to repeat the exercises until they can say them fluently and correctly. Regular review of vocabulary is also emphasized [30, 31].
    • Active Use: Students are encouraged to use new vocabulary words in sentences and in conversation with other English speakers [33].
    • Comprehensive Vocabulary: The total vocabulary for the course consists of 1,923 words, with 568 verb entries. Irregular verbs are presented in bold font. [29].
    • Vocabulary Types: The vocabulary includes words from a variety of categories including:
    • Basic words and greetings: Simple greetings and everyday vocabulary used in basic conversation [2, 3].
    • Action verbs: Regular and irregular verbs with conjugations in different tenses [2, 8, 34, 35].
    • Nouns: Concrete and abstract nouns related to daily life and activities.
    • Adjectives: Words describing characteristics, states, or conditions.
    • Adverbs: Words that modify a verb, adjective, or another adverb.
    • Expressions: The course includes common English expressions, and encourages students to learn these [11, 36].

    Vocabulary Learning Strategies:

    • Contextual Learning: Students are encouraged to learn new vocabulary within the context of sentences and expressions. The course emphasizes that language is not just about individual words, but also about how those words are used in sentences [37].
    • Newspaper Articles: The course advises using newspaper articles to expand vocabulary and improve fluency. Students are asked to select newspaper articles, identify new vocabulary words, look them up in a dictionary, and study their meanings [37-39].
    • Lesson Texts: Students are also encouraged to read the lesson texts for vocabulary practice [33].
    • Emphasis on Meaning: The course directs learners to not only recognize the vocabulary, but also to understand their full meaning.

    Importance of Vocabulary:

    • Fluency: The course stresses that while knowing vocabulary and grammar is important, fluency is the ability to use the words in actual conversation [40, 41].
    • Speaking Skills: The goal of the course is to enable students to speak English fluently and understand native speakers [31].

    By using these vocabulary strategies and resources, the “Spoken English Learned Quickly” course helps students build a strong vocabulary base that enables effective communication in English.

    Exploring Verb Usage in “Spoken English Learned Quickly”

    The sources, excerpts from the workbook “Spoken English Learned Quickly,” offer a practical approach to understanding and using English verbs. While they don’t explicitly discuss grammatical rules in a traditional sense, the sources emphasize the importance of speaking aloud and practicing verb usage in context for effective learning.

    Here’s a breakdown of insights related to verb usage found in the sources:

    • Verb Conjugation and Tenses: The sources present various verb tables, including “TO BE,” “TO DO,” “TO HAVE,” and “TO GO,” showcasing their conjugation in different tenses. These tables are designed for learners to practice speaking the verb forms aloud, internalizing their usage through repetition rather than rote memorization.
    • Regular and Irregular Verbs: The workbook distinguishes between regular and irregular verbs, providing practice exercises for both. Regular verbs follow predictable patterns for past tense and past participle formation, while irregular verbs require individual memorization. The exercises for both types encourage learners to repeat the various forms aloud, solidifying their understanding through active practice.
    • Helping Verbs (Auxiliary Verbs): The sources introduce the concept of helping verbs, classifying them into those that change form (like “to be,” “to do,” and “to have”) and those that remain constant (like “can,” “could,” “may,” “might,” etc.). These verbs are presented in the context of sentences, demonstrating their usage in different tenses and situations.
    • Two-Word Verbs (Phrasal Verbs): The workbook dedicates sections to two-word verbs, also known as phrasal verbs, which combine a verb with a preposition or adverb to create a new meaning. These verbs are often tricky for English learners, as their meanings can’t be deduced from the individual words. The sources provide lists of common two-word verbs along with example sentences, encouraging learners to practice their usage in context.
    • Verb Agreement: The sources touch upon the concept of subject-verb agreement, illustrating how the verb form changes depending on the subject. This concept is presented through examples, showcasing how singular and plural subjects require different verb forms.
    • Active and Passive Voice: The sources demonstrate the difference between active and passive voice through examples. The workbook emphasizes that while both voices are grammatically correct, the active voice is generally preferred in spoken English for its clarity and conciseness.

    While the sources don’t delve deeply into theoretical grammar rules, they offer a practical approach to verb usage through:

    • Repetition and Practice: Learners are encouraged to repeat verb forms and sentences aloud, internalizing their usage through consistent practice.
    • Contextual Learning: Verbs are presented within the context of sentences, allowing learners to grasp their meanings and usage in real-world situations.
    • Focus on Spoken Language: The workbook prioritizes spoken English, encouraging learners to acquire fluency by speaking aloud and practicing verb usage in a conversational setting.

    The sources’ approach to verb usage aligns with their overarching philosophy of learning spoken English quickly through active participation, consistent effort, and a focus on practical communication. They emphasize that mastering verb usage is essential for achieving fluency in English.

    Mastering Pronunciation: Insights from “Spoken English Learned Quickly”

    The sources, excerpts from “Spoken English Learned Quickly,” place a strong emphasis on pronunciation as a crucial element of spoken English fluency. While the provided materials don’t offer specific pronunciation drills, they highlight several key principles and strategies for developing clear and accurate pronunciation:

    • Speak Aloud: The most fundamental principle emphasized throughout the sources is the importance of speaking aloud. The workbook consistently reiterates that “To learn to speak English correctly, you must speak it aloud.” This active vocalization is crucial for training the mouth and vocal cords to produce English sounds accurately.
    • Listen and Repeat: The workbook’s structure revolves around audio recordings that guide learners through various exercises. Learners are instructed to listen to the examples and then repeat the sentences and phrases, mimicking the pronunciation and intonation of the native speakers on the recordings. This repeated listening and imitation helps learners internalize correct pronunciation patterns.
    • Practice with an English Teacher: While the workbook supports self-study, it acknowledges the significant benefits of practicing with an English teacher, particularly for refining pronunciation. The sources suggest that even a short session each week with a teacher can help learners identify and correct pronunciation errors, and receive personalized feedback.
    • Focus on Rhythm and Intonation: The sources distinguish between knowing vocabulary and grammar, and being able to speak fluently with natural rhythm and intonation. They recommend consistent use of the audio recordings for at least a year after finishing the lessons to absorb and master the subtle nuances of English pronunciation.
    • Record Yourself: While not explicitly mentioned in the sources, recording oneself while practicing pronunciation can be a valuable tool for self-assessment. Listening to recordings can help learners identify areas where their pronunciation deviates from the target model, allowing them to focus on specific areas for improvement.
    • Phonetic Awareness: While not directly covered in the sources, developing phonetic awareness can significantly enhance pronunciation. This involves understanding the individual sounds (phonemes) that make up English words and being able to distinguish between them. Resources like phonetic charts and pronunciation guides can aid learners in this process.
    • Exposure to Authentic English: The sources encourage learners to supplement their studies by listening to authentic English audio materials, such as news broadcasts, podcasts, and movies. This consistent exposure to native speakers can help learners familiarize themselves with various accents and speaking styles, further refining their pronunciation skills.

    The sources’ emphasis on speaking aloud, listening and repeating, practicing with a teacher, and focusing on rhythm and intonation, lays a strong foundation for pronunciation development. Learners are encouraged to actively engage with the language, mimicking native speakers and continuously refining their pronunciation through practice and feedback. While the sources don’t provide explicit pronunciation drills, they advocate a holistic approach that integrates pronunciation practice into every aspect of spoken English learning.

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • The science behind how romantic relationships affect mental health

    The science behind how romantic relationships affect mental health

    Romantic relationships significantly impact mental health, influencing both emotional well-being and psychological resilience. Research indicates that positive romantic interactions can enhance feelings of love, security, and support, which are critical for maintaining mental health. When partners provide emotional support and understanding, individuals often experience lower levels of stress and anxiety. The presence of a loving partner can boost self-esteem and foster a sense of belonging, mitigating feelings of loneliness and depression. Furthermore, healthy relationships encourage the sharing of experiences and coping strategies, which can be beneficial in times of emotional distress.

    Conversely, unhealthy or tumultuous romantic relationships can lead to increased anxiety and depression. Conflict, lack of support, or betrayal can amplify stress and feelings of worthlessness, affecting not just mental health but also physical well-being. Studies suggest that the quality of a romantic relationship influences individuals’ overall life satisfaction and can even impact their ability to cope with external stressors. The neurobiological aspect plays a role as well; for instance, the release of oxytocin during positive interactions can foster bonding and reduce stress, while the absence of such connections can lead to heightened levels of cortisol, the stress hormone. Ultimately, the nature of romantic relationships plays a crucial role in shaping mental health outcomes, highlighting the importance of nurturing healthy connections.

    The dynamic interplay of love, conflict, and vulnerability in romantic relationships can significantly shape an individual’s mental health. Healthy relationships are often characterized by mutual respect, understanding, and open communication, all of which foster emotional safety and security. This supportive environment allows partners to engage in positive interactions that reinforce their bond and improves resilience against life’s challenges. Studies have shown that individuals in stable and loving relationships tend to report lower levels of stress and greater overall happiness, as their partners serve not just as sources of affection, but also as critical allies in navigating the complexities of life. This emotional support is instrumental in bolstering self-esteem and providing a buffer against external pressures, thus promoting better mental health. On the flip side, relationship distress introduces significant emotional turmoil that can exacerbate mental health issues. Frequent conflicts, misunderstandings, or feelings of rejection often lead to heightened anxiety and depressive symptoms. Research indicates that such negative dynamics can create a vicious cycle where mental health problems might further strain the relationship, leading to a downward spiral. Moreover, the lack of emotional support in dysfunctional partnerships can leave individuals feeling isolated and vulnerable, reducing their ability to cope with stressors effectively. The awareness of this interplay between relationship health and mental well-being underscores the importance of fostering positive interactions and resolving conflicts constructively, ultimately contributing to enhanced emotional health for both partners.

    The bidirectional link between relationships and mental health highlights how psychological well-being can shape relationship choices and experiences. Individuals with mental health conditions may approach dating with caution, leading them to avoid relationships altogether due to fears of vulnerability or potential misunderstandings. For instance, someone struggling with anxiety or depression might feel unworthy of love or worry that their struggles will burden potential partners. This avoidance can reinforce feelings of isolation and loneliness, perpetuating a cycle where the lack of fulfilling relationships contributes to worsening mental health. Consequently, this dynamic can create barriers to forming healthy connections, as individuals may miss out on the emotional support that could aid their mental well-being. Conversely, when individuals with mental health challenges do enter into relationships, they may inadvertently choose partners who are less empathetic or emotionally supportive. This inclination can stem from a lowered self-esteem or a belief that they do not deserve a nurturing partnership. Such choices can lead to increased emotional distress, as incompatible dynamics often amplify mental health issues instead of alleviating them. Furthermore, the presence of a partner who doesn’t understand or support their mental health needs can lead to feelings of frustration, rejection, and further alienation. Thus, recognizing this bidirectional influence is crucial for both individuals and mental health professionals, as it underscores the need for supportive environments and conscious dating choices that prioritize emotional well-being.

    Dr. Caroline Fenkel’s insights highlight the profound impact of mental health on relationship dynamics, particularly in how individuals communicate their needs and emotions. When someone is grappling with unprocessed trauma, anxiety, or depression, they may struggle to express themselves effectively, leading to misunderstandings and unresolved conflicts. This difficulty in communication can create a cycle of frustration; their partners may feel disconnected or confused, which can exacerbate feelings of inadequacy or worthlessness in the person struggling. As these unspoken issues fester, they may inadvertently push their partners away, reinforcing patterns of isolation rather than fostering the deep connections that could aid their healing. Moreover, the tendency to choose emotionally unavailable partners often stems from an internalized belief that they are undeserving of healthy love or that such connections are inherently risky. These partners might mirror past traumas or unresolved emotional issues, leading to a repeating cycle of conflict and disappointment. For individuals with anxiety and depression, this situation may feel familiar and, paradoxically, more comfortable, despite its negative consequences. As they navigate through relationships marked by emotional unavailability, the lack of support can deepen their struggles with mental health, reinforcing a sense of hopelessness. This complex interplay underscores the importance of addressing mental health issues in therapeutic settings, as healing these psychological wounds can empower individuals to seek out healthier relationships and improve their overall emotional well-being.

    Understanding the intricate link between romantic relationships and mental health is essential for cultivating healthier partnerships and enhancing overall well-being. Research conducted by Charlie Health delves into how relationships influence emotional health and how mental health issues can, in turn, shape relationship dynamics. The findings emphasize that committed relationships, such as marriage, tend to offer more significant psychological benefits compared to less committed arrangements, like cohabitation. This underscores the importance of not only entering into relationships but also nurturing them, as the quality of these connections plays a vital role in mental health outcomes. By recognizing that improving relationship quality can lead to better mental health, individuals can take proactive steps toward fostering supportive and fulfilling partnerships. Moreover, the research highlights that supportive romantic relationships can have a profound positive impact on mental well-being, even for those facing serious mental health conditions. For example, studies have shown that individuals with psychosis who are in satisfying relationships report better overall mental health and reduced depressive symptoms. This connection is crucial, as stable partnerships provide emotional grounding and a sense of safety, which are essential for managing symptoms and reducing feelings of isolation. Conversely, relationship distress can serve as a strong predictor of depression, illustrating how unresolved conflicts and dissatisfaction can activate underlying mental health struggles. By prioritizing open communication, establishing boundaries, and engaging in shared experiences, individuals can cultivate healthier relationships that not only support their emotional needs but also contribute to their overall mental well-being.

    Committed relationships tend to provide the greatest mental health benefits

    The distinction between committed and less committed relationships is crucial when examining their effects on mental health. Research indicates that the emotional and psychological benefits of marriage often extend beyond mere companionship. Married individuals frequently report higher levels of happiness, lower rates of depression, and enhanced life satisfaction compared to those in cohabiting relationships. This can be attributed to the sense of stability and security that marriage typically fosters, establishing a strong foundation for mutual support and collaboration. The commitment involved in marriage also encourages partners to invest more significantly in the relationship, promoting effective communication and problem-solving strategies that enhance emotional resilience and promote overall wellbeing. Moreover, the findings from the 2017 review suggest a cyclical relationship between mental health and relationship quality. Individuals who are mentally healthier are naturally more inclined to seek out and maintain positive relationships, yet the support systems provided by strong partnerships further bolster their mental health. This interplay highlights the importance of nurturing committed relationships, as they not only benefit those with existing mental health challenges but also provide a buffer against future emotional struggles. As couples work together to cultivate a stable environment characterized by empathy and understanding, they can significantly reduce stressors that contribute to anxiety and depression, resulting in a healthier partnership that continues to foster individual emotional growth.

    The research underscores the powerful influence that relationships have on mental health, indicating that a stable and supportive partnership can often act as a protective factor against psychological distress. While individuals with existing mental health challenges may struggle with relationship dynamics, the relationships themselves can provide invaluable support that enhances emotional resilience. This means that nurturing healthy connections can lead to improvements in mental well-being, reflecting a positive feedback loop: as one’s mental health improves due to the support of a partner, it can further strengthen the relationship itself. Therefore, prioritizing relationship quality is crucial, as it not only benefits the individuals involved but also contributes to a more profound sense of fulfillment and happiness. Moreover, the observation that the reverse—improved mental health leading to better relationships—is less consistent suggests a need for tailored interventions focused on relationship building. Many individuals may find themselves caught in a cycle where their mental health issues hinder their ability to engage fully and positively in their partnerships, leading to dissatisfaction and potential conflict. This cycle can perpetuate negative feelings, making it essential to foster environments where open communication, mutual respect, and emotional support are prioritized. By focusing on enhancing relationship quality through intentional practices like conflict resolution, shared experiences, and emotional validation, individuals can create healthier partnerships that not only support mental well-being but also strengthen their overall quality of life. Recognizing and acting on the importance of relationships in mental health can empower individuals to cultivate the connections necessary for enduring happiness and emotional stability.

    Healthy relationships can improve mental well-being even for people with serious mental health conditions

    Supportive romantic relationships can serve as a vital source of emotional stability, particularly for individuals grappling with serious mental health conditions like psychosis. The 2023 study highlights that those who maintain satisfying partnerships experience improved mental well-being and fewer depressive symptoms, emphasizing the protective role that a stable relationship can play. This emotional grounding is crucial for individuals facing significant challenges, as it helps mitigate feelings of isolation and fosters a sense of safety. When partners provide understanding and encouragement, they create an environment conducive to healing and symptom management, which is essential for those navigating the complexities of mental health issues. Dr. Fenkel’s insights underscore the importance of cultivating these supportive connections, as they can dramatically enhance the quality of life for individuals with serious mental health conditions. Conversely, the research also reveals that relationship distress can be a potent predictor of depression, illustrating the negative impact that unhealthy dynamics can have on mental health. Unhappy or conflicted relationships can exacerbate existing mental health struggles, leading to a cycle of emotional turmoil that can be difficult to escape. Studies have shown that marital dissatisfaction is closely linked to increased rates of depression, often more so than other significant life factors. This connection reinforces the need for individuals to actively work on their relationships, addressing conflicts and fostering open communication to prevent the escalation of distress. By recognizing the profound influence that both supportive and distressed relationships have on mental health, individuals can take proactive steps to nurture their partnerships, ultimately contributing to better emotional outcomes and overall well-being.

    Relationship distress can be a strong predictor of depression

    The correlation between marital distress and depression is alarming yet critical to understand, as it underscores the profound impact that relational dynamics can have on mental health. The 2023 article highlights that the stress and unhappiness arising from troubled marriages can serve as significant triggers for depressive symptoms, sometimes even overshadowing more traditionally recognized risk factors such as sex, education, and childhood trauma. This finding suggests that the emotional toll of unresolved conflicts and dissatisfaction within relationships can activate or exacerbate existing vulnerabilities, making it essential to prioritize emotional health in the context of partnership. Individuals trapped in unhappy relationships may find themselves in a detrimental cycle; their mental health deteriorates, which in turn complicates their ability to engage positively with their partner, further fueling feelings of isolation and despair.

    Moreover, the emotional strain caused by ongoing relationship conflict often leads to a decrease in self-esteem and self-worth, which are critical components of mental health. As partners struggle to communicate effectively or feel unappreciated, the cumulative impact can lead to feelings of hopelessness and alienation. This detrimental cycle may manifest as reduced emotional availability, increased irritability, or withdrawal from social connections, compounding mental health issues. Understanding this relationship between marital distress and depression emphasizes the importance of addressing relational problems as part of overall mental health care. Couples seeking therapy or engaging in open dialogue about their issues can cultivate healthier dynamics, ultimately reducing their risk of depression and fostering resilience that leads to improved mental health outcomes for both partners. By recognizing the significance of relationship quality, individuals can take proactive steps toward seeking help and making necessary changes to their partnerships, which can be a pivotal factor in their emotional well-being.

    The findings from the 1999 study provide compelling evidence of the profound impact that marital dissatisfaction can have on mental health, particularly concerning the onset of major depression. The statistic that individuals in unhappy marriages are nearly three times more likely to experience significant depressive episodes within a year highlights the urgency of addressing relational issues before they escalate into more severe mental health crises. This research not only underscores the importance of emotional support and communication within marriages but also suggests that the very structure of the relationship can either serve as a protective factor or a significant risk factor for mental health issues. The fact that marital dissatisfaction accounted for nearly 30% of new depression cases, regardless of demographic variables or previous mental health history, emphasizes the urgent need for couples to actively work on their relationship quality to mitigate these risks.

    Furthermore, the consistency of these findings across different genders and histories of depression reinforces the universality of the relationship-mental health connection. It suggests that the emotional turmoil stemming from an unhappy marriage is a shared experience that transcends individual backgrounds and previous mental health challenges. This highlights the necessity for mental health professionals to consider relationship dynamics when assessing and treating depression. By integrating relationship counseling and support into mental health treatment plans, therapists can help individuals not only address their personal mental health challenges but also improve their relational dynamics, ultimately fostering a healthier emotional environment. Recognizing the significant role that marital satisfaction plays in mental health can empower individuals to seek help and make necessary changes, thereby enhancing both their relationship quality and overall well-being.

    By contrast, healthy relationships may help reduce depression

    The concept of self-expansion in healthy relationships offers a refreshing perspective on how intimacy and connection can bolster mental health. This process, where individuals embrace aspects of their partner’s identity and experiences, contributes to a richer, more fulfilling sense of self. As partners engage in shared activities, interests, and emotional exchanges, they enrich each other’s lives and perspectives, fostering a deeper emotional bond. The research indicates that individuals who actively engage in self-expansion experience fewer depressive symptoms, suggesting that such relationships can serve as a crucial buffer against the emotional challenges that may arise in life. This highlights the potential of healthy relationships not merely as sources of support but as dynamic environments that promote personal growth and well-being.

    Moreover, the long-term benefits associated with self-expansion emphasize the importance of nurturing healthy relationships. The research demonstrating the decrease in depressive symptoms over a nine-month period underscores that the positive effects of relationship quality are not merely short-lived. Instead, when individuals invest in their connections, they are likely to reap sustained psychological benefits. This reinforces the idea that actively participating in one’s relationship—through shared experiences, open communication, and mutual support—can lead to a more profound sense of happiness and reduced vulnerability to depression. Encouraging couples to engage in self-expanding activities, such as exploring new hobbies together or setting mutual goals, can be an integral part of therapeutic approaches aimed at enhancing relationship quality and mental health. By fostering environments where partners help one another grow and thrive, individuals can mitigate the risks of depressive symptoms and enjoy an enriched emotional life.

    Mental health influences dating decisions

    The insights from the 2022 study highlight the intricate ways in which mental health can influence the dynamics of romantic relationships, particularly among younger individuals navigating the often tumultuous landscape of college life. For students dealing with anxiety, the tendency to overthink relationship scenarios can lead to a constant need for reassurance, which may create pressure on both partners. This kind of behavior can strain relationships, causing misunderstandings and potential conflict, as one partner may feel overwhelmed by the other’s emotional needs. On the other hand, individuals experiencing depression may find the effort required to foster emotional connections to be daunting or even exhausting, leading to withdrawal or disengagement from relationships altogether. Recognizing these behavioral patterns is crucial for students, as it empowers them to make more conscious choices about whom they enter into relationships with and how they maintain those connections.

    Understanding the impact of mental health on relationship dynamics can also foster a culture of empathy and support among peers. When individuals are aware that their mental health can shape their relationship behaviors and decisions, they are better equipped to communicate their needs and boundaries to their partners. This awareness allows for healthier interactions characterized by mutual understanding and support rather than confusion or isolation. Additionally, by encouraging open conversations about mental health, students can foster environments where seeking help and discussing emotional challenges becomes normalized, rather than stigmatized. Creating these supportive relationships can not only enhance personal emotional health but also cultivate a community of connectedness that actively works to uplift one another during difficult times. This proactive approach to mental health and relationships ultimately lays the groundwork for more fulfilling and resilient partnerships.

    The findings from the study regarding men’s attitudes toward partners’ mental health highlight important dynamics in relationship decision-making and perceptions within romantic contexts. The tendency for men, especially white, heterosexual men, to weigh a partner’s mental health before entering a relationship indicates an increasing awareness of mental health’s critical role in relationship dynamics. This shift in perspective reflects a broader societal movement towards recognizing mental well-being as an integral aspect of healthy partnerships. By evaluating potential partners through the lens of mental health, these men might be aiming to establish more stable and supportive relationships, ultimately benefiting their emotional well-being and that of their partners. This awareness can help facilitate deeper connections based on mutual understanding and empathy, paving the way for more fulfilling partnerships.

    Interestingly, the study also reveals that more participants reported ending relationships due to a partner’s mental health than experiencing breakups because of their own mental health issues, suggesting a complex interplay in how mental health is perceived and prioritized in relationships. This dynamic might indicate a societal tendency to externalize relationship difficulties, viewing a partner’s mental health challenges as significant factors warranting a breakup, rather than addressing one’s own issues. It prompts a reevaluation of emotional support within relationships, emphasizing that understanding and coping with mental health challenges should be a shared responsibility between partners. By fostering open dialogues about mental health and encouraging collective approaches to navigating these issues, individuals may find it easier to maintain relationships even in the face of mental health struggles, cultivating resilience and understanding in what can often be a difficult aspect of modern partnerships.

    How to cultivate a healthy relationship

    Fostering a healthy relationship is indeed a proactive approach to enhancing emotional well-being, and self-awareness plays a critical role in achieving this. Understanding personal emotional needs, triggers, and unique communication styles allows individuals to engage more effectively with their partners. This introspection not only helps in expressing one’s needs clearly but also aids in recognizing and empathizing with a partner’s emotional landscape. By enhancing self-awareness, individuals can forge deeper connections built on trust and understanding, which are essential for a supportive relationship. This mutual respect for each other’s emotional worlds creates a stable foundation, enabling couples to navigate conflicts more constructively and reinforcing their bond over time.

    In addition to self-awareness, communication stands out as a fundamental strategy for cultivating a healthy relationship. Open and honest dialogue fosters trust and emotional security, allowing both partners to express their thoughts and feelings freely. When conflicts arise, addressing them through respectful conversations can prevent misunderstandings from festerings. Additionally, practicing active listening—where one partner validates the other’s feelings without immediate judgment—can significantly enhance emotional intimacy and support. Participating in shared activities or setting mutual goals can also help couples grow together, reinforcing their connection and creating an environment where both individuals feel valued and heard. By employing these strategies, couples can develop a nurturing relationship that not only supports their mental health but also cultivates resilience against future stressors, paving the way for a happier, more fulfilling life together.

    Prioritizing open communication is vital in maintaining the health and longevity of any relationship. When partners feel safe to share their thoughts and emotions, it creates a space for vulnerability and authenticity, which can deepen their connection. This willingness to engage in candid conversations not only helps to clarify misunderstandings but also reinforces a sense of partnership where both individuals feel valued and understood. Establishing regular check-ins, where each partner can express their feelings and discuss any concerns, can cultivate this practice, ensuring that both individuals remain attuned to each other’s emotional states. By fostering a culture of openness, couples can address potential issues before they turn into significant conflicts, thereby enhancing their emotional intimacy.

    Moreover, transparency in communication allows partners to navigate conflicts more constructively. When challenges arise, rather than resorting to avoidance or defensiveness, openly discussing grievances can lead to healthier resolution strategies. This not only helps to resolve the immediate issue but also strengthens the relationship by providing both partners with the tools to manage future disagreements effectively. Open dialogue encourages mutual understanding and compromise, which are essential components of a resilient partnership. Furthermore, when partners commit to addressing difficulties together, they reinforce their emotional security, knowing they can tackle challenges as a team. Thus, prioritizing open communication is not just a strategy for conflict resolution; it’s an ongoing practice that nurtures trust, cultivates emotional connection, and fortifies the overall health of the relationship.

    Establishing and respecting boundaries is a crucial aspect of healthy relationships, as it honors the individuality of each partner while promoting a strong emotional connection. Clear boundaries help define personal limits regarding emotional availability, physical space, and time commitments, allowing each person to maintain their sense of self within the relationship. By openly discussing and agreeing upon these boundaries, couples can create an environment where both partners feel secure and valued. This not only prevents feelings of overwhelm or resentment but also encourages a deeper level of trust, as each individual knows their needs and limits are acknowledged and respected.

    Moreover, respecting boundaries encourages personal growth and self-discovery within the relationship. When individuals feel free to pursue their own interests, friendships, and passions outside of the partnership, it can enhance their sense of self-worth and contribute positively to relationship dynamics. For instance, engaging in solo activities or maintaining friendships independent of the relationship can provide fresh perspectives and invigorate the partnership itself. Additionally, when conflicts arise, understanding each partner’s boundaries allows for more constructive discussions and resolutions. This cultivation of both closeness and independence not only strengthens the bond between partners but also fosters a healthier, more balanced relationship in which both individuals can thrive, supporting each other’s growth while navigating life together.

    Engaging in shared experiences offers couples an enriching opportunity to deepen their emotional connection while simultaneously promoting individual growth. When partners embark on new adventures together, whether it’s exploring a new city, taking a cooking class, or starting a fitness regimen, they create lasting memories and strengthen their bond through shared joy and teamwork. These experiences foster a sense of collaboration, as both partners contribute to the activity’s success and navigate challenges together. By encouraging each partner to bring their unique skills and perspectives to the table, shared activities can lead to a greater appreciation for each other, enhancing the overall quality of the relationship.

    Furthermore, the benefits of self-expansion through shared experiences extend beyond relationship satisfaction; they also play a significant role in promoting mental health. Engaging in new activities together stimulates excitement and curiosity, which can counter feelings of monotony or stagnation that sometimes contribute to depressive symptoms. The emotional upliftment that comes from learning and growing together can be particularly beneficial, providing partners with a sense of purpose and connection that reinforces their commitment to one another. Additionally, shared goals, such as planning a trip or working on a creative project, can build resilience within the relationship, serving as a source of motivation and encouragement. By making a conscious effort to engage in shared experiences, couples can cultivate a rich emotional tapestry that not only enhances their relationship but also contributes positively to their mental well-being.

    Seeking support when facing mental health challenges is a proactive step that can significantly enhance both individual and relationship well-being. When either partner is struggling, it can create strain and tension within the relationship, often leading to misunderstandings and frustration. By recognizing the value of external support, couples can access strategies and tools that are tailored to their specific needs. Therapy or counseling can offer a safe space for individuals or couples to explore their emotions, improve communication skills, and develop coping mechanisms. Peers groups can also provide a sense of community and understanding, reinforcing the idea that they are not alone in their struggles. This collective approach to mental health can lead to improvements in individual emotional states, which in turn can strengthen the partnership.

    Moreover, embracing the need for support demonstrates a commitment to the relationship’s health. It shows an understanding that mental health issues should not be faced in isolation and that seeking help is a sign of strength rather than weakness. By encouraging one another to seek professional help when necessary, couples can foster an environment of trust and openness, where both partners feel comfortable discussing their mental health without fear of judgment. This increased emotional transparency can alleviate stressors that might otherwise escalate into larger issues, creating a more supportive relationship dynamic. Ultimately, when couples actively engage in seeking support and addressing their mental health, they not only nurture their own well-being but also reinforce the foundation of their relationship, making it more resilient in the face of challenges.

    Here’s a bibliography that includes a variety of sources discussing the science behind how romantic relationships affect mental health. These sources feature academic articles, books, and reviews that delve into the complex interactions between relationship dynamics and mental well-being.

    Bibliography

    1. Kiecolt-Glaser, J. K., & Newton, T. L. (2001). Marriage and health: His and hers. Psychological Bulletin, 127(4), 472-503. doi:10.1037/0033-2909.127.4.472
    • This article reviews the extensive literature on how marital relationships impact physical and mental health, emphasizing stress, emotional well-being, and marital satisfaction.
    1. Rusbult, C. E., & Van Lange, P. A. M. (2003). Interdependence, Interaction, and Relationships. Annual Review of Psychology, 54, 351-375. doi:10.1146/annurev.psych.54.101601.145240
    • This review explores theories and research on relationship quality and its effects on psychological processes, including mental health outcomes.
    1. Coyne, J. C. (1976). Self-Report Measures of Social Support: An Overview. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 44(5), 791–798. doi:10.1037/0022-006x.44.5.791
    • This article provides insights into how social support from romantic partners can mitigate stress and improve mental health.
    1. Braithwaite, S. R., & Holt-Lunstad, J. (2017). Relationships and Health: The Role of Social Support in Health and Well-Being. In J. C. Nussbaum & J. Coupland (Eds.), Handbook of communication and aging research (pp. 157-178). New York, NY: Routledge.
    • This book chapter discusses how relationship quality and social support correlate with various mental health outcomes.
    1. Whisman, M. A. (2013). The association between depression and marital dissatisfaction: A longitudinal study. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 81(4), 689-698. doi:10.1037/a0031121
    • This longitudinal study investigates the bidirectional relationship between marital satisfaction and depression, providing evidence of how each can influence the other.
    1. Covington, D. W., & D’Arcy, A. (2020). Relationships, Mental Health, and the Impact of Covid-19. Journal of Family Psychology, 34(7), 1624-1634. doi:10.1037/fam0000720
    • This paper examines the effects of romantic relationships on mental health during the Covid-19 pandemic, highlighting the role of support and connection.
    1. Laursen, B., & Collins, W. A. (1994). Interpersonal relationships during adolescence. Journal of Research on Adolescence, 4(1), 97-109. doi:10.1207/s15327795jra0401_6
    • This article discusses how romantic relationships in adolescence affect emotional development and mental health, providing insights into the importance of these formative connections.
    1. Mikulincer, M., & Shaver, P. R. (2007). Attachment in adulthood: Structure, dynamics, and change. New York, NY: Guilford Press.
    • This book discusses the attachment theory and its implications for adult romantic relationships, including its effects on mental health, emotional regulation, and relationship satisfaction.
    1. Lammers, J., Stukas, A. A., Jordan, J., Pollmann, M., & Stapel, D. A. (2011). Power Increases Infidelity in Women. Psychological Science, 22(11), 1391-1396. doi:10.1177/0956797611416256
    • This study explores the dynamics of power in relationships and its correlation with infidelity, affecting emotional well-being.
    1. Reis, H. T., & Shallcross, L. (2018).The relationship between romantic relationships and mental health: Current insights. Current Psychiatry Reports, 20(6), 59. doi:10.1007/s11920-018-0905-3
      • This overview provides a summary of research linking romantic relationships with mental health outcomes, addressing the positive and negative impacts.

    These sources encompass a well-rounded exploration of how romantic relationships influence mental health, covering various aspects such as emotional support, communication, conflict, and the impacts of relationship dynamics on psychological well-being.

    Romantic Relationships and Mental Health

    Romantic relationships profoundly shape mental health, impacting emotional well-being and psychological resilience. Positive connections foster security and reduce stress, while distressed relationships can increase anxiety and depression. The interplay is bidirectional, with mental health influencing relationship choices and communication. Committed partnerships often provide greater psychological benefits, and cultivating healthy relationship skills like open communication and boundary setting is crucial for mental well-being. Research indicates that supportive relationships can improve mental health even for those with serious conditions, while relationship distress is a strong predictor of depression.

    The Intertwined Fates: Romantic Relationships and Mental Health

    Comprehension Quiz

    1. Explain two ways in which positive romantic relationships contribute to good mental health, according to the provided text.
    2. Describe how unhealthy or tumultuous romantic relationships can negatively impact an individual’s mental and even physical well-being.
    3. What does the concept of the “bidirectional link” between relationships and mental health refer to, and provide one example of this dynamic?
    4. According to Dr. Caroline Fenkel’s insights, how might unprocessed trauma or mental health challenges affect an individual’s ability to communicate within a relationship?
    5. What key difference in psychological benefits has research noted between committed relationships (like marriage) and less committed arrangements (like cohabitation)?
    6. Explain how a stable and supportive romantic partnership can act as a “protective factor” against psychological distress, even for individuals with existing mental health conditions.
    7. Based on the provided text, why is marital distress considered a strong predictor of depression? Briefly mention a key finding from the 1999 study.
    8. Describe the concept of “self-expansion” in healthy relationships and how it can contribute to reducing depressive symptoms.
    9. According to the 2022 study, how might anxiety and depression specifically influence the dating decisions and behaviors of college students?
    10. Identify two key strategies mentioned in the text for cultivating and maintaining a healthy romantic relationship.

    Answer Key

    1. Positive romantic relationships enhance mental health by providing feelings of love, security, and support, which lower stress and anxiety. They also boost self-esteem and foster a sense of belonging, mitigating feelings of loneliness and depression through emotional support and shared coping strategies.
    2. Unhealthy relationships increase anxiety and depression through conflict, lack of support, or betrayal, amplifying stress and feelings of worthlessness. This negative dynamic can also affect physical well-being and reduce overall life satisfaction and the ability to cope with external stressors.
    3. The “bidirectional link” refers to the mutual influence between mental health and relationships; mental well-being can shape relationship choices, and relationship experiences can impact mental health. For example, individuals with anxiety might avoid relationships due to fear of vulnerability, leading to further isolation.
    4. Dr. Fenkel suggests that individuals grappling with mental health challenges may struggle to express their needs and emotions effectively, leading to misunderstandings and unresolved conflicts. This can create a cycle of frustration and push partners away, reinforcing feelings of isolation.
    5. Research indicates that committed relationships, such as marriage, tend to offer more significant psychological benefits like higher levels of happiness, lower rates of depression, and enhanced life satisfaction compared to less committed arrangements due to the stability and security they typically foster.
    6. A stable and supportive romantic partnership can act as a protective factor by providing emotional grounding and a sense of safety, which is crucial for managing mental health symptoms and reducing feelings of isolation. It fosters an environment of understanding and encouragement conducive to healing.
    7. Marital distress is a strong predictor of depression because the stress and unhappiness from troubled marriages can trigger or exacerbate depressive symptoms, sometimes more significantly than other risk factors. The 1999 study found that individuals in unhappy marriages were nearly three times more likely to experience major depression within a year.
    8. Self-expansion in healthy relationships is the process where individuals embrace aspects of their partner’s identity and experiences, leading to a richer sense of self. This engagement in shared activities and emotional exchanges has been linked to fewer depressive symptoms over time.
    9. College students with anxiety may overthink relationship scenarios and constantly seek reassurance, potentially straining their partnerships. Those with depression might find the effort of forming emotional connections daunting, leading to withdrawal and disengagement from relationships.
    10. Two key strategies for cultivating a healthy romantic relationship are prioritizing open communication, which fosters trust and allows for constructive conflict resolution, and establishing and respecting boundaries, which honors individuality and promotes emotional security.

    Essay Format Questions

    1. Discuss the intricate ways in which the quality of a romantic relationship can either enhance or undermine an individual’s mental health. Use specific examples from the text to illustrate your points regarding emotional support, conflict, and overall well-being.
    2. Analyze the “bidirectional link” between romantic relationships and mental health. Explore how pre-existing mental health conditions might influence an individual’s choices and experiences in relationships, and conversely, how relationship dynamics can impact mental well-being.
    3. Drawing upon the insights of Dr. Caroline Fenkel and the research on committed relationships, evaluate the importance of communication and emotional availability in fostering healthy romantic partnerships that support mental health.
    4. Critically assess the claim that committed relationships, particularly marriage, provide greater mental health benefits compared to less committed relationships. Consider the factors that contribute to these differences and discuss any potential limitations or nuances in this finding.
    5. Examine the practical strategies for cultivating a healthy romantic relationship as outlined in the text. Discuss the significance of self-awareness, open communication, boundaries, shared experiences, and seeking support in maintaining both relationship satisfaction and individual mental well-being.

    Glossary of Key Terms

    • Emotional Well-being: An overall sense of happiness, contentment, and the ability to manage one’s emotions effectively in response to life’s challenges.
    • Psychological Resilience: The capacity to cope with stress and adversity, bounce back from negative experiences, and adapt to change while maintaining mental health.
    • Emotional Support: The provision of comfort, understanding, and encouragement from a partner, helping to buffer against stress and promote positive feelings.
    • Self-Esteem: A feeling of self-worth and confidence in one’s own abilities and value as a person.
    • Sense of Belonging: The feeling of being connected to and accepted by others, which is crucial for psychological health and mitigating loneliness.
    • Neurobiological Aspect: The involvement of the nervous system and biological processes, such as hormone release (e.g., oxytocin, cortisol), in influencing behavior and emotional states within relationships.
    • Relationship Distress: Negative aspects within a romantic relationship, such as frequent conflict, misunderstandings, lack of support, or feelings of rejection, that can lead to emotional turmoil.
    • Bidirectional Link: The concept that two factors influence each other; in this context, mental health affects relationships, and relationships affect mental health.
    • Unprocessed Trauma: Past experiences that have not been fully emotionally resolved and can continue to impact current thoughts, feelings, and behaviors, including those within relationships.
    • Committed Relationship: A romantic partnership characterized by a strong sense of dedication, long-term orientation, and often formalized through marriage.
    • Less Committed Relationship: A romantic partnership that may lack the same level of long-term dedication or formalization as a committed relationship, such as cohabitation or dating.
    • Protective Factor: Something that reduces the likelihood of a negative outcome; in this context, a stable and supportive relationship can protect against psychological distress.
    • Marital Distress: Specific negative aspects within a marriage, such as frequent conflict, dissatisfaction, and lack of intimacy, that can negatively impact mental health.
    • Self-Expansion: A process in healthy relationships where individuals incorporate aspects of their partner’s identity and experiences into their own sense of self, leading to personal growth and enrichment.
    • Open Communication: A style of interaction where partners feel safe and willing to share their thoughts, feelings, needs, and concerns honestly and respectfully.
    • Boundaries: Personal limits and expectations within a relationship that define what is acceptable and unacceptable in terms of emotional, physical, and mental space.
    • Shared Experiences: Activities, interests, or goals that partners engage in together, fostering connection, creating memories, and promoting self-expansion.

    Briefing Document: The Interplay Between Romantic Relationships and Mental Health

    Date: October 26, 2023

    Prepared For: Interested Parties

    Subject: Review of Sources on the Science Behind Romantic Relationships and Mental Health

    Executive Summary:

    This briefing document synthesizes key themes and important findings from the provided sources regarding the significant and bidirectional relationship between romantic relationships and mental health. The sources consistently highlight that positive and supportive romantic relationships can enhance emotional well-being, reduce stress, and foster resilience. Conversely, unhealthy or distressed relationships are strongly linked to increased anxiety, depression, and lower overall life satisfaction. The quality of commitment, communication, boundaries, and shared experiences within a relationship plays a crucial role in shaping these mental health outcomes. Furthermore, an individual’s mental health can influence their relationship choices and behaviors, creating a complex interplay that necessitates understanding and proactive cultivation of healthy connections.

    Main Themes and Key Ideas:

    1. Positive Romantic Relationships Enhance Mental Health:

    • Emotional Support and Security: Healthy relationships provide a vital source of emotional support and security, which are fundamental for maintaining mental health.
    • “Research indicates that positive romantic interactions can enhance feelings of love, security, and support, which are critical for maintaining mental health.”
    • “Healthy relationships are often characterized by mutual respect, understanding, and open communication, all of which foster emotional safety and security.”
    • Reduced Stress and Anxiety: Supportive partners can buffer against stress and anxiety.
    • “When partners provide emotional support and understanding, individuals often experience lower levels of stress and anxiety.”
    • “Individuals in stable and loving relationships tend to report lower levels of stress and greater overall happiness, as their partners serve not just as sources of affection, but also as critical allies in navigating the complexities of life.”
    • Boosted Self-Esteem and Belonging: Loving relationships contribute to a positive self-image and a sense of connection, mitigating loneliness and depression.
    • “The presence of a loving partner can boost self-esteem and foster a sense of belonging, mitigating feelings of loneliness and depression.”
    • Encouragement of Healthy Coping: Sharing experiences and coping strategies within a supportive relationship can be beneficial during times of emotional distress.
    • “Healthy relationships encourage the sharing of experiences and coping strategies, which can be beneficial in times of emotional distress.”
    • Neurobiological Benefits: Positive interactions release oxytocin, fostering bonding and reducing stress hormones like cortisol.
    • “The neurobiological aspect plays a role as well; for instance, the release of oxytocin during positive interactions can foster bonding and reduce stress…”

    2. Negative or Distressed Romantic Relationships Harm Mental Health:

    • Increased Anxiety and Depression: Conflict, lack of support, and betrayal can significantly elevate levels of anxiety and depression.
    • “Conversely, unhealthy or tumultuous romantic relationships can lead to increased anxiety and depression.”
    • “Relationship distress introduces significant emotional turmoil that can exacerbate mental health issues.”
    • Reduced Life Satisfaction and Coping Abilities: Poor relationship quality impacts overall happiness and the ability to handle external stressors.
    • “Studies suggest that the quality of a romantic relationship influences individuals’ overall life satisfaction and can even impact their ability to cope with external stressors.”
    • “The lack of emotional support in dysfunctional partnerships can leave individuals feeling isolated and vulnerable, reducing their ability to cope with stressors effectively.”
    • Vicious Cycles: Negative relationship dynamics and mental health problems can create a downward spiral, where each exacerbates the other.
    • “Research indicates that such negative dynamics can create a vicious cycle where mental health problems might further strain the relationship, leading to a downward spiral.”
    • Feelings of Worthlessness and Rejection: Lack of support and negative interactions can amplify feelings of inadequacy.
    • “Conflict, lack of support, or betrayal can amplify stress and feelings of worthlessness…”

    3. Bidirectional Link Between Mental Health and Relationships:

    • Mental Health Influences Relationship Choices: Individuals with mental health conditions may approach dating cautiously or choose less supportive partners due to fears or low self-esteem.
    • “The bidirectional link between relationships and mental health highlights how psychological well-being can shape relationship choices and experiences.”
    • “Individuals with mental health conditions may approach dating with caution, leading them to avoid relationships altogether due to fears of vulnerability or potential misunderstandings.”
    • “Conversely, when individuals with mental health challenges do enter into relationships, they may inadvertently choose partners who are less empathetic or emotionally supportive.”
    • Communication Challenges: Unprocessed trauma or mental health issues can hinder effective communication, leading to misunderstandings and conflict.
    • “When someone is grappling with unprocessed trauma, anxiety, or depression, they may struggle to express themselves effectively, leading to misunderstandings and unresolved conflicts.”
    • Cycle of Isolation: Difficulty forming healthy connections due to mental health can reinforce feelings of isolation and loneliness, worsening mental well-being.
    • “This avoidance can reinforce feelings of isolation and loneliness, perpetuating a cycle where the lack of fulfilling relationships contributes to worsening mental health.”

    4. Commitment Matters:

    • Greater Psychological Benefits in Committed Relationships: Research suggests that committed relationships, particularly marriage, tend to offer more significant psychological benefits compared to less committed arrangements like cohabitation.
    • “The findings emphasize that committed relationships, such as marriage, tend to offer more significant psychological benefits compared to less committed arrangements, like cohabitation.”
    • “Married individuals frequently report higher levels of happiness, lower rates of depression, and enhanced life satisfaction compared to those in cohabiting relationships.”
    • Stability and Security: Marriage often fosters a sense of stability and security, providing a strong foundation for mutual support.
    • “This can be attributed to the sense of stability and security that marriage typically fosters, establishing a strong foundation for mutual support and collaboration.”

    5. Impact on Individuals with Serious Mental Health Conditions:

    • Supportive Relationships as a Protective Factor: Stable and supportive romantic relationships can improve mental well-being and reduce depressive symptoms even for individuals with serious mental health conditions like psychosis.
    • “Supportive romantic relationships can serve as a vital source of emotional stability, particularly for individuals grappling with serious mental health conditions like psychosis.”
    • “The 2023 study highlights that those who maintain satisfying partnerships experience improved mental well-being and fewer depressive symptoms, emphasizing the protective role that a stable relationship can play.”
    • Relationship Distress as a Predictor of Depression: Unhappy or conflicted relationships can exacerbate existing mental health struggles and serve as a strong predictor of depression, sometimes outweighing other risk factors.
    • “The research also reveals that relationship distress can be a potent predictor of depression, illustrating the negative impact that unhealthy dynamics can have on mental health.”
    • “The 2023 article highlights that the stress and unhappiness arising from troubled marriages can serve as significant triggers for depressive symptoms, sometimes even overshadowing more traditionally recognized risk factors such as sex, education, and childhood trauma.”
    • “The statistic that individuals in unhappy marriages are nearly three times more likely to experience significant depressive episodes within a year highlights the urgency of addressing relational issues before they escalate into more severe mental health crises.”

    6. How Healthy Relationships Improve Mental Well-being:

    • Self-Expansion: Healthy relationships facilitate self-expansion, where individuals incorporate aspects of their partner’s identity and experiences, leading to a richer sense of self and fewer depressive symptoms.
    • “The concept of self-expansion in healthy relationships offers a refreshing perspective on how intimacy and connection can bolster mental health.”
    • “As partners engage in shared activities, interests, and emotional exchanges, they enrich each other’s lives and perspectives, fostering a deeper emotional bond.”
    • “The research indicates that individuals who actively engage in self-expansion experience fewer depressive symptoms, suggesting that such relationships can serve as a crucial buffer against the emotional challenges that may arise in life.”

    7. Mental Health Influences Dating Decisions and Relationship Dynamics:

    • Anxiety and Overthinking: Individuals with anxiety may overthink relationship scenarios, leading to a constant need for reassurance and potential strain.
    • “For students dealing with anxiety, the tendency to overthink relationship scenarios can lead to a constant need for reassurance, which may create pressure on both partners.”
    • Depression and Withdrawal: Depression can make the effort required for emotional connection feel daunting, leading to withdrawal.
    • “Individuals experiencing depression may find the effort required to foster emotional connections to be daunting or even exhausting, leading to withdrawal or disengagement from relationships altogether.”
    • Men’s Awareness of Partners’ Mental Health: Some individuals, particularly white, heterosexual men, report considering a partner’s mental health before entering a relationship, indicating a growing awareness of its importance.
    • “The tendency for men, especially white, heterosexual men, to weigh a partner’s mental health before entering a relationship indicates an increasing awareness of mental health’s critical role in relationship dynamics.”
    • Ending Relationships Due to Partner’s Mental Health: More participants reported ending relationships due to a partner’s mental health than their own, highlighting complex dynamics in how mental health is perceived in relationships.
    • “Interestingly, the study also reveals that more participants reported ending relationships due to a partner’s mental health than experiencing breakups because of their own mental health issues…”

    8. Cultivating Healthy Relationships:

    • Self-Awareness: Understanding one’s own emotional needs and communication style is crucial for effective engagement in a relationship.
    • “Fostering a healthy relationship is indeed a proactive approach to enhancing emotional well-being, and self-awareness plays a critical role in achieving this.”
    • Open Communication: Honest dialogue fosters trust, allows for the expression of feelings, and helps resolve conflicts constructively.
    • “Prioritizing open communication is vital in maintaining the health and longevity of any relationship.”
    • Establishing and Respecting Boundaries: Clear boundaries honor individuality and promote emotional security and trust.
    • “Establishing and respecting boundaries is a crucial aspect of healthy relationships, as it honors the individuality of each partner while promoting a strong emotional connection.”
    • Engaging in Shared Experiences: Shared activities deepen emotional connection, promote growth, and combat monotony.
    • “Engaging in shared experiences offers couples an enriching opportunity to deepen their emotional connection while simultaneously promoting individual growth.”
    • Seeking Support: Utilizing therapy, counseling, or peer groups can provide valuable tools for navigating mental health challenges within a relationship.
    • “Seeking support when facing mental health challenges is a proactive step that can significantly enhance both individual and relationship well-being.”

    Conclusion:

    The provided sources underscore the profound and multifaceted influence of romantic relationships on mental health. Nurturing healthy, supportive connections characterized by open communication, mutual respect, and shared experiences can significantly contribute to emotional well-being and resilience. Conversely, distressed relationships pose a considerable risk to mental health, potentially triggering or exacerbating conditions like anxiety and depression. Recognizing the bidirectional nature of this link is crucial for individuals, couples, and mental health professionals alike. Prioritizing relationship quality and addressing mental health challenges within the context of these intimate connections can lead to significant improvements in overall life satisfaction and emotional stability. The information presented highlights the importance of proactive efforts to cultivate and maintain healthy romantic relationships as a vital component of mental health and well-being.

    Romantic Relationships and Mental Health

    How do positive romantic relationships benefit mental health?

    Positive romantic relationships provide crucial emotional support and understanding, which can significantly lower levels of stress and anxiety. The presence of a loving partner often boosts self-esteem and fosters a sense of belonging, helping to mitigate feelings of loneliness and depression. Furthermore, healthy relationships encourage the sharing of experiences and coping strategies, proving beneficial during times of emotional distress. The neurobiological aspect also plays a role, with the release of oxytocin during positive interactions promoting bonding and reducing stress.

    In what ways can unhealthy or tumultuous romantic relationships negatively impact mental health?

    Unhealthy or tumultuous romantic relationships can lead to increased anxiety and depression due to conflict, lack of support, or betrayal. These negative dynamics can amplify stress and feelings of worthlessness, impacting both mental and physical well-being. Relationship distress can also create a cycle where mental health problems further strain the relationship, leading to a downward spiral. The absence of emotional support in dysfunctional partnerships can leave individuals feeling isolated and vulnerable, reducing their ability to cope with stressors effectively and potentially leading to heightened levels of cortisol, the stress hormone.

    How does an individual’s mental health influence their relationship choices and experiences?

    An individual’s mental health significantly shapes their relationship choices and experiences. Those with mental health conditions may approach dating with caution, potentially avoiding relationships due to fears of vulnerability or misunderstandings, which can reinforce feelings of isolation. Conversely, they might inadvertently choose less empathetic or supportive partners, stemming from lowered self-esteem or a belief that they are undeserving of a nurturing partnership. This can lead to increased emotional distress and further alienation if their partner doesn’t understand or support their mental health needs.

    How does difficulty in communication, often linked to unprocessed trauma or mental health conditions, affect romantic relationships?

    When individuals grapple with unprocessed trauma, anxiety, or depression, they may struggle to express their needs and emotions effectively, leading to misunderstandings and unresolved conflicts. This difficulty can create a cycle of frustration where partners feel disconnected or confused, exacerbating feelings of inadequacy or worthlessness in the person struggling. As unspoken issues persist, they may inadvertently push their partners away, reinforcing patterns of isolation rather than fostering supportive connections.

    What distinguishes the mental health benefits of committed relationships, like marriage, from less committed arrangements?

    Committed relationships, particularly marriage, tend to offer more significant psychological benefits compared to less committed arrangements like cohabitation. Married individuals often report higher levels of happiness, lower rates of depression, and enhanced life satisfaction. This is often attributed to the stability and security that marriage typically fosters, establishing a strong foundation for mutual support and collaboration. The commitment involved encourages partners to invest more significantly in the relationship, promoting effective communication and problem-solving strategies that enhance emotional resilience and overall well-being.

    Can supportive romantic relationships improve mental well-being even for individuals with serious mental health conditions?

    Yes, supportive romantic relationships can have a profound positive impact on mental well-being, even for those facing serious mental health conditions like psychosis. Satisfying partnerships provide emotional grounding and a sense of safety, which are essential for managing symptoms and reducing feelings of isolation. Understanding and encouraging partners create an environment conducive to healing and symptom management, significantly enhancing the quality of life for individuals with serious mental health conditions.

    How significantly can relationship distress predict or contribute to depression?

    Relationship distress, particularly marital dissatisfaction, can be a strong predictor of depression. The stress and unhappiness arising from troubled relationships can serve as significant triggers for depressive symptoms, sometimes even overshadowing other risk factors. Individuals in unhappy relationships may experience a detrimental cycle where their mental health deteriorates, complicating their ability to engage positively with their partner and further fueling feelings of isolation and despair. Research indicates that individuals in unhappy marriages are significantly more likely to experience depressive episodes.

    What are some key strategies for cultivating a healthy and supportive romantic relationship that benefits mental health?

    Cultivating a healthy relationship involves self-awareness, open communication, establishing and respecting boundaries, engaging in shared experiences, and seeking support when facing mental health challenges. Understanding personal emotional needs and communication styles, along with fostering a safe space for both partners to share their thoughts and emotions, builds trust and emotional security. Respecting individual boundaries allows each partner to maintain their sense of self, while shared experiences deepen emotional connection and promote self-expansion. Recognizing when to seek external support, such as therapy, further enhances both individual and relationship well-being.

    Romantic Relationships and Mental Health

    Romantic relationships have a significant and multifaceted impact on mental health, influencing both positive well-being and negative psychological distress. Research indicates a strong connection between the dynamics of romantic relationships and individuals’ emotional and psychological states.

    Positive Impacts of Healthy Romantic Relationships:

    • Emotional Well-being and Resilience: Positive romantic interactions can enhance feelings of love, security, and support, which are crucial for maintaining mental health. When partners offer emotional support and understanding, individuals often experience lower levels of stress and anxiety.
    • Boosted Self-Esteem and Belonging: The presence of a loving partner can boost self-esteem and foster a sense of belonging, thereby mitigating feelings of loneliness and depression.
    • Enhanced Coping Strategies: Healthy relationships encourage the sharing of experiences and coping strategies, which can be beneficial during emotional distress. Partners in stable and loving relationships often report greater overall happiness and serve as critical allies in navigating life’s complexities.
    • Neurobiological Benefits: Positive interactions in romantic relationships can lead to the release of oxytocin, a hormone that fosters bonding and reduces stress.
    • Support for Serious Mental Health Conditions: Supportive romantic relationships can positively impact mental well-being even for individuals facing serious mental health conditions like psychosis, leading to improved overall mental health and reduced depressive symptoms. A stable partnership can provide emotional grounding and a sense of safety, essential for managing symptoms and reducing isolation.
    • Self-Expansion: Engaging in self-expansion within a healthy relationship, where individuals embrace aspects of their partner’s identity and experiences through shared activities, interests, and emotional exchanges, can lead to fewer depressive symptoms and a richer sense of self. These positive effects can be long-lasting.

    Negative Impacts of Unhealthy Romantic Relationships:

    • Increased Anxiety and Depression: Unhealthy or tumultuous romantic relationships can lead to increased anxiety and depression. Conflict, lack of support, or betrayal can amplify stress and feelings of worthlessness, negatively affecting mental and even physical well-being.
    • Reduced Life Satisfaction and Coping Ability: The quality of a romantic relationship influences individuals’ overall life satisfaction and their ability to cope with external stressors.
    • Heightened Stress Hormone Levels: The absence of positive connections can lead to heightened levels of cortisol, the stress hormone.
    • Vicious Cycles: Relationship distress can create a vicious cycle where mental health problems might further strain the relationship, leading to a downward spiral of negative dynamics, heightened anxiety, and depressive symptoms.
    • Feelings of Isolation and Vulnerability: The lack of emotional support in dysfunctional partnerships can leave individuals feeling isolated and vulnerable, reducing their ability to cope effectively.
    • Marital Distress and Depression: Marital distress is a strong predictor of depression. The stress and unhappiness from troubled marriages can trigger depressive symptoms, sometimes more significantly than other risk factors. Individuals in unhappy marriages are nearly three times more likely to experience significant depressive episodes. Marital dissatisfaction can account for a significant percentage of new depression cases.

    Bidirectional Link Between Relationships and Mental Health:

    • Mental Health Shaping Relationship Choices: Psychological well-being can shape relationship choices and experiences. Individuals with mental health conditions might approach dating with caution, avoiding relationships due to fears of vulnerability or burdening partners, which can reinforce isolation. They may also inadvertently choose less empathetic or emotionally supportive partners due to lowered self-esteem.
    • Mental Health Affecting Communication: Individuals grappling with mental health challenges may struggle to express their needs and emotions effectively, leading to misunderstandings and unresolved conflicts that can push partners away.

    Committed vs. Less Committed Relationships:

    • Greater Benefits from Commitment: Committed relationships, such as marriage, tend to offer more significant psychological benefits compared to less committed arrangements like cohabitation. Married individuals often report higher levels of happiness, lower rates of depression, and enhanced life satisfaction, likely due to the stability and security fostered by marriage. The commitment encourages greater investment, effective communication, and problem-solving.

    Mental Health Influences on Dating Decisions:

    • Anxiety and Overthinking: Individuals with anxiety may overthink relationship scenarios and constantly seek reassurance, potentially straining partnerships.
    • Depression and Disengagement: Those experiencing depression might find the effort required for emotional connection daunting, leading to withdrawal.
    • Partner’s Mental Health as a Factor: Some individuals, particularly white, heterosexual men, weigh a partner’s mental health before entering a relationship, indicating an increasing awareness of its role in relationship dynamics. Interestingly, more people report ending relationships due to a partner’s mental health than their own.

    Cultivating Healthy Relationships:

    • Self-Awareness: Understanding personal emotional needs, triggers, and communication styles is critical for effective engagement with partners.
    • Open Communication: Honest dialogue fosters trust and emotional security, allowing partners to express thoughts and feelings freely and resolve conflicts constructively. Regular check-ins can help maintain this openness.
    • Active Listening: Validating a partner’s feelings without judgment enhances emotional intimacy and support.
    • Shared Experiences: Engaging in new activities together creates lasting memories, strengthens bonds through shared joy and teamwork, and promotes self-expansion.
    • Establishing and Respecting Boundaries: Clear boundaries regarding emotional availability, space, and time allow each partner to maintain their sense of self and prevent overwhelm, fostering trust and security.
    • Seeking Support: Recognizing the value of external support, such as therapy or peer groups, can provide tools and strategies for navigating mental health challenges and strengthening the relationship. Seeking help demonstrates a commitment to the relationship’s health.

    In conclusion, romantic relationships profoundly influence mental health, with healthy, supportive connections fostering well-being and unhealthy ones contributing to distress. Understanding this intricate link and actively working to cultivate positive relationship dynamics are essential for enhancing emotional health and overall quality of life.

    Romantic Relationships and Mental Health: A Deep Connection

    Romantic relationships have a significant impact on mental health, influencing both emotional well-being and psychological resilience. Research consistently demonstrates a strong link between the quality of these connections and individuals’ mental states.

    Positive Impacts of Healthy Romantic Relationships on Mental Health:

    • Enhanced Emotional Well-being and Resilience: Positive interactions in romantic relationships can enhance feelings of love, security, and support, which are critical for maintaining good mental health. Emotional support and understanding from a partner are associated with lower levels of stress and anxiety.
    • Boosted Self-Esteem and Sense of Belonging: A loving partner can boost self-esteem and foster a sense of belonging, thereby reducing feelings of loneliness and depression.
    • Improved Coping Strategies: Healthy relationships encourage the sharing of experiences and coping mechanisms, proving beneficial during times of emotional distress. Partners can serve as crucial allies in navigating life’s complexities.
    • Neurobiological Benefits: Positive interactions can lead to the release of oxytocin, a hormone that promotes bonding and reduces stress.
    • Support for Individuals with Serious Mental Health Conditions: Satisfying romantic relationships can improve mental well-being and reduce depressive symptoms even for those with conditions like psychosis, providing emotional grounding and a sense of safety.
    • Self-Expansion and Reduced Depression: Engaging in self-expansion within a healthy relationship, where partners share experiences and interests, can lead to a richer sense of self and fewer depressive symptoms. These positive effects can be long-lasting.
    • Greater Benefits from Committed Relationships: Committed relationships, such as marriage, tend to offer more substantial psychological benefits than less committed relationships, possibly due to the stability and security they provide, fostering mutual support and effective communication. Married individuals often report higher happiness and lower rates of depression. A 2017 review suggested a cyclical relationship where mentally healthier individuals seek positive relationships, and strong partnerships further bolster mental health. Supportive partnerships can act as a protective factor against psychological distress.

    Negative Impacts of Unhealthy Romantic Relationships on Mental Health:

    • Increased Anxiety and Depression: Unhealthy or tumultuous relationships can lead to increased anxiety and depression. Conflict, lack of support, or betrayal can amplify stress and feelings of worthlessness.
    • Reduced Life Satisfaction and Coping Ability: The quality of a romantic relationship influences overall life satisfaction and the ability to cope with external stressors.
    • Heightened Stress Response: The absence of positive connections can lead to increased levels of cortisol, the stress hormone.
    • Vicious Cycles of Distress: Relationship distress can create a negative cycle where mental health problems strain the relationship, leading to further mental health decline.
    • Feelings of Isolation and Vulnerability: Lack of emotional support in dysfunctional relationships can leave individuals feeling isolated and vulnerable, reducing their coping capacity.
    • Marital Distress as a Strong Predictor of Depression: Marital distress is a significant predictor of depression. The stress and unhappiness from troubled marriages can trigger depressive symptoms, sometimes more so than other factors. Individuals in unhappy marriages are nearly three times more likely to experience major depressive episodes. Marital dissatisfaction accounted for nearly 30% of new depression cases in a 1999 study. This connection holds across genders and previous mental health histories.

    Bidirectional Influence Between Mental Health and Relationships:

    • Mental Health Shapes Relationship Choices: An individual’s psychological well-being can influence their relationship choices and experiences. Those with mental health conditions may approach dating cautiously, fearing vulnerability or burdening partners, potentially leading to avoidance and isolation. They might also inadvertently choose less supportive partners due to lower self-esteem.
    • Mental Health Affects Communication and Dynamics: Individuals struggling with mental health may find it difficult to express their needs and emotions effectively, leading to misunderstandings and conflicts that can push partners away. For example, anxiety can lead to overthinking and a constant need for reassurance, while depression can cause withdrawal.
    • Partner’s Mental Health as a Consideration in Dating Decisions: Some individuals, particularly white, heterosexual men, consider a potential partner’s mental health before entering a relationship, indicating an increased awareness of its importance. More people report ending relationships due to a partner’s mental health than their own.

    Cultivating Healthy Relationships for Better Mental Health:

    • Self-Awareness: Understanding one’s own emotional needs and communication style is crucial for effective interactions.
    • Open Communication: Honest and open dialogue fosters trust and emotional security, allowing for the expression of feelings and constructive conflict resolution. Regular check-ins can be beneficial.
    • Active Listening: Validating a partner’s feelings without judgment enhances emotional intimacy.
    • Shared Experiences: Engaging in activities together strengthens bonds and promotes self-expansion, contributing to well-being.
    • Establishing and Respecting Boundaries: Clear boundaries promote security and respect for individual needs within the relationship.
    • Seeking Support: Recognizing the need for external support, such as therapy or counseling, can provide valuable tools for navigating mental health challenges and strengthening the relationship.

    In conclusion, the interplay between romantic relationships and mental health is complex and profound. Nurturing healthy connections through open communication, mutual respect, and shared experiences can significantly improve mental well-being, while addressing relationship distress is crucial for preventing and mitigating mental health issues.

    Relationship Quality and Mental Health

    Based on the sources and our previous discussion, relationship quality refers to the nature and character of the interactions, support, and overall dynamic between partners in a romantic relationship. It encompasses various elements that contribute to the well-being and satisfaction of both individuals involved and has a profound impact on their mental health.

    Importance of Relationship Quality for Mental Health:

    • Positive Impact: High-quality relationships, characterized by positive interactions, emotional support, and understanding, are crucial for maintaining good mental health. They enhance feelings of love, security, and support, leading to lower levels of stress and anxiety. A loving partner can boost self-esteem and foster a sense of belonging, mitigating feelings of loneliness and depression. Healthy relationships encourage the sharing of coping strategies and provide critical allies in navigating life’s challenges. The emotional support found in these relationships is instrumental in bolstering self-esteem and buffering against external pressures, thus promoting better mental health. Even for individuals with serious mental health conditions like psychosis, satisfying partnerships can lead to improved mental well-being and reduced depressive symptoms. Furthermore, engaging in self-expansion within a healthy relationship can lead to fewer depressive symptoms. Committed relationships, particularly marriage, often provide more significant psychological benefits due to the stability and security they foster.
    • Negative Impact of Poor Quality: Conversely, low-quality or distressed relationships can have detrimental effects on mental health. Conflict, lack of support, or betrayal can increase anxiety and depression, amplifying stress and feelings of worthlessness. The quality of a romantic relationship influences overall life satisfaction and the ability to cope with external stressors. Relationship distress can create a vicious cycle where mental health problems further strain the relationship, leading to a downward spiral. The absence of emotional support in dysfunctional partnerships can leave individuals feeling isolated and vulnerable, reducing their ability to cope effectively. Marital distress is a strong predictor of depression. Individuals in unhappy marriages are nearly three times more likely to experience significant depressive episodes.

    Factors Influencing Relationship Quality:

    • Communication: Open and honest communication is fundamental to healthy relationships. It fosters trust, emotional security, and allows partners to express their thoughts and feelings freely. Addressing conflicts through respectful conversations can prevent misunderstandings from festering. Active listening, where one partner validates the other’s feelings, enhances emotional intimacy and support. Prioritizing open communication allows for constructive conflict resolution, mutual understanding, and compromise.
    • Mutual Respect and Understanding: Healthy relationships are characterized by mutual respect, understanding, and open communication, all of which foster emotional safety and security.
    • Emotional Support: Providing and receiving emotional support is a cornerstone of relationship quality. Partners in supportive relationships serve not just as sources of affection but also as critical allies.
    • Conflict Resolution: The ability to resolve conflicts constructively is crucial. Open dialogue about grievances can lead to healthier resolution strategies, strengthening the relationship.
    • Shared Experiences: Engaging in shared experiences deepens emotional connection, promotes individual growth, and creates lasting memories. These experiences foster a sense of collaboration and can counter feelings of monotony.
    • Boundaries: Establishing and respecting boundaries honors the individuality of each partner while promoting a strong emotional connection. Clear boundaries help define personal limits and prevent feelings of overwhelm or resentment, fostering trust.
    • Self-Awareness: Understanding personal emotional needs, triggers, and communication styles allows individuals to engage more effectively with their partners, forging deeper connections built on trust and understanding.
    • Commitment: Committed relationships, such as marriage, tend to offer greater stability and security, fostering mutual support and collaboration, which contribute to higher relationship quality.
    • Mental Health: An individual’s mental health can significantly influence relationship quality. Difficulties in expressing emotions or unprocessed trauma can lead to misunderstandings and unresolved conflicts. Conversely, healthy relationships can provide invaluable support that enhances emotional resilience for those with mental health challenges.
    • Seeking Support: Recognizing the need for and seeking external support, such as therapy or counseling, can provide strategies and tools to navigate challenges and improve relationship dynamics.

    In essence, relationship quality is a multifaceted construct that significantly influences mental health. Nurturing relationships through effective communication, mutual respect, shared experiences, and the establishment of healthy boundaries are key to fostering high-quality connections that promote emotional well-being. Conversely, addressing conflict and seeking support are crucial for mitigating the negative impacts of poor relationship quality on mental health.

    Romantic Relationship Communication Dynamics

    Based on the sources and our conversation history, communication dynamics in romantic relationships refer to how partners exchange information, ideas, feelings, and needs. These dynamics are crucial for the overall quality and health of the relationship and have a significant impact on the mental well-being of both individuals.

    Importance of Communication:

    • Foundation of Healthy Relationships: Open and honest communication is a fundamental characteristic of healthy relationships. It fosters trust and emotional security, allowing partners to express their thoughts and feelings freely.
    • Expressing Needs and Emotions: Effective communication enables individuals to express their emotional needs clearly to their partners. Understanding personal communication styles also aids in this process. Furthermore, being able to communicate one’s mental health struggles can foster empathy and support within the relationship.
    • Conflict Resolution: Open dialogue is essential for addressing conflicts constructively. Respectful conversations can prevent misunderstandings from escalating. Transparency in communication allows partners to discuss grievances openly, leading to healthier resolution strategies and strengthening the relationship by providing tools to manage future disagreements.
    • Emotional Intimacy and Support: Active listening, where one partner validates the other’s feelings without immediate judgment, can significantly enhance emotional intimacy and support. Regular check-ins can also cultivate a practice of open communication, ensuring that both individuals remain attuned to each other’s emotional states.
    • Preventing Negative Cycles: Difficulties in communication, often stemming from unprocessed trauma, anxiety, or depression, can lead to misunderstandings and unresolved conflicts. This can create a cycle of frustration where partners feel disconnected, potentially exacerbating feelings of inadequacy or worthlessness. Similarly, in younger individuals, anxiety can lead to overthinking and a constant need for reassurance, straining the relationship.

    Challenges in Communication:

    • Impact of Mental Health: An individual’s mental health can significantly influence their ability to communicate effectively. Someone grappling with mental health issues may struggle to express themselves, leading to misunderstandings. Depression, for instance, can make the effort required for emotional connection feel daunting, leading to withdrawal.
    • Choosing Emotionally Unavailable Partners: Sometimes, individuals may choose partners who mirror past traumas or unresolved emotional issues, leading to a repeating cycle of conflict and disappointment. The lack of emotional availability in such relationships can further deepen mental health struggles.
    • Avoidance and Defensiveness: When conflicts arise, resorting to avoidance or defensiveness hinders constructive resolution. Open discussion, on the other hand, promotes mutual understanding and compromise.

    Cultivating Healthy Communication Dynamics:

    • Self-Awareness: Understanding personal emotional needs, triggers, and unique communication styles is crucial for engaging effectively with a partner.
    • Active Listening and Validation: As mentioned, actively listening to and validating a partner’s feelings is key.
    • Establishing Regular Check-ins: Creating dedicated time to discuss feelings and concerns can foster openness.
    • Transparency: Being open and honest in expressing thoughts and feelings builds trust.
    • Respecting Boundaries: Clear communication about and respect for personal boundaries ensures that both partners feel secure and valued.
    • Seeking Support: When communication challenges arise, seeking therapy or counseling can provide tools and strategies for improvement.

    In summary, communication dynamics are at the heart of a romantic relationship, profoundly influencing its quality and the mental health of the individuals involved. Open, honest, and respectful communication, coupled with active listening and a willingness to address conflicts constructively, fosters a supportive and secure environment. Conversely, poor communication can lead to misunderstandings, unresolved issues, and negative impacts on mental well-being. Recognizing the influence of mental health on communication and proactively working to cultivate healthy communication practices are essential for building and maintaining fulfilling relationships.

    Committed Relationships and Mental Well-being

    Based on the sources and our conversation history, committed relationships, particularly those like marriage, are highlighted as providing significant emotional and psychological benefits that impact mental health. These relationships differ from less committed arrangements, such as cohabitation, in the level of dedication and security they typically offer.

    Mental Health Benefits of Committed Relationships:

    • Greater Psychological Well-being: Research indicates that committed relationships tend to offer more substantial psychological benefits compared to less committed ones. Married individuals frequently report higher levels of happiness, lower rates of depression, and enhanced life satisfaction compared to those in cohabiting relationships.
    • Stability and Security: This increased well-being can be attributed to the sense of stability and security that marriage typically fosters. This stable foundation is crucial for mutual support and collaboration between partners.
    • Enhanced Emotional Resilience: The commitment involved in marriage encourages partners to invest more significantly in the relationship, which in turn promotes effective communication and problem-solving strategies. These skills enhance emotional resilience and contribute to overall well-being.
    • Support During Mental Health Challenges: Supportive romantic relationships, especially within a committed framework, can have a profound positive impact on mental well-being, even for those facing serious mental health conditions like psychosis. Satisfying partnerships are linked to improved overall mental health and reduced depressive symptoms in such individuals. These relationships provide emotional grounding and a sense of safety, which are essential for managing symptoms and reducing feelings of isolation.
    • Positive Feedback Loop: The sources suggest a cyclical relationship between mental health and relationship quality in committed relationships. Mentally healthier individuals are more likely to seek out and maintain positive, committed relationships, and the support provided by these strong partnerships further bolsters their mental health. This creates a positive feedback loop where support leads to better mental health, which in turn can strengthen the relationship.

    Why Committed Relationships May Offer More Benefits:

    The greater benefits observed in committed relationships like marriage are often linked to the increased sense of stability and security they provide. This encourages a deeper investment in the partnership, leading to more effective communication, stronger support systems, and a greater willingness to work through challenges. The formal commitment can also foster a stronger sense of “we-ness” and shared identity, which can be protective against feelings of loneliness and isolation.

    Potential Challenges in Committed Relationships:

    It’s important to note that while committed relationships generally offer significant mental health benefits, they are not immune to challenges. Relationship distress in any form, including within marriage, can be a strong predictor of depression. Unhappy or conflicted committed relationships can exacerbate existing mental health struggles, leading to a cycle of emotional turmoil. The stress and unhappiness arising from troubled marriages can serve as significant triggers for depressive symptoms, sometimes even more so than other risk factors.

    Nurturing Committed Relationships:

    Given the significant impact of committed relationships on mental health, prioritizing relationship quality is crucial. Actively working on the relationship through open communication, establishing boundaries, and engaging in shared experiences can cultivate healthier partnerships that support emotional needs and contribute to overall mental well-being. Recognizing that improving relationship quality can lead to better mental health empowers individuals to take proactive steps towards fostering supportive and fulfilling committed relationships.

    In conclusion, committed relationships, particularly marriage, tend to be associated with significant mental health benefits due to the stability, security, and mutual support they often provide. However, the quality of these relationships remains paramount, as distress can negatively impact mental well-being. Therefore, nurturing and actively maintaining the health of committed relationships is essential for both individual and relational well-being.

    The Science Behind How Romantic Relationships Affect Mental Health

    Romantic relationships play a significant role in shaping mental health, influencing emotional well-being, psychological resilience, and overall life satisfaction. This essay explores the multifaceted ways in which romantic relationships impact mental health, examining both the positive and negative effects, the bidirectional link between relationships and mental health, and strategies for cultivating healthy partnerships.


    The Impact of Romantic Relationships on Mental Health

    Romantic relationships can profoundly influence mental health, either positively or negatively, depending on the quality of the relationship. Positive romantic interactions, characterized by emotional support, understanding, and mutual respect, can enhance feelings of love, security, and belonging. These factors are critical for maintaining mental health, as they reduce stress, anxiety, and feelings of loneliness. For instance, when partners provide consistent emotional support, individuals often experience lower levels of cortisol, the stress hormone, and higher levels of oxytocin, which fosters bonding and emotional well-being. Healthy relationships also encourage the sharing of coping strategies, which can be particularly beneficial during times of emotional distress.

    Conversely, unhealthy or tumultuous relationships can have detrimental effects on mental health. Conflict, lack of support, or betrayal can amplify stress and feelings of worthlessness, leading to increased anxiety and depression. Research indicates that the quality of a romantic relationship significantly influences an individual’s overall life satisfaction and ability to cope with external stressors. For example, the absence of positive interactions can lead to heightened levels of cortisol, exacerbating mental health issues. Thus, the nature of romantic relationships plays a crucial role in shaping mental health outcomes, underscoring the importance of nurturing healthy connections.


    The Bidirectional Link Between Relationships and Mental Health

    The relationship between mental health and romantic partnerships is bidirectional, meaning that mental health can influence relationship choices and experiences, and vice versa. Individuals with mental health conditions, such as anxiety or depression, may approach dating with caution, often avoiding relationships due to fears of vulnerability or burdening their partners. This avoidance can reinforce feelings of isolation and loneliness, perpetuating a cycle where the lack of fulfilling relationships worsens mental health. Consequently, this dynamic can create barriers to forming healthy connections, as individuals may miss out on the emotional support that could aid their mental well-being.

    On the other hand, when individuals with mental health challenges do enter into relationships, they may inadvertently choose partners who are less empathetic or emotionally supportive. This tendency can stem from lowered self-esteem or a belief that they do not deserve a nurturing partnership. Such choices can lead to increased emotional distress, as incompatible dynamics often amplify mental health issues instead of alleviating them. For example, a partner who lacks understanding or support can exacerbate feelings of frustration, rejection, and alienation. Recognizing this bidirectional influence is crucial for both individuals and mental health professionals, as it highlights the need for supportive environments and conscious dating choices that prioritize emotional well-being.


    The Role of Communication and Vulnerability in Relationships

    Effective communication and emotional vulnerability are essential components of healthy romantic relationships. When partners openly express their needs, emotions, and concerns, it fosters emotional safety and security, which are critical for mental well-being. Healthy relationships are often characterized by mutual respect, understanding, and open communication, all of which contribute to emotional resilience. For instance, individuals in stable and loving relationships tend to report lower levels of stress and greater overall happiness, as their partners serve as critical allies in navigating life’s challenges.

    However, when communication breaks down, it can lead to significant emotional turmoil. Individuals grappling with unprocessed trauma, anxiety, or depression may struggle to express themselves effectively, leading to misunderstandings and unresolved conflicts. This difficulty in communication can create a cycle of frustration, where partners feel disconnected or confused, further exacerbating feelings of inadequacy or worthlessness. Addressing these communication barriers through therapy or open dialogue can help couples rebuild trust and emotional intimacy, ultimately improving both relationship quality and mental health outcomes.


    Committed Relationships and Mental Health Benefits

    Committed relationships, such as marriage, tend to provide the greatest mental health benefits compared to less committed arrangements. Research indicates that married individuals often report higher levels of happiness, lower rates of depression, and enhanced life satisfaction. This can be attributed to the sense of stability and security that marriage typically fosters, establishing a strong foundation for mutual support and collaboration. The commitment involved in marriage also encourages partners to invest more significantly in the relationship, promoting effective communication and problem-solving strategies that enhance emotional resilience.

    Moreover, the cyclical relationship between mental health and relationship quality highlights the importance of nurturing committed relationships. Individuals who are mentally healthier are more inclined to seek out and maintain positive relationships, yet the support systems provided by strong partnerships further bolster their mental health. This interplay underscores the importance of cultivating stable environments characterized by empathy and understanding, which can significantly reduce stressors that contribute to anxiety and depression. By prioritizing relationship quality, individuals can create healthier partnerships that support emotional growth and well-being.


    The Protective Role of Healthy Relationships in Mental Health

    Healthy romantic relationships can serve as a vital source of emotional stability, particularly for individuals grappling with serious mental health conditions. Supportive partnerships provide understanding and encouragement, creating an environment conducive to healing and symptom management. For example, individuals with psychosis who are in satisfying relationships report better overall mental health and reduced depressive symptoms. This emotional grounding is crucial for managing symptoms and reducing feelings of isolation, highlighting the protective role that stable relationships can play.

    Conversely, relationship distress can be a potent predictor of depression, illustrating the negative impact that unhealthy dynamics can have on mental health. Unhappy or conflicted relationships can exacerbate existing mental health struggles, leading to a cycle of emotional turmoil that can be difficult to escape. Studies have shown that marital dissatisfaction is closely linked to increased rates of depression, often more so than other significant life factors. This connection reinforces the need for individuals to actively work on their relationships, addressing conflicts and fostering open communication to prevent the escalation of distress. By recognizing the profound influence that both supportive and distressed relationships have on mental health, individuals can take proactive steps to nurture their partnerships, ultimately contributing to better emotional outcomes and overall well-being.


    Cultivating Healthy Relationships for Mental Well-Being

    Fostering a healthy relationship requires self-awareness, open communication, and mutual respect. Understanding personal emotional needs and triggers allows individuals to engage more effectively with their partners, creating a stable foundation for emotional intimacy. Open and honest dialogue fosters trust and emotional security, enabling couples to navigate conflicts constructively and prevent misunderstandings from escalating. Additionally, establishing and respecting boundaries is crucial for maintaining individuality within the relationship, promoting personal growth and self-discovery.

    Engaging in shared experiences and setting mutual goals can also strengthen emotional connections and promote mental well-being. Activities such as exploring new hobbies together or planning future endeavors can enhance relationship satisfaction and provide a sense of purpose. Furthermore, seeking support when facing mental health challenges is a proactive step that can significantly enhance both individual and relationship well-being. Therapy or counseling can offer a safe space for couples to explore their emotions, improve communication skills, and develop coping mechanisms, ultimately fostering a more resilient and supportive partnership.


    Conclusion

    The intricate link between romantic relationships and mental health underscores the importance of cultivating healthy, supportive partnerships. Positive relationships can enhance emotional well-being, reduce stress, and provide a buffer against mental health challenges, while unhealthy dynamics can exacerbate emotional distress. By prioritizing open communication, mutual respect, and emotional support, individuals can create fulfilling relationships that not only enhance their mental health but also contribute to a more profound sense of happiness and resilience. Recognizing the bidirectional influence of relationships and mental health empowers individuals to make conscious choices that prioritize emotional well-being, ultimately leading to healthier and more satisfying partnerships.

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • 12 Subtle Behaviors That Stem from Childhood Emotional Neglect

    12 Subtle Behaviors That Stem from Childhood Emotional Neglect

    Imagine growing up in an environment where your emotional needs were overlooked—where love was conditional, validation was scarce, and your feelings were dismissed. While you may not consciously recall the impact of childhood emotional neglect, it often leaves subtle imprints on your behavior in adulthood. These habits may seem harmless or even quirky, but they often serve as coping mechanisms for unmet emotional needs.

    The human psyche is wired for connection, and when those early bonds are weak or absent, people instinctively develop ways to fill the void. Whether it’s through an excessive attachment to objects, a compulsive need for approval, or an aversion to receiving affection, these behaviors reveal a deep-seated yearning for emotional security. Dr. Jonice Webb, author of Running on Empty: Overcome Your Childhood Emotional Neglect, explains that “when a child’s emotional needs are ignored, they don’t disappear—they go underground, surfacing in unexpected ways later in life.”

    Understanding these behaviors is the first step toward healing. By recognizing them for what they truly are—responses to childhood emotional neglect—you can begin to address the underlying wounds and create healthier emotional patterns. Here are 12 behaviors that may indicate unresolved emotional neglect from your past, starting with three common yet often misunderstood habits.

    1 – Obsessive Plant Collecting

    A home filled with houseplants may seem like a simple passion for greenery, but for some, it represents much more. If you find yourself obsessively collecting plants, ensuring their survival with meticulous care, this could be an unconscious attempt to create the nurturing environment you never had as a child. Plants thrive on consistent attention—watering, pruning, repotting—offering a sense of control and responsibility that childhood emotional neglect may have deprived you of. In this way, your plant collection becomes an emotional anchor, a quiet way of giving and receiving care.

    While cultivating plants is a fulfilling and healthy hobby, it’s important to examine whether your attachment to them is compensating for deeper emotional needs. Studies in psychology suggest that individuals who lack secure attachments in childhood often form intense bonds with non-human entities, seeking stability in their surroundings. Instead of letting plants become a replacement for human connection, consider expanding your circle of emotional support—whether through friendships, therapy, or community involvement. True emotional fulfillment comes from balance, where care is both given and received.

    2 – Overly Apologetic Behavior

    Do you instinctively say “sorry” for things that don’t require an apology? This habit, while often dismissed as politeness, may actually be rooted in feelings of unworthiness. If you grew up in an environment where your feelings were invalidated or where mistakes were met with harsh criticism, you may have learned that apologizing was a way to maintain peace and avoid rejection. Over time, this conditioned response turns into a reflex, making you apologize even when you’ve done nothing wrong.

    Breaking free from excessive apologizing begins with recognizing your inherent worth. Assertiveness training can be beneficial, as it helps you reframe your communication style without guilt. Dr. Harriet Lerner, author of The Dance of Anger, emphasizes that “apologizing excessively can undermine your confidence and diminish the power of your voice.” Instead of defaulting to apologies, try replacing them with expressions of gratitude or acknowledgment. For example, instead of saying, “Sorry for being late,” say, “Thank you for waiting.” These small shifts can help reshape your mindset, reinforcing the idea that you deserve to take up space without constant self-doubt.

    3 – Collection of Unopened Gifts

    If you tend to leave gifts unopened, you might be unconsciously rejecting love and appreciation. This behavior can be traced back to early experiences where affection was inconsistent or came with strings attached. If love was unpredictable in childhood—sometimes given, sometimes withheld—you may struggle to accept genuine kindness in adulthood. Unopened gifts serve as a metaphor for unclaimed affection; by leaving them untouched, you preserve their symbolic meaning while avoiding the vulnerability of receiving love.

    Opening a gift may seem like a small act, but it’s a powerful step toward embracing self-worth. Allowing yourself to fully receive and appreciate kindness fosters emotional healing. Psychologists suggest that practicing gratitude and self-compassion can help dismantle the barriers built by childhood neglect. A simple exercise, such as journaling about what a gift means to you, can help reframe your perspective and make receiving feel less overwhelming. In time, you can learn to embrace love—both in tangible and emotional forms—without hesitation.

    Conclusion

    While these behaviors may appear harmless, they often point to deeper emotional wounds left unaddressed. Whether it’s nurturing plants excessively, over-apologizing, or avoiding the acceptance of gifts, each habit reflects an unmet childhood need. The good news is that recognizing these patterns is the first step toward healing. By understanding the origins of these behaviors, you can begin to shift your perspective and cultivate healthier emotional habits.

    Healing from childhood emotional neglect requires self-awareness, patience, and intentional growth. Exploring resources like Running on Empty by Jonice Webb or The Emotionally Absent Mother by Jasmin Lee Cori can provide deeper insights into how past neglect shapes adult behavior. More importantly, fostering meaningful connections, practicing self-compassion, and seeking professional support can help you move beyond these subtle yet powerful influences of your past.

    4 – Excessive Online Shopping

    Online shopping provides instant gratification, but for some, it’s more than just a pastime—it’s a coping mechanism. If filling your cart gives you a sense of comfort or control, this behavior may stem from emotional deprivation in childhood. Every new purchase can act as a fleeting substitute for love, offering a temporary dopamine rush that masks underlying emotional emptiness. Dr. April Lane Benson, author of To Buy or Not to Buy: Why We Overshop and How to Stop, explains that compulsive shopping often fills an emotional void, with purchases standing in for the security and validation that were absent during formative years.

    While retail therapy may provide short-term relief, it can also lead to financial stress and clutter, creating a cycle of guilt and dependency. To break free from this pattern, start by identifying the emotional triggers that drive your shopping habits. Are you seeking comfort after a stressful day? Trying to fill loneliness? Shifting your focus toward meaningful experiences—such as connecting with loved ones or engaging in fulfilling hobbies—can reduce the need for material substitutes. Practicing mindful spending and setting financial boundaries can help you redirect emotional energy toward healthier, long-lasting sources of joy.

    5 – Talking to Inanimate Objects

    If you frequently find yourself talking to your stuffed animals, favorite mug, or even your car, it might be more than just a quirky habit. While this behavior can be a form of creative self-expression, it often originates from a deeper need for emotional connection. Childhood emotional neglect can leave individuals yearning for companionship, and in the absence of consistent, nurturing interactions, people may develop alternative ways to express themselves. Talking to inanimate objects provides comfort and predictability—unlike human relationships, objects don’t judge, abandon, or disappoint.

    Though there’s nothing inherently wrong with this habit, it’s essential to ensure it doesn’t replace meaningful social connections. Psychologists suggest that people who engage in extensive one-sided communication with objects might be compensating for a lack of secure attachments. To balance this, consider gradually increasing your social interactions—whether through joining clubs, attending community events, or reconnecting with old friends. As author and therapist Brené Brown puts it, “Connection is why we’re here; it is what gives purpose and meaning to our lives.” Strengthening real-world relationships can fulfill the emotional needs that inanimate objects simply cannot.

    6 – Obsessive List-Making

    If you feel compelled to write lists for everything—tasks, goals, grocery items, future plans—it could be more than just a preference for organization. For individuals who experienced neglect or unpredictability in childhood, lists provide a sense of order and control. When emotional needs were unmet or when life felt chaotic, creating structure through lists became a way to manage anxiety and regain a feeling of stability. Each completed task offers a sense of accomplishment, reinforcing the illusion of control over one’s environment.

    While list-making can be a helpful tool, excessive reliance on it may indicate an underlying fear of uncertainty. If your lists dictate your every move, you might be missing out on spontaneous joys and experiences. Try challenging yourself to let go of rigid planning in small ways—leave a day unstructured, embrace a last-minute invitation, or allow yourself to complete tasks intuitively rather than systematically. Psychologist Susan David, in Emotional Agility, emphasizes the importance of flexibility, stating that “rigidity in emotions or behaviors limits our ability to grow.” Learning to trust yourself without the constant need for lists can open the door to greater emotional resilience and personal freedom.

    Conclusion

    The behaviors we develop as adults often hold clues to our past experiences, particularly those rooted in childhood emotional neglect. Whether it’s excessive online shopping, talking to inanimate objects, or an obsession with making lists, each habit serves as a subconscious attempt to regain control, security, or emotional fulfillment. Recognizing these patterns is not about self-judgment but about self-awareness—understanding the emotional wounds behind these behaviors can help pave the way for healing.

    To truly address the effects of childhood neglect, it’s important to cultivate deeper emotional connections, practice self-compassion, and seek alternative ways to fulfill emotional needs. Books such as Running on Empty by Jonice Webb and Emotional Agility by Susan David provide valuable insights into reshaping these behavioral patterns. By consciously working toward emotional balance, you can move beyond coping mechanisms and create a life built on genuine connection, fulfillment, and self-acceptance.

    7 – Constant Phone Checking

    If you find yourself constantly reaching for your phone, checking notifications, or scrolling mindlessly, it may be more than just a habit—it could be a subconscious way of seeking the validation and connection you lacked in childhood. Every notification, like, or message can serve as a stand-in for the attention and reassurance that were absent during your formative years. Dr. Sherry Turkle, author of Reclaiming Conversation, highlights that “our devices are psychologically powerful because they don’t just change what we do—they change who we are.” For those who experienced emotional neglect, smartphones can become a way to feel seen, even if the connections they provide are superficial.

    While digital communication is an essential part of modern life, excessive phone use can prevent meaningful in-person relationships. Instead of letting your phone dictate your sense of connection, try setting boundaries—schedule phone-free time during meals, social gatherings, or before bed. Engage in activities that encourage presence, such as mindfulness exercises or face-to-face conversations. True connection comes not from a screen but from engaging fully with the world and the people around you. By reducing digital dependency, you can foster deeper and more fulfilling relationships.

    8 – Avoiding Mirrors

    If you actively avoid looking at your reflection, it may indicate deeper issues with self-worth and self-perception. For those who experienced emotional neglect as children, a lack of affirmation and positive reinforcement can lead to discomfort with self-image. Without caregivers who reflected back love and validation, it’s common to develop an unconscious aversion to one’s own presence—both physically and emotionally. Avoiding mirrors can be a way to sidestep self-confrontation, as seeing yourself forces you to acknowledge insecurities you may prefer to ignore.

    Healing from this habit requires a gentle, compassionate approach toward self-acceptance. Start with small steps, such as using daily affirmations while looking into the mirror. Practice self-care routines that nurture not only your physical appearance but also your emotional well-being. Dr. Kristin Neff, a leading expert on self-compassion, emphasizes in Self-Compassion: The Proven Power of Being Kind to Yourself that “our worth is not contingent on external validation but on the ability to treat ourselves with kindness.” Embracing your reflection means embracing the whole of who you are—flaws, strengths, and all. Over time, the mirror can become a place of self-recognition rather than avoidance.

    9 – Over-Organizing Bookshelves

    A meticulously arranged bookshelf may seem like a simple sign of neatness, but for some, it represents an underlying need for control. If your bookshelves must always be perfectly categorized—by genre, color, or author—it might be a way to impose order on an otherwise unpredictable world. Childhood emotional neglect often leaves individuals craving structure; without a stable emotional environment, external organization becomes a way to create a sense of stability. Arranging books just right offers a tangible form of control, something that may have been lacking in early life.

    While organization is a valuable skill, it’s important to balance it with spontaneity and enjoyment. Try breaking free from rigid categorization—perhaps mix up your books, allow space for new discoveries, or even embrace an intentionally imperfect arrangement. Books are meant to be experienced, not just displayed. According to The Life-Changing Magic of Tidying Up by Marie Kondo, organization should bring joy rather than act as a means of control. Instead of seeking perfection, allow your bookshelf—and by extension, your life—to reflect curiosity, growth, and flexibility.

    Conclusion

    The habits we develop often serve as silent echoes of our childhood experiences. Constant phone checking, avoiding mirrors, or obsessively organizing bookshelves may seem like harmless behaviors, but they often point to deeper emotional needs that were overlooked in our formative years. Recognizing these patterns is the first step toward healing, allowing us to move from unconscious coping to conscious self-awareness.

    To break free from these cycles, it’s essential to cultivate a sense of self-worth independent of external validation. Whether it’s reducing reliance on digital interactions, embracing self-acceptance, or allowing for a bit more spontaneity in daily life, small but intentional changes can lead to greater emotional freedom. Books such as Reclaiming Conversation by Sherry Turkle and Self-Compassion by Kristin Neff offer valuable insights into these patterns and how to overcome them. Ultimately, healing from childhood emotional neglect means learning to engage with the world—and ourselves—with confidence, authenticity, and a deep sense of self-love.

    10 – Nighttime Snack Rituals

    If you often find yourself reaching for snacks late at night, even when you’re not physically hungry, this habit may be linked to unmet emotional needs rather than mere cravings. For many, food provides comfort and security—especially in moments of solitude. Childhood emotional neglect can lead to using food as a coping mechanism, filling the void left by a lack of nurturing care. According to psychologist Susan Albers, author of 50 Ways to Soothe Yourself Without Food, emotional eating often arises from the desire to recreate feelings of warmth, safety, or companionship.

    Breaking free from this pattern requires distinguishing between emotional hunger and physical hunger. Instead of automatically reaching for a snack, try engaging in alternative self-soothing activities, such as journaling, meditation, or a relaxing bedtime routine. Developing healthier nighttime habits—like sipping herbal tea, reading a book, or practicing deep breathing—can help address emotional cravings in a more fulfilling way. True nourishment comes not just from food but from cultivating self-care practices that foster emotional well-being.

    11 – Excessive Souvenir Collection

    Do you feel an irresistible urge to buy souvenirs every time you travel, accumulating trinkets that often gather dust? While collecting mementos can be a delightful way to preserve memories, an excessive attachment to souvenirs may signal a deeper emotional need. Childhood emotional neglect often leaves individuals longing for tangible reminders of happiness, security, and connection. By holding onto physical objects, you may be attempting to compensate for past experiences that lacked emotional richness.

    Rather than letting souvenirs serve as substitutes for meaningful emotional experiences, consider focusing on the moments themselves. Reflect on the memories behind each item and ask yourself if the object truly adds value to your life. As Marie Kondo suggests in The Life-Changing Magic of Tidying Up, only keep things that “spark joy” and serve a meaningful purpose. Shifting your perspective from accumulating objects to cherishing experiences can help you build stronger emotional connections and find fulfillment in the present, rather than in material keepsakes.

    12 – Binge-Watching Children’s Shows

    If you find yourself gravitating toward children’s shows long after childhood, it may be more than just nostalgia—it could be a subconscious attempt to reclaim a sense of comfort, innocence, and stability that was missing in your early years. Animated shows offer predictable storylines, warm relationships, and simple resolutions, providing a safe emotional escape from the complexities of adult life. According to psychologist Dr. Jennifer Fayard, nostalgia can be a powerful coping mechanism, helping individuals feel connected to a more secure and joyful version of themselves.

    While there’s nothing wrong with enjoying childhood favorites, it’s important to ensure that this habit doesn’t serve as an emotional retreat from real-life challenges. Try balancing your media consumption with diverse content that encourages personal growth and emotional resilience. Engaging in creative hobbies, social interactions, or even therapy can help address underlying emotional needs while still allowing you to embrace the joy of nostalgia. As Brené Brown states in The Gifts of Imperfection, “We cannot selectively numb emotions; when we numb the painful emotions, we also numb the positive ones.” Finding a balance between comfort and growth can lead to deeper emotional fulfillment.

    Conclusion

    Our habits often serve as windows into our past, revealing hidden emotional wounds that continue to shape our present behaviors. Whether it’s nighttime snacking, excessive souvenir collecting, or binge-watching childhood shows, these actions often stem from a longing for comfort, security, and emotional fulfillment that was absent in childhood. Recognizing these behaviors as coping mechanisms is the first step toward breaking free from their hold.

    Healing from childhood emotional neglect requires conscious effort—finding healthier ways to address emotional needs, building deeper relationships, and embracing personal growth. Books such as 50 Ways to Soothe Yourself Without Food by Susan Albers and The Gifts of Imperfection by Brené Brown offer valuable insights into self-compassion and emotional healing. By understanding the deeper motivations behind these subtle habits, you can begin to replace temporary comforts with lasting emotional well-being, creating a life that is not just about coping but about thriving.

    Bibliography

    1. Albers, Susan. 50 Ways to Soothe Yourself Without Food: Mindful Practices to Overcome Overeating. New Harbinger Publications, 2009.
    2. Brown, Brené. The Gifts of Imperfection: Let Go of Who You Think You’re Supposed to Be and Embrace Who You Are. Hazelden Publishing, 2010.
    3. Kondo, Marie. The Life-Changing Magic of Tidying Up: The Japanese Art of Decluttering and Organizing. Ten Speed Press, 2014.
    4. Neff, Kristin. Self-Compassion: The Proven Power of Being Kind to Yourself. HarperCollins, 2011.
    5. Turkle, Sherry. Reclaiming Conversation: The Power of Talk in a Digital Age. Penguin Books, 2015.
    6. Van der Kolk, Bessel. The Body Keeps the Score: Brain, Mind, and Body in the Healing of Trauma. Viking, 2014.
    7. Walker, Pete. Complex PTSD: From Surviving to Thriving: A Guide and Map for Recovering from Childhood Trauma. Azure Coyote Press, 2013.
    8. Whitfield, Charles L. Healing the Child Within: Discovery and Recovery for Adult Children of Dysfunctional Families. Health Communications, 1987.
    9. Winnicott, Donald W. The Maturational Processes and the Facilitating Environment: Studies in the Theory of Emotional Development. Karnac Books, 1965.
    10. Yehuda, Rachel. Understanding Trauma: Integrating Biological, Clinical, and Cultural Perspectives. Cambridge University Press, 2002.

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog

  • Photoshop Beginners Training: Selection and Photo Editing Fundamentals by GFXMentor

    Photoshop Beginners Training: Selection and Photo Editing Fundamentals by GFXMentor

    The source is a transcript from a GFXMentor Photoshop tutorial aimed at beginners. Instructor Imran introduces the course by emphasizing that while it’s for novices, even experienced users might learn something new. He stresses that Photoshop, as a raster-based software, differs significantly from Illustrator, a vector-based program, and shouldn’t be directly compared. The tutorial covers the interface, basic tools like the Move and Marquee tools, selections, layers, foreground and background colors, and essential shortcuts. Imran underscores the importance of understanding resolution and working non-destructively with layers, advising students to take their time and focus on quality over speed.

    GFXMentor’s Photoshop for Beginners: A Study Guide

    Quiz

    Answer the following questions in 2-3 sentences each.

    1. According to Imran, what is the primary difference between Photoshop and Illustrator?
    2. What does it mean for Photoshop to be a “Raster-based” software?
    3. What resolution (pixels per inch) should you typically use when designing for screens in Photoshop, and why?
    4. How do Foreground and Background colors work in Photoshop, and what keyboard shortcuts are used to fill a selection with each?
    5. Explain what the Marquee tool does and how selections are used in Photoshop.
    6. Why is working with layers crucial in Photoshop?
    7. What is the purpose of “Feathering” a selection in Photoshop?
    8. What is the difference between using the Feather option in the Property bar versus right-clicking on the image with the selection tool?
    9. Describe the function of “Select Inverse” and how it is used.
    10. What is the keyboard shortcut to Deselect an active area?

    Quiz Answer Key

    1. Photoshop is a raster-based software that relies on pixels and is primarily used for photo editing, while Illustrator is a vector-based software with different functions that should not be directly compared.
    2. Being “Raster-based” means Photoshop relies on pixels to create images. The image quality is dependent on the number of pixels, and enlarging the image can lead to pixelation.
    3. You should use 72 pixels per inch when designing for screens because most browsers and mobile apps display images in this resolution.
    4. Foreground and Background colors are like having two color pencils that you can easily switch between; Alt+Backspace fills with the Foreground color, while Ctrl+Backspace fills with the Background color.
    5. The Marquee tool is used to create selections, which define the active area of the canvas. Any edits or effects applied will only affect the selected area.
    6. Working with layers in Photoshop allows you to move, transform, and edit elements independently without affecting other parts of the image. This provides flexibility and non-destructive editing.
    7. “Feathering” softens the edges of a selection, creating a blurred or faded effect. It is commonly used to blend selections with their surroundings for a more natural look.
    8. Feather in the Property Bar is persistent for future selections until you change it. Feather applied by right-clicking is only applied to that specific selection.
    9. “Select Inverse” reverses the selection, activating everything outside the current selection and deactivating the area inside; you can fill the now selected area with a color or effect.
    10. The keyboard shortcut to deselect an active area is Ctrl+D.

    Essay Questions

    1. Discuss the importance of understanding Raster-based images in Photoshop. How do you avoid problems of poor design and what are best practices to avoid the pitfalls of pixelated images?
    2. Explain the concept of non-destructive editing in Photoshop and how the use of layers contributes to this workflow. Provide specific examples.
    3. Compare and contrast using the selection tools in Photoshop with the selection methods used in Adobe Illustrator, and how the basic principles can be used to enhance your workflow.
    4. Describe a scenario where you might use “Select Inverse” in a photo editing project. Explain the steps you would take and the desired outcome.
    5. How do the shortcuts discussed in the source material enhance the speed and quality of Photoshop projects?

    Glossary of Key Terms

    • Raster-based: An image composed of pixels, where image quality depends on the number of pixels; enlarging a raster image can cause pixelation.
    • Pixel: The smallest unit of an image on a screen, a tiny square of color.
    • Resolution: The number of pixels per inch (PPI) in an image; higher resolution means more detail.
    • Canvas: The work area in Photoshop where you create and edit images.
    • Artboard: A feature that creates multiple canvases in the same Photoshop document.
    • Layer: A transparent sheet on which you can place elements of your design, allowing for independent editing.
    • Foreground Color: The primary color used for painting, filling, and stroking.
    • Background Color: The secondary color that can be used for various purposes, like filling a background.
    • Selection: An active area of the canvas defined by a selection tool, limiting edits to that specific area.
    • Marquee Tool: A selection tool used to create rectangular or elliptical selections.
    • Feather: A setting that softens the edges of a selection, creating a blurred or faded effect.
    • Select Inverse: A command that reverses the selection, selecting everything outside the current selection.
    • Deselect: A command that removes any active selection on the canvas.
    • Workspace: The arrangement of panels, toolbars, and windows in the Photoshop interface.
    • Zoom Level: The magnification level at which you are viewing an image, expressed as a percentage.
    • Shortcuts: Keyboard combinations that provide quick access to commands and tools.
    • RGB Color Mode: A color model that uses red, green, and blue to create colors; commonly used for screen display.
    • CMYK Color Mode: A color model that uses cyan, magenta, yellow, and black to create colors; commonly used for printing.

    GFXMentor: Photoshop for Beginners – Lesson 1 Summary

    Okay, here’s a briefing document summarizing the main themes and important ideas from the provided source “01.pdf,” which appears to be a transcript of a beginner’s Photoshop tutorial by “GFXMentor” Imran:

    Briefing Document: GFXMentor Photoshop Beginners Training – Lesson 1

    Source: Transcript “01.pdf”

    Main Themes:

    • Introduction to Photoshop for Beginners: The tutorial aims to provide a foundational understanding of Photoshop for individuals with little to no prior experience. Imran emphasizes that advanced topics will be covered later.
    • Photoshop vs. Illustrator: A recurring theme is the comparison between Photoshop and Illustrator, both Adobe products. Imran stresses that they are distinct tools with different functions and should not be directly compared.
    • Raster-Based Nature of Photoshop: A core concept is that Photoshop is a raster-based software dependent on pixels. This contrasts with Illustrator’s vector-based nature. The implications of this (especially regarding image size and resolution) are repeatedly emphasized.
    • Importance of Layers: Layers are presented as a crucial element for non-destructive editing and manipulating individual elements within an image. Imran strongly advises using new layers for every new element to maintain flexibility.
    • Selection Tools and Techniques: The tutorial focuses on the Marquee tools (Rectangular and Elliptical) for making selections. It covers various selection techniques like adding, subtracting, intersecting, and feathering selections.
    • Shortcuts vs. Quality: While shortcuts are useful for speeding up workflow, Imran emphasizes that quality of work is more important than speed. He encourages beginners not to be overwhelmed by shortcuts and to focus on understanding the fundamental concepts.

    Key Ideas and Facts:

    • Raster vs. Vector: Photoshop is a raster-based software, meaning it relies on pixels. “Photoshop is actually a Raster-based software. What’s Raster? It is basically dependent on pixels.” This means image quality can degrade if an image is enlarged without proper initial sizing.
    • Photo Editing Focus: Initially, Photoshop was primarily designed for photo editing. “At the start Photoshop was created solely to edit photos here.”
    • Interface Similarities & Differences: While the interface may resemble Illustrator due to both being Adobe products, their functions are different. It covers customizing the workspace and resetting it if needed (Window>>Workspace).
    • Version: The tutorial uses Adobe Photoshop CC 2018.
    • Image Size and Resolution: Unlike Illustrator, setting the correct image size in Photoshop is crucial from the beginning because of its raster nature. “Now, you have to keep in mind that it’s Raster-based software, meaning if we don’t take the right size and later we enlarge it, your artwork will go bad!” For screen design, a resolution of 72 pixels per inch is recommended.
    • Color Mode: RGB color mode is the starting point.
    • Canvas vs. Artboard: The work area in Photoshop is traditionally called a “canvas,” but the “Artboard” option is now available.
    • Zoom Level and 100% View: It’s crucial to check artwork at 100% zoom level to accurately assess sharpness and pixelation. “Whenever you build something you have to check it at 100% then you’ll be aware whether it’s correct, like the edges are present, pixelating or not.”
    • Layers are Essential: Working with layers is highly recommended for flexibility and non-destructive editing. “Just like in Illustrator I never restrict on taking new layers every time, now I’ll do because as long as you don’t work on different layers you can’t move or transform them separately.” Layers are compared to transparent glass sheets.
    • Foreground and Background Colors: Photoshop uses foreground and background colors instead of Fill and Stroke in Illustrator.
    • Selection Tools:The Marquee tool selects an active area of pixels. “Now, whatever we’ll work, it’ll remain in this selection only.”
    • Selection options include New Selection, Add to Selection (Shift), Subtract from Selection (Alt), and Intersect (Alt+Shift).
    • Feathering softens the edges of a selection. It can be set in the Property bar or via right-click -> Feather.
    • Select Inverse inverts the selection.
    • Deselect (Ctrl+D) removes the selection.
    • Filling Selections: Alt+Backspace fills with the foreground color, and Ctrl+Backspace fills with the background color.
    • Undo and History: Ctrl+Z undoes the last action, while Ctrl+Alt+Z steps back through the history.
    • Image Source: Unsplash (unsplash.com) is recommended for free stock images.
    • Importing Images: Dragging an image into an existing Photoshop file adds it to that file. Dragging it onto the Menu bar opens it in a new file.

    Quotes:

    • “Please don’t compare them, I’ve told the same back when I started Illustrator training. Even today I repeat, you really can’t compare them. Because both have different functions for different works.” (Regarding Photoshop and Illustrator)
    • “So layers are a great ‘friend’, please form a good ‘friendship’ with them, just keep in mind that whenever you build new things you’re taking a new layer too, it’s beneficial for you solely.” (Emphasis on Layers)
    • “Bro don’t do that! Observe at 100% because wherever used, it’d remain at that size level. PNG and JPEG- these are Raster images, their sole purpose is to be seen at 100% size level.” (Checking Image Quality)

    Overall Impression:

    The tutorial provides a clear and accessible introduction to Photoshop for absolute beginners. The instructor uses relatable analogies and emphasizes practical tips, but it may get long due to the depth of explanation for each element and tool. The contrast between Photoshop and Illustrator and the importance of understanding raster-based images are key takeaways.

    Frequently Asked Questions About Getting Started with Photoshop (Based on GFXMentor’s Beginner Training)

    Question 1: What is Photoshop, and what is it primarily used for?

    Photoshop is a raster-based software program primarily used for photo editing. Raster-based means it works with images made up of pixels. While its initial focus was on photo editing (like removing blemishes or altering appearances), it has expanded to handle various design tasks.

    Question 2: How is Photoshop different from Illustrator, and why shouldn’t I compare them directly?

    Photoshop and Illustrator, while both from Adobe, serve different purposes. Photoshop is a raster-based program that manipulates pixels within an image. Illustrator is a vector-based program that creates scalable graphics using mathematical equations. You shouldn’t compare them directly because they are designed for distinct types of work, and comparing them is like comparing apples to oranges.

    Question 3: Why is it important to consider the size of the file when starting a new project in Photoshop?

    Because Photoshop is raster-based, image quality is dependent on resolution. Unlike vector graphics, raster images don’t scale up well. If you start with an incorrect or too small of size and then enlarge it later, the artwork can become pixelated and lose quality. Therefore, it’s important to start with the correct dimensions for your intended use (print, web, etc.). When simply editing a photo, size isn’t an issue.

    Question 4: What resolution should I use when creating images for screens (websites, mobile apps, etc.)?

    When designing for screens (computer monitors, websites, mobile apps, TVs), a resolution of 72 pixels per inch (PPI) is generally recommended. This resolution is suitable for digital displays and helps optimize file size for online use.

    Question 5: What are layers, and why are they crucial when working in Photoshop?

    Layers are like transparent sheets stacked on top of each other. Each layer can contain different elements of your design. They are crucial because they allow you to work on individual elements separately without affecting the rest of the image. This makes it easy to move, edit, and delete elements independently. Working without layers can lead to difficulty in making changes later on.

    Question 6: What is the “Selection” tool used for, and how does it affect the work I do in Photoshop?

    The Selection tool (like the Marquee tool) defines an active area on your canvas. Any actions you take, such as painting or filling with color, will only affect the selected area. Think of it as isolating a specific portion of your image to work on, leaving the rest untouched.

    Question 7: What is “Feathering,” and how can I use it with selections?

    Feathering softens the edges of a selection, creating a gradual transition between the selected area and the surrounding pixels. You can apply feathering using the “Feather” option in the Properties bar (for permanent change) or by right-clicking inside the selection and choosing “Feather” (for a one-time effect). It’s useful for creating soft-edged shapes or blending elements together seamlessly. Remember to adjust the pixel amount depending on the size of your image.

    Question 8: What are some useful keyboard shortcuts for beginners in Photoshop?

    Some helpful shortcuts mentioned are:

    • Zoom In: Ctrl + (plus) or Alt + Scroll Up
    • Zoom Out: Ctrl – (minus) or Alt + Scroll Down
    • Fill with Foreground Color: Alt + Backspace
    • Fill with Background Color: Ctrl + Backspace
    • Deselect: Ctrl + D
    • Undo: Ctrl + Z
    • Multiple Undos (History): Ctrl + Alt + Z

    Photoshop Basics: Interface, Tools, Layers, and Selections

    Here’s an overview of Photoshop basics, according to the provided source:

    • Photoshop is a raster-based software dependent on pixels.
    • Initially, Photoshop was mainly used for photo editing.
    • The version of Photoshop used in the source is Adobe Photoshop CC 2018.
    • Similarities exist between Photoshop and Illustrator because both are made by Adobe, but their functions differ.

    Key Interface Elements and Tools:

    • The toolbar is on the left side, and panels are on the right.
    • The interface can be customized by pulling out panels and arranging them as desired.
    • If the interface is altered, it can be reset to its previous state by going to Window>>Workspace and doing Reset.
    • The Move tool and Marquee tool are fundamental.

    Creating a New File:

    • When creating a new file, it is important to know the correct size to avoid artwork degradation upon enlargement.
    • Presets are available for Photos, Print, Art & Illustrations, Web, and Mobile.
    • It is advisable to name files properly for easy searching.
    • You can adjust Width, Height, Resolution, Color Mode, and Background Content.
    • Resolution for screen design should be 72 pixels per inch.
    • It is recommended to keep the color mode on RGB and the bit depth at 8 bits for web and mobile applications.
    • “Canvas” is the term used for the work area in Photoshop.
    • Using Ctrl+ (plus) and Ctrl- (minus) or Alt and scrolling can zoom in and out.

    Working with Layers:

    • Layers are a crucial aspect. Working on different layers allows you to move or transform elements separately.
    • Taking a new layer can be done by clicking the new layer button.
    • Layers can be imagined as transparent glass sheets stacked on top of each other, where each object stays detached, and can be moved or transformed easily.

    Selections:

    • Selections define the active area of the canvas.
    • The Marquee tool is used for making selections.
    • The “New Selection” option makes each new selection replace the previous one.
    • To add to a selection, press Shift while making the selection.
    • To subtract from a selection, press Alt.
    • To intersect selections, press Alt+Shift.
    • To fill a selection with the foreground color, use Alt+Backspace. To fill with the background color, use Ctrl+Backspace.

    Feather Option:

    • The Feather option softens the edges of a selection.
    • To apply Feather temporarily, right-click with the Selection tool and choose Feather.

    Other Selection Options:

    • Normal mode allows selections of any size.
    • Fixed Ratio mode creates selections with a fixed width-to-height ratio.
    • Fixed Size mode creates selections of a fixed pixel size.
    • Elliptical Marquee tool is used to make round selections. Press Shift to make a perfect circle.
    • Select Inverse inverts the selection, activating the outer part of the canvas instead of the inner part.
    • Deselect removes the selection. The shortcut is Ctrl+D.

    Image Usage:

    • It is important to work on layers to preserve original images and retain the ability to make changes.
    • Stock images can be downloaded from websites like unsplash.com for practice.

    Raster Image Characteristics in Photoshop

    Here’s a discussion of raster images, based on the source:

    • Photoshop is a raster-based software that relies on pixels.
    • With raster images, it’s important to consider image size when creating a new file in Photoshop. If the image size isn’t right and it’s enlarged later, the artwork quality will decrease.
    • When working with raster images, it is important to observe the image at 100% zoom to check its sharpness and avoid being concerned about pixelation when zoomed in excessively. PNG and JPEG are raster image formats designed to be viewed at a 100% size level.
    • In raster images, you don’t create things individually; instead, you work with an area of pixels.

    The source also mentions that a video will be made to properly explain the differences between raster and vector images.

    Photoshop Selection Tool: A Comprehensive Guide

    Here’s a discussion of the Selection tool in Photoshop, according to the provided source and our conversation history:

    • The Selection tool is used to define the active area of the canvas. When a selection is active, any work done will only affect that selected area.
    • The Marquee tool is a tool for making selections.
    • When using the Selection tool, a property bar appears with various options. These options include:
    • New Selection: Each new selection replaces the previous one.
    • Add to Selection: Holding Shift while selecting adds to the existing selection.
    • Subtract from Selection: Holding Alt subtracts from the existing selection.
    • Intersect: Holding Alt+Shift will select the intersecting area.
    • Feather softens the edges of a selection. To apply Feather temporarily, right-click with the Selection tool and choose Feather.
    • Different modes for the Selection tool:
    • Normal: Allows selections of any size.
    • Fixed Ratio: Creates selections with a fixed width-to-height ratio.
    • Fixed Size: Creates selections of a fixed pixel size.
    • The Elliptical Marquee tool is used to make round selections. Press Shift to make a perfect circle.
    • Select Inverse inverts the selection, activating the outer part of the canvas instead of the inner part.
    • Deselect removes the selection. The shortcut is Ctrl+D.
    • To fill a selection with the foreground color, use Alt+Backspace. To fill with the background color, use Ctrl+Backspace.
    • As Photoshop is a raster-based software that relies on pixels, selections involve working with areas of pixels rather than individual objects.

    Photoshop Layers: A Comprehensive Guide

    Here’s a discussion of Layers in Photoshop, according to the provided source:

    • Layers are a crucial aspect of working in Photoshop. Working on different layers allows you to move or transform elements separately.
    • Taking a new layer can be done by clicking the new layer button.
    • Layers can be imagined as transparent glass sheets stacked on top of each other, where each object stays detached, and can be moved or transformed easily.
    • It is beneficial to take a new layer whenever new things are built. If you don’t work on different layers you can’t move or transform them separately.
    • If all work is done on a single layer, separating elements later becomes impossible.
    • When an element is painted directly onto the Background layer (without creating a new layer), it becomes part of that layer and cannot be moved independently.
    • If you fill an image without taking a new layer, it becomes a permanent change.
    • Working on layers helps preserve original images and retain the ability to make changes.
    • To delete a layer, select the layer and drag it to the delete icon or press Backspace (unless a selection is active, in which case only the selected area will be deleted).

    Photoshop Image Editing Guide

    Here’s a discussion of image editing in Photoshop, according to the provided source and our conversation history:

    • Photoshop was initially created solely to edit photos.
    • Image editing often involves tasks like removing blemishes.
    • When editing images in Photoshop, it’s important to work with layers to preserve the original image and allow for flexible modifications.
    • You can download stock images from sites like unsplash.com for practice. These images are free and can be used for commercial projects.
    • When incorporating an image into Photoshop, you can either add it to an existing file or open it as a separate file by dragging and dropping it onto the menu bar.
    • It’s important to observe the image at 100% zoom to check its actual quality.
    • Selections can be used to isolate specific areas of an image for editing. The Feather option can create soft edges. You can also invert a selection so that you are editing everything outside the selection.
    • To fill a selection with color, use Alt+Backspace to fill with the foreground color or Ctrl+Backspace to fill with the background color.
    • Remember that Photoshop is a raster-based software, and enlarging images excessively can lead to pixelation.
    • Always save a backup copy of your original images.
    Basic Selections – Adobe Photoshop for Beginners – Class 1
    More Selections – Adobe Photoshop for Beginners – Class 2

    Aasalamu Alaikum, welcome to GFXMentor, I’m your teacher Imran. And from today we’re starting Photoshop beginner’s training. And yes many people are wondering, “Hey, will Sir only teach Beginners, not Advanced?” Of course I will, everything I’ll teach. But at the start, all the students and well-wishers of mine, if they don’t know anything about Photoshop, then it’ll be very helpful for them. But as it’s a beginners training, doesn’t mean those who know already won’t watch at all, of course watch it, because maybe you can learn more new things! Now first of all, before I start let me tell you some things, if you’ve already seen my Illustrator training and know about it, then, at first keep in mind, don’t try to find Illustrator in this software! You’ll become confused. Right? No. 2, some elements might be similar to Illustrator, just because these are made by the same company- Adobe. So the interfaces should be looking similar. Ahh… Some elements that are commonly used, definitely as we progress I’ll tell you gradually. But but but! Please don’t say Illustrator was good, Photoshop isn’t; or Photoshop was good, Illustrator isn’t. Please don’t compare them, I’ve told the same back when I started Illustrator training. Even today I repeat, you really can’t compare them. Because both have different functions for different works. Now what’s Photoshop for, that’s the important point. Photoshop is actually a Raster-based software. What’s Raster? It is basically dependent on pixels. Inshallah I’ll make a short video, explaining the differences properly, about the differences between Raster and Vector, you’ll understand them well. Now, “Photoshop”- from the name itself it seems to be related to photos, so yes! At the start Photoshop was created solely to edit photos here. Now what’s editing? For example we take a picture and it has problems like my face has lots of marks and blemishes, I often use Photoshop to remove them, many people do so. Ahh… When did I start using Photoshop? Well, as everyone knows I have around 17-18 years of experience, but I started Photoshop literally older than that period; I couldn’t do well that much. Yes one hobby I had, like everyone even when I was small, I used to paste my face on Salman Khan’s body, although I’m not a bodybuilder! () But, ahh… These hobbies I had, then I used to think “Yes I know Photoshop well! Fabulous things here, it’s so easy!” But when I understood, I realised that the front-end of Photoshop is nothing, lots of things are hidden in the backend! So definitely, when progressing to the Advanced techniques, we shall see that. Right? So, umm… C’mon let’s start! Okay so first of all, an interface you’re seeing here, must be too familiar, just like in Illustrator. But yes, as I said it’s made by Adobe too so you’ll see the similarities in their interfaces but the works are different. The version I’m using is Adobe Photoshop CC 2018. And… Yes let me share some things, usually when you install newly a welcome screen is shown, my one seems vanished, ran away, angry at me maybe, I dunno where did it go! () But that’s okay no problem, I didn’t need that much anyway, it’d kinda irritate me, my Photoshop would get a bit slow as it’d come at start, then we could proceed. But yes, anyways. This is your Photoshop, okay? In Illustrator you had the toolbars on the left side, similarly it’s here too. On the right side if you notice, some panels are given, time to time you’ll get different panels. Ahh, just in case let me tell you, if anythings vanishes from the interface, or if you make any such changes, remember anytime you can design the interface as you wish. You can pull out any panel and stick with each other. And whatever convenient you feel, you can keep on the front, things you don’t need, you just remove them. No problem. When you’re done setting up your interface, you’ll go to Window>>Workspace and from here you can save new workspace. I won’t be doing it now. However if everything vanishes away, understand? And you be like, “Sir our tools ran away and we did like removing this Property panel or whatever…” if disappears… totally fine! No problem at all, simply go to Window>>Workspace, and do Reset. If I use Essentials; I usually utilize it initially, this is a good starting point; and if you click Reset then all your elements will return back to their previous places. Right? Okay [clearing throat] I usually… okay if you see the toolbar, here two tiny arrows are given, if you click it it’ll show into double columns. If you wish you can keep it in a single column or double. My habit is to keep it in double column usually. Because from the very beginning it’d be double-columned in Photoshop so I’ve become habituated to it, but then it’s okay, you can change it as you wish. CC 2018 has a great addition I noticed, that is previously if we kept the mouse on a tool and wait awhile, a small tool tip would appear, now a small learning point appears instead, it gives you insight on how a tool will work. Ahh so… That’s new for me, this is good, it’s great indeed. And… Yes it’s upto you guys, on how you perceive it. If you want the 2018 version, then please visit Adobe’s site, from there at least try the trial version with your Creative Cloud ID. Okay? Alright [clearing throat], so uhh… What things you need to be careful of? Firstly, in Photoshop, like… okay let me explain first, in Illustrator whenever we’ve taken a new file, I never restricted you on what size to take, never! Now, you have to keep in mind that it’s Raster-based software, meaning if we don’t take the right size and later we enlarge it, your artwork will go bad! So make sure that whatever you create, you should know the size. For example, if you’re making a pamphlet, brochure or website, or even mobile app whatever it is, right? You must know it’s correct size first. And then you gotta take a new file based on that size, only if you design. But if you’re just editing a photo, that’s not an issue, at all. You simply open the photo and work, okay? Yes, if you’re printing something or designing any screen, whichever it is, then you have to know its size correctly. So let’s start, I’m creating a new file here. And… These are some recent sizes that I used previously. It’s coming here, okay? And, if you notice up here, you can save it too, meaning if you use any size repeatedly then better you save it. How to do it, we shall see. Some presets of Photos are given- Print, Art & Illustrations, Web, Mobile; if you come to Mobile, presets of various devices are already provided. Alright? Then, I hope you won’t be having problems over here, but still, if you’re using older versions the presets are given there too, though the interface might look different, but that’s okay, no issues at all. So let’s see what’s given here- first of all the file name is shown, better give names, don’t save it “Untitled”! And… If you don’t name at the start, do it while saving okay? I always try to give names properly so that if I have to search later, with the search function on the harddrive I can find out my files. Right? Next it asks- that is Width, and the Height here. Here the units are given, and you can set the measurements you want to use. So let’s keep it in Pixels, here’s a 1000×1000 ratio is already set. Okay here’s the orientations, what’s that? See from here you won’t understand as the width and height are same, let’s say if I set the height at 500, like this, and currently I’m getting the Landscape option, right? And if I click here, notice the width and height gets swapped. Alright? Coming below, here the Resolution is given. Now what’s this? How many pixels are present in one inch. Now see, usually when we design for screens, a fixed thing to keep in mind that you need to go for 72 pixels per inch. And, here pixels-per-centimetre are also specified, though we don’t use it at all. Ahh… Just keep in mind that, if you design for screen- which screen? Anything! Be it computer screen, for website or mobile app, maybe for TV, always go for 72 resolution, right? If you come below, there’s RGB colour mode, and more different colour modes stated. Yes, in Illustrator only RGB and CMYK was present, but here lots of options are available. No tension! We’ll see all these later. For now just keep it on RGB, okay? After that there’s the Bits, showing how much bits your document should be made so no tension here too, just keep it on 8 bits. And… Why 8 bits? Because, the browsers or mobile apps we have, the images showed there be it PNG, JPEG or whatever- those are mostly displayed in 8 bits. So don’t worry. What’s the job of 16 bits, we’ll see later in a more advanced level. Right? So next, here comes Background Condense. Now if you click here, you see the options “White”, “Black”, “Background Color” but no tension if you see only three, you’ll see more options if you scroll down, there’s “Transparent”, even “Custom”; Remember that in older versions of Photoshop you’d get only “White”, “Background Color” and “Transparent”. Okay? So no need to tense, these aren’t that much important, I usually take “White”, if choose “Transparent” we can do it later, nothing problematic. Alright? Some advanced options are here, which of course, is “advance”. I’m not teaching them now, will see later. And let’s simply click this button, create it. Alright one more thing, I’m keeping it in this orientation- 1000×500 pixels, and as I said, you can save presets here; if I want to save, Oops I changed this! Okay… () I again enter 500. And let’s save this. As I save, and… giving it any name- “Imran”, click Save. Now in the Saved option it (the preset) appears. Whenever I want to take this size, I don’t need to be tensed about it, simply I’ll click here and create. Okay dear? So here comes a 1000×500 pixels canvas. Okay, one word I used- “canvas”; in Illustrator we called this work area “Artboard”, now in here we call it as “canvas”. But interesting thing is, recently even in Photoshop the Artboard option has arrived. So if I go to New file, taking the saved preset, see this, if I click on the “Artboard” check, This will turn into an artboard, okay? And, how to make new artboards, how much in total- all will be found inside the created file. See this, as I click here “Artboard 1” appears, written here, but if I got to the previous file, it’s not written there. That means, there the classic Photoshop type is appearing. If you notice, here comes a Background layer, while on the artboard one it shows nothing but “Artboard 1”, and “Layer 1” is written here. Correct? So what’s the difference between these two? We’ll see in a moment, but for now, just keep in mind that we won’t be taking any artboard in new files. So uhh… Now notice an important issue. Some elements you’ve already seen in Illustrator like Zoom in or out, we usually press Ctrl+ (plus) and Ctrl- (minus), like Ctrl- for Zoom out and Ctrl+ for Zoom in. And… Yes, along with that if you press Alt and scroll up, you can Zoom in, if scroll down then Zoom out, right? Bottom here you can observe the keys I press. It’ll be helpful for you. Right? Alright [clearing throat] Now, in Photoshop I created a new file, what to do with it? Now the most important thing let me share, many times my students ask me, “Sir whatever we make, it gets pixelated if we zoom in and see!” Yes of course it’ll happen! Notice above here, presently the file name is titled “Untitled-1 @77.9% RGB 8 bit”. This 77.9% is your zoom level. Whenever you build something you have to check it at 100% then you’ll be aware whether it’s correct, like the edges are present, pixelating or not. But if you zoom in too much then yes, you’ll see pixelations. So yes remember that always check your Raster image artworks at 100% level, so that whether it’s correctly sharpened or not. If blurry or pixelated at 100% then it’s bad, but otherwise no issues, no tension. If you zoom in and check, it’ll surely look bad because it’s Raster. Just like if I check my face’s skin under the microscope, it’ll look like a horrible mountain to me! Right? Exactly, nobody zooms in too much to have a glance! So, many students get too much anxious that “Sir whatever we make, be it JPEG, PNG- it’s getting too pixelated!” When asking when it happens, they reply “We zoomed in and saw it pixelated.” Bro don’t do that! Observe at 100% because wherever used, it’d remain at that size level. PNG and JPEG- these are Raster images, their sole purpose is to be seen at 100% size level. Right? Alright. So now what’ll we see in Photoshop today? First thing, Some tools I’d like to show, number 1 is this Move tool, second is Marquee tool here. Now what’s this Marquee tool? And Move tool? Ahh… See, to make you understand I’ll give some comparisons with Illustrator, like, comparison not in the context of good or bad, rather what things we’ve seen in there and what’s related to here. Right? So first of all, whatever we used to build in Illustrator we would simply select that by clicking, because each object had a separate path there. In here, you don’t have any vector but only Raster, which means we have an area of pixels here, and here we don’t make things individually, for example if you have a photo, nothing is separated there, it’s a complete painted grid of pixels. Right? Now just like that, notice the Selection tool here, we do it like that, means we haven’t selected one object only but just some pixels, or say, in our whole canvas, this part is currently the active area. Now, whatever we’ll work, it’ll remain in this selection only. Okay dear? Apart from Selection, Move tool is used for moving things, But! Just as I said that in Illustrator I never restricted for which size you should take, now you have to be careful about what size to take particularly. Just like in Illustrator I never restrict on taking new layers every time, now I’ll do because as long as you don’t work on different layers you can’t move or transform them separately. Right? So first of all, keep in mind the very first important matter, that is Layer. Let me share a small thing immediately- as a Brush tool is given here, and if I pick any colour from here, and make this line with the tool. Now remember, this line I painted just above the Background layer. Now if I try to move it with Move tool, it’ll show some errors. Just forget it, not needed now; Just keep in mind that it’s not moving because it’s not a separate object, I just painted the pixels of this Background layer! It’s like I spray-paint the wall behind me, okay? And if I later want to move it elsewhere, won’t be possible just because I permanently painted it! Similarly moving this won’t be possible at all. Second thing, if you really want to move, what’ll you do? We’ll take a new layer from here; here’s the button for it; and now if I paint here, then yes it can be moved with Move tool! Why?! Because it’s a separate thing now! Same as if I mounted a glass on the wall and paint on it, now I can easily move that glass, right?! Glass, similarly imagine the layer as transparent glass, and… we make separate things on top of each. Every object stays detached from each other, so we can move or transform them easily, and if not wanted, easily can delete it. Right? So layers are a great “friend”, please form a good “friendship” with them, just keep in mind that whenever you build new things you’re taking a new layer too, it’s beneficial for you solely; If you don’t want, don’t take, no issues. The problems will happen solely to you too, that “Oh man, I made all in a single layer, now how to separate them?!” It won’t happen then! Please, don’t ask me such weird questions that “Sir I made everything in single layer”… Suffer, regret, tolerate it! Or just rebuild it again! () So if you wanna escape from such toiling, please take a new layer whenever you create. Right? I’m turning my workspace back to Normal. Okay, not necessary you need to go here for workspace, here’s a small icon given, if clicked here shows “Reset Essentials”, you can do it from here too. If you wish, reset it from there too. So that’s not an issue. Okay. Now if I delete this layer, and let’s see what we gotta learn today. Selection and Move tool. And alongside, here’s this thing. [clearing throat] You’ve seen in Illustrator, one was Fill and one was Stroke. In here it’s a bit different, both are colours- one is Foreground and other’s Background. Now, how do we suppose to understand? Ahh… In plain words, at a time you’re like grabbing two colour pencils in both hands! Whenever you wish you can change the colours, for example simply… Oh you must click single time only, yes in Illustrator it was double, here we click only once; just select any colour, from here I take blue and take red for the background. Now you have two colours, and you can swap it. If you want default, what’ll happen? That… the foreground will be black and the background will be white. Right? So whenever you want you can change the colours from here. What’s their purpose? Wait just a while, I’m gonna explain soon. Okay? The first tool I wanna explain is Selection. Okay what is it? As I said, it’s nothing but the active area of your canvas. So just a while ago as you’ve seen, I painted something with the Brush tool. Like this, I make a line here. And I can paint all over the canvas, wherever I want. Right? But! If I select and delete for now, and… let’s say I make this selection, and now I’m gonna paint with the Brush, it won’t be painting outside, because that’s not the active area. As I said before, Selection is the active area of the canvas. So yes, you can paint it whenever you want, and see it’s being painted in this much area only. So Selection, just remember that you’ve activated some part of the canvas. Right? And whatever you work on, it’ll happen in this area. Understand? That’s what Selection is! Okay, let me share some points related to Selection, just as in Illustrator there was a Property bar above it, it’s present here too. Whatever tools you take, the properties will be shown here. So if we look on Selection, notice there’s a default button pressed here and it’s called “New Selection”. Now what’s the purpose of it? Whenever I make a selection and do another, the previous one will vanish. Everytime I click a new selection will be made, right? If you see the bigger one… Okay these buttons must be very familiar to you, you’ve seen in the Pathfinder class too, it’s the same as it. As the Unite button was present, here’s the “Add to Selection”. That means if I create selection now and do another, both will remain, two or three- as I create selections it’ll add with the previous ones. And in fact if I overlap like this, all the selections will be added together, right?! Just like that, if you come across here and here’s given “Subtract from Selection” It means from the selections some areas will be subtracted. Correct dear? And finally here comes “Intersect”. Now what’ll it do is, the selection you already made and the one you’re making now, the common area between them will be remaining, the rest will vanish. So for example, if you see this selection, I select this area, then only this part of the old selection will stay, the one already made I mean. But you know what? These buttons irritate me too much. Why it’s so problematic? Because, I usually forgot that I kept “Add to Selection” pressed on and when I’m progressing on my workflow speedily, suddenly the selection doesn’t building correctly, if I make another then look it’s getting added with the previous ones. And that’s quite irritating! I feel it too bad, I dunno, maybe you’ll feel the same when you’ll work speedily. So I’ll suggest, don’t use them at all!!! Then what to do else? You simply use shortcuts! What are those? For example, if you made a selection and want to add another, press Shift, and make selections. Interestingly, when I press Shift, the button (Add to Selection) automatically gets pressed. Okay? So yes, now whenever you need to add, just press Shift. And it’ll be adding. Right? Similarly, if you wanna subtract, press Alt. Your selections will get minus. Okay? And if intersecting the selections, then yes you gotta press both buttons! Press Alt+Shift and click, it’ll intersect. So I hope you’ve understood the selection by now, but it’s not over yet! After Selection, just beside there’s another option called Feather. Okay so what’s this? Before that I want to explain something else. Number one, ahh… You have this foreground and background colour, correct? As an example, I made a selection and I want to fill this foreground colour here, so one method is this Gradient tool, which contains Paint Bucket, you take it and click here. But trust me, ahh… See, I’ve been sharing much about shortcuts in Photoshop, and, if you have confusion then no problem, you can use the tools too. But shortcuts make the workflow fast, right? Okay, so the shortcut of this Paintbucket to fill colours, better one I mean, we simply do Alt+Backspace, it fills the Foreground colours. Undo-ing it. Now if I want the Background colour; let’s suppose we have two colours, red in foreground and blue in background, If I do Alt+Backspace the Foreground gets filled, undo, and if I wanna fill with Background colour, then it’s Ctrl+Backspace. Correct? And in fact you can do Ctrl+Delete, similarly Alt+Delete you can do. Right? So remember, in many areas of Photoshop, Delete and Backspace do the same job. Right dear? It’s on your keyboard, right? So as you’ve seen, we can make selections and fill with colours, and to fill as I said, Alt+Backspace for Foreground and Ctrl+Backspace for Background. Keep in mind that if there’s a selection present, it’ll fill inside it. If there’s not, it’ll fill the whole layer. Right? Like this. Okay. Another thing let me share, you have only one option for Undo- Ctrl+Z, if you need more undos, you can do Ctrl+Alt+Z. Keep in mind. Like I made this line, then another, yet another and so on. Now if I press Ctrl+Z, it’ll undo only the last line. If press again, it’ll redo. Correct? But if Ctrl+Alt+Z, we’ll continue undo-ing back. Now remember, Ctrl+Alt+Z is not actually undo, but History. What is this, how to handle it, we’ll see everything later. For now just observe, making a selection and pressing Alt+Backspace, it gets filled. We were actually talking about an option given in Property panel, named Feather. If I increase it, currently at zero pixels, let’s say I give it 50 pixels. [clearing throat] Right? And as I make a selection, notice it becomes quite rounded. Now, not actually round, it gets soft. If I fill with Foreground colour, it gets filled like that. Why? Because we’ve enabled Feather. Now… one thing to remember, in the Property bar if you’ve given Feather, then it’s kinda permanent, until you don’t change the value the next selections will have it! See this. Alright? But if you don’t want it permanent, then simply do this- keep it 0, and, whenever you make selections; see I created, filled it, and took new layer. Correct? I build another selection, and I want the Feather here. So to do this, you right-click via Selection tool obviously, and there on the third option is Feather. Now from here you can determine how much Feather you need to put. So let’s suppose, I give it 30 pixels, press Okay, and as I fill it with Background colour via Ctrl+Backspace, look the Feather has already come! Okay, now the intriguing thing is, the next selection I’ll make, that’ll come out sharp as before. So we don’t have problems, that as we gave Feather it’ll continue further, it’s not like that at all. Just keep in mind that whenever you need Feather, right-click and put that from there. Now, again remember that the right-click I’m doing is from Selection tool itself, correct? And, the options you see here, all belong to Selection tool, okay? If we take any other tools, upon right-clicking different things will be showing up, so make sure you notice which tool you use. See this, as I’m using Brush tool and right-click, you’ll see some Brush options are given. So, make sure you’re in Selection tool and then right-clicking. Correct? From right-click, here we take Feather. So in the current selection, going to Feather I’m giving much less now- 5 pixels. Press Okay, and let’s fill some other colour; here, I take purple, and fill here. See this! If I zoom in and show, then it’s looking quite smooth. Alright? Okay! So see, this one’s Feather is less, that blue one with 50 pixels looks more. I hope you’ve understood till Feather. Ahh… Anyway, notice I made a mistake here, the layer containing green one, I made the purple one there too, now I can’t move them individually and separately. Whenever I move it, these two will move together. So make sure, when you build something, “build” specially, keep it on the next or different layers as a must. Okay dear? Alright, if we need to delete layers, no problem at all, simply come to any layer and drag it here to delete. Second method is simply to press Backspace while remaining on a layer, as you press it the entire layer will be deleted. But only if not made any selections; if yes then only that area will be deleted. But if not, all the layers will be gone. Like this, as I’m pressing Backspace all layers are getting deleted, except the Background one. So the next we see in this tool, is this (dropdown) with options “Normal”, “Fixed Ratio”, “Fixed Size”. Normal is where you can make selections of any size you want, but when keeping on Fixed Ratio, notice by default it’s given 1:1 ratio, that means when I create, it’ll be square-shaped only. Like, it’s a ratio of 1:1, of width and height. If I put 2:1, it’ll become a rectangle. Meaning the width is 2x while the height is 1x. Right? Third option is Fixed Size, it’ll create selection of a fixed size, by default it’s given 64×64 pixels, that means wherever I’ll click or move it it’ll remain as a selection of 64×64 pixels only. I hope you’ve understood it too till now. Anyway, what’s “Selected Mask”, we’ll see later, just forget it for now. In older versions you may see it as “Refine Edge”. Right? So it’s same as that, just more advanced. Now… Coming to Marquee Selection, here the Elliptical Marquee is given. With this you can make round selections. So similarly as in Illustrator we’d make rounds by pressing Shift, it’ll happen here too. Alright? So you can make a round selection just like this, with Shift. And if you wish you can make it oval too. Right? All those things are available here too, right? If I right-click, those same things here, like Feather and Select Inverse. Now what’s this Select Inverse, I’m gonna share. Okay so, the next thing I’ll tell is, like if I make a selection and fill, it’ll be filled inside, but if I right-click and Select Inverse, now it’ll fill the other areas, meaning the outer part of the canvas is active, leaving this inside part. Okay dear? So I hope you’ve understood it too, it wasn’t so tough anyway. Select Inverse, you’ve got it. There’s a third option- Deselect. Now what’ll it do? Removing selection. It has a shortcut too- Ctrl+D. No matter how many selections you make, just press Ctrl+D and it’ll be removed. D for Deselect, right? Ahh… Remember, Illustrator’s Ctrl+D was different, in here too. Understand? Okay, so utilizing all these when we build something, what’ll it be? For example, I wish to use any picture. Let’s go for Unsplash. Keep in mind this great website- unsplash.com. And, you can download stock images from here, these are all free images, you can use them in even your commercial projects. So, it’s quite a fabulous and helpful website, and be sure to visit, https://www.unsplash.com you can use images from here for your practice. So uh, let’s just download some images and see what we can do with it, I’m gonna use this picture, so simply click Download from here, and it’ll be downloaded here. Keep in mind these are quite high-quality images, with much higher resolution, okay? So from Show Folder, dragging this image into Photoshop. Now it’s an important point to think- where to drop it while dragging. If you already have a file opened, and drop the image right here then it’ll add just inside the file. But if you want not to add here but rather in a separate file, I pressed Esc; simply drag again and drop it on the Menu bar this time. So once you do it, another file will be opened. One more thing to remember, the small image you’re seeing, it’s not that small! As I said, always observe at 100% level to check the actual quality of your image. Currently it’s 8.33%, that means it’s a humongous sized image! If I press Ctrl+1 it’ll show at 100% level. See this, it’s the actual size of the image, quite giant it is! So I’m zooming out, and let’s go and take a new layer. And from here I’m making a selection- Elliptical Marquee. Like this. Okay? And right-clicking, I’m giving it a Feather. Now remember, be it 5 or 50 pixels, this Feather won’t work on this image, it’s a much larger image! So I’ll add much more Feather here, so let’s say I add approx. 200 pixels. Correct dear? Press Okay, and right-clicking I choose Select Inverse. Keep in mind, first I make selection, then give Feather and then do Select Inverse. New layer I already took, and now I’m filling it with black colour, meaning as here the default colours coming- Foreground black and Background white, if I press Alt+Backspace, the black colour will be filled here. See this! Ahh… A fairly simple frame, created here. And I hope you all loved it. So not necessary that you fill with black; undo-ing it, now give it white if you wish. See this? And, this kind of things you must’ve seen in many images, so your first photo editing is done. Now, what was the reason behind taking different layer? Just because, if I don’t like it, I can change it anytime or even remove it. Correct? And if you would’ve filled on this layer, which you can, nobody’s stopping you, but you’ll be facing the problem- see, this time I’m giving more Feather, so let’s go for like 400 pixels, remember why I’m giving so much? Because the image is too large, but for smaller images I’ll give less Feather, like 40 or 50 pixels, okay? Alright! Giving the Feather and Select Inverse, and going to a new layer… Sorry (), I mean if I fill it here, notice the problem that’ll occur. It becomes a permanent change, now I can’t move, make it lighter or even delete. Yes I can surely undo, but if you save the file and close, it’ll be permanently changed. So please please please! Always preserve your original images, meaning always keep a backup, and better work on layers, not on original images. You’ll have the freedom to change it anytime and correct it. So again I took a new layer and fill it white. See this! We’ve filled a beautiful shade of white colour here, and it looks fading from the edges. Now yeah, I’m deducing this class of mine is being stretched too long, but trust me, these are minute details which lots of people face problems with, and they can’t understand. By the way the shortcuts I talked about, I’ll be sharing in classes parallelly, you can note it down if you wish. And ahh… Not necessary you get dependent on shortcuts, if you can’t remember, don’t worry! You can change it from menus or options. Just as I shared on Select Inverse, right-clicking and selecting like that, you’ll find the shortcuts too, see if go to Select menu so notice, Select All- Ctrl+A, Deselect- Ctrl+D, Reselect- Shift+Ctrl+D, and Inverse Select, or Select Inverse as we said, Shift+Ctrl+I. All these shortcuts can be seen in this menu too. So sometimes I keep forgetting shortcuts, just don’t be panicked, don’t be anxious, no problem at all! Just keep in mind that with shortcuts the work gets faster. There’s no guarantee that with shortcuts the work will be good! So good work is more important, fast work not that much. Right? So that’s I always say- quality vs quantity. If you produce quantity, not necessary it’ll be good, but if you produce quality, also not necessary it’ll be large in quantity. Always remember, work at a slow pace, no problem, but do it well. So don’t be anxious about shortcuts; many students gets confused that “Sir how we’ll be able to use so many shortcuts?” and etc. Don’t worry! Go slow, no issues. If you don’t recall shortcuts, the options are provided in the menu already. Everything has a second method to be utilized. So go slow, work well, that’s much more important. The things I shared related to Selection tool, it’s still much less, there are more left yet, but I wish to end this class here for now. I hope you’ve understood it all so far. Keep in mind, it’s only for beginners, for those who already know they might’ve not found much similarities, I’m sorry if yall know already! But I have many students who don’t know about Photoshop at all, This was much much more important for those. Ahh… My classes get stretched sometimes, but I always try to make you understand every detail. Some more things still left in Selection, along with the Rectangle and Elliptical Marquee tools, we’ll learn in more detail later. If I share everything today, it’ll be really too much, you won’t be able to practice! And I hope you loved the class, if yes please give it a like, and subscribe to it if you didn’t yet, and one more thing, please share with your friends dude, Photoshop has been started on my channel! Thank you! ()

    By Amjad Izhar
    Contact: amjad.izhar@gmail.com
    https://amjadizhar.blog